Tatva Volume 1 Chemistry

Academic Progress for every Student
Regular tests &

assignments
VEDANTU
IMPROVEMENT Report card with
PROMISE detailed analysis
VIP
Parent-teacher
meetings
Our Extraordinary Results 2021

Our Students
5.2X
HIGHER
Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER
All India HIGHER

All India All India
37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%
CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

student scoring above 90% student scoring above 90% Advanced
SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectified in upcoming editions.
Printed by
Softberry Technology Pvt. Ltd
2nd Floor, above PNB, Scheme No 140
Indore, Madhya Pradesh - 452016
https://www.softberry.in
How to use your
Tatva Practice Book
1
2. Hexagonal Packing
Hexagonal packing is more
efficient. Its coordination
number is 6 and voids in the
packing are smaller than square
packing. If we place another Scan the QR Code in each
layer on square packing then chapter’s theory section to
there are the following
view micro concept videos
related to the chapter, on
SCAN CODE the Vedantu app.
Solid State
Exercise - 2:
2
Solve all types of
1. CsBr crystallizes in a body
centered cubic lattice. The edge
length of unit cell is 436.6 pm.
Given that the atomic mass of
Cs = 133u and Br = 80u, the
exercise questions density of CsBr is:
based on the latest JEE (JEE 2019)
pattern.
(a) 42.5 g/cm3 (b) 0.425 g/cm3
(c) 4.25 g/cm3 (d) 8.5 g/cm3
Answer Key
3
CHAPTER-1: SOLID STATE
For extra exam
Exercise-1: Basic Objective preparation content,
visit the Vedantu app.
Scan the QR code in the You can find previous
Answers Section to view years’ JEE papers with
detailed solutions for all solutions and detailed
exercise questions. analysis.
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
I am delighted to present to you a Ready Reckoner and an amazing book to guide you for your
exams-‘TATVA’. Tatva—which means the ‘Core’ is fully aligned with the culture, the mission, and the
vision of Vedantu and therefore it gives me immense pleasure and joy to share this book with you. We
at Vedantu have always believed in revolutionizing the teaching and learning process and always
speedily progressed in the direction of bringing superior quality education and content to your table.
Tatva is a step forward in this direction. This book is your guide, your practice guru, and your
companion in moving towards your dreams. The book is a result of the consistent effort, diligence, and
research by our experienced team of subject experts and teachers.
This book has been customized with curated content to suit the needs of JEE aspirants like you and
guide you on the right path to cracking JEE and optimizing your efficiency. Tatva is a comprehensive
amalgamation of important concepts, theories, derivations, definitions, solved examples, concept
videos, practice questions, and important questions. We have ensured that high-quality content and
the right ingredients are in place in this booklet to help you climb up the success ladder.
A few guiding points to optimally use Tatva with a planned approach:
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise concepts,
mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary, and eventually makes you capable of
clearing all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
We suggest revision of theory followed by practice of solved examples.
Practice relevant questions daily after finishing Vedantu lectures and session assignments. We
believe that a daily dose of Tatva will keep all your exam blues at bay.
Use the Tatva booklet to mark notes so that it always comes in handy for last-minute revision
sessions before your exams. Notes should include key points of theory, solved examples, and some
questions which you couldn't solve in the first attempt.
Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 of JEE Tatva deal with basic questions and those which can be asked or
already asked in JEE Main. Similarly, Exercise 3 and Exercise 4 deal with JEE Advanced level
questions. We recommend you solve basic JEE Main questions before moving to JEE Advanced
level questions.
Before wrapping up, the practice mantra: “Don't practice until you get it right. Practice until you
can't get it wrong.”
We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

because success is only one step away. Wishing that your talent shines
bright. All the very best!
Anand Prakash
Founder and Academic Head, Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE/NEET
and Olympiads. He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6, 7 (JEE
Advanced), AIR-1, 7, 9(AIIMS), and thousands of more students who have
successfully cleared these competitive exams in the last few years.
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Franklin D. Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of a group of creative Vedans who have strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you.
We extend our heartfelt gratitude to the superb team of Vedans who give wings to the vision of Vedantu,
starting with our leaders who have been guiding and encouraging us at every step of the way:
Vamsi Krishna Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Jain Sir
We thank our leaders for their insight and mentorship. They steered the project in the right direction and were
instrumental in making Tatva a reality:
Sahil Bhatia, Sudhanshu Jain, Shubam Gupta, Ajay Mittal, Arshad Shahid, Jaideep Sontakke
The managers who embodied every aspect of what Tatva aimed to accomplish and brought their ideas and
diligence to the table to execute this vision immaculately:
Harish Rao, Neha Surana, Charubak Chakrabarti, Prashant Palande
Chemistry Team
We truly appreciate all the Master Teachers of Vedantu whose relentless efforts helped us translate this vision
into reality. Our heartfelt gratitude to our creative content developers and the typesetting team, who have put
in their hard work, insight, and eagerness to nurture and execute Tatva into ‘your ready handbook’ and bring a
positive learning experience to you.
Teachers Subject Matter Experts
Arpit Sharma Disha Kukreja Seema Agarwal (Team Lead)
Garima Priyanka
Typesetting Team Graphic Designer

Amit Prajjwal Moorthy R
We cannot thank the creative team enough. Their creative minds and contagious energy have added a visual
flair, truly making Tatva the treasure trove of knowledge that it is.
Kajal Nilanjan Chowdhury Rabin Jacob Mohit Kamboj
Kiran Gopal Balaji Sakamuri Thamam Mubarish Haritha Ranchith
Sarib Mohammad
We thank and appreciate the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal, and Dipshi
Shetty.
The journey of bringing Tatva to life, from an idea to the book you are holding, would not have been possible
without the extensive support of our diligent Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated
team of Teachers, and our talented Tech Team.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
STRUCTURE OF AN ATOM
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Solved Examples ............................................................................................................................... 31
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions........................................................................................... 54
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAINS Questions ........................................................................... 61

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ................................................................................. 70
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .................................................................... 80
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 233
PERIODIC PROPERTIES
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 88
Solved Examples ............................................................................................................................... 105
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 236

CHEMICAL BONDING
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 131

Solved Examples ............................................................................................................................... 148

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 238
MOLE AND EQUIVALENT CONCEPT
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 189
Solved Examples ............................................................................................................................... 199
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 240

Chapter 01 9
1. INTRODUCTION 2. They are deflected towards the positive plate in an electric

field suggesting that they are negatively charged. They were
In this chapter, we explore the inside world of atoms which is full of named as electrons by Stoney.
mystery and surprises. Whole chemistry is based on atoms and 3. They can make a light paddle wheel to rotate placed in their
their structures. We will also study the behaviour exhibited by the path. This means they possess kinetic energy and are material
electrons and their consequences. particles.
1.1 Discovery of fundamental particles 4. They ionise gases through which they travel.
Dalton’s atomic theory was able to explain the law of conservation 5. They produce X-rays when they strike a metallic target.
of mass, law of constant composition and law of multiple 6. The characterstics of cathode rays (electrons) do not depend
proportion very successfully but it failed to explain the results of on the material of electrodes and nature of the gas present in
many experiments like it was known that substances like glass or the cathode ray tube.
ebonite when rubbed with silk or fur generate electricity
7. The negatively charged material particles constituting the
1.1.1 Discovery of electron cathode rays are called electrons.
William Crookes in 1879 studied the electrical discharge in Thus, we can conclude that electrons are basic constituents
partially evacuated tubes known as cathode ray discharge tubes. of all matter.
A discharge tube is made of glass, about 60cm long containing 1.1.3 Charge to mass ratio of electron
two thin pieces of metals called electrodes, sealed in it. This is
known as Crookes Tube. The negative electrode is known as
cathode and positive electrode is known as anode.
When a gas enclosed at low pressure(  10-4 atm) in discharge
tube is subjected to a high voltage (  10,000V), invisible rays
originating from the cathode and producing a greenish glow
behind the perforated anode on the glass wall coated with
phosphorescent material ZnS is observed. These rays were called
cathode rays.
Apparatus of charge to mass ratio of electron

In 1897, J.J. Thomson measured e/m ratio of electron by using
cathode ray tube and applying electric and magnetic field
perpendicular to each other as well as to the path of electrons.
The extent of deviation of electrons from their path in the presence
of electric and magnetic field depends on:
(a) Charge on the electron
Production of Cathode rays (b) Mass of the particle
1.1.2 Properties of Cathode rays (c) The strength of electric or magnetic field
1. They produce sharp shadow of the solid object in their path When only electric field is applied, the electrons are deflected to
suggesting that they travel in straight line. the point A. When only magnetic field is applied, the electrons
are deflected to the point C. By balancing the strengths of electric
SCAN CODE
Structure of an Atom
STRUCTURE OF AN ATOM 10
or magnetic fields, the electrons are allowed to hit the screen at cathode and then from the gas inside the discharge tube due to
point B i.e. the point where electrons hit in the absence of electric bombardment of the gas molecules by the high speed electrons
and magnetic field. By measuring the amount of deflections, emitted first from the cathode.
Thomson was able to calculate the value of e/m as
1.2.1 Discovery of proton
1.758820 × 1011C/kg.
Since the atom as a whole is electrically neutral and the presence
1.1.4 Charge on the electron
of negatively charged particles in it was established, therefore it
was thought that some positively charged particles must also be
present in the atom. So, during the experiments with cathode
rays, the scientist Goldstein designed a special type of discharge
tube. He discovered new rays called Canal rays. The name canal
rays is derived from the fact that the rays travelled in straight line
through a vacuum tube in the opposite direction to cathode rays,
pass through and emerge from a canal or hole in the cathode.
They are also known as anode rays.
Millikan oil drop apparatus
R.A Millikan devised a method known as oil drop experiment

to determine the charge on the electrons.
In this method, oil droplets in the form of mist, produced by the Production of Anode rays
atomiser, were allowed to enter through a tiny hole in the upper
plate of electrical condenser. The downward motion of these 1.2.2 Properties of anode rays
droplets was viewed through the telescope, equipped with a 1. They travel in straight lines.
micrometer eye piece. By measuring the rate of fall of these
2. They carry a positive charge.
droplets, Millikan was able to measure the mass of oil droplets.
The air inside the chamber was ionized by passing a beam of X- 3. They are made up of material particles.
rays through it. The electrical charge on these oil droplets was 4. The value of the charge on the particles constituting the
acquired by collisions with gaseous ions. The fall of these charged anode rays is found to depend on the nature of gas taken.
oil droplets can be retarded, accelerated or made stationary
5. The mass of the particles constituting the anode rays is
depending upon the charge on the droplets and the polarity and
found to depend on the nature of gas taken.
strength of the voltage applied to the plate. By carefully
measuring the effects of electrical field strength on the motion of 6. The charge to mass ratio(e/m) of the particles is also found
oil droplets, Millikan concluded that the magnitude of electrical to depend on the gas taken.
charge, q, on the droplets is always an integral multiple of the 7. Their behaviour in electric and magnetic field is opposite to
electrical charge e, that is, q = n e, where n = 1, 2, 3... . etc. that observed for electron.
Charge on the electron is found to be –1.6022 × 10–19C. 1.2.3 Origin of anode rays
The mass of electron was thus calculated as These rays are believed to be produced as a result of the knock
out of the electrons from the gaseous atoms by the bombardment
e 1.6022 1019 C of high speed electrons of the cathode rays on them. These
m   9.1094  1031 kg.
e / m 1.758820  1011 C / kg anode rays are not emitted from the anode but are produced in
the space between the anode and the cathode.
1.1.5 Origin of cathode rays
The lightest positively charged particles were obtained when
The cathode rays are first produced from the material of the the gas taken in the discharge tube was hydrogen. The e/m value
SCAN CODE
of these particles were maximum. They had minimum mass and
of  particles ( 42 He) is incident on Beryllium (Be), a new type of
unit positive charge. The particle was called a proton.
particle was ejected. It had mass almost equal to that of a proton
Charge on a proton = + 1.6022 × 10–19C
( 1.672 ×10–27kg) and carried no charge.
Mass of a proton = 1.672 × 10–27kg
11
5 B + 24 He  14 1
7 N + 0n
1.3.1 Discovery of neutron
The theoretical requirement for the existence of a neutron particle

9
4 Be + 42 He  12
6 C + 10 n
in the atomic nucleus was put forward by Rutherford in 1920.It
was proposed to be a particle with no charge and having mass
almost equal to that of a proton. He named it as neutron. In 1932,
Chadwick proved its existence. He observed that, when a beam
Properties of Fundamental Particles
Name Discoverer Symbol Charge Relative Mass

Charge
Electron J.J. Thomson e –1.6022 × 10–19 C –1 9.1094×10–31 Kg

Proton Goldstein p +1.6022 × 10–19C +1 1.6726 × 10–27 kg
Neutron Chadwick n 0 0 1.6749 × 10–27 kg
2. DEFINITIONS OF SUB-ATOMIC PARTICLES The charge distribution was such, that it gave the most stable
arrangement. This model of the atom was often called the plum –
2.1 Electron pudding model. Also the raisin pudding model or watermelon
A fundamental particle which carries one unit negative charge model.
and has a mass nearly equal to 1/1837th of that of hydrogen atom.
2.2 Proton
A fundamental particle which carries one unit positive charge
and has a mass nearly equal to that of hydrogen atom.
2.3 Neutron
A fundamental particle which carries no charge but has a mass
nearly equal to that of hydrogen atom.
3. THOMSON MODEL Thomson’s proposed model of atom

3.1 Drawbacks
Sir J. J. Thomson, who discovered the electron, was the first to Though the model was able to explain the overall neutrality of
suggest a model of atomic structure. the atom, it could not satisfactorily explain the results of scattering
(i) All atoms contain electrons. experiments carried out by Rutherford.
(ii) The atom as a whole is neutral. The total positive charge
and total negative charge must be equal. 4. RUTHERFORD’S -SCATTERING EXPERIMENT
He visualised all the positive charge of the atom as being spread
Rutherford conducted - particles scattering experiments in 1909.
out uniformly throughout a sphere of atomic dimensions (i.e.
In this experiment, a very thin foil of gold (0.004nm) is bombarded
approx. 10–10 m in diameter). The electrons were smaller particles
by a fine stream of alpha particles. A fluorescent screen (ZnS) is
together carrying a negative charge, equal to the positive charge
placed behind the gold foil, where points were recorded which
in the atom. They were studded in the atom like plums in a pudding.
SCAN CODE
were emerging from -particles. Polonium was used as the source
of -particles.
Scattering of   particles by thin gold foil

It has been found that radius of atom is of the order of
10 –10m while the radius of the nucleus is of the order of
10–15m.
Thus if a cricket ball represents a nucleus, then the radius of
atom would be about 5 km.
Rutherford’s Scattering Experiment
4.3 Rutherford’s nuclear atomic model
4.1 Observations
Rutherford carried out a number of experiments, involving the
scattering of   particles by a very thin foil of gold. Observations
were:
(i) Most of the   particles (99%) passes through it, without
any deviation or deflection.
(ii) Some of the   particles were deflected through small angles.
(iii) Very few   particles were deflected by large angles and
occasionally an   particle got deflected by 180o
4.2 Conclusions
(i) An atom must be extremely hollow and must consist of Rutherford’s Nuclear atomic model
mostly empty space because most of the particles passed (i) An atom consists of tiny positively charged nucleus at the
through it without any deflection. centre and it is surrounded by hollow portion called extra
(ii) Very few particles were deflected to a large extent. This nuclear part.
indicates that: (ii) The positive charge of the nucleus is due to nucleons which
(a) Electrons because of their negative charge and very low consist of protons and neutrons while the electrons, present
mass cannot deflect heavy and positively charged  particles in extra nuclear portion has negligible mass and carry a
(b) There must be a very heavy and positively charged body in negative charge.
the atom i.e. nucleus which does not permit the passage of (iii) The atom is electrically neutral, as the number of electrons is
positively charged  particles. equal to number of protons in it. Thus, total positive charge
(c) Because, the number of  particles which undergo deflection of the nucleus is balanced by the total negative charge of
of 180º, is very small, therefore the volume of positively electrons.
charged body must be extremely small fraction of the total (iv) The electrons in the extra nuclear part are revolving around
volume of the atom. This positively charged body must be the nucleus in circular paths called orbits. Thus, an atom
at the centre of the atom which is called nucleus. resembles the solar system in which the sun plays the role
of nucleus and the planets that of revolving electrons and
the model is known as planetary model.
SCAN CODE
(v) Electrons and nucleus are held together by the electrostatic NOTE
force of attraction.
The general notation that is used to represent the mass
(vi) Forces of attraction operating on the electron are exactly
A
balanced by centrifugal forces. number and atomic number of a given atoms is ZX
4.4 Drawbacks Where, X – symbol of element
(i) According to classical mechanics, any charged body in A – Mass number
motion under the influence of attractive forces should radiate
Z – atomic number
energy continuously. If this is so, the electron will follow a
spiral path and finally fall into the nucleus and the structure 5.3 Isotopes, Isobars, isotones and Isoelectronic
would collapse. This behaviour is never observed. 5.3.1 Isotopes:
Isotopes are the atoms of the same element having identicalatomic
number but different mass number. The difference is due
to the difference in number of neutrons.
The chemical properties of atoms are controlled by the number
of electrons. Thus, isotopes of an element show same chemical
behaviour.
Isotopes of Hydrogen
Isotope Formula Mass No. of No. of
number protons neutrons
Drawbacks of Rutherford’s model of atom 1
Protium 1H (H) 1 1 0
(ii) It says nothing about the electronic structure of atoms i.e.
how the electrons are distributed around the nucleus and Deuterium 2
1H (D) 2 1 1
what are the energies of these electrons.
3
5. ATOMIC NUMBER AND MASS NUMBER Tritium 1H (T ) 3 1 2
Isotopes of Oxygen
5.1 Atomic number (Z)
Isotope Mass number No. of No. of
Atomic number of an element is equal to the number of unit
protons neutrons
positive charges or number of protons present in the nucleus of
the atom of the element. It also represents the number of electrons 16
8 O
16 8 8
in the neutral atom. Eg. Number of protons in
Na = 11 , thus atomic number of Na = 11 17
8 O
17 8 9
5.2 Mass number (A)
18
8 O
The elementary particles (protons and neutrons) present in the 18 8 10
nucleus of an atom are collectively known as nucleons. Isotopes of some common elements
The mass number (A) of an atom is equal to the sum of protons Element Isotopes
and neutrons. It is always a whole number. Thus,
12 13 14
Mass number (A) = Number of protons(Z) + Number of Carbon (C) 6 C, 6 C, 6 C
neutrons(n)
14 15
Nitrogen (N) 7 N, 7 N
Therefore, number of neutrons (n) = Mass Number (A) – Number
of protons (Z) 233 235 238
Uranium 92 U, 92 U, 92 U
n =A– Z
32 33 34 36
Sulphur 16 S, 16 S, 16 S, 16 S
SCAN CODE
5.3.2 Relative Abundance 5.3.6 Isodiaphers
Isotopes of an element occur in different percentages in nature, Isodiaphers are the atoms of different elements which have the
which is termed as relative abundance. same diference of the number of neutrons & protons.
Using this relative abundance the average atomic mass of the Example
element can be calculated. For Example, 11 12
5
B 6
C
the average atomic mass of Cl is 35.5 due to existence of two p  5 p  6
isotopes 35Cl and 37Cl in 75% and 25% abundance respectively. n  6 n  p  1 n  7 n  p  1
e  5  e  6 
5.3.3 Isobars
Atoms of different elements having different atomic numbers 5.3.7 Isosteres
but same mass numbers are called isobars. Eg
Isosteres are the molecules which have the same number of atoms
Isobar Atomic Mass No. of No. of No. of & electrons.
number number electrons protons neutrons Example
40
18 Ar 18 40 18 18 22
CO 2 N2O
Atoms  1 2 Atoms  2 1
40
19 K 19 40 19 19 21 3 3
Electrons  6  8  2 Electrons  7  2  8
40  22e   22e 
20 Ca 20 40 20 20 20
5.3.4 Isotones 6. ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATIONS

Atoms of different elements which contain the same number of
neutrons are called isotones. Eg Electromagnetic Radiations are waves which are formed as a result
of oscillating magnetic and electric fields which are perpendicular
Isotones Atomic Mass number No. of neutrons
to each other and both are perpendicular to direction of motion.
number
36
16 S 16 36 20
37
17 Cl 17 37 20
38
18 Ar 18 38 20
39
19 K 19 39 20
40
20 Ca 20 40 20
Electric & magnetic field components
5.3.5 Isoelectronic
They do not require any medium and can move in vacuum
The species (atoms or ions) containing the same number of unlike sound waves.
electrons are called isoelectronic. Eg.
Light is a form of radiation and has wave characterstics. The
O2–, F–, Na+, Mg2+, Al3+, Ne etc various characterstics of a wave are:
To go further into the atomic mysteries, we will have to
understand the nature of electromagnetic radiations and study
“Maxwell’s Electromagnetic Wave theory”.
James Maxwell was the first to give a comprehensive explanation
about the interaction between the charged bodies and the
behaviour of electric and magnetic fields.
Propagation of a Wave
SCAN CODE
1) Amplitude : It is height of the crest or trough (depth) of a 7.1 Electromagnetic Wave Theory
wave. Units : metre (m) The main points of this theory are:
2) Frequency (  ) : The number of waves passing through a (1) A source (like the heated rod) emits energy continuously
point in one second. Units : Hertz (Hz) or s –1 in the form of radiations (i.e. no change in wavelength or
frequency of the emitted radiations even on increasing the
3) Time Period : The time taken by a wave to complete one energy radiated).
vibration is called time period. Units : s
(2) These radiations are Electromagnetic in nature.
4) Velocity : The distance travelled by a wave in one second
7.2 Failure of EM wave theory
is called velocity. Units : m/s
In vacuum, all types of electromagnetic radiations travel at The theory failed because of two experiments:
the same speed i.e. 3 × 108 m/s. This is called speed of light.
(1) Black Body Radiation :
5) Wavelength(  ) : The distance between two adjacent crests
According to Maxwell’s theory on heating a body the
or troughs is called wavelength. Units : Angstrom(Å) intensity should increase, that is, energy radiated per unit
[1 Å=10–10m] area should increase without having any effect on the
wavelength or frequency.
6) Wave Number ( ) : It is the number of wavelengths per
But we observe that when we heat an iron rod, it first turns
centimetre of length. Units : m-1
to red then white and then becomes blue at very high
  1/  temperatures. This means that frequency of emitted
radiations is changing.
6.1 Relationship between velocity, frequency & wavelength
An ideal body, which emits and absorbs radiations of all
c   frequencies is called black body and radiation emitted by a
black body is called black body radiation
where c : speed of light i.e. 3 × 108 m/s in vaccum
The variation of intensity with wavelength at different
v : frequency; : wavelength temperatures for a black body is shown below:
7. ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM
When all the electromagnetic radiations are arranged in increasing

order of wavelength or decreasing frequency the band of
radiations obtained is termed as electromagnetic spectrum.
Wavelength-intensity relationship
Electromagnetic radiation & Visible spectrum
So it is observed that with increasing temperature,the
The visible spectrum is a subset of this spectrum (VIBGYOR) dominant wavelength in the emitted radiations decreases
whose range of wavelength is 380-760nm. and the frequency increases.
The wavelengths increase in the order: That is at higher temperatures, though the intensity rises as
Gamma Rays < X-rays < Ultra-violet rays < Visible< Infrared < predicted by Maxwell’s theory but the wavelength
Micro-waves <Radio waves. decreases. If T1>T2>T3 then 1< 2< 3.
SCAN CODE
(2) Photoelectric Effect :
Thus, these findings were contradictory to the Maxwell’s
When radiations with certain minimum frequency (0) strike theory. The number of electrons ejected and kinetic energy
the surface of a metal, the electrons are ejected from the associated with them should depend on the intensity of
surface of the metal. This phenomena is called photoelectric light. It has been observed that though the number of
effect. The electrons emitted are called photoelectrons. electrons ejected does depend upon the brightness of light,
the kinetic energy of the ejected electrons does not.
Light photons
To justify these findings Max Von Planck gave his Quantum
Electrons ejected
from the surface theory.
8. PLANCK’S QUANTUM THEORY
The main points of this theory are:

(i) The energy is emitted or absorbed not continuously but
discontinuously in the form of small discrete packets of
energy. Each such packet of energy is called a ‘quantum’.
Sodium metal In case of light this quantum of energy is called a photon.
Photoelectric effect
According to Maxwell’s Theory, the ejection of electrons

should depend on intensity of radiation that is if electrons
are not being ejected, then on increasing the intensity they
can be ejected.
Apparatus for studying the photoelectric effect
The following observations are made:

(i) The electrons are ejected from the metal surface as soon as
(ii) At a time only one photon can be supplied to one electron
the beam of light strikes the surface, i.e., there is no time lag
or any other particle.
between the striking of light beam and the ejection of
electrons from the metal surface. (iii) One quantum cannot be divided or distributed.
(ii) The number of electrons ejected is proportional to the
(iv) The energy of each quantum is directly proportional to the
intensity or brightness of light.
frequency of radiation.
(iii) For each metal, there is a characteristic minimum frequency,
0 (also known as threshold frequency) below which hc
E   or E  h 
photoelectric effect is not observed. At a frequency 
 > 0, the ejected electrons come out with certain kinetic
energy. The kinetic energies of these electrons increase with h = Planck’s constant = 6.626 × 10-34Js
the increase of frequency of the light used. (v) The total energy emitted or absorbed by a body will be in
whole number quanta.
SCAN CODE
nhc NOTE
Hence E = nh 
 Energy can also be expressed in Electron Volt(eV).
The energy acquired by an electron when it is accelerated
This is also called “Quantisation of energy”.
through a potential difference of one Volt.
8.1 Explanation of Black body radiation 1eV = 1.602 × 10–19J
As the temperature is increased the energy emitted increases Conclusion :
thereby increasing the frequency of the emitted radiations. As
Light has both the Wave nature (shows the phenomena of
the frequency increases the wavelength shifts to lower values.
diffraction and interference) and Particle nature (could explain
8.2 Explanation of Photoelectric effect the black body radiation and photoelectric effect) . Thus, light
(i) When light of some particular frequency falls on the surface has dual nature.
of metal, the photon gives its entire energy to the electron Bohr’s Model is based on “Atomic Spectra”, therefore before
of the metal atom. The electron will be ejected from the moving further we will study:
metal only if the energy of the photon is sufficient to
overcome the force of attraction of the electron by the 9. WHAT IS SPECTRUM?
nucleus. So, photoelectrons are ejected only when the
incident light has a certain minimum frequency (threshold A spectrum is a group or band of wavelengths/colours and the
frequency 0). The Threshold energy required for emission study of emission or absorption spectra is known as
spectroscopy.
is called “Work Function” that is “h0” . 9.1 Types of spectrum
(ii) If the frequency of the incident light () is more than the There are two types of spectrum
threshold frequency (0), the excess energy is imparted to 1) Emission Spectrum
the electron as kinetic energy. Hence, 2) Absorption Spectrum
Energy of one quantum = Threshold Energy + Kinetic 9.2 Emission Spectrum
Energy
When radiations emitted from a source are incident on a prism
h  h 0  (1/ 2) me v 2 and are separated into different wavelengths and obtained on a
photographic plate.
(iii) When  > 0, then on increasing the intensity, the number
(a) Continuous Emission Spectra:
of quanta incident increases thereby increasing the number
of photoelectrons ejected. There are no gaps between various wavelengths, one
wavelength merges into another.
(iv) When  > 0, then on further increasing the frequency, the
energy of each photon increases and thus kinetic energy of
each ejected electron increases.
Continuous spectrum of white light
Plot of kinetic energy versus frequency of absorbed photons
SCAN CODE
(b) Discontinuous Emission Spectra: They are numbered as 1,2,3,...... These numbers are known as
It is also known as Line Spectra or atomic spectra. Principal quantum Numbers.
In this, certain wavelengths go missing from a group and (a) Energy of an electron is given by:
that leaves dark spaces in between giving discontinuity to En= –RH (Z2/n2) n = 1,2,3.......
the spectrum. It is also known as fingerprint of an element.
where RH is Rydberg’s constant and its value is
2.18 × 10–18 J.
Z = atomic number
Z2
E n  2.18  1018 J / atom
n2
Z2
E n  13.6 eV / atom
n2
9.3 Absorption Spectra Z2

E n  1312 kJ / mol
When light from any source is first passed through the solution n2
of a chemical substance and then analysed, it is observed that
there are some dark lines in the continuous spectra. Thus, energies of various levels are in the order:
K < L < M < N...... and so on.

Energy of the lowest state(n=1) is called ground state.
(b) Radii of the stationary states:
52.9n 2
rn  pm
Z
For H-atom (Z = 1), the radius of first stationary state is
called Bohr orbit (52.9 pm)
(c) Velocities of the electron in different orbits:

Bohr studied the atomic spectra of hydrogen and based on that
he proposed his model. 2.188 106 Z
vn  m/s
n
10. BOHR’S MODEL
3) Since the electrons revolve only in those orbits which have
NOTE fixed values of energy, hence electrons in an atom can have
only certain definite values of energy and not any of their
This model is applicable to H-atom or H-like species like
own. Thus, energy of an electron is quantised.
He+,Li2+,Be3+. 4) Like energy, the angular momentum of an electron in an
10.1 Postulates atom can have certain definite values and not any value of
their own.
1) An atom consists of a small, heavy, positively charged
nucleus in the centre and the electrons revolve around it in nh
circular orbits. mr 
2
2) Electrons revolve only in those orbits which have a fixed
value of energy. Hence, these orbits are called energy levels Where n=1,2,3...... and so on.
or stationary states. 5) An electron does not lose or gain energy when it is present
in the same shell.
SCAN CODE
6) When an electron gains energy, it gets excited to higher
energy levels and when it de-excites, it loses energy in the
NOTE
form of electromagnetic radiations and comes to lower 1.09677 × 107 m-1 is also known as Rydberg’s constant.
energy values.
10.4 Line Spectrum of Hydrogen
When an electric discharge is passed through gaseous hydrogen,
the H 2 molecules dissociate and the energetically excited
hydrogen atoms produced emit electromagnetic radiations of
discrete frequency. The hydrogen spectra consists of several
lines named after their discoverer.
We get discrete lines and not a continuous spectra because the
energy of an electron cannot change continuously but can have
only definite values. Thus we can say that energy of an electron
is quantised.
10.2 What does negative energy for Hydrogen atom means?

This negative sign means that the energy of the electron in the
atom is lower than the energy of a free electron at rest. A free
electron at rest is an electron that is infinitely far away from the
nucleus (n  ) and is assigned the energy value of zero. As
the electron gets closer to the nucleus (as n decreases), E n
becomes more and more negative. The most negative energy
Electronic Transitions in the hydrogen spectrum
value is given by n=1 which corresponds to the most stable
orbit. LYMAN SERIES :
10.3 Transition of Electron When an electron jumps from any of the higher states to the
ground state or first state (n = 1) ,the series of spectral lines
We know that energy is absorbed or emitted when electron excites
emitted lies in the ultra violet region and are called as Lyman
or de-excites respectively. The energy gap between the two orbits
series.
is
Therefore , in Rydberg’s formula n1= 1, n2 = 2,3,4,5...
E  E f  E i
BALMER SERIES :
When an electron jumps from any of the higher states to the
 R   R 
E    2H     2H  state with n=2,the series of spectral lines emitted lies in the visible
 nf   ni  region and are called as Balmer series.
Therefore , in Rydberg’s formula n1 = 2, n2 = 3,4,5,6....
 1 1   1 1  PASCHEN SERIES :
E  R H  2  2   2.18  1018  2  2  J / atom
 ni nf   ni nf  When an electron jumps from any of the higher states to the
The wavelength associated with the absorption or emission of state with n=3 ,the series of spectral lines emitted lies in the
the photon is: infrared region and are called as Paschen series.
Therefore , in Rydberg’s formula n1 = 3, n2 = 4,5,6...
1 E R H  1 1   1 1  1
      1.09677 10
7
 2  2m
 hc hc  n i2 n f2   ni nf 
This is known as Rydberg’s formula.
SCAN CODE
BRACKETT SERIES : 3) Inability to explain splitting of lines in the magnetic field
When an electron jumps from any of the higher states to the (Zeeman Effect) and in the electric field (Stark Effect). If the
state with n = 4,the series of spectral lines emitted lies in the source emitting the radiation is placed in magnetic or electric
infrared region and are called as Brackett series. field, it is observed that each spectral line splits up into a
Therefore , in Rydberg’s formula n1 = 4, n2 = 5,6,7... number of lines. Splitting of spectral lines in magnetic field
is known as Zeeman Effect while splitting of spectral lines
PFUND SERIES : in electric field is known as Stark Effect.
When an electron jumps from any of the higher states to the 4) It could not explain the ability of atoms to form molecules
state with n = 4,the series of spectral lines emitted lies in the by covalent bonds.
infrared region and are called as Pfund series.
5) It could not explain dual behaviour of matter and also
Therefore , in Rydberg’s formula n1 = 5, n2 = 6,7... contradicts Heisenberg uncertainty principle.
10.5 Ionisation Energy
11. TOWARDS QUANTUM MECHANICAL MODEL
It is the energy required to remove the electron completely from
the atom so as to convert it into a positive ion. This model was based on two concepts:
Thus, n1 = 1 and n2 =  (1) de Broglie Concept of dual nature of matter
10.6 Limiting Line (2) Heisenberg uncertainty Principle
It is the line of shortest wavelength i.e. n2 =  11.1 Dual behaviour of matter
NOTE de Broglie proposed that matter should also exhibit dual behaviour
i.e. both particle and wave like properties.
Although a hydrogen atom has only one electron, yet its
spectra contains large number of lines. This is because a
h h h h
sample of hydrogen gas contains large number of    
molecules. When such a sample is heated to a high mv p 2m(KE) 2mqV
temperature, the hydrogen molecules split into hydrogen
Where p is linear momentum of a particle.
atoms. The electrons in different hydrogen atoms absorb
different amounts of energies and are excited to different According to de Broglie, every object in motion has a wave
levels. When these electrons return, different electrons character. The wavelengths associated with ordinary objects are
adopt different routes to return to the ground state. Thus, so short (because of their large masses) that their wave properties
they emit different amounts of energies and thus large cannot be detected. The wavelengths associated with electrons
number of lines in atomic spectra in hydrogen. and other subatomic particles (with very small mass) can however
be detected experimentally.
Maximum no. of lines that can be emitted when an electron
in an excited state n2 de-excites to n1 (n2>n1) : 11.2 Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle
It is impossible to measure simultaneously the position and
(n 2  n1  1) (n 2  n1 ) momentum of a small particle with absolute accuracy. If an attempt
2 is made to measure any of these two quantities with higher
accuracy, the other becomes less accurate. The product of the
10.7 Limitations of Bohr’s Model
uncertainty in the position (x) and the uncertainty in momentum
1) Inability to explain line spectra of multi-electron atoms. (p) is always a constant and is equal to or greater than h/4.
2) It fails to account for the finer details (doublet-two closely (x). (p)  h/4
spaced lines) of the hydrogen spectra. or (x). (mv)  h/4
or (x). (v)  h/4m
SCAN CODE
11.2.1 Explanation
12.1 Probability Density
|  |2 is the probability of finding the electron at a point within an
atom.
12.2 Concept of Orbital
It is a three dimensional space around the nucleus within which
the probability of finding an electron of given energy is maximum
(say upto 90%).
12.3 Quantum Numbers
They may be defined as a set of four numbers with the help of
which we can get complete information about all the electrons in
an atom i.e. location, energy, type of orbital occupied, shape and
orientation of that orbital etc.
The three quantum numbers called as Principal, Azimuthal and
Magnetic quantum number are derived from Schrodinger wave
equation. The fourth quantum number i.e. the Spin quantum
number was proposed later on.
Suppose we attempt to measure both the position and momentum 1) Principal Quantum Number (n):
of an electron. To pin point the position of the electron we have It tells about the shell to which an electron belongs.
to use light so that the photon of light strikes the electron and
n = 1,2,3,4,5..... and so on.
the reflected photon is seen in the microscope. As a result of the
hitting, the position as well as the velocity of the electron are This number helps to explain the main lines of the spectrum
disturbed. on the basis of electronic jumps between these shells.
11.2.2 Significance of Uncertainity Principle (a) It gives the average distance of the electron from the
nucleus. Larger the value of n, larger is the distance from
It rules out the existence of definite paths or trajectories of
the nucleus.
electrons as stated in Bohr’s Model.
(b) It completely determines the energy in hydrogen atom or
NOTE hydrogen like species.
The effect of Heisenberg Uncertainty Principle is The energy of H-atom or H-like species depends only on
significant only for motion of microscopic objects, and is the value of n.
negligible for that of macroscopic objects.
Order of energy : 1 < 2 < 3 < 4 < 5....... and so on.
12. QUANTUM MECHANICAL MODEL OF ATOM For multi-electron species, energy depends on both principal
and azimuthal quantum number.
Quantum mechanics is a theoretical science that deals with the
study of the motion of microscopic objects which have both The maximum number of electrons present in any shell = 2n2
particle like and wave like properties. The fundamental equation
of quantum mechanics was developed by Schrodinger. 2) Azimuthal Quantum Number (l) :
This equation describes a function called electron wave function Also known as Orbital Angular momentum or Subsidiary
quantum number.Within the same shell, there are number
(  ). This wave function stores all the information about an
of sub-shells, so number of electronic jumps increases and
electron like energy, position, orbital etc. As such it does not
this explains the presence of fine lines in the spectrum. This
have any physical significance. The information stored in  about quantum number tells about :
an electron can be extracted in terms of Quantum Numbers.
(a) The number of subshells present in a shell.
(b) Angular momentum of an electron present in subshell.
SCAN CODE
(c) Shapes of various subshells present within the same shell. Under the influence of external magnetic field, electrons of a
(d) Relative energies of various subshells. subshell can orient themselves in a certain preferred regions of
Value of l varies from 0 to n – 1 space around the nucleus called orbitals.
For 1st shell (n = 1): l = 0 The magnetic quantum number determines the number of
preferred orientations of the electrons present in a subshell. Since
For 2nd shell (n = 2): l = 0,1 each orientation corresponds to an orbital, thus magnetic
For 3rd shell (n = 3): l = 0,1,2 quantum number determines the number of orbitals present in
For 4th shell (n = 4): l = 0,1,2,3 any subshell.
Value of m ranges from – l to +l including zero.
Value of l Designation of subshell
Subshell Orbitals (m) Number of orbitals
0 s
s-subshell (l=0) m= 0 1
1 p p-subshell (l=1) m = -1, 0, 1 3
2 d d-subshell (l=2) m = –2, –1, 0, 1 ,2 5
3 f f-subshell (l=3) m = –3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3 7
4 g
5 h
The notations s,p,d,f represent the initial letters of the word sharp, Orbital Value of m
principal, diffused and fundamental. In continuation l = 4 is called px m= 0
g subshell and l = 5 is called h subshell and so on.
py m=+1
Principal shell Subshells
pz m=–1
1st shell l = 0 (s-subshell)
2nd shell l = 0,1 (s & p subshell)
Orbital Value of m
3 shell
rd
l = 0,1,2 (s,p & d subshell)
4th shell l = 0,1,2,3 (s,p,d & f subshell) d z2 m=0
dxz m = +1
d yz m = –1
NOTE
The number of subshells present in any principal shell is d x2  y2 m = +2
equal to the number of the principal shell.
d xy m = –2
Energies of various subshell present within the same shell
is: s < p < d < f These orbitals of the same subshell having equal energy are
Angular momentum of an electron in orbital : .
called degenerate orbitals Eg.
h The three p-orbitals of a particular principal shall have the
l (l  1)   l (l  1)
2 same energy in the absence of magnetic field.
Similarly, all five orbitals of d-subshell of a particular shell have
(3) Magnetic Quantum Number(m): the same energy.
This quantum number is required to explain the fact that when Thus, for H-atom order of energy is:
the source producing the line spectrum is placed in a magnetic 1s < 2s = 2p < 3s = 3p = 3d < 4s = 4p = 4d = 4f < ..........
field, each spectral line splits up into a number of line (Zeeman For multi electron atoms, the energy of the orbitals decreases
effect). with increase in effective nuclear charge.
SCAN CODE
Eg. E2s (H) > E2s (Li) > E2s (Na) > E2s (K) (2) Shape of p-orbitals:
The total possible values of m in a given subshell = 2l + 1
(a) It consists of two lobes present on either side of the
Total no. of orbitals in a given shell = n2 plane that passes through the nucleus. The p-orbital is
dumb-bell shaped.
4) Spin Quantum Number(s):
The electron in an atom not only moves around the nucleus (b) There are three possible orientations of electron cloud in
but also spins about its own axis. Since the electron in an p-orbitals. Therefore, the lobes of p-orbital may be
orbital can spin either in clockwise or anti-clockwise considered to be along x,y and z axis. Hence they are
direction. Thus s can have only two values designated as px, py, pz. The three p-orbitals are oriented
at right angles to one another.
1 1
 or  (c) First main energy level( Principal quantum number n = 1)
2 2
does not contain any p-orbital.
This quantum number helps to explain the magnetic
properties of substances. (d) The three p-orbitals of a particular energy level have same
energy in absence of an external electric and magnetic
NOTE field and are called degenerate orbitals.
An orbital cannot have more than two electrons and (e) Like s orbitals, p-orbitals increase in size with increase in
these electrons should be of opposite spin. the energy of main shell of an atom. Thus, value of
Thus, maximum number of electrons in s-subshell = 2 azimuthal quantum number is one (l=1) and magnetic
quantum number has three values (m= –1, 0, +1)
Maximum number of electrons in p-subshell = 6
Maximum number of electrons in d-subshell = 10
Maximum number of electrons in f-subshell = 14
12.4 Shapes of atomic orbitals
(1) Shape of s-orbitals:
(a) They are non-directional and spherically symmetric i.e.
probability of finding the electron at a given distance is
equal in all directions.
(b) 1s orbital and 2s orbital have same shape but size of 2s is
larger.
(c) There is a spherical shell within 2s orbital where electron Boundary surface diagrams of three 2p orbitals
density is zero and is called a node.
(3) Shapes of d-orbitals:
(d) The value of azimuthal quantum number(l) is zero (l=0)
and magnetic quantum number can have only one value (a) They are designated as dxy, dyz, dzx and d x 2 y2 . They
i.e. m = 0
have a shape like a four leaf clover. The fifth d orbital
designated as d z2 looks like a doughnut.
(b) All five d orbitals have same energy in the absence of

magnetic field.
(c) The d orbitals have azimuthal quantum number l = 2 and
magnetic quantum number values –2, –1,0,+ 1,+ 2.
Boundary surface diagram of the s orbital
SCAN CODE
(d) For principal shell number 1 and 2, there are no d orbitals.
12.6 Filling of orbitals in an atom

(1) Aufbau Principle:
In the ground state of the atoms, the orbitals are filled in
order of their increasing energies. In other words, electrons
Boundary surface diagrams of five 3d orbitals first occupy the lowest energy orbital available to them and
enter into higher energy orbitals only when the lower energy
We have drawn boundary surface diagrams i.e the surface is orbitals are filled.
drawn in space for an orbital on which probability density Unlike H-atom where energy of orbitals depend only on n,
()2 is constant. It encloses the region where probability of energy of orbitals of multi-electron orbitals depend on both
finding the electron is very high. We do not draw a boundary n and l. Their order of energy can be determined using (n+l)
surface diagram that encloses 100% probability of finding rule.
the electron because probability density has some value, According to this rule, lower the value of (n+l) for an orbital,
howsoever small it may be, at any finite distance from the lower is its energy. If two different types of orbitals have
nucleus. Thus it is not possible to draw a boundary surface the same value of (n+l), the orbital with lower value of n has
diagram of a rigid size in which the probability of finding the lower energy.
electron is 100%.
12.5 Nodes and nodal planes
NOTE
It is a region of zero probability.
There are two types of nodes:
(1) Radial or Spherical nodes: Three dimensional regions in
an orbital where probability of finding the electron
becomes zero.
Number of radial/ spherical nodes = n – l – 1
Order of filling of orbitals
1s22s22p63s23p64s23d104p65s24d105p66s2 ......
(2) Pauli Exclusion Principle: An orbital can have maximum
two electrons and these must have opposite spin.
Nodes in s-orbital
(2) Planar or Angular Nodes: They are the planes cutting
through the nucleus on which probability of finding the
(3) Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity: Electron pairing in
electron is zero.
p,d and f orbitals cannot occur until each orbital of a given
Number of Planar/Angular Nodes = l subshell contains one electron each. Also all the singly
Total Number of nodes = n - 1 occupied orbitals will have parallel spin.
SCAN CODE
Electronic configurations of elements in the ground state
Atomic No. Element Electronic Configuration
1 H 1s1
2 He 1s2
1
3 Li [He] 2s
2
4 Be [He] 2s
2 1
5 B [He] 2s 2p
2 2
6 C [He] 2s 2p
2 3
7 N [He] 2s 2p
2 4
8 O [He] 2s 2p
2 5
9 F [He] 2s 2p
2 6
10 Ne [He] 2s 2p
1
11 Na [Ne] 3s
2
12 Mg [Ne] 3s
2 1
13 Al [Ne] 3s 3p
2 2
14 Si [Ne] 3s 3p
2 3
15 P [Ne] 3s 3p
2 4
16 S [Ne] 3s 3p
2 5
17 Cl [Ne] 3s 3p
2 6
18 Ar [Ne] 3s 3p
1
19 K [Ar] 4s
2
20 Ca [Ar] 4s
1 2
21 Sc [Ar] 3d 4s
2 2
22 Ti [Ar] 3d 4s
3 2
23 V [Ar] 3d 4s
5 1
24 Cr [Ar] 3d 4s
5 2
25 Mn [Ar] 3d 4s
6 2
26 Fe [Ar] 3d 4s
7 2
27 Co [Ar] 3d 4s
8 2
28 Ni [Ar] 3d 4s
10 1
29 Cu [Ar] 3d 4s
10 2
30 Zn [Ar] 3d 4s
SCAN CODE
12.7 Exceptional Configuration of Cr & Cu 12.8 Electronic Configuration of Ions
The completely filled and completely half filled sub-shells are 12.8.1 Cations:
stable due to the following reasons: They are formed when outermost electrons are removed from
1. Symmetrical distribution of electrons: It is well known an atom. While removing the electrons, we must remove the
that symmetry leads to stability. The completely filled or electrons from the highest principal quantum number.
half filled subshells have symmetrical distribution of 12.8.2 Anions:
electrons in them and are therefore more stable. Electrons
They are formed when electrons are added to the innermost
in the same subshell (here 3d) have equal energy but empty shell.
different spatial distribution. Consequently, their shielding
12.8.3 Magnetic moment :
of one another is relatively small and the electrons are
more strongly attracted by the nucleus. n(n  2) B.M .
2. Exchange Energy : The stabilizing effect arises whenever
two or more electrons with the same spin are present in the B.M.  Bohr Magneton
degenerate orbitals of a subshell. These electrons tend to Where n is number of unpaired electrons.
exchange their positions and the energy released due to Species with unpaired electrons are called paramagnetic and
this exchange is called exchange energy. The number of the species with no unpaired electrons are called diamagnetic
exchanges that can take place is maximum when the
subshell is either half filled or completely filled. As a result
13. IMPORTANT RELATIONS
the exchange energy is maximum and so is the stability.
1  1 1 
eg. for Cr : [Ar] 4s1 3d5 Rydberg equation :   R H  n 2  n 2 
 1 2 
(RH = 109678 cm–1 and n2 > n1)

1
c     and  

hc
E  h or 

Bohr’s Model
1312Z2
En  kJ mol1
n2
2.178  10 18 Z 2 13.6Z2

 J / atom  eV / atom
n2 n2
2.165  106 Z
Velocity of electron, n  m/s
n
0.529 n 2
Radius of orbit  Å
Z
1
Photoelectric effect = h  h0  m
2
2
( 0  Threshold frequency)
h
de-Broglie equation :  
m
Possible exchange for a d5 configuration
h
Thus, total number of exchanges=10 Heisenberg’s uncetainity principle : x  p 
4
SCAN CODE
Solve (iii) and (iv) to get :
14. MATHEMATICAL MODELLING OF BOHR’S
POSTULATES V
2KZe 2
and r  2
n 2h 2
nh 4 Kme 2 Z
Consider an ion of atomic number (Z) containing single electron
revolving its nucleus at a distance of ‘r’ as shown in the figure. put K = 9 × 109 Nm2C–2, e = 1.6 × 10–19C and h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js in
the above expressions to get :
Velocity of an electron in nth Bohr orbit 
V Z –1
Vn = 2.165 × 106 ms
n
n2
e– and Radius of the nth Bohr orbit  rn = 0.53 Å
+Ze r Z
Now, the Total Energy of the electron moving in nth orbit  K.E.n
+ P.E.n
1 K(Ze)(e)  K q1 q 2 
T.E.n  mVn2 
2 r  E.P.E.  r 
NOTE
Atomic number = Number of protons on the nucleus = Z 1  K Ze 2  K(Ze)(e)
  T.En= 2  r   rn [Using (iii)]
 n 
 Charge on the nucleus = + Ze
Electrostatic force of attraction (F) between the nucleus of charge -KZe 2
 En  T. En =
+ Ze and electron (–e) is given by : 2rn
K | q1 | | q 2 | 1 It can be shown from the above expressions that :

F where K  4
r2 0
1 K Ze 2 K Ze 2  K Ze2
9 2 –2
K.E.n  , P.E.n  and E n 
= 9 × 10 Nm C 2 rn rn 2rn
K | Ze | | e | KZe 2 or K.E.n = –En and P.E.n = 2En

F  2 ........(i)
r2 r Using the value of rn in the expression of En, we get :
mv 2 22 K 2 me 4 Z 2
The centrifugal forces acting on the electron is ........(ii) En 
r n2h2
This centrifugal force must be provided by the electrostatic force Z2

of attraction (F). En  -2.178×10-18 J / atom
n2
 From (i) and (ii), we have :
Z2
KZe2 mV 2 or En  -13.6 eV / atom
 ...........(iii) n2
r2 r
Angular momentum of electron about the nucleus = 1eV  1.6  1019 J 
nh Z2
mVr  ........ (iv)  – 2.178 × 10–18 × 6.02 × 1023 J/mole
2 n2
where ‘n’ is a positive integer
Z2
(n = 1, 2, 3, .........  )  – 1312 kJ/mole
n2
SCAN CODE
15. PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS FOR 1s AND 2s
SCAN CODE
SUMMARY
 Constituents of atom: Atom is no longer considered as  Energy is emitted continuously from any source in the
indivisible. It is made up of electrons, protons and form of radiations travelling in the form of waves and
neutrons called fundamental particles. associated with electric and magnetic fields, oscillating
perpendicular to each other and to the direction of radiation
 Electron: A fundamental particle which carries one unit
. All of them travel with the velocity of light.
negative charge and has a mass nearly equal to 1/1837th of
that of hydrogen atom.  Relationship between velocity, frequency & wavelength:
c = 
 Proton: A fundamental particle which carries one unit
where c : speed of light i.e. 3 × 108 m/s in vacuum
positive charge and has a mass nearly equal to that of
 : frequency;  : wavelength
hydrogen atom.
 Electromagnetic spectrum: When all the electromagnetic
 Neutron: A fundamental particle which carries no charge radiations are arranged in increasing order of wavelength
but has a mass nearly equal to that of hydrogen atom. or decreasing frequency the band of radiations obtained is
 Thomson’s model of atom: An atom is a sphere of termed as electromagnetic spectrum.
positive electricity in which sufficient number of electrons  Black body radiation: If the substance being heated is a
were embedded to neutralize the positive charge just as black body (which is a perfect absorber and perfect radiator
seeds in a melon or raisins in pudding. It could not of energy) the radiation emitted is called black body radiation.
explain results of Rutherford’s scattering experiments.  Photoelectric effect: When radiation of certain minimum
 Rutherford’s model of atom: A thin foil of gold was frequency () strike the surface of a metal, electrons are
bombarded with  -particles. Most of the  -particles ejected. This minimum energy (h0) is called wave function
passed through the foil undeflected, a few were deflected (W0).
through small angle while very few were deflected back. It  Planck’s quantum theory: This theory was put forward to
was therefore, concluded that there was sufficient empty explain the limitations of electromagnetic wave theory. It
space within the atom and small heavy positively charged suggests that radiant energy is emitted or absorbed
body at the center called nucleus. Thus, atom consists of discontinuously in the form of small packets of energy called
a heavy positively charged nucleus in the centre quanta (called photons in case of light). Energy of each
containing all protons and neutrons and the electrons quantum (E) = hv where ‘h’ is Planck’s constant (= 6.626 ×
were revolving around the nucleus so that the centrifugal 10-34 Js). Total energy emitted or absorbed = nhv where n is
an interger. If n = N0, energy is called one einstein.
force balances the force of attraction.
 Emission and Absorption Spectra: When light emitted from
 Atomic number and mass number: The general notation
any source is directly passed on to prism and resolved, the
that is used to represent the mass number and atomic
spectrum obtained is called emission spectrum. In case of
A
number of a given atoms is ZX white light, e.g., from sun, it is resolved into seven colours
(VIBGYOR). The spectrum obtained is called contiuous
Where, X – symbol of element
spectrum. If light emitted from a discharge tube is resolved,
A – Mass number some coloured lines are obtained. The spectrum obtained
Z – atomic number is called line spectrum. It white light is first passed through
the solution of a compound or vapour of a substance and
 Isotopes: Isotopes are the atoms of the same element having then resolved, the spectrum obtained is called absorption
identical atomic number but different mass number. The spectrum. It has dark lines in the continuous spectrum.
difference is due to the difference in number of neutrons.
 Absorption spectrum of hydrogen: When H2 gas is taken in
 Isobars: Atoms of different elements having different atomic the dischange tube, series of lines obtained and the regions
numbers but same mass numbers are called isobars. in which they lie are as under:
 Isotones: Atoms of different elements which contain the
same number of neutrons are called isotones.
Series: Lyman Balmer
 Paschen Brackett Pfund
     
 Isoelectronic: The species (atoms or ions) containing
the same number of electrons are called isoelectronic. Region: UV Visible Infrared
SCAN CODE
 Rydberg formula: This formula is used to calculate wave  Azimuthal quantum number (l): It determines the number
number of different series of lines of the spectrum of of subshells present in any main shell (n) and the shape of
hydrogen or hydrogen like particles as : the subshell. For a given value of n, l = 0 to n - 1. Thus, for
n = 1, l = 0 (one subshell), for n = 2 , l = 0, 1, (2 subshell), for
 1 1  n = 3, l = 0, 1, 2 (3 subshells), for n = 4, l = 0, 1, 2, 3 (4
v  R  2  2  Z 2 (Z = 1 for hydrogen)
n 
 i nf  subshells). For l = 0, 1, 2 and 3. designation are s, p, d and f
respectively. Thus, subshells present are : n = 1 (1s), n = 2
where R = Rydberg constant = 109677 cm-1 or 1.097×107 m-1 (2s, 2p), n = 3 (3s, 3p, 3d), n = 4 (4s, 4p, 4d, 4f).
 Bohr’s Model:  Magnetic quantum number (m): It determines the number
of orbitals present in any subshell and the orientation of
1312Z2
En  kJ mol1 each orbital. For a given value of l, m = - l to + l including ‘0’.
n2
 Spin quantum number (s): It tells about the spinning motion
2.178  10 18
Z 2
13.6Z2 of the electron, i.e., clockwise or anti-clockwise. For a given
 J / atom  eV / atom
n2 n2 1 1
value of m, s   and  . It helps to explain magnetic
2 2
2.165 106 Z
Velocity of electron, v n  m/s properties of the substances.
n
0.529 n 2  Shapes of atomic orbitals: The shape of an orbital is found

Radius of orbit  Å
Z by finding the probability    of the electron in that orbital
2
 Dual behaviour of particle: According to de Broglie, every at different points around the nucleus and representing by
object in motion has a wave character. The wavelengths the densiy of points. The shape of the electron cloud thus
associated with ordinary objects are so short (because of obtained gives the shape of the orbital. Some orbitals are
their large masses) that their wave properties cannot be found to have a region of space within it where probability
detected. The wavelengths associated with electrons and is zero. This is called a node. It may be spherical/radial or
other subatomic particles (with very small mass) can planar/angular.
however be detected experimentally  Rules for filling of electrons in orbitals:
 Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle: It is impossible to  Aufbau principle: Orbitals are filled in order of their
measure simultaneously the position and momentum of a increasing energy. The order of energy and hence that of
small particle with absolute accuracy. If an attempt is made filling orbitals is found by (n + l) rule. It states “lower the
to measure any of these two quantities with higher accuracy, (n + l) value, lower is the energy. If two orbitals have same
the other becomes less accurate. The product of the (n + l) value, orbital with lower value of n has lower energy.”
uncertainty in the position (x) and the uncertainty in Thus, the order is:
momentum (p) is always a constant and is equal to or 1s<2s<2p<3s<3p<4s<3d<4p<5s<4d<5p<6s<4f<5d....
greater than h/4. (n + l) 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7
 Quantum mechanical Model of atom: Quantum mechanics  Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity: Pairing of electrons
is a theoretical science that deals with the study of the does not occur in orbitals of the same subshell (degenerate
motion of microscopic objects which have both particle like orbitals) until each of them is first singly occupied.
and wave like properties. The fundamental equation of  Pauli exclusion principle: No two electrons in an atom can
quantum mechanics was developed by Schrodinger. have the same set of four quantum numbers or an orbital
can have maximum two electrons and these must have
 Quantum number: It is a set of four numbers which give
opposite spin.
complete information about any electron in an atom. These
 Electronic configuration of elements : Distribution of
are:
electrons of an atom into different shells, subshells and
 Principal quantum number (n): It determines the size of the
orbitals is called its electronic configuration. Complete
orbital. Its values are 1, 2, 3, etc. or K, L, M, etc. It also
electronic configuration is obtained by following the above
determines the energy of the main shell in which the elecron
rules, e.g.,
is present and maximum number of electrons present in the
Cl = 1s22s22p63s23p2x3p2y3p1z
nth shell (= 2 n2). 17
SCAN CODE
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
Distinguish between Proton, Neutron & Electron.
Sol.
Parameter Proton Neutron Electron
1. Charge unit positive no charge unit negative
(+1.6 × 10–19 C) (–1.6 × 10–19 C)
2. Mass 1.672 × 10–27 Kg 1.674 × 10–27 Kg 9.1094 × 10–31 Kg
3. Denoted 1
p1 0
n1 –1
e0
4. Location nucleus nucleus extra-nuclear region
5. Effected by Electric field & magnetic Remain undeflected Electric field & magnetic
field (towards negative in electric and field (towards positive plate)
plate) magnetic fields.
6. Discovered by Goldstein Chadwick Thomson
Example - 2
Give the difference between Isotopes, isobars & Isotones.
Sol.
Isotopes Isobars Isotones
1. They are atoms having the same They are atoms having the same They are atoms having the same
number of protons but differ in sum of protons and neutrons. number of neutrons but differ in
the number of neutrons. the number of protons.
2. They have the same atomic They have the same mass They have different atomic number
number but differ in their mass number but differ in their atomic and mass number
number. number
3. They are atoms of the same They are atoms of different They are atoms of different elements
element hence they have elements hence there is no hence there is no similarity in their
identical chemical properties. similarity in their chemical chemical properties.
properties.
Example - 3 Example - 6
Why electrons are called Planetary according to An atom of an element contains 29 electrons and 35
Rutherford model? neutrons. Deduce
Sol. This model was analgous to the solar system, where the (a) the number of protons and
nucleus may be compared to the sun and the electrons to
(b) the electronic configuration of the element
the planets. The Coulombic force between the nucleus and
(c) Mass Number
kq1q 2
the electron is where q1 and q2 are the charges, r is Sol. Number of electrons = 29
r2
the distance of separation between the molecules and the Number of neutrons = 35
electron and k is the proportionality constant. This is similar For neutral atom :
to gravitational force between two masses m1 and m2 as Number of protons = Number of electrons
m1m 2 (a) Therefore, number of protons = 29
G. where G is gravitational constant and r is the
r2 (b) Atomic Number = 29
distance of separation between planet and the sun.
Element is Cu.
Example - 4
1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s1 3d10
(a) Why e/m ratio of anode rays is different for different
(c) Mass Number = p + n
gases.
= 29 + 35 = 64
(b) Why was pressure of air inside the tube reduced to
Example - 7
10–2 atm in cathode ray experiment ?
Sol. (a) The charge to mass (e/m) ratio of anode rays is (i) Which model of an atom is called apple pie model?
dependent upon the nature of the gas taken in the (ii) Why are the atomic masses of most element is
discharge tube. This is because positively charged fractional?
particles are produced by the loss of one or more Sol. (i) Thomson Model
electrons from the neutral atoms of the gas contained
(ii) It is due to the existence of various isotopes of an
in the discharge tube. Therefore, the mass of the
element in various percentage abundance.
positively charged particles will depend upon the
nature of the gas. In case of hydrogen, the charge to Example - 8
mass (e/m) ratio was maximum. Explain the Rutherford’s scattering experiment and also
(b) This is because at very low pressure gas gets ionized give its drawbacks.
and become conducting. Sol. A very thin foil of gold (0.004nm) is bombarded by a fine
Example - 5 stream of alpha particles. A fluorescent screen (ZnS) is
placed behind the gold foil, where points were recorded
Calculate the number of neutrons in
which were emerging from -particles. Polonium was used
(a) dipositive zinc ion (b) Mg+2 as the source of -particles.
Sol. (a) Number of protons = 30 Observations
Mass Number = 65 Rutherford carried out a number of experiments, involving
 p + n = 65 the scattering of -particles by a very thin foil of gold.
n = 65 – 30 = 35 Observations were:
(b) Number of protons = 12
(i) Most of the -particles (99%) passes through it, without
Mass Number = 24 any deviation or deflection.
p + n = 24
(ii) Some of the -particles were deflected through small angles.
n = 24 – 12 = 12.
(iii) Very few -particles were deflected by large angles and
occasionally an -particle got deflected by 180o
Conclusions
Example - 9
(i) An atom must be extremely hollow and must consist of The nuclear radius is of the order of 10-13cm while atomic
mostly empty space because most of the particles passed radius is of the order 10-8cm. Assuming nucleus to be
through it without any deflection. spherical, what fraction of atomic volume is occupied by
(ii) Very few particles were deflected to a large extent. This nucleus?
indicates that:
4 3
(a) Electrons because of their negative charge and very low Sol. Volume of a sphere = r
3
mass cannot deflect heavy and positively charged 
particles 4
Therefore, volume of nucleus =  (1013 )3
3
(b) There must be a very heavy and positively charged body
in the atom i.e. nucleus which does not permit the passage 4
Volume of atom =  (108 )3
of positively charged  particles. 3
Fraction of atomic volume occupied by
(c) Because, the number of  particles which undergo
deflection of 180º, is very small, therefore the volume of
4
positively charged body must be extremely small fraction  (1013 )3
of the total volume of the atom. This positively charged nucleus = 3  1015
4 8 3
body must be at the centre of the atom which is called  (10 )
3
nucleus.
Example - 10
Drawbacks
(i) Calculate the total number of electrons in 1.6g of
methane.
(ii) An ion with mass number 56 contains 3 units of
positive charge and 30.4% more neutrons than
electrons. Assign symbol to this ion.
Sol. (i) 1 molecule of CH4 has = 10 electrons
16g CH4 has = 10NA electrons
1.6g CH4 has = 1.0 NA electrons
= 6.022 × 1023 electrons
(i) According to classical mechanics, any charged body in
motion under the influence of attractive forces should (ii) Suppose number of electrons in the ion, M3+ = x
radiate energy continuously. If this is so, the electron will
follow a spiral path and finally fall into the nucleus and the 30.4
 No. of neutrons = x  x  1.304x
structure would collapse. This behaviour is never 100
observed. No. of electrons in the neutral atom = x + 3
(ii) It says nothing about the electronic structure of atoms i.e.  No. of protons = x + 3
how the electrons are distributed around the nucleus and
Mass no. No. of protons + No. of neutrons
what are the energies of these electrons.
56 = x + 3 + 1.304 x or 2.304x = 53 or x = 23
 No. of protons = Atomic no. = x + 3 = 23 + 3 = 26
Hence, the symbol of the ion will be 56
26 Fe3 .
Example - 11 (4) So it is observed that with increasing temperature the

dominant wavelength in the emitted radiations
(i) Arrange X-rays, cosmic rays and radiowaves
decreases and the frequency increases.
according to frequency.
(ii) Calculate the wavenumber of yellow radiation (c) When radiations with certain minimum frequency ( 0 )
having wavelength of 5800Å. strike the surface of a metal, the electrons are ejected
(iii) Define threshold frequency. from the surface of the metal. This phenomena is called
photoelectric effect. The electrons emitted are called
Sol. (i) Cosmic rays > x-rays > Radio waves
photoelectrons.
1 1 If the frequency of the incident light (  ) is more than
(ii)    = 1.72 × 106 m–1
 5800 1010
the threshold frequency (  0 ), the excess energy is
(iii) The minimum frequency required to eject an electron imparted to the electron as kinetic energy. Hence,
from the surface of metal.
Energy of one quantum = Threshold Energy + Kinetic
Example - 12
Energy
Define
h  h0  (1/2) me v2
(a) Electromagnetic spectrum
(b) Black Body and Black body radiation. When    0 , then on increasing the intensity the
(c) Photoelectric Effect number of quanta incident increases thereby
Sol. increasing the number of photoelectrons ejected.
(a) When all the electromagnetic radiations are arranged When    0 , then on further increasing the
in increasing order of wavelength or decreasing
frequency, the energy of each photon increases and
frequency the band of radiations obtained is termed thus kinetic energy of each ejected electron increases.
as electromagnetic spectrum.
The visible spectrum is a subset of this spectrum
(VIBGYOR) whose range of wavelength is 380-760nm.
The wavelengths increase in the order:
Gamma Rays < X-rays < Ultra-violet rays < Visible<
Infrared < Micro-waves <Radio waves.
(b)
(1) An ideal body, which emits and absorbs radiations of
all frequencies is called black body and radiation
emitted by a black body is called black body radiation. Example - 13
(2) According to Maxwell’s theory on heating a body the Differentiate between absorption spectrum and emission
intensity should increase, that is, energy radiated per spectrum?
unit area should increase without having any effect
Sol. The main points of difference between absorption &
on the wavelength or frequency.
emission spectra are summed up in the below :
Absorption Spectrum :
1. Absorption spectrum is obtained when the white light
is first passed through the substance and the
transmitted light is analysed in the spectroscopy.
(3) 2. It consists of dark lines in the otherwise continous
spectrum
3. Absorption spectrum is always discontinuous
spectrum consisting of dark lines.
Emission Spectrum : Example - 15

1. Emission spectrum is obtained when the radiation from A 100 watt bulb emits electromagnetic light of wavelength
the source are directly analysed in the spectroscope. 400nm. Calculate the number of photons emitted per
2. It consists of bright coloured lines separated by dark second by the bulb.
spaces. Sol. Power of the bulb = 100 watt
3. Emission spectrum can be continuous spectrum (if = 100 J s–1
source emits white light) or discontinuous, i.e., line
spectrum if source emits some coloured radiation. hc
Energy of one photon, E = h 
Example - 14 
(a) Calculate the wavelength, frequency and wave

(6.626  10 34 Js)  (3  108 m s 1 )
number of light wave whose time period is 
400  109 m
2 × 10–10sec?
(b) Yellow light emitted from sodium lamp has = 4.969 × 10–19 J
wavelength of 580 nm. Calculate the frequency and  Number of photons emitted
wave number of yellow light.
100 J s 1
(c) How long will it take for a radio wave of frequency =
4.969  10 19 J
6 × 1013 Hz, sent by a path finder to travel from Mars
to earth over a distance of 8 × 107 km = 2.012 × 1020 s–1.
1 1 Example - 16
Sol. (a) Frequency () =   5 109 s 1.
Period 2.0  1010 s The threshold frequency  0 for a metal is 7 × 1014s-1.
Calculate the kinetic energy of an electron emitted when
c 3.0 108 m s 1 radiation of frequency 1 × 1015s-1 hits the metal.
Wavelength,     6.0 × 10–2 m
 5  109 s 1
Sol. 0 = 7 × 1014 s–1 ;  = 1015 s–1
1 1 According to photo electric effect

Wavenumber,     16.66 m1
 6  102 m h = h0 + K.E.
(b) C   K.E. = h ( – 0)
= 6.626 × 10–34 (1015 – 7 × 1014)
3  108
  = 1.9878 × 10–19 J.
580  109
Example - 17
= 5.17 × 1014 Hz
If photon of wavelength 150pm strikes an atom and one
1 1 of its inner bound electron ejected out with a velocity of
   1.7  106 m1
 580  109 1.5 ×107m/s. Calculate the energy with which it is bound
to the nucleus.
(c) All radiations in vacuum travel with the same speed,
Sol. Energy of incident photon
C = 3 × 108 m/s
Distance to be travelled = 8 × 107 ×103 m hc
=

= 8 × 1010 m
8  1010 (6.626 1034 Js)  (3.0 108 ms 1 )

 2.66  102 sec 
Time taken = (150  1012 m)
3  108
= 4 min. 44 sec. = 1.325 × 10–15 J
Energy of ejected electron

1
1 K.E. = mv2
 m 2 2
2
2  K.E. 2  0.93  10 19
1  v2   = 0.204 × 1012
  (9.11 1031 kg)  (1.5  107 ms 1 ) 2 m 9.11 10 31
2
= 1.025 × 10–16 J v  0.204  1012 = 0.452 × 106
Energy with which the electron was bound to the nucleus  v = 4.52 × 105 ms–1
–16 –16
= 13.25 × 10 – 1.025 × 10
= 12.225 × 10–16 J Example - 19
Electrons are emitted with zero velocity from a metal

12.225  1016
or  = 7.63 × 103 eV.. surface when it is exposed to radiations of wavelength
1.602  1019
6800Å. Calculate the threshold frequency and work
Example - 18 function of the metal.
The work function for caesium atom is 1.9eV. Calculate Sol. K.E. = h – h0
(a) threshold frequency (b) threshold wavelength of
If the velocity is zero, K.E. = 0
the radiation (c) If the cesium atom is irradiated with a
wavelength of 500nm, calculate the kinetic energy and  0 = h – h0
the velocity of ejected electron. or h = h0 or  = 0
Sol. (a) Work function (w0) = h 0
c 3.0  108 ms 1
v = 
 6800  1010 m
W0 1.9  1.602  1019 J = 4.41 × 1014 s–1

 0   (1 eV  1.602  10 19 )
h 6.626  1034 J s Threshold frequency = 4.41 × 1014 s–1
= 4.59 × 1014 s–1 Work function = h0 = 6.626 × 10–34 × 4.41 × 1014
= 2.92 × 10–19 J.
c 3.0  108 m s 1

(b) 0    6.54  107 m Example - 20
 0 4.59  1014 s 1
Why electronic energy is negative?
= 654 × 10–9 m = 654 nm Sol. The negative sign of energy means that the energy of the
(c) Work function, hv0 = 1.9 × 1.602 × 10–19J electron in the atom is lower than the energy of a free
electron at rest. A free electron at rest is an electron that is
= 3.04 × 10–19 J
sufficiently far away from the nucleus and its energy is
hc assumed to be zero. Mathematically, it corresponds to
Energy of incident radiation, hv =
 setting n equal to infinity in the equation so that E = 0. As
the electron moves closer to the nucleus due to electrostatic
6.626  1034  3  108 attraction, work is done by the electron itself and hence
 = 3.97 × 10–19 J
500  109 energy is released. Consequently, its energy decreases and
it takes energy values less than zero, which means negative
hv = hv0 + K.E.
values. The negative sign also indicates that the electron
 K.E. = hv – hv0 is bound to the nucleus and a hydrogen atom is in a stable
= 3.97 × 10–19 – 3.04 × 10–19 state in comparison to a state where electron is sufficiently
far away from the nucleus.
K.E. = 0.93 × 10–19J
Example - 21 52.9n 2
rn = pm
Describe postulates of Bohr’s model. Z
Sol. Postulates: For H-atom (Z = 1), the radius of first stationary state
1) An atom consists of a small, heavy positively charged
is called Bohr orbit (52.9 pm)
nucleus in the centre and the electrons revolve around
it in circular orbits. (c) Velocities of the electron in different orbits:
2) Electrons revolve only in those orbits which have a
2.188 ×106 Z
fixed value of energy. Hence, these orbits are called Vn = m/s
energy levels or stationary states. n
They are numbered as 1,2,3,...... These numbers are 3) Since the electrons revolve only in those orbits which
known as Principal quantum Numbers. have fixed values of energy, hence electrons in an
atom can have only certain definite values of energy
and not any of their own. Thus, energy of an electron
is quantised.
4) Like energy, the angular momentum of an electron in
an atom can have certain definite values and not any
value of their own.
nh
mνr =
2π
Where n=1,2,3...... and so on.
5) An electron does not lose or gain energy when it is
(a) Energy of an electron is given by: present in the same shell.
En= –RH(Z2/n2) n = 1,2,3....... 6) When an electron gains energy, it gets excited to higher
where RH is Rydberg’s constant and its value is energy levels and when it de-excites, it loses energy
in the form of electromagnetic radiations and comes
2.18 × 10–18 J.
to lower energy values.
Z = atomic number
Example - 22
Z2 What is meaning of “Quantisation of angular
E n = -2.18 ×10-18 J/atom momentum”?
n2
Sol. According to Bohr’s Model, angular momentum of an
2
Z h
E n = -13.6 eV/atom electron, moving in an orbit is a fixed multiple of .
n2 2
Z2 nh
E n = -1312 kJ/mol mr  where n = 1, 2, 3, 4........
n2 2
It means that when an electron gains or loses energy, it
Thus, energies of various levels are in the order: does so in such a way that n has a value which is a whole
number. In other words, electron does not gain or lose
K < L < M < N...... and so on.
energy in a continuous manner but in jumps (or bursts).
Energy of the lowest state(n=1) is called ground state. This led to the concept of quantisation of energy which
(b) Radii of the stationary states: means that radiant energy is emitted or absorbed in bursts
(or jumps) rather than as continuous flow.
Example - 23
R H . 22
What transition of Li spectrum will have the same
+2 I.E. for He+ =
12
wavelength as that of second line of Balmer series of
He+ spectrum. = 2.18 × 10–18 × 4
Sol. Using Rydberg’s formula : = 8.72 × 10–18 J
Example - 25
1  1 1 
 R H  2  2  Z2 What transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have
  n1 n 2  the same wavelength as the Balmer transition,n=4 to n=2
of He+ spectrum?
1  1 1  Sol. For He+ ion,
For Li 2 :  RH  2  2  (3)
2
....... (1)
 n
 1 n 2 
1 1 1
 RZ2  2  2 
1 1 1 2   n1 n 2 
For He+ :  R H  2  2  (2) ........ (2)
 2 4 
Now, n1 = 2, n2 = 4 and Z = 2
Compairing (1) and (2)
1 1 1 3
 R(2) 2  2  2   R ...... (i)
 1 1  2  1 1 2  2 4  4
 2  2  (3)   2  2  (2)
 n1 n 2  2 4 
1 1 1
2 For H atom   R  2  2  ........ (ii)
 1 1   1 1 2  n1 n 2 
 2  2  2  2  
 n1 n 2   2 4   3 
Equating equations (i) and (ii) ( is the same)
 1 1  1 1  1 1 3
 2  2     
n
 1 n 2   9 36  n12 n 22 4
Now, if n1 = 1 and n2 = 2
 1 1  1 1 
 2  2  2  2  Therefore, the transition n = 2 to n = 1 in H atom will have the
 n1 n 2   3 6  same wavelength as the transition from n = 4 to n = 2 in He+.
Hence, n1 = 3 and n2 = 6 Example - 26
Example - 24 The wavelength of the first line in the Balmer series is
6561Å. Calculate the wavelength of second line and
Calculate the energy required for the process
limiting line in Balmer series.
He+ He+2 +e– . the ionisation energy for the hydrogen
atom in the ground state is 2.18 × 10–18J/atom–1. Sol. According to Rydberg equation,
Sol. For ionisation, n2 =  1  1 1 

R 2  2
 n
 1 n 2 
2  1 1 
Ionisation Energy, I.E. = R H .Z  n 2  n 2 
 1 2  For first line in Balmer series, n1 = 2, n2 = 3
 1
1  1 1  5 
1  R . Z2  6561  R  22  32   R  36  ........ (i)
 R H . Z2  2  2   H 2    
 n1   n1
For second line in Balmer series, n1 = 2, n2 = 4
2
R H . (1)
I.E. for H in ground state = = RH 1  1 1  3
12    R  22  42   R  16  ....... (ii)
   
–18 –1
= 2.18 × 10 J atom
Dividing eq. (i) by (ii),

1 1
 
 5 16 8R H 8  1.067 107
 
6561 36 3
  1.17 108 m
6561 5 16
  = 4860 Å  = 11.7 nm.
36  3
Example - 29
For limiting line in Balmer series, n1 = 2 & n2 = 
What is the wavelength of light emitted when electron in
H-atom undergoes transition from energy level with n =
1  1 1  R
  R 2  2   (iii) 4 to an energy level n = 2?
 2   4
Dividing Eq. (i) by (iii) 1  1 1 
Sol.  RZ 2  2  2 
 n
 1 n 2 
 45

6561 36
1  1 1 
 1.097 107  12  2 2
 '  3645Å  2 4 
Example - 27
1 1 
Electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 242nm is just  1.097 107    
 4 16 
sufficient to ionize the sodium atom. Calculate the
ionisation energy of sodium in kJ/mol.
3
 1.097 107 
c 16
Sol. E  N h  N h

16

1 34
(6.02  10 mol )  (6.626 10 J s)  (3  10 m s )
23 8 1 1.097  107  3

242  10 9 m
 4.8617  1017 m
= 4.945 × 105 J mol–1 = 494.5 kJ mol–1.
 4861.7  10 10 m
Example - 28
The atomic spectrum of Li+2 arises due to transition of an  4861.7 Å
electron from n2 to n1 level if n1+n2=4 and n2–n1= 2.
Calculate the wavelength (in nm)of transition. Example - 30
Sol. Solving, For Hydrogen atom calculate the energy required to
remove the electron completely from n=2 orbit. What is
n1 + n2 = 4
the longest wavelength of light in cm that can be used to
n2 – n1 = 2 cause this transition.
n2 = 3 and n1 = 1
 1 1 
Using Rydberg’s formula : Sol. E = 2.18 × 10–18 Z2  n 2  n 2  J / atom
 1 2 
1 1 1 n1 = 2 n2 = 
 RH  2  2  Z2
  n1 n2 
 1 1
E = 2.18 × 10–18 (1)2  2  
2 
1 1 1
 RH  2  2 (3)2
 1 3  = 5.45 × 10–19 J
hc
1 E 
 8R H 

hc 6.626  1034  3  108 5

   109,677  cm 1
E 5.45  10 19 36
= 3.647 × 10–7 m = 15232.9 cm–1 = 1.523 × 106 m–1.

= 3.647 × 10–5cm. Example - 34
Example - 31 Which state of triply ionised Be+3 has same orbital radius
as that of ground state of H-atom.
The energy associated with first orbit in hydrogen atom
is – 2.17 × 10–18J/atom. What is the energy associated (1) 2
with fifth orbit? Sol. For hydrogen atom, r = 0.529 Å
(1)
Sol. Energy associated with nth orbit in hydrogen atom is
= 0.529 Å
18
2.17  10 J
En   atom 1 0.529n 2
n2 For Be+3, r =
(4)
 Energy associated with 5th orbit,
0.529 n 2
2.17  1018 J Thus, 0.529 
E5   4
52
= – 8.68 × 10–20 J  n = 2.
(a) Which transition between Bohr orbits corresponds Give the difference between Electromagnetic waves and
to third line in the Balmer series of the hydrogen matter waves.
spectrum.
Sol :
(b) Calculate the radius of Bohr’s fifth orbit for hydrogen
Electromagnetic Waves :
atom.
1. The electromagnetic waves are associated with electric
Sol. (a) n1 = 2 n2 = 5
and magnetic fields, perpendicular to each other and to
Transition : 5  2 the direction of propagation.
(b) Radius of Bohr’s nth orbit is given as : 2. They do not require any medium for propagation, i.e., they
2
rn = 0.0529 n nm can pass through vacuum.
 For n = 5 3. They travel with the same speed as that of light.
r5 = 0.0529 × (5)2 nm = 1.3225 nm 4. They leave the source, i.e., they are emitted by the source.
Example - 33 c
5. Their wavelength is given by  
Calculate the wavenumber for the longest wavelength 
transition in the Balmer series of atomic hydrogen. Matter waves :
Sol. For Balmer series, 1. Matter waves are not associated with electric and magnetic
fields.
 1 1 
  109, 677  2  2  cm 2. They require medium for their propagation, i.e., they cannot
2 n 
pass through vaccum.
 1 3. They travel with lower speeds. Moreover, it is not constant
 will be maximum of  is minimum     for all matter waves.
 
4. They do not leave the moving particle, i.e., they are not
for n = 3. The value will be
emitted by the particle.
 1 1
 = 109, 677 cm–1  22  32 
 
h Or (x). (mv)  h/4

5. Their wavelength is given by  
m
Example - 36 Or (x). (v)  h/4m
Give the difference between particle and a wave. Explanation
Sol.
Particle :
1. A particle occupies a well-defined position in space, i.e., a
particle is localized in space, e.g., a grain of sand, cricket
ball, etc.
2. When a particular space is occupied by one particle, the
same space cannot be occupied simultaneously by any
other particle. In other words, particles do not interfere.
3. When a number of particles are present in a given region
of space, their total value is equal to their sum, i.e., it is
neither less nor more.
Wave :
Change of momentum and position of
1. A wave is spread out in space, e.g., on throwing a stone in
electron on impact with a photon
a pond of water, the waves start moving out in the form of
concentric circles. Similarly, the sound of the speaker Suppose we attempt to measure both the position and
reaches everybody in the audience. Thus, a wave is momentum of an electron. To pin point the position of
delocalized in space. the electron we have to use light so that the photon of
light strikes the electron and the reflected photon is
2. Two or more waves can coexist in the same region of space
seen in the microscope. As a result of the hitting, the
and hence interfere.
position as well as the velocity of the electron are
3. When a number of waves are present in a given region of disturbed.
space, due to interference, the resultant wave can be larger
It rules out the existence of definite paths or trajectories
or smaller than the individual waves, i.e., inter-ference may
of electrons as stated in Bohr’s Model.
be constructive or destructive.
(ii) On the basis of Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, it
Example - 37 can be shown why electrons cannot exist within the
(i) State and illustrate Heisenberg’s uncertainty atomic nucleus. This is because the diameter of the
principle atomic nucleus is of the order of 10–15m. Hence, if the
(ii) Why electron cannot exist in the nucleus? electron were to exist within the nucleus, the maximum
Sol. (i) It is impossible to measure simultaneously the position uncertainty in its position would have been 10–15m
and momentum of a small particle with absolute (i.e., x = 10–15 m) Taking the mass of electron as 9.1 ×
accuracy. If an attempt is made to measure any of these 10–31 kg, the minimum uncertainty in velocity can be
two quantities with higher accuracy, the other calculated by applying uncertainty principle as
becomes less accurate. The product of the uncertainty follows :
in the position (x) and the uncertainty in momentum h h
(p) is always a constant and is equal to or greater x. p  or x. (m  ) 
4 4
than h/4.
h
or  
(x). (p)  h/4 4 x  m
6.6  1034 kg m 2 s 1

4  3.14  (10 15 m)  (9.1 1031 kg)
= 5.77 × 1010 m s–1
This value is much higher than the velocity of light (viz, Example - 41
3 × 108 m s–1) and hence is not possible. Calculate the mass of a photon with wavelength 3.6Å
Example - 38 Sol. Here,  = 3.6 Å = 3.6 × 10–10 m. As photon travels with the
Show that the circumference of the Bohr orbit for velocity of light,
hydrogen atoms is an integral multiple of the de-
 = 3.0 × 108 m s–1
Broglie’s wavelength associated with the electron
moving around the orbit. h
By de Broglie equation,  =
Sol. According to Bohr postulate of angular momentum, m
h h h
mr  n or 2  r  n ...... (i) or m 
2 m 
h 6.626  1034 J s
According to de Broglie equation,   .... (ii) 
m (3.6  1010 m) (3.0  108 m s 1 )
Substituting this value in eqn. (i), we get 2  r = n
= 6.135 × 10–29 kg.
Thus, the circumference (2  r) of the Bohr orbit for
hydrogen atom is an integral multiple of de Broglie Example - 42
wavelength. The kinetic energy of an electron is 4.55 × 10-25 J.
Example - 39 Calculate the wavelength of the electron.
Sol. Here, we are given
Find velocity of electron for H-atom in its first Bohr orbit
of radius a0. Also, find the de-broglie wavelength. kinetic energy
Sol. According to Bohr’s model, angular momentum is 1
quantised. i.e., m 2  4.55  1025 J
2
nh m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
mr 
2 h = 6.6 × 10–34 kg m2 s–1
nh 1
   (9.1 1031 )  2  4.55 1025
2 ma 0 2
de-Broglie wavelength,
4.55  10 25  2
or    106
2
h h (2 ma 0 ) 9.1  10 31

 
m m (nh)
1 h
or   10 m sec   
3
m
2 a 0

n
6.6  1034 kg m 2s 1
Example - 40 
(9.1 10 31 kg)  103 m s 1
Does Bohr model satisfy Heisenberg principle ?
= 7.25 × 10–7 m.
Sol. No, it rules out the well defined circular paths (orbits) or
trajectories proposed by Bohr. Since for a subatomic particle Example - 43
like an electron, it is not possible to simultaneously
determine the position and velocity at any moment with (a) Calculate the de-Broglie wavelength of an electron
good degree of precision, therefore, it is not possible to moving with 1% speed of light.
talk about the trajectory of an electron or well defined
(b) A molecule of O2 and that of SO2 travel with the same
circular orbits.
velocity. What is the ratio of their wavelengths ?
h 1
Sol. (a) We know that   Sol. Kinetic Energy = m 2  qV
m 2
m = 9.1 × 10–31kg, h = 6.63 × 10–34kg m2 s–1 mv 2

V ....... (1)
2q
1 3.0  108
 = 1% of speed of light = ms 1
100
h
According to de-Broglie,  
= 3.0 × 106m s–1 (  speed of light = 3.0 × 108m s–1) m
6.63  10 34 kg m 2s 1 h
   
(9.1 1031 kg)  (3.0  106 m s 1 ) m
= 2.43 × 10–10 m. Putting in (1)

2
h m  h 
(b)   V  
m 2q  m 
 O2 mSO2 64 h2
  V
SO2 mO 2 32 2mq 2
 O2 2 (6.626  10 34 ) 2
 V
SO2 1 (2  1.67  10 )  (1.6  1019 ) (0.005 10 9 ) 2
27
Example - 44 V = 32.8 Volts
An electron is moving with KE of 3 × 10-25 J. Calculate its Example - 46

wavelength and frequency. What will happen to the wavelength associated with a
moving particle if its velocity is doubled?
1
Sol. K.E.  m 2 Sol. Wavelength becomes half of the original value.
2
h 1
(because   , i.e.,   )
2 K.E. 2  3.0  1025 J m 
  
m 9.1 1031 kg
Example - 47
= 812ms –1 2 –2
(1J = 1 kg m s ) The mass of an electron is 9.1 × 10–31kg. If its kinetic
energy is 10MeV, calculate its wavelength.
h
By de Broglie equation,   Sol. 1eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J
m
KE = 10 × 106 eV
6.626 10 34 J s K.E. = 10 × 106 × 1.6 × 10–19J
 = 8.967 × 10–7 m
(9.1 1031 kg) (812 m s 1 )
K.E = 1.6 × 10–12 J
= 8967 Å.
1 2
K.E = m
c 3  10 8 2
   3.34  1014 Hz
 8.967  10 7
2 (K.E.)
Example - 45 
m
Calculate the accelerating potential that must be applied
on a proton beam to give it an effective wavelength of h h
 
0.005 nm. m 2m (KE)
Sol. m = 10–27g = 10–30 kg

34
6.626  10
 h
2  9.1 1031 (1.6  1012 ) x . =
4m
  3.88 1013 m
h
 
Example - 48 4 mx
A golf ball has a mass of 40g and a speed of 45m/s. If the
speed can be measured within accuracy of 2%. Calculate 6.626  1034
uncertainty in the position.  
4  3.14  10 30  10 11
Sol. Uncertainty in speed = 2% of 40 m s–1 = 5.25 × 106 m/s.
2 Example - 51
i.e.,    45  0.9 m s1
100 An electron has a speed of 500m/s with an uncertainty
Applying uncertainty principle of 0.02% what is the uncertainty in locating its position.
h 0.02
x (m  )  Sol. Uncertainity in speed =  500  0.1 m / s
4 100
h h
or x  x .  
4m 4m
h 6.626  1034
6.626 1034 kg m 2 s 1 x  
 4 m 4  3.14  9.1 10 31  0.1
4  3.14  (40  10 3 kg) (0.9 m s 1 )
= 1.46 × 10–33 m x  5.77  10 4 m.
Example - 52
Example - 49 (a) What is the physical significance of  and 2
Calculate the uncertainty in position of dust particle with (b) What is quantum mechanics ?
mass equal to 1mg if the uncertainity in velocity is 5.5 × Sol. (a) In the phsyical sense,  gives the amplitude of the
10–20m/s. wave associated with the electron. We know that in
Sol. m = 10–3 g = 10–6 kg the case of light waves, the square of the amplitude of
the wave at a point is proportional to the intensity of
= 5.5 × 10–20 m/s.
light. Extending the same cocept to electron wave
h motion, the square of the wave function, 2 may be
x ×  = taken as intensity of electron at any point. In other
4m
words, 2 determines the probability of finding the
h moving electron in a given region i.e. it gives the
x = 4 m probability density. Thus, 2 has been called the
probability density and  the probability amplitude.
Large value of 2 means a high probability of finding
6.626  10 34
x = the electron at that place and a small value of 2 means
4  3.14  106  5.5  10 20
low probability. If 2 is almost zero at a particular point,
x  9.59 × 10–10m it means that the probability of finding the electron at
that point is negligible.
Example - 50
(b) A branch of science that takes dual nature of matter
The approximate mass of an electron is 10–27g. Calculate
into consideration is known as quantum mechanics.
the uncertainty in its velocity if the uncertainty in its
position were of the order 10–11m.
Example - 53
Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital (vi) Outline the shapes of: (a) 3s (b) 3p z (c) 3d xz
Sol : Orbit (d) 3d x 2 -y2
(i) An orbit is a well defined circular path around the nucleus Sol. :
in which the electron revolves. (i) An orbital may be defined as a region in space around
the nucleus where the probability of finding the
(ii) An orbit represents the planar motion of an electron around electron is maximum.
the nucleus.
(iii) All the orbits are circular.
(iv) The concept of an orbit is not in accordance with the wave

(ii)
character of electrons (de Broglie’s hypothesis and
Heisenberg’s uncertainity principle)
(v) The orbits do not have any directional characteristics. (iii) Similarities : (i) Both have spherical shape (ii) Both
h
(vi) The maximum number of electrons in any orbit is given by 2n2, have same angular momentum as it is = l (l  1) .
2
where n is the number of orbit. Differences :
Orbital (i) 1s has no node while 2s has one node.
(i) An orbital is the three dimensional space around the (ii) Energy of 2s is greater than that of 1s.
nucleus within which the probability of finding an electron (iii) Size of 2s is larger than that of 1s.
is maximum.
(iv) Shape of s-orbital is spherically symmetric because
(ii) An orbital represents a three dimensional region of space the probability of finding the electron is same in all
around the nucleus. the directions at a particular distance from the nucleus.
(iii) Different orbitals have different shapes. e.g. (v) (1) Shapes of s-orbitals:
s-orbitals are spherically symmetric, p-orbitals are dumb-
bell shaped and so on. (a) They are non-directional and spherically symmetric
i.e. probability of finding the electron at a given
(iv) The concept of an orbital is in accordance with the wave distance is equal in all directions.
character of electrons and uncertainty principle.
(b) 1s orbital and 2s orbital have same shape but size of
(v) All the orbitals, except s-orbitals, have directional 2s is larger.
characteristics.
(c) There is a spherical shell within 2s orbital where
(vi) The maximum number of electrons present in any orbital is electron density is zero and is called a node.
two.
(d) The value of azimuthal quantum number (l ) is zero
Example - 54
(l =0) and magnetic quantum number can have only
(i) What is an orbital? one value i.e. m=0
(ii) Which d-orbital does not have four lobes? Draw
its shape?
(iii) Compare the shapes of 1s and 2s orbital.
(iv) Why the shape of s-orbital is spherically
symmetric?
(v) Explain the shapes of s,p,d orbitals
(2) Shapes of p-orbitals:

(a) It consists of two lobes present on either side of the
plane that passes through the nucleus. The p-orbital
is dumb-bell shaped.
(b) There are three possible orientations of electron cloud (vi)
in p-orbitals. Therefore, the lobes of p-orbital may be
considered to be along x,y and z axis. Hence they are
designated as px,py,pz. The three p-orbitals are oriented
at right angles to one another.
(c) First main energy level( Principal quantum number=1)
does not contain any p-orbital.
(d) The three p-orbitals of a particular energy level have
same energy in absence of an external electric and
magnetic field and are called degenerate orbitals.
(e) Like s orbitals, p-orbitals increase in size with increase
in the energy of main shell of an atom. Thus, value of
azimuthal quantum number is one (l =1) and magnetic
quantum number has three values (m= –1, 0, +1)
Example - 55
(a) What is the lowest value of n which allows a g-orbital
to exist?
(b) What are degenerate orbitals ?
Sol. (a) For g-subshell, l = 4. As l = 0 to n–1, hence to have
l = 4, minimum value of n = 5, i.e., 5th shell.
For l = 4, m = –4, –3, – 2, –1, 0, +1, +2, +3, + 4, i.e., 9 values
which means 9 orbitals.
(b) The orbitals of same shell and sub-shell having equal
energy are called degenerate orbitals.
eg. 3px, 3py, 3pz
Example - 56
(i) Designate the orbital with n = 4, l = 2 and m = 0
(3) Shapes of d-orbitals:
(ii) List the quantum numbers of electrons for 3d
(a) They are designated as dxy, dyz, dzx and dx2-y2. They orbital
have a shape like a four leaf clover. The fifth d
(iii) An atomic orbital has n=3. What are the possible
orbital designated as d 2z looks like a doughnut. values of l and m.
(b) All five d orbitals have same energy in the absence (iv) Which of the following orbitals are possible?
of magnetic field. 1p, 2s,2p,3f
(c) The d orbitals have azimuthal quantum number l = 2 (v) Using s,p,d notations describe the following
and magnetic quantum number values –2, quantum numbers:
–1,0,+ 1,+ 2. (a) n=1, l = 0 (b) n=3, l = 2
(d) For principal shell number 1 and 2, there are no d (c) n=3, l = 1 (d) n=4, l = 3
orbitals. (e) n=2, l = 1
(vi) Write the values of n,l,m,s for 4p
(vii) What is the total number of orbitals in the 4f
sub-shell?
(viii) What is the maximum number of electrons that Example - 57

can occupy the 4d sub-shell What is the angular momentum of an electron in
(ix) How many electrons will be present in possible (i) 2s orbital (ii) 4f orbital (iii) 2p angular momentum
orbital having n = 3, l = 1, m = –1
h
(x) Calculate the number of electrons in  (l  1)
2
(a) 3pz orbital (b) 3d subshell (c) 7s subshell.
Sol. (i) For 2s, l = 0, thus angular momentum = 0
(xi) How many electrons in an atom may have the
following quantum numbers h
(ii) For 4f orbital, l = 3, angular momentum = 12
2
1
(a) n = 4, ms = - (b) n = 3, l = 0
2 2h
(iii) For 2p orbital, l = 1, angular momentum 
Sol. (i) 4d 2z 2
Example - 58
1 1
(ii) n = 3 l = 2 m = –2, –1, 0, +1, +2 s   , (i) How many electrons will be present in all the possible
2 2
orbital having (a) n + l = 4 (b) n + l = 5
(iii) n=3 l = 0, 1, 2 (ii) How many electrons in sulphur (Z=16) can have
when l=0 m= 0 n+l=3
l=1 m = –1, 0, +1 (iii) How many electrons in Cl have n + l = 3
l=2 –2, –1, 0, +1, +2 Sol
(iv) 1p is not possible because when n = 1, l = 0 only (i) (a) Subshells with n + l = 4 are 4s, 3p
(for p, l = 1) Hence, electrons present = 2 + 6 = 8
2s is possible becuase when n = 2, l = 0 (for s, l = 0) (b) Subshells with n + l = 5 are 5s, 4p, 3d. Hence,
2p is possible because when n = 2, l = 0, 1 (for p, l = 1) electrons present = 2 + 6 + 10 = 18.
3f is not possible because when n = 3, l = 0, 1, 2 (ii) For 1 s2, n + l = 1 + 0 = 1

(for f, l = 3) For 2 s2, n + l = 2 + 0 = 2
(v) (a) 1s, (b) 3d, (c) 3p, (d) 4f, (e) 2p For 2 p6, n + l = 2 + 1 = 3
1 1 For 3 s2, n + l = 3 + 0 = 3
(vi) n = 4 ; l = 1 ; m = –1, 0, + 1 s   ,
2 2 For 3 p4, n + l = 3 + 1 = 4
(vii) Number of orbitals in f-subshell = 7 Thus, n + l = 3 for 2 p6 and 3 s2 electrons, i.e., for 8
(viii) Maximum number of electrons in d-subshell - 10 electrons.
(ix) m = –1 represents an orbital and orbital can have (iii) Cl  1s22s22p63s23p5
maximum of two electrons. For 1s2, n + l = 1 + 0 = 1
(x) (a) An orbital can have maximum of 2 electrons For 2s2, n + l = 2 + 0 = 2
(b) d-subshell has maximum of 10 electrons For 2p6, n + l = 2 + 1 = 3
(c) s-subshell has maximum of two electrons
For 3s2, n + l = 3 + 0 = 3
2 2
(xi) (a) Total electrons in n = 4 are 2n , i.e., 2 × 4 = 32.
For 3p5, n + l = 3 + 1 = 4
1 Thus, (n + l) = 3 for 2p6 & 3s2 electrons, i.e. for 8 electrons.
Half of them, i.e., 16 electrons have ms = – .
2
(b) n = 3, l = 0 means 3s orbital which can have
2 electrons.
What are quantum number of the valence electrons in
Why half filled and fully filled orbitals are stable?
potassium atom[Z =19] in ground state?
Sol. The completely filled and completely half filled sub-shells
Sol. K[19] : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s1
are stable due to the following reasons:
1 1 1. Symmetrical distribution of electrons: It is well known
Therefore, n = 4, l = 0, m = 0, s = + or 
2 2 that symmetry leads to stability. The completely filled or
half filled subshells have symmetrical distribution of
Example - 60
electrons in them and are therefore more stable. Electrons
What information do you get from the principal quantum in the same subshell (here 3d) have equal energy but
number about an atom ? different spatial distribution. Consequently, their shielding
Sol. (i) It gives us the average distance of the electron from of one another is relatively small and the electrons are
the nucleus.
more strongly attracted by the nucleus.
(ii) It determines the energy of the electron in H-atom
and hydrogen like particles. 2. Exchange Energy : The stabilizing effect arises whenever
two or more electrons with the same spin are present in the
(iii) The maximum number of electrons present in any
degenerate orbitals of a subshell. These electrons tend to
shell is given by 2n2 where ‘n’ is the number of exchange their positions and the energy released due to
principal shell. this exchange is called exchange energy. The number of
Example - 61 exchanges that can take place is maximum when the
Explain pauli exclusion principle & Why Pauli exclusion subshell is either half filled or completely filled. As a result
principle is called exclusion principle? the exchange energy is maximum and so is the stability.
Sol. No two electrons in an atom can have the same set of four eg. Cr (24) : [Ar] 4s1 3d5
quantum numbers.
If one electron in an atom has some particular values for
the four quantum numbers, then all the other electrons in
that atom are excluded from having the same set of values.
It is because of this reason that this principle is called
exclusion principle.
Example - 62
Write short note on Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity.
Why it is called multiplicity rule?
Sol. Electron pairing in p, d and f orbitals cannot occur until
each orbital of a given subshell contains one electron each
or is singly occupied.
This is due to the fact that electrons being identical in
charge, repel each other when present in the same orbital.
This repulsion can, however, be minimised if two electrons
move as far apart as possible by occupying different
degenerate orbitals.
Further, all the singly occupied will have parallel spins, i.e.,
in the same direction, viz., either clockwise or anticlockwise.
This is due to the fact that two electrons with parallel spins
(of course in different orbitals) will encounter less inter-
electronic repulsions in space than when they have opposite Thus, total number of exchanges=10
spins and total spin of unpaired electrons is maximum.
Why the three electrons present in 2p subshell of (a) Indicate the number of unpaired electron in
nitrogen remain unpaired?
(i) P (ii) Cr(iii) Si (iv) Kr (v)Fe+2
Sol. According to Hund’s rule, electron pairing in p, d and f
orbitals cannot occur until each orbital of a given subshell (b) Which is more paramagnetic:
contains one electron each. so that total spin of unpaired Fe+2 or Fe+3
electrons is maximum.
(c)Which is more stable Fe+2 or Fe+3
For the element nitrogen, which contains 7 electrons, the
Sol.
following configurations can be written :
(a) (i) 15
P = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p1x 3p1y 3p1z .
No. of unpaired electron = 3

(ii) 24
Cr = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5 4s1.
Total spin of unpaired electrons No. of unpaired electrons = 6
1 1 1 1 (iii) Si = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p1x 3p1y .

   1 14
2 2 2 2
No. of unpaired electrons =2
Example - 65
(iv) 36
Kr = Noble gas. All orbitals are filled. Unpaired
Write the electronic configuration of electrons = 0.
(i) Cu (ii) Cu+ (iii) Cu+2 (iv) Cr (v) Cr+3 (vi) Co+3 (v) Fe = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d6. No. of unpaired
26
(vii) O–2(viii) Fe+3 (ix) Fe+2 (x) Zn+2 (xi) H– (xii) Na+ electrons = 4 (in 3 d)
(xiii) O–2 (xiv) F– (xv) Al+3 (xvi) Sc (xvii)Cl– (b) As Fe3+ contains 5 unpaired electrons while Fe2+
Sol. (i) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s1 3d10 contains only 4 unpaired electrons, Fe3+ is more
paramagnetic.
(ii) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10
(c) Fe+2 : [Ar] 4s0 3d6
2 2 6 2 6 9
(iii) 1s 2s 2p 3s 3p 3d .
Fe+3 : [Ar] 4s0 3d5
2 2 6 2 6 5 1
(iv) 1s 2s 2p 3s 3p 3d 4s .
(v) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 Since d-subshell is half filled in Fe+3, hence it is more stable
(vi) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d6 Example - 67
(vii) 1s2 2s2 2p6 (i) What are the atomic numbers of the elements whose
outermost electrons are represented by (a)3s1 (b) 2p3
(viii) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5
(c) 3d5
(ix) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d6
(x) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 (ii) Which atoms are indicated by the following
configurations? (a) [He]2s 1 (b) [Ne]3s 2 3p 3
(xi) 1s 2 (c) [Ar]4s23d1
(xii) 1s2 2s2 2p6 Sol.
2 2 6
(xiii) 1s 2s 2p (i) (a) Total electrons : 2 + 2 + 6 + 1 = 11
(xiv) 9
F = 1s 2s 2p  F = 1s 2s 2p
2 2 5 – 2 2 6 Atomic Number = 11
(xv) 1s2 2s2 2p6 (b) Total electrons : 2 + 2 + 3 = 7
(xvi) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 3d1 Atomic Number = 7
(xvii) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6

(c) There can be two cases : Example - 70

For Cr : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s1 3d5 How many radial nodes & angular nodes are present in
Thus atomic number = 24 (a) 5d (b) 4p (c) 6d
Sol. (a) Radial nodes : n – l – 1
For Mn : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 3d6
=5–2–1=2
Thus atomic Number = 25
Angular nodes = l = 2
(ii) (a) 1s2 2s1, Thus 3Li
(b) Radial nodes = n – l – 1
(b) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p3, Thus 15P
=4–1–1=2
2 2 6 2 6 2 1
(c) 1s 2s 2p 3s 3p 4s 3d , Thus 21Sc Angular nodes = l = 1
Example - 68 (c) Radial nodes = n – l – 1
(i) Which orbital in the following pair is lower in energy =6–2–1=3
in a many electron atom : 3p and 3d Angular nodes = l = 2
(ii) Why 4s orbital is filled before 3d? Example - 71
Sol. (i) Orbital having lower value of (n + l) Estimate the highest velocity of the electron being
ejected by light of  = 2.4×1015Hz for a metal with a work
will have lower energy.
function of 10 eV.
For 3p : n + l = 4 (n = 3, l = 1)
Sol. Energy of incident photon = h
3d : n + l = 5 (n = 3, l = 2) = 6.63 × 10–34 × 2.4 × 1015
Thus 3p has lower energy. = 1.63 × 10–18 J
(ii) Orbitals are filled with electrons starting with the orbital Threshold Energy = 10eV × 1.6×10–18J
of lowest energy.
Therefore, KE = 1.63 ×10–18 – 1.6×10–19 J
Orbital having lower value of (n + l) will have lower = 1.47 × 10–18J
energy.
½ mev2 = 1.47 × 10–18
For 4s : n + l = 4 (n = 4, l = 0)
For 3d : n + l = 5 (n = 3, l = 2) v= 3.23  10  m /s
12
= 1.79×106 m/s Ans.
Thus 4s is filled before 3d. Example - 72
Example - 69 A H-like species is in their excited state
(i) What is the total number of electrons in 2p subshell (A) and absorbs a photon of energy 3.868 eV and get
of a chlorine atom in the ground state. excited to a new state (B). The electron from B on returning
(ii) Which sub-shells are occupied in the outermost to a lower orbit, can give a maximum of ten different
principal energy level of Argon atom in the ground emissions. Some of the radiations have energies greater
state. than it and some equal to 3.868 eV. Exactly 2 radiations
have energies less than 3.868 eV. Determine the orbit
(iii) How many electrons are there in the valence quantum numbers of states A and B and also identify the species.
level of copper (Atomic number=29)?
Sol. Total number of emissions from state B = 10.
Sol. (i) Cl (17) : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5
Thus,nB (nB – 1)/2 = 10  nB = 5 Ans.
Total electrons in 2p = 6
Also, number of spectral lines with energies less than 3.868
(ii) Ar (18) : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 eV = 2. So, there are two transitions possible between nB to
p-subshell is occupied nA excluding the direct transition from B to A. Therefore, nA
= 3 Ans.
(iii) Cu (29) : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s1 3d10
Also I.P = 13.6Z2 eV and from the given information 3.868
Valence quantum level of Cu = 4 =13.6Z2 ([1/32) – [1/52]) Thus, Z = 2 Ans.
It has 1 electron
Example - 73
v
Estimate the De-broglie’s wavelength of Hence frequency =
2r
(a) An electron moving with a velocity of 7.28×107m/s.
Calculate velocity (v2) and radius (r2) for electron in 2nd
(b) A 100 kg motorbike moving at 6.63 m/s Bohr orbit in H-atom (Z = 1)
Sol. (a) mass of electron = 9.1×10-31kg and given velocity Z = 1 for H-atom
= 7.28×107m/s
n2
Thus, momentum of electron Using rn  0.529 Å
Z
= m × v = 9.1×7.28×10–24 kgm/s = 6.625×10–23
 2
2
Therefore, wavelength = h/mv = 10–8m 10
r2  0.529  10 m  2.12  1010 m
= 10 –11
m Ans. 1
(b) Momentum = 100 × 6.63 kgm/s = 663 kgm/s vn = 2.165 × 106 (1/n) m/s
Therefore, wavelength = h/mv = 10-36m Ans. v2 = 2.165 × 106 (1/2) = 1.09 × 106 m/s
Example - 74
A electron is moving with a velocity of 108 ± 105 m/s. v2 1.09  106
Hence frequency  
Calculate the uncertainty in its position. 2r2 2( ) (2.12  10 10 )
Sol. v = 2×105. Therefore p = mv = 1.82×10-25 v = 8.18 × 1014 Hz Ans.
Thus, x = h/4p = 2.9 × 10 m Ans.
–10
Example - 76
Example - 75 Determine the maximum number of lines that can be
Determine the frequency of revolution of the electron in emitted when an electron in H atom in
2nd Bohr’s orbit in hydrogen atom. n = 6 state drops to the ground state. Also find the
Sol. The frequency of revolution of electron is given by : transitions corresponding to the lines emitted.
Sol. The maximum number of lines can be calculated by using
1
Frequency = (n 2  n1  1) (n 2  n1 )
time period the formula where n2 = 6 and n1 = 1
2
are 15
v The distinct transition corresponding to these line are
61
r 6  2, 21
6  3, 3  2, 31
+Ze
6  4, 4  3, 4  2, 41
6  5, 5  4, 5  3, 5  2, 51
Example - 77
Find the wavelength of radiation required to excite the
Time period
electron in ground level of Li++ (Z = 3) to third energy
Total distance covered in 1 revolution 2r level. Also find the ionisation energy of Li2+. (R = 109,
= 
velocity v 677 cm–1)
Sol. Ground level : n = 1

Each of dxy, dxz, dyz, d (x 2  y2 ) dz2 has 2 nodal planes,
1  1 1 
Use :  RZ 2  2  2  which means a total of 10 nodal planes.
 n
 1 n 2 
Hence for n = 3, a total of 13 nodal planes are there.

Putting the values : n1 = 1, n2 = 3, Z = 3
Example - 79
1 1 1
We get :  1.09  10  3   2  2 
7 2
Write down the electronic configuration of following
 1 3  species. Also find the number of unpaired electrons in
each.
1 1
 8.776  107 m 1   = 113.97Å Ans. (a) Fe, Fe2+, Fe3+ (Z of Fe = 26)
 v
Ionisation energy is the energy required to remove the (b) Br, Br– (Z of Br = 35)
electron from ground state to infinity i.e. corresponding Sol. Follow the order of increasing energy (Aufbau Rule) :
transition responsible is 1   . 1s, 2s, 2p, 3s, 3p, 4s, 3p, 4d, 5s, 4d ......
(a) Fe (Z = 26) : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 3d6
Note that 3d orbital are not fully filled.
3d6 
Orbitals filled as per Hund’s Rule.
Clearly the number of unpaired electrons is 4.
 Fe2+ : (Z = 24)
While Writing electronic configuration (e.c.) of
cations, first write e.c. of neutral atom and then
“remove desired number of electrons from outermost
orbital”.
In Fe2+, remove 2e– from 4s2 since 4s orbital (through
1 1  lower in energy then 3d) is the outermost. Hence e.c.
i.e. E (1 )  13.6  32  2  2  eV
1   of Fe2+ is : 1s2 2s2 2p 3p6 3d6 4s0
Note that number of unpaired electrons remains same
Ionisation energy = E (1 )  122.4 eV
as that in Fe, i.e. 4.
= 1.95 × 10–17J Ans. [1eV  1.6  10 19 J]  Fe3+ (Z = 23)
Example - 78 Now remove 2e– from 4s2 and 1e– from 3d6 to get e.c.
In all, how many nodal planes are there in the atomic as : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5 4s0
orbitals for the principal quantum number n = 3.
Note that, now all ‘d’ orbits have an odd electron (i.e.
Sol. Shell with n = 3 has 1 ‘s’ (3s), 3 ‘p’ (px, py, pz) and 3 ‘d’ are half filled).
2
(dxy, dxz,dyz, d (x 2  y2 ) and d z ) orbitals.
 ‘s’ has no nodal plane. Hence number of unpaired electrons in Fe3+ is 5.

(b) Br (Z = 35)
 Each of px, py, pz has one nodal plane, which means a
Following Aufbau rule, e.c. is :
total of 3 nodal planes.
1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 4p5
Clearly one of 4p5 orbitals contains unpaired electrons :

  n(n  2) B.M
4p5 
(n = number of unpaired electrons ; BM : unit of magnetic
Orbitals filled as per Hund’s Rule. moment in Bohr’s Magneton)
Hence Br has only one unpaired electron.
 1.73  n(n  2)
 Br– (Z = 36)
On solving for n, we get n = 1. This means that vanadium
Since anion (s) is (are) formed by adding electron (s), so ion (Z = 23) in the compound has one unpaired electron.
simply write e.c. as per total number of electrons finally.
3d :
For Z = 36, e.c. is : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 4p6
So its electronic configuration (e.c.) must be :
Clearly there are no unpaired electrons.
Example - 80 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d1
A compound of Vanadium has a magnetic moment of i.e vanadium exists as V4+ ion in the compound since the
1.73 B.M. Work out the electronic configuration of ground state e.c. of 23V is :
vanadium in the compound. 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 4s2
Sol. The magnitude of magnetic moment () of a compound/
species/ion is given by : 3d : 4s :
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Subatomic Particles & Special Terms 9. Which of the following atoms and ions are isoelectronic
i.e. have the same number of electrons with the neon atom
1. Which is not basic postulate of Dalton’s atomic theory ?
–
(a) F (b) Oxygen atom
(a) Atoms are neither created nor destroyed in a chemical
–
reaction (c) Mg (d) N
(b) In a given compound, the relative number and kinds 10. The triad of nuclei that is isotonic is :
of atoms are constant. 14 15 17 12 14 19
(a) 6 C, 7 N, 9 F
(b) 6 C, 7 N, 9 F
(c) Atoms of all elements are alike, including their masses.
(d) Each element is composed of extremely small particles 14 14 17 14 14 19
(c) 6 C, 7 N, 9 F
(d) 6 C, 7 N, 9 F
called atoms.
11. An isotone of 32Ge76 is
2. The number of electrons in a neutral atom of an element is
equal to its : (i) 32Ge77 (ii) 33As77
(a) atomic weight (b) atomic number (iii) 34Se77 (iv) 34Se78
(c) equivalent weight (d) electron affinity (a) Only (i) and (ii) (b) Only (ii) and (iii)
3. The e/m for positive rays in comparison to cathode rays (c) Only (ii) and (iv) (d) (ii), (iii), and (iv)
is : Rutherford's Nuclear Model of an Atom and
(a) very low (b) high Electromagnetic Spectrum
(c) same (d) none 12. When a gold sheet is bombarded by a beam of –particles,
4. Which has highest e/m ratio ? only a few of them get deflected whereas most go straight,
(a) He2+ (b) H+ undeflected. This is because
(c) He+ (d) H (a) The force of attraction exerted on the –particles by
the oppositely charged electrons is not sufficient.
5. Cathode rays have :
(b) A nucleus has a much smaller volume than that of an
(a) mass only (b) charge only
atom.
(c) neither mass nor charge
(c) The force of repulsion acting on the fast moving
(d) mass and charge both –particles is very small.
6. Mass of neutron is .............. times the mass of electron. (d) The neutrons in the nucleus do not have any effect
(a) 1840 (b) 1480 on the –particles.
(c) 2000 (d) None of these 13. Discovery of the nucleus of an atom was due to the
7. Positive rays or canal rays are : experiment carried out by
(a) electromagnetic waves (a) Bohr (b) Mosley
(b) a steam of positively charged gaseous ions (c) Rutherford (d) Thomson
(c) a stream of electrons 14. Rutherford’s scattering experiment is related to the size of
the
(d) neutrons
(a) Nucleus (b) Atom
8. The ion that is isoelectronic with CO is :
(c) Electron (d) Neutron
(a) CN (b) O 2
(c) O2 (d) N 2
15. Rank the following types of radiations from the highest 24. Which of the following is not a characteristic of Planck’s
energy to the lowest. quantum theory of radiation ?
ultraviolet/visible/X-ray/microwave/infrared (a) Energy is not absorbed or emitted in whole number
(a) X-ray, ultraviolet, microwave, infrared, visible multiples of quantum.
(b) ultraviolet, X-ray, visible, infrared, microwave (b) Radiation is associated with energy.
(c) infrared, microwave, ultraviolet, visible, X-ray (c) Radiation is associated with energy emitted or absorbed
(d) X-ray, ultraviolet, visible, infrared, microwave continuously but in the form of small packets called quanta.
16. The velocity of light is 3.0 × 108 ms–1. Which value is (d) The magnitude of energy associated with quantum is
closest to the wavelength in nanometres of a quantum of proportional to frequency.
light with frequency of 8 × 1015 s–1 25. The number of photons emitted in 10 hours by a 60 W
(a) 3 × 107
(b) 2 × 10 –25 sodium lamp ( of photon = 6000 Å)
(c) 5 × 10–18 (d) 3.7 × 101 (a) 6.50 × 1024 (b) 6.40 × 1023
17. The frequency of a wave of light is 12 × 1014 s–1. The (c) 8.40 × 1023 (d) 3.40 × 1023
wave number associated with this light is Bohr's Model of an Atom
(a) 5 × 10–7 m (b) 4 × 10–8 cm–1
26. The Bohr orbit radius for the hydrogen atom (n = 1) is
(c) 2 × 10–7 m–1 (d) 4 × 104 cm–1 approximately 0.530 Å. The radius for the first excited state
18. The frequency of a green light is 6 × 1014 Hz. Its wavelength (n = 2) orbit is
is : (a) 0.13 Å (b) 1.06 Å
(a) 500 nm (b) 5 nm (c) 4.77 Å (d) 2.12 Å
(c) 50,000 nm (d) None of these 27. The energy of electron in 3rd orbit of hydrogen atom is
Planck's Quantum Theory (a) –1311.8 kJ mol–1 (b) –82.0 kJ mol–1
19. Which wave property is directly proportional to energy of (c) –145.7 kJ mol–1 (d) –327.9 kJ mol–1
electromagnetic radiation : 28. The ionization energy of H atom is 13.6 eV. The ionization
(a) velocity (b) frequency energy of Li2+ ion will be
(c) wave number (d) all of these (a) 54.4 eV (b) 40.8 eV
20. The energy E corresponding to intense yellow line of (c) 27.2 eV (d) 122.4 eV
sodium of  589 nm is : 29. The ratio of the difference in energy between the first and
the second Bohr orbit to that between second and third
(a) 2.10 eV (b) 43.37 eV
Bohr orbit is
(c) 47.12 eV (d) 2.11 kcal
21. The relation between energy of a radiation and its 1 1
(a) (b)
frequency was given by : 2 3
(a) de Broglie (b) Einstein 27 4
(c) Planck (d) Bohr (c) (d)
5 9
22. The number of photons of light of  = 2.5 × 106 m–1 necessary 30. Energy of electron of hydrogen atom in second Bohr
to provide 1 J of energy are orbit is
(a) 2 × 1018 (b) 2 × 1017 (a) –5.44 × 10–19 J (b) –5.44 × 10–19 kJ
(c) 2 × 1020 (d) 2 × 1019 (c) –5.44 × 10–19 cal (d) –5.44 × 10–19 eV
23. Minimum number of photons of light of wavelength 4000Å, 31. The energy of second Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom is
which provide 1J energy : –3.4 eV. The energy of fourth orbit of He+ ion would be
(a) 2 × 1018 (b) 2 × 109 (a) –3.4 eV (b) –0.85 eV
(c) 2 × 1020
(d) 2 × 10 10
(c) –13.64 eV (d) +3.4 eV
32. The energy of an electron in the first Bohr orbit of H atom (d) There are interelectronic repulsions.
is –13.6 eV. The possible energy value(s) of the excited 40. Ratio of frequency of revolution of electron in the second
state(s) for electrons in Bohr orbits to hydrogen is (are) excited state of He+ and second state of hydrogen is
(a) –3.4 eV (b) –4.2 eV
32 27
(c) –6.8 eV (d) +6.8 eV (a) (b)
27 32
33. The ionization energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. The
energy required to excite the electron in a hydrogen atom 1 27
(c) (d)
from the ground state to the first excited state is 54 2
(a) 1.69 × 10–18 J (b) 1.69 × 10–23 J
Hydrogen Spectra
(c) 1.69 × 1023 J (d) 1.69 × 1025 J
41. The line spectrum of two elements is not identical because
34. In a Bohr’s model of atom when an electron jumps from
(a) They do not have same number of neutrons
n = 1 to n = 3, how much energy will be emitted or absorbed
(1erg = 10–7 J) (b) They have dissimilar mass number
(a) 2.15 × 10–11 erg (b) 0.1911 × 10–10 erg (c) They have different energy level schemes
(c) 2.389 × 10–12 erg (d) 0.239 × 10–10 erg (d) They have different number of valence electrons
35. An electron in H-atom is moving with a kinetic energy of 42. The line spectrum observed when electron jumps from
5.45×10–19J. What will be energy level for this electron ? higher level to M level is known as
(a) 1 (b) 2 (a) Balmer series (b) Lyman series
(c) 3 (d) None of these (c) Paschen series (d) Brackett series
36. The energy required to dislodge electron from excited 43. In hydrogen spectrum, the series of lines appearing in
isolated H-atom, IE1 = 13.6 eV is ultra violet region of electromagnetic spectrum are called
(a) = 13.6 eV (b) > 13.6 eV (a) Balmer lines (b) Lyman lines
(c) Pfund lines (d) Brackett lines
(c) < 13.6 and > 3.4 eV (d)  3.4 eV
44. How many spectral lines are produced in the spectrum of
37. The radius of first Bohr’s orbit for hydrogen is 0.53 Å. hydrogen atom from 5th energy level ?
The radius of third Bohr’s orbit would be
(a) 5 (b) 10
(a) 0.79 Å (b) 1.59 Å
(c) 15 (d) 4
(c) 3.18 Å (d) 4.77 Å
45. An electron jumps from 6th energy level to 3rd energy
38. According to Bohr model, angular momentum of an electron level in H-atom, how many lines belong to visible region ?
in the 3rd orbit is :
(a) 1 (b) 2
3h 1.5h (c) 3 (d) Zero
(a) (b)
  46. The wavenumber for the shortest wavelength transition
3 9h in the Balmer series of atomic hydrogen is
(c) (d)
h  (a) 27420 cm–1 (b) 28420 cm–1
39. Electronic energy is a negative energy because (c) 29420 cm–1 (d) 12186 cm–1
(a) Electron carries negative charge. 47. When electrons in N shell of excited hydrogen atom return
to ground state, the number of possible lines spectrum is :
(b) Energy is zero near the nucleus and decreases as the
distance from the nucleus increases. (a) 6 (b) 4
(c) Energy is zero at an infinite distance from the nucleus (c) 2 (d) 3
and decreases as the electron comes closer to the
nucleus.
48. What transition in He+ ion shall have the same wave number 56. Photoelectric effect shows
as the first line in Balmar series of H atom ?
(a) particle-like behaviour of light
(a) 7  5 (b) 5  3
(b) wave-like behaviour of light
(c) 6  4 (d) 4  2
(c) both wave-like and particle-like behaviour of light
49. The difference in wavelength of second and third lines of
(d) neither wave-like nor particle-like behaviour of light
Balmer series in the atomic spectrum is
57. Increase in the frequency of the incident radiations
(a) 131 Å (b) 524 Å
increase the :
(c) 324 Å (d) 262 Å
(a) rate of emission of photo-electrons
50. The third line in Balmer series corresponds to an electronic
(b) work function
transition between which Bohr’s orbits in hydrogen atom
(c) kinetic energy of photo-electrons
(a) 5  3 (b) 5  2
(d) threshold frequency
(c) 4  3 (d) 4  2
58. Ultraviolet light of 6.2 eV falls on aluminium surface (work
51. The wave number of the first line of Balmer series of H
function = 4.2 eV). The kinetic energy (in joule) of the
atom is 15200 cm–1. What is the wave number of the first
fastest electron emitted is approximately :
line of Balmer series of Li2+ ion ?
(a) 3 × 10–21 (b) 3 × 10–19
(a) 15200 cm–1 (b) 6080 cm–1
(c) 3 × 10–17 (d) 3 × 10–15
(c) 76000 cm–1 (d) 136800 cm–1
59. The kinetic energy of the photoelectrons does not depend
52. A certain transition in H spectrum from an excited state to
upon
the ground state in one or more steps gives rise to a total of
10 lines. How many of these belong to the UV spectrum ? (a) Intensity of incident radiation
(a) 3 (b) 4 (b) Frequency of incident radiation
(c) 6 (d) 5 (c) Wavelength of incident radiation

(d) Wave number of incident radiation.
Particle Nature of Electromagnetic Radiations
60. The threshold wavelength for photoelectric effect on
53. Einstein’s theory of photoelectric effect is based on :
sodium is 5000 Å. Its work function is :
(a) Newtons corpuscular theory of light
(a) 4 × 10–19 J (b) 1J
(b) Huygen’s wave theory of light
(c) 2 × 10 J
–19
(d) 3 × 10–10 J
(c) Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory of light
61. If the threshold frequency of a metal for photoelectric effect
(d) Planck’s quantum theory of light is 0, then which of the following will not happen ?
54. In photoelectric effect the number of photo-electrons (a) If the frequency of the incident radiation is 0, the
emitted is proportional to : kinetic energy of the electrons ejected is zero.
(a) intensity of incident beam (b) If the frequency of the incident radiation is , the kinetic
(b) frequency of incident beam energy of the electrons ejected will be h– h0.
(c) velocity of incident beam (c) If the frequency is kept same at  but intensity is
(d) work function of photo cathode increased, the number of electrons ejected will increase.
55. Threshold wavelength depends upon : (d) If the frequency of incident radiation is further
increased, the number of photoelectrons ejected will
(a) frequency of incident radiation
increase.
(b) velocity of electrons
(c) work function
(d) None of the above
Dual Nature of Particle 69. The Heisenbergs Uncertainty Principle states that ........... .
62. The de–Broglie wavelength associated with a material (a) no two electrons in the same atom can have the same
particle is set of four quantum numbers
(a) Directly proportional to its energy (b) two atoms of the same element must have the same
(b) Directly proportional to momentum number of protons
(c) Inversely proportional to its energy (c) it is impossible to determine accurately both the
(d) Inversely proportional to momentum position and momentum of an electron simultaneously
63. The de Broglie wavelength of a tennis ball of mass 66 g (d) electrons of atoms in their ground states enter
moving with the velocity of 10 metres per second is energetically equivalent sets of orbitals singly before
approximately they pair up in any orbital of the set
(a) 10–35 metres (b) 10–33 metres 70. For an electron, if the uncertainty in velocity is v, the
(c) 10–31 metres (d) 10–36 metres uncertainty in its position (x) is given by :
64. The wavelength of a cricket ball weighing 100 g and
h 
travelling with a velocity of 50 m/s is (a) m (b)
2 hm
(a) 1.3 × 10–28 m (b) 1.3 × 10–37 m
(c) 1.3 × 10–34 m (d) 1.3 × 10–30 m h 2m
(c) (d)
65. A cricket ball of 0.5 kg is moving with a velocity of 100 ms–1. 4m h
The wavelength associated with its motion is 71. A ball of mass 200g is moving with a velocity of 10m sec–1.
(a) 1/100 cm (b) 66 × 10 –34
m If the error in measurement of velocity is 0.1%, the
uncertainty in its position is :
(c) 1.32 × 10 m–35
(d) 6.6 × 10 m –28
(a) 3.3 × 10–31 m (b) 3.3 × 10–27 m

66. An electron with velocity v is found to have a certain
value of de Broglie wavelength. The velocity that the (c) 5.3 × 10–25 m (d) 2.64 × 10–32 m
neutron should possess to have the same de Broglie 72. If uncertainty in the measurement of position and
wavelength is momentum of an electron are equal then uncertainly in the
(a) v (b) v/1840 measurement of its velocity is approximately :
(c) 1840v (d) 1840/v (a) 8 × 1012 m s–1 (b) 6 × 1012 m s–1
67. An electron has kinetic energy 2.8 × 10–23 J de–Broglie (c) 4 × 1012 m s–1 (d) 2 × 1012 m s–1
wavelength will be nearly(me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg) 73. In the Schrodinger’s wave equation  represents
(a) 9.24 × 10 m–4
(b) 9.24 × 10 m –7
(a) Orbit (b) Wave function
(c) 9.24 × 10 m–8
(d) 9.24 × 10–10 m (c) Wave (d) Radial probability
Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle and 74. The quantum number not obtained from Schrodinger
Schrodinger's Wave Equation equation is
68. If uncertainty in the position of an electron is zero, the (a) n (b) l

uncertainty in its momentum would be (c) m (d) s
h Quantum Numbers
(a) zero (b) 
4 75. For each value of , the number fo ms values are
(a) 2 (b) n
h
(c)  (d) infinite (c) 2 + 1 (d) n – 
4
76. A subshell with n = 6,  = 2 can accommodate a maximum (c) V3+ (d) Fe3+
of 85. Azimuthal quantum number for the last electron in Na atom
(a) 10 electrons (b) 12 electrons is
(c) 36 electrons (d) 72 electrons (a) 1 (b) 0
77. The correct designation of an electron with n = 4, l = 3, (c) 2 (d) 3
m = 2, and s = 1/2 is :
86. Presence of three unpaired electrons in phosphorus atom
(a) 3d (b) 4f can be explained by
(c) 5p (d) 6s (a) Pauli’s rule
78. A 3d-electron having s = +1/2 can have a magnetic quantum (b) Uncertainty principle
no :
(c) Aufbau’s rule
(a) +2 (b) +3 (d) Hund’s rule
(c) –3 (d) +4
87. The quantum numbers for the outermost electron of an
79. Which of the following sets of quantum number is correct element are given below
for an electron in 4f orbital ?
1
(a) n = 3,  = 2, m = –2, s = +1/2 n  2,   0, m  0, ms  
2
(b) n = 4,  = 4, m = –4, s = –1/2
The atom is
(c) n = 4,  = 3, m = +1, s = +1/2
(a) hydrogen (b) lithium
(d) n = 4,  = 3, m = +4, s = +1/2
(c) beryllium (d) boron
80. For a d-electron, the orbital angular momentum is
88. Which electronic configuration does not follow the Pauli’s
(a) 6  h / 2  (b) 2  h / 2  exclusion principle ?
(c) h/2 (d) zero (a) 1s2, 2s2 2p4 (b) 1s2, 2s2 2p4, 3s2
(c) 1s2, 2p4 (d) 1s2, 2s2 2p6, 3s3
Electronic Configuration
89. Magnetic quantum number for the last electron in sodium
81. According to (n + l) rule after completing ‘np’ level the
is :
electron enters to :
(a) 3 (b) 1
(a) (n – 1) d (b) (n + 1) s
(c) 2 (d) zero
(c) nd (d) (n + 1) p
90. How many spherical nodes are present in 4s orbital in a
82. The correct ground state electronic configuration of
hydrogen atom ?
chromium atom (Z = 24) is
(a) 0 (b) 2
(a) [Ar] 3d5 4s1 (b) [Ar] 3d4 4s2
(c) 3 (d) 4
(c) [Ar] 3d6 4s0 (d) [Ar] 4s1 4p5
91. The number of nodes possible in radial wave function of
83. In manganese atom, Mn (Z = 25), the total number of
3d orbital is
orbitals populated by one or more electrons (in ground
state) is (a) 1 (b) 2
(a) 15 (b) 14 (c) 0 (d) 3
(c) 12 (d) 10 92. The d-orbital with the orientation along X and Y axes is
called :
84. Which of the following has maximum number of unpaired
electrons ? (a) d z2 (b) d zy
(a) Mg 2+
(b) Ti 3+
(c) d yz (d) d x 2 y2

93. Which d-orbital does not have four lobes ? 100. For which one of the following sets of four quantum
numbers an electron will have the highest energy
(a) d x 2 y2 (b) d xy
n  m s
(c) d z2 (d) d xz (a) 3 2 1 1/2
(b) 4 1 0 –1/2
94. The number of angular nodes in a 3s atomic orbital is
(c) 4 2 –1 1/2
(a) 0 (b) 1
(d) 5 0 0 –1/2
(c) 2 (d) 3
95. The number of radial nodes in a 3s atomic orbital is 101. Nitrogen has the electronic configuration 1s 2 ,2s2 2p1x
(a) 0 (b) 1
2p1y 2p1z and not 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p x2 2p1y 2p 0z . It was proposed by :
(c) 2 (d) 3
(a) Aufbau principle
96. The electrons identified by n and l
(b) Pauli’s exclusion principle
(i) n = 4, l = 1 (ii) n = 4, l = 0
(c) Hund’s rule
(iii) n = 3, l = 2 (iv) n = 3, l = 1
(d) Uncertainty principle
can be placed in order of increasing energy, from lowest to
highest 102. Which of the following has maximum number of unpaired
electron (atomic number of Fe 26)
(a) (iv) < (ii) < (iii) < (i) (b) (ii) < (iv) < (i) < (iii)
(a) Fe (b) Fe (II)
(c) (i) < (iii) < (ii) < (iv) (d) (iii) < (i) < (iv) < (ii)
(c) Fe (III) (d) Fe (IV)
97. The correct set of quantum numbers for the unpaired
electron of chlorine atom is 103. The total spin and magnetic moment for the atom with
atomic number 7 are
n  m
(a) 2 1 0 (a)  3, 3 BM (b)  1, 8 BM
(b) 2 1 1
3
(c) 3 1 1 (c)  , 15 BM (d) 0, 8 BM
2
(d) 3 0 0
104. 3py orbital has .......... nodal plane
98. The maximum number of 4d-electrons having spin quantum
(a) XY (b) YZ
1
number s   are (c) ZX (d) Any
2
105. A compound of vanadium has magnetic moment of 1.73
(a) 10 (b) 7 B.M. The electronic configuration of the vanadium ion in
(c) 1 (d) 5 the compound is
99. Consider the following ions (a) [Ar] 4s03d1 (b) [Ar] 4s13d0
1. Ni2+ 2. Co3+ 3. Cr2+ 4. Fe3+ (c) [Ar] 4s23d0 (d) [Ar] 4s03d3
(Atomic number : Cr = 24, Fe = 26, Co = 27 and Ni = 28)
The correct sequence of increasing number of unpaired
electrons in these ions is
(a) 1, 2, 3, 4 (b) 4, 2, 3, 1
(c) 1, 3, 2, 4 (d) 3, 4, 2, 1
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. In Bohr series of lines of hydrogen spectrum, the third line 7. Of the following sets which one does not contain
from the red end corresponds to which one of the following isoelectronic species ? (2005)
inner-orbit jumps of the electron for Bohr orbits in an atom
(a) BO33 , CO32  , NO3 (b) SO32  , CO 32  , NO 3
of hydrogen ? (2003)
(a) 3  2 (b) 5  2 (c) CN  , N 2 , C 22  (d) PO 34 , SO 42  , ClO 4
(c) 4  1 (d) 2  5
8. Uncertainty in the position of an electron
2 The wavelength of the radiation emitted, when in a (mass = 9.1 × 10–31 kg) moving with a velocity 300 ms–1,
hydrogen atom electron falls from infinity to stationary Accurate upto 0.001%, will be (h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js) (2006)
state 1, would be (Rydberg constant = 1.097 × 107 m–1)
(a) 19.2 × 10–2 m (b) 5.76 × 10–2 m
(2004)
(c) 1.92 × 10–2 m (d) 3.84 × 10–2 m
(a) 91 nm (b) 192 nm
9. According to Bohr’s theory, the angular momentum of an
(c) 406 nm (d) 9.1 × 10–8 nm
electron in 5th orbit is (2006)
3. Which of the following sets of quantum numbers is correct
for an electron in 4f orbital ? (2004) h h
(a) 25 (b) 1.0
(a) n = 4, l = 3, m = + 4, s = + 1/2  
(b) n = 4, l = 4, m = – 4, s = – 1/2
h h
(c) n = 4, l = 3, m = + 1, s = + 1/2 (c) 10 (d) 2.5
 
(d) n = 3, l = 2, m = – 2, s = + 1/2
10. Which of the following sets of quantum numbers represents
4. Consider the ground state of Cr atom (Z = 24). The numbers the highest energy of an atom ? (2007)
of electrons with the azimuthal quantum numbers, l = 1 and
(a) n = 3, l = 1, m = 1, s = + 1/2
2 are, respectively (2004)
(b) n = 3, l = 2, m = 1, s = + 1/2
(a) 12 and 4 (b) 12 and 5
(c) n = 4, l = 0, m = 0, s = + 1/2
(c) 16 and 4 (d) 16 and 5
(d) n = 3, l = 0, m = 0, s = + 1/2
5. Which of the following statements in relation to the
hydrogen atom is correct ? (2005) 11. The ionization enthalpy of hydrogen atom is 1.312 × 106 J
mol–1. The energy required to excite the electron in the
(a) 3s, 3p and 3d orbitals all have the same energy
atom from n = 1 to n = 2 is (2008)
(b) 3s and 3p orbitals are of lower energy than 3d orbital
(a) 8.51 × 105 J mol–1 (b) 6.56 × 105 J mol–1
(c) 3p orbital is lower in energy than 3d orbital
(c)7.56 × 105 J mol–1 (d) 9.84 × 105 J mol–1
(d) 3s orbital is lower in energy than 3p orbital
12. In an atom, an electron is moving with a speed of 600 m/s
6. In a multi electron atom, which of the following orbitals with an uncertainity of 0.005%, the position of the electron
described by the three quantum numbers will have the can be (h = 6.6 × 10 –34 kg m2s –1, mass of electron
same energy in the absence of magnetic and electric fields ? em = 9.1 × 10–31 kg) (2009)
(A) n = 1, l = 0 m = 0 (a) 1.52 × 10–4 m (b) 5.01 × 10–3 m
(B) n = 2, l = 0, m = 0 (c) 1.92 × 10–3 m (d) 3.84 × 10–3 m
(C) n = 2, l = 1, m = 1 13. Calculate the wavelength (in nanometer) associated with a
(D) n = 3, l = 2, m = 1 proton moving at 1.0 × 103 ms–1 (Mass of proton =
1.67 × 10–27 kg and h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js) (2009)
(E) n = 3, l = 2, m = 0 (2005)
(a) 0.032 nm (b) 0.40 nm
(a) (D) and (E) (b) (C) and (D)
(c) 2.5 nm (d) 14.0 nm
(c) (B) and (C) (d) (A) and (B)
14. The energy required to break one mole of Cl–Cl bonds in 21. The energy of an electron in first Bohr orbit of H-atom is
Cl2 is 242 kJ mol–1. The longest wavelength of light capable –13.6 eV. The energy value of electron in the excited state
of breaking a single Cl–Cl bond is (2010) Li2+ is: (Online 2014 SET-1)
(a) 594 nm (b) 640 nm (a) –27.2 eV (b) 30.6 eV
(c) 700 nm (d) 494 nm (c) – 30.6 eV (d) 27.2 eV
15. Ionisation energy of He is 19.6 × 10 J atom . The energy
+ –18 –1
22. Chloro compound of vanadium has only spin magnetic
of the first stationary state (n = 1) of Li2+ is (2010) moment of 1.73 BM. This vanadium chloride has the
(a) 4.41 × 10–16 J atom–1 (b) – 4.41 × 10–17 J atom–1 formula: (at. no. of V = 23) (Online 2014 SET-1)
(c) – 2.2 × 10–15 J atom–1 (d) 8.82 × 10–17 J atom–1 (a) VCl2 (b) VCl4
16. A gas absorbs photon of 355 nm and emits at two wave- (c) VCl3 (d) VCl5
lengths. If one of the emission is at 680 nm, the other is at 23. Based on the equation:
(a) 1035 nm (b) 325 nm
1 1
(c) 743 nm (d) 518 nm
E = – 2.0 ×10–18J  2
 2  the wavelength of the light
17. The frequency of light emitted for the transition n = 4 to  n2 n1 
n = 2 of He+ is equal to the transition in H atom corresponding that must be absorbed to excite hydrogen electron from
to which of the following ? (2011) level n= 1 to level n = 2 will be (h = 6.625 × 10–34 Js,
(a) n = 3 to n = 1 (b) n = 2 to n = 1 c = 3 × 108 ms–1) (Online 2014 SET-2)
(c) n = 3 to n = 2 (d) n = 4 to n = 3 (a) 2.650 × 10–7 m (b) 1.325 × 10–7 m
18. The electrons identified by quantum numbers n and l (c) 5.300 × 10–10 m (d) 1.325 × 10–10 m
(2012) 24. If 0 and  be the threshold wavelength and wavelength of
incident light, the velocity of photoelectron ejected from
(1) n = 4, l = 1 (2) n = 4, l = 0
the metal surface is: (Online 2014 SET-2)
(3) n = 3, l = 2 (4) n = 3, l = 1
can be placed in order of increasing energy as 2h  1 1  2h
(a)    (b)  0   
(a) (3) < (4) < (2) < (1) (b) (4) < (2) < (3) < (1) m  0   m
(c) (2) < (4) < (1) < (3) (d) (1) < (3) < (2) < (4)
19. Energy of an electron is given by 2hc 2hc   0   
(c) 0    (d) 
m  0 

m
 Z2 
E  2.178  10 18 J  2 
n  25. The de-Broglie wavelength of a particle of mass 6.63 g
moving with a velocity of 100 ms–1 is:
Wavelength of light required to excite an electron in an
hydrogen atom from level n = 1 to n = 2 will be (2013) (Online 2014 SET-3)
(h = 6.62 × 10–34 Js and c = 3.0 × 108 ms–1) (a) 10–33
m (b) 10–35
m
(a) 1.214 × 10–7 m (b) 2.816 × 10–7 m (c) 10–25 m (d) 10–31 m
(c) 6.500 × 10–7 m (d) 8.500 × 10–7 m 26. Excited hydrogen atom emits light in the ultraviolet
region at 2.47 × 10 15 Hz. With this frequency, the
20 The correct set of four quantum numbers for the valence
energy of a single photon is:
electrons of rubidium atom (Z=37) is : (2014)
(h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js) (Online 2014 SET-3)
1 1
(b) 5,1,1,  (a) 8.041 × 10 J (b) 6.111 × 10–17 J
–40
(a) 5,1,0, 
2 2
(c) 2.680 × 10–19 J (d) 1.640 × 10–18 J
1 1
(c) 5,0,1,  (d) 5,0,0, 
2 2
27. If m and e are the mass and charge of the revolving 32. The total number of orbitals associated with the principal
electron in the orbit of radius r for hydrogen atom, the quantum number 5 is (Online 2016 SET-1)
total energy of the revolving electron will be: (a) 5 (b) 10
(Online 2014 SET-3) (c) 20 (d) 25
me2 e2 33. Aqueous solution of which salt will not contain ions
(a) (b)  with the electronic configuration 1s22s22p63s23p6 ?
r r
(Online 2016 SET-2)
1 e2 1 e2 (a) NaF (b) NaCl
(c) (d) 
2 r 2 r
(c) KBr (d) CaI2
28. Ionization energy of gaseous Na atoms is 495.5 kJ mol–1. 34. The radius of the second Bohr orbit for hydrogen atom is:
The lowest possible frequency of light that (2017)
ionizes a sodium atom is (h = 6.626 × 10 –34 Js,
NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol–1) (Online 2014 SET-4) (Planck’s Const. h = 6.6262 × 10–34 Js;
Mass of electron = 9.1091 × 10–31 kg;
(a) 7.50 × 104 s–1 (b) 4.76 × 1014 s–1
Charge of electron e = 1.60210 × 10–19 C;
(c) 1.24 × 1015 s–1 (d) 3.15 × 1015 s–1
29. Which of the following is the energy of a possible excited Permittivity of vacuum
state of hydrogen ? (2015) 0  8.854185  1012 kg 1m3 A 2 )
(a) – 3.4 eV (b) + 6.8 eV
(a) 4.76 Å (b) 0.529 Å
(c) + 13.6 eV (d) – 6.8 eV
(c) 2.12 Å (d) 1.65 Å
30. At temperature T, the average kinetic energy of any
35. If the shortest wavelength in Lyman series of hydrogen
3 atom is A, then the longest wavelength in Paschen series
particle kT. The de Broglie wavelength follows the
2 of He+ is (Online 2017 SET-1)
order : (Online 2015 SET-1)
5A 9A
(a) Visible photon > Thermal neutron > Thermal (a) (b)
9 5
electron
(b) Thermal proton > Thermal electron > Visible 36A 36A
photon (c) (d)
5 7
(c) Thermal proton > Visible photon > Thermal
36. The electron in the hydrogen atom undergoes transition
electron
from higher orbitals to orbital of radius 211.6 pm. This
(d) Visible photon > Thermal electron > Thermal transition is associated with : (Online 2017 SET-2)
neutron
(a) Lyman series
31. A stream of electrons from a heated filament was passed
(b) Balmer series
between two charged plates kept at a potential difference
V esu. If e and m are charge and mass of an electron, (c) Paschen series
respectively, then the value of h/ (where  is wavelength (d) Brackett series
associated with electron wave) is given by: 37. Ejection of the photoelectron from metal in the
(2016) photoelectric effect experiment can be stopped by
applying 0.5 V when the radiation of 250 nm is used.
(a) 2meV (b) meV The work function of the metal is :
(c) 2meV (d) meV (Online 2018 SET-1)
(a) 4 eV (b) 4.5 eV
(c) 5 eV (d) 5.5 eV
38. The de-Broglie’s wavelength of electron present in first (c) 1, 3 (d) 3, 4
Bohr orbit of ‘H’ atom is : (Online 2018 SET-2)
42. Which of the graphs shown below does not represent
(a) 0.529 Å the relationship between incident light and the electron
ejected from metal surface?
(b) 2  0.529Å
(JEE Main 10-01-2019 Shift-I)
0.529
(c) Å
2
(d) 4  0.529Å
39. Which of the following statements is false ? (a)
(Online 2018 SET-3)

(a) Photon has momentum as well as wavelength.
(b) Splitting of spectral lines in electrical field is called
Stark effect.
(c) Rydberg constant has unit of energy.
(b)
(d) Frequency of emitted radiation from a black body
goes from a lower wavelength to higher wavelength as
the temperature increases.
40. For emission line of atomic hydrogen from ni = 8 to nf = n,
 1 
to the plot of wave number    against  2  will be
n 
(c)
(The Rydberg constant, RH is in wave number unit)
(a) Linear with intercept -RH
(b) Non linear
(c) Linear with slope RH
(d) Linear with slope -RH
(d)
41. Which of the following combination of statements is true
regarding the interpretation of the atomic orbitals?
1. An electron in an orbital of high angular momentum 43. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV.
stays away from the nucleus than an electron in the The energy of second excited state of He+ ion in eV is:
orbital of lower angular momentum. (JEE Main 10-01-2019 Shift-II)
2. For a given value of the principal quantum number, (a) –54.4 (b) –3.4
the size of the orbit is inversely proportional to the
(c) –6.04 (d) –27.2
azimuthal quantum number.
44. Heat treatment of muscular pain involves radiation of wave-
3. According to wave mechanics, the ground state an-
length of about 900 nm. Which spectral line of H-atom is
h suitable for this purpose?
gular momentum is equal to
2 (JEE Main 11-01-2019 Shift-I)
4. The plot of  vs r for various azimuthal quantum [RH = 1 × 10 cm , h = 6.6 × 10–34 Js,
5 –1
numbers, shows peak shifting towards higher r value. c = 3 × 108 ms–1]

(JEE Main 09-01-2019 Shift-I) (a) Paschen,   3 (b) Paschen, 5  3
(a) 1, 4 (b) 1, 2
(c) Balmer,   2 (d)   1
50. If p is the momentum of the fastest electron ejected from
45. The de Broglie wavelength () associated with a photo-
a metal surface after the irradiation of light having wave-
electron varies with the frequency (v) of the incident ra- length  , then for 1.5p momentum of the photoelectron,
diation as, [v0 is threshold frequency]
the wavelength of the light should be:
(JEE Main 11-01-2019 Shift-II)
(Assume kinetic energy of ejected photoelectron to be
1 1 very high in comparison to work function):
  (JEE Main 08-04-2019 shift-II)
(a) 5
(b) 1
(v v 0 ) 2 (v v 0 ) 4
3 1
(a)  (b) 
1 1 4 2
 
(c) 3
(d) 1
(v v 0 ) 2
(v v 0 ) 2 3 4
(c)  (d) 
2 9
46. What is the work function of the metal if the light of wave-
length 4000Å generates photoelectrons of velocity 6 × 51. For any given series of spectral lines of atomic hydrogen,
105 ms–1 from it?
let v  vmax  v min be the difference in maximum and mini-
(Mass of electron = 9 × 10–31 kg
mum frequencies in cm–1. The ratio v Lyman / vBalmer is:
Velocity of light = 3 × 108 ms–1
Planck’s constant = 6.626 × 10–34 Js
(a) 4: 1 (b) 9: 4
Charge of electron = 1.6 × 10–19 Je V–1)
(JEE Main 12-01-2019 Shift-I) (c) 5: 4 (d) 27: 5
(a) 0.9 eV (b) 3.1 eV 52. Which one of the following about an electron occupying
the 1s orbital in a hydrogen atom is incorrect? (The Bohr
(c) 2.1 eV (d) 4.0 eV radius is represented by a0).
47. If the de Broglie wavelength of the electron in nth Bohr (JEE Main 09-04-2019 Shift-II)
orbit in a hydrogenic atom is equal to 1.5  a0 (a0 is Bohr (a) The probability density of finding the electron is maxi-
radius), then the value of n/z is mum at the nucleus.
(JEE Main 12-01-2019 Shift-II) (b) The electron can be found at a distance 2a0 from the
(a) 0.40 (b) 1.50 nucleus.
(c) 1.0 (d) 0.75 (c) The magnitude of the potential energy is double that
48. The size of the isoelectronic species Cl , Ar and Ca is
– 2+ of its kinetic energy on an
affected by: (JEE Main 08-04-2019 Shift-I) (d) The total energy of the electron is maximum when it is
(a) azimuthal quantum number of valence shell at a distance from the nucleus.
(b) electron-electron interaction in the outer orbitals 53.
2
The graph between  and r (radial distance) is shown
(c) principal quantum number of valence shell below. This represents: (JEE Main 10-04-2019 Shift-I)
(d) nuclear charge
49. The quantum number of four electrons are given below:
I. n = 4, l = 2 , m1 = –2, ms = –1/2
II. n = 3, l = 2, m1 = –2, ms = +1/2
III. n = 4, l = 1 , m1 = 0, ms = +1/2
IV. n = 3, l = 1 , m1 = 1, ms = –1/2
The correct order of their increasing energies will be:
(a) IV < III < II < I (b) I < II < III < IV (a) 3s orbital (b) 2s orbital
(c) IV < II < III < I (d) I < III < II < IV (c) 1s orbital (d) 2p orbital
54. The isoelectronic set of ions is : A. The integer n1 = 2.
(JEE Main 10-04-2019 Shift-I) B. The ionization energy of hydrogen can be calculated
(a) N3–, O2–, F– and Na+ from the wave number of these lines.
(b) N3–, Li+, Mg2+ and O2– C. The lines of longest wavelength corresponds to n =2
(c) F , Li , Na and Mg
– + + 2+ to n = 3.
(d) Li+, Na+, O2– and F– D. As wavelength decreases, the lines of the series con-
verge. (JEE Main 07-01-2020 Shift-II)
55. The ratio of the shortest wavelength of two spectral se-
ries of hydrogen spectrum is found to be about 9. The (a) B, C, D (b) A, B, D
spectral series are: (JEE Main 10-04-2019 Shift-II) (c) A, C, D (d) A, B, C
(a) Lyman and Paschen 59. The radius of second Bohr orbit, in terms of the Bohr
(b) Balmer and Brackett radius, a0, in Li2+ is: (JEE Main 08-01-2020 Shift-II)
(c) Brackett and Pfund 2a 0 4a 0
(d) Paschen and Pfund (a) (b)
3 9
56. The electrons are more likely to be found:
4a 0 2a 0
(c) (d)
3 9
60. The de Broglie wavelength of an electron in the 4th Bohr
orbit is: (JEE Main 09-01-2020Shift-I)
(a) 4a 0 (b) 2a 0
(a) in the region a and c (c) 8a 0 (d) 6a 0
(b) in the region a and b 61. The figure that is not a direct manifestation of the quan-
(c) only in the region a tum nature of atoms is : (JEE Main 02-09-2020 Shift-I)
(d) only in the region c

57. Amongst the following statements, that which was not
proposed by Dalton was: (a)
(a) Matter consists of indivisible atoms.
(b) When gases combine or reproduced in a chemical
reaction they do so in a simple ratio by volume provided
(b)
all gases are at the same T & P.
(c) Chemical reactions involve reorganisation of atoms.
These are neither created nor destroyed in a chemical
reaction.
(d) All the atoms of a given element have identical prop-
erties including identical mass. Atoms of different ele- (c)
ments differ in mass.
58. For the Balmer series in the spectrum of H-atom,
The correct statements among (A) to (D) are:
1 1 (d)
v  RH  2  2 
 n1 n 2 
62. The number of subshells associated with n = 4 and
(c) 6s, 6p, 6d, 6f
m= –2 quantum numbers is :
(d) 6s, 5f, 6d, 6p
68. The difference between the radii of 3rd and 4th orbits of
(a) 4 (b) 8
Li2+ is R 1 . The difference between the radii of 3rd and
(c) 2 (d) 16
4th orbits of He+ is R 2 Ratio R 1 : R 2 is :
63. The work function of sodium metal is 4.41 × 10–19J. If pho-
tons of wavelength 300 nm are incident on the metal, the (JEE Main 05-09-2020 shift-I)
kinetic energy of the ejected electrons will be (h = 6.63 × (a) 8 : 3 (b) 3 : 8
10–34 J s; c = 3 × 108 m/s) …………. × 10–21 J. (c) 3 : 2 (d) 2 : 3
69. The correct statement about probability density (except
64. Consider the hypothetical situation where the azimuthal
at infine distance from nucleus) is :
quantum number, l, takes values 0, 1, 2, ………. n + 1, (JEE Main 05-09-2020 Shift-II)
where n is the principal quantum number. Then, the ele-
(a) It can be zero for 3p orbital
ment with atomic number :
(JEE Main 03-09-2020 Shift-II) (b) It can be zero for 1s orbital
(a) 13 has a half-filled valence subshell (c) It can never be zero for 2s orbital
(b) 9 is the first alkali metal (d) It can negative for 2p orbital
(c) 8 is the first noble gas 70. According. Bohr's atomic theory (2021-02-24-Shift-II)
(d) 6 has a 2p-valence subshell
Z2
65. The region in the electromagnetic spectrum where the (A) Kinetic energy of electron is 
n2
Balmer series lines appear is:
(JEE Main 04-09-2020 Shift-I) (B) The product of velocity (v) of electron and principal
(a) Microwave quantum number (n), ' vn '  Z 2 .
(b) Infrared
Z3
(c) Ultraviolet (C) Frequency of revolution of electron in an orbit is  .
n3
(d) Visible
66. The shortest wavelength of H atom in the Lyman series is Z3
 . The longest wavelength in the Balmer series of He + (D) Coulombic force of attraction on the electron is .
n4
is : (JEE Main 04-09-2020 Shift-II) Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given
below
91 21
(a) (b) (a) (A) only
5 5
(b) (C) only
361 51 (c) (A), (C) and (D) only
(c) (d)
4 9
(d) (A) and (D) only
67. In the sixth period, the orbitals that are filled are :
(a) 6s, 5d, 5f, 6p
(b) 6s, 4f, 5d, 6p
71. The plots radial distribution functions for various orbitals splitting of spectral lines in the presence of a magnetic
of hydrogen atom against ‘r’ are given below field.
(2021-02-22-Shift-I) In the light of the above statements, choose the most
appropriate answer from the options given below
(2021-03-18-Shift-II)
(a) Both statement I and statement II are false.
(A) (b) Both statement I and statement II are true.

(c) Statement I is false but statement II is true.
(d) Statement I is true but statement II is false.
75. If the Thomson model of the atom was correct, then the
result of Rutherford's gold foil experiment would have been:
(2021-07-27-Shift-II)
(B) (a) All of the  particles pass through the gold foil without
decrease in speed
(b)  particles are deflected over a wide range of angles.
(c) All particles get bounced back by 180°
(d)  particles pass through the gold foil deflected by
small angles and with reduced speed
76. Given below are two statements: (2021-07-27-Shift-I)
(C)
Statement I : Rutherford's gold foil experiment cannot
explain the line spectrum of hydrogen atom.
Statement II: Bohr's model of hydrogen atom contradicts
Heisenberg's uncertainty principles.
In the light of the above statements, choose the most
appropriate answer from the options given below
(D)
(a) Statement I is false, but Statement II is true.
(b) Statement I is true, but Statement II is false.
The correct plot for 3s orbital is (c) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
(a) (B) (b) (A) (d) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
(c) (D) (d) (C) 77. Given below are two statements. (2021-08-26-Shift-I)
72. The orbital having two radial as well as two angular nodes Statement I: According to Bohr's model of an atom,
is: (2021-02-26-Shift-I) qualitatively the magnitude of velocity of electron increase
with decrease in positive charges on the nucleus as there
(a) 3p (b) 5d
is no strong hold on the electron by the nucleus.
(c) 4f (d) 4d
Statement II: According to Bohr's model of an atom,
73. A certain orbital has no angular nodes and two radial nodes. qualitatively the magnitude of velocity of electron increases
The orbital is: (2021-03-18-Shift-I) with decrease in principal quantum number.
(a) 2s (b) 3s In the light of the above statements, choose the most
(c) 2p (d) 3p appropriate answer from the options given below:
74. Given below are two statements: (a) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
Statement I: Bohr’s theory accounts for the stability and (b) Both Statement I and Statement II are true.
line spectrum of Li + ion. (c) Statement I is false, but Statement II is true.
Statement II: Bohr’s theory was unable to explain the (d) Statement I is true, but Statement II is true.
78. Identify the element for which electronic configuration in 88. A source of monochromatic radiation of wavelength 400
+3 oxidation state is [Ar]3d5: (2021-09-01-Shift-II) nm provides 1000 J of energy in 10 seconds. When this
(a) Ru (b) Mn radiation falls on the surface of sodium, x × 1020 electrons
(c) Co (d) Fe are ejected per second. Assume that wavelength 400 nm is
79. The azimuthal quantum number for the valence electrons sufficient for ejection of electron from the surface of sodium
of Ga+ ion is______. (Atomic number of Ga = 31) metal. The value of x is _____. (Nearest interger)
(2021-07-20-Shift-I) (2021-07-25-Shift-I)
80. A proton and a Li3+ nucleus is accelerated by the same
 h  6.626 10 –34
Js 
potential. If Li and  p denote the de Broglie wavelengths
89. An accelerated electron has a speed of 5 × 106 m s-1 with an
 Li uncertainty of 0.02%. The uncertainty in finding its location
of Li3+ and proton respectively, then the value  is while in motion is x × 10-9 m. The value of x is __.
p
(2021-07-25-Shift-II)
x 10 1 . The value of x is _________. (Rounded off to [Nearest integer]
the nearest integer) [Use mass of electron = 9.1 × 10-31 kg, h = 6.63 ×10-34Js, =
[Mass of Li3+ = 8.3 mass of proton] [2021-02-24-Shift-I] 3.14]
81. The spin only magnetic moment of a divalent ion in an 90. A metal surface is exposed to 500 nm radiation. The
aqueous solution (atomic number 29) is (round-off)___ threshold frequency of the metal for photoelectric current
BM. (2021-02-25-Shift-II) is 4.3 × 1014 Hz. The velocity of ejected electron is ___ x 105
82. A ball weighing 10g is moving with a velocity of 90 ms-1. If ms-1 (Nearest integer) (2021-08-26-Shift-II)
the uncertainty in its velocity is 5%, then the uncertainty  Use : h = 6.63×10 –34 Js, me =9.0×10 –31 kg 
 
in its position is ________ 1033 m .(Rounded off to the
91. The kinetic energy of an electron in the second Bohr orbit
nearest integer) (2021-02-26-Shift-II)
h2
Given : h  6.63  1034 Js  of a hydrogen atom is equal to . The value of 10x is
  xma02
83. When light of wavelength 248 nm falls on a metal of ____. (Nearest integer) (a0 is radius of Bohr’s orbit)
threshold energy 3.0 eV, the de-Broglie wavelength of (2021-08-27-Shift-I)

emitted electrons is ______ A . [2021-03-16-Shift-I]  Given : π  3.14
Use : 3  1.73, h  6.626  1034 js  92. The number of photons emitted by a monochromatic (single
  frequency) infrared range finder of power 1 mW and
m e  9.1 1031 kg; c  3.0  108 ms 1 ;1eV  1.6  1019 J  wavelength of 1000 nm, in 0.1 second is x × 1013. The value
of x is _____ . (Nearest integer) (2021-08-27-Shift-II)
84. The number of orbitals with n = 5, m1 = +2 is (Round off to (h = 6.63 × 10-34 Js, c = 3.00 × 108 ms-1)
the Nearest interger). [2021-03-16-Shift-II] 93. Ge (Z =32) in its ground state electronic configuration has
85. A certain orbital has n = 4 and ml = –3. The number of radial x completely filled orbitals with m1 = 0. The value of x is__.
nodes in this orbital is ........... (Round off to the Nearest (2021-08-31-Shift-I)
Integer). (2021-03-17-Shift-I) 94. The value of magnetic quantum number of the outermost
86. The wavelength of electrons accelerated from rest through electron of Zn+ ion is _____. (2021-08-31-Shift-II)
a potential difference of 40 kV is x × 10-12 m. The value of x 95. A 50 watt bulb emits monochromatic red light of wavelength
is______. (Nearest integer) (2021-07-20-Shift-II) of 795 nm. The number of photons emitted per second by
Given : Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg the bulb is x × 1020. The value of x is _____. (nearest integer)
Charge on an electron = 1.6 × 10–19 C (2021-09-01-Shift-II)
Planck’s constant = 6.63 ×10–34 Js
Given : h  6.63  1034 Js and c = 3.0  108 ms -1 
87. Number of electrons that Vanadium (Z = 23) has in p-orbitals  
is equal to _____ (2021-07-22-Shift-II)
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 9. In any subshell, the maximum number of electrons having
1. The minimum real charge on of any particle, which can exist same value of spin quantum number is
is :
(a)     1 (b)  + 2
(a) 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb (b) 1.6 × 10–10 coulomb
(c) 4.8 × 10–10 coulomb (c) zero (c) 2 + 1 (d) 4 + 2
2. The ratio of e/m, i.e., specific charge for a cathode ray : 10. The ratio of specific charge (e/m) of an electron to that of a
hydrogen ion is :
(a) has the smallest value when the discharge tube is filled
with H2 (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1840 : 1
(b) is constant (c) 1 : 1840 (d) 2 : 1
(c) varies with the atomic number of gas in the discharge 11. The nucleus of an atom can be assumed to be spherical.
tube The radius of the nucleus of mass number A is given by 1.25
× 10–13 × A1/3 cm Radius of atom is one Å. If the mass number
(d) varies with the atomic number of an element forming the
is 64, then the fraction of the atomic volume that is occupied
cathode
by the nucleus is
3. Which are isoelectronic with each other ?
(a) 1.0 × 10–3 (b) 5.0 × 10–5
(a) Na+ and Ne (b) K+ and O
(c) 2.5 × 10–2 (d) 1.25 × 10–13
(c) Ne and O (d) Na and K
+ +
12. Li2+ and Be3+ are :
4. Naturally occurring elements are mixtures of :
(a) isotopes (b) isomers
(a) isotone (b) isobars
(c) isobars (d) isoelectronic
(c) isotopes (d) isomers
13. The mass number of three isotopes of an element are 11, 12,
5. Suppose 10–17J of light energy is needed by the interior of and 13 units. Their percentage abundances 80, 15, and 5,
human eye to see an object. The photons of green light (= respectively. What is the atomic weight of the element ?
550 nm) needed to see the object are :
(a) 11.25 (b) 20
(a) 27 (b) 28
(c) 16 (d) 10
(c) 29 (d) 30
14. The given diagram indicates the energy levels of a certain
6. The approximate quantum number of a circular orbit of atom. When the system moves from 2E level to E level, a
diameter, 20.6 nm of the hydrogen atom according to Bohr’s photon of wavelength  is emitted. The wavelength of
theory is :
4E
(a) 10 (b) 14 photon produced during the transition from to E level
3
(c) 12 (d) 16 is :
7. As electron moves away from the nucleus, its potential
energy
(a) Increases (b) Decreases
(c) Remains constant (d) None of these
8. In a sample of H-atoms, electrons make transitions from n =
5 to n = 1. If all the spectral lines are observed, then the line  3
(a) (b)
having the 3rd highest energy will correspond to 3 4
(a) 5  3 (b) 4  1
4
(c) 3  1 (d) 5  4 (c) (d) 3
3
15. A photon of 300 nm is absorbed by a gas and then re-emits 21. Photoelectron emission is observed for three different metals
two photons. One re-emitted photon has wavelength 496 A, B and C. The kinetic energy of the fastest photoelectrons
nm, the wavelength of second re-emitted photon is : versus frequency ‘’ is plotted for each metal. Which of the
(a) 759 (b) 857 following graph shows the phenomenon correctly ?
(c) 957 (d) 657
16. 4000 Å photon is used to break the iodine molecule,then the
% of energy converted to the K.E. of iodine atoms if bond
dissociation energy of I 2 molecule is 246.5 kJ/mol (a) (b)
(a) 8% (b) 12%

(c) 17% (d) 25%
17. Consider a 20 W light source that emits monochromatic
light of wavelength 600 nm. The number of photons ejected
per second in the form of Avogadro’s constant NAV is (c) (d)
approximately :
(a) NAV (b) 10–2NAV
(c) 10–4 NAV (d) 10–6 NAV 22. Which of the following electronic transition in a hydrogen
atom will require the largest amount of energy
18. The work function of a metal is 4.2 eV. If radiations of 2000 Å
fall on the metal. then the kinetic energy of the fastest (a) From n = 1 to n =2 (b) From n = 2 to n=3
photoelectron is (c) From n   to n  1 (d) From n = 3 to n = 5
(a) 1.6 × 10–19 J (b) 16 × 1010 J 23. If the total energy of an electron in the 1st shell of H
(c) 3.2 × 10–19 J (d) 6.4 × 10–10 J atom = 0.0 eV then its potential energy in the 1st excited state
19. If a certain metal was irradiated by using two different light would be
radiations of frequency ‘x’ and ‘2x’, the maximum kinetic (a) + 6.8 eV (b) + 20.4 eV
energy of the ejected electrons are ‘y’ and ‘3y’ respectively. (c) – 6.8 eV (d) + 3.4 eV
The threshold frequency of the metal will be : 24. Ratio of frequency of revolution of electron in the 2nd excited
(a) x/3 (b) x/2 state of He+ and 2nd state of hydrogen is
(c) 3x/2 (d) 2x/3 (a) 32/27 (b) 27/32
20. Which of the correct graphical representation based on (c) 1/54 (d) 27/2
photoelectric effect (assuming v > v0) 25. Which of the following curves represent the speed of the
electron of hydrogen atom as a function of principal quantum
number ‘n’ ?
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4
(a) I and II (b) II and III
(c) III and IV (d) II and IV
26. For a hypothetical H like atom which follows Bohr’s model, 33. What is the de–Broglie wavelength associated with the
some spectral lines were observed as shown. hydrogen electron in its third orbit
If it is known that line ‘E’ belongs to the visible region, (a) 9.96 × 10–10 cm (b) 9.96 × 10–8 cm
then the lines possibly belonging to ultra violet region will (c) 9.96 × 104 cm (d) 9.96 × 108 cm
be ( n1 is necessarily ground state) 34. De-Broglie wavelength for an electron is related to applied
n5 voltage as
n4
C B 12.3 12.3
n3 (a)   Å (b)   Å
D A
n2
h V
E
n1
12.3 12.3
[Assume for this atom, no spectral series shows overlaps (c)   Å (d)   Å
E m
with other series in the emmission spectrum]
35. If E1, E2 and E3 represent respectively the kinetic energies of
(a) B and D (b) D only
an electron, an alpha particle and a proton each having same
(c) C only (d) A only
de Broglie wavelength then :
27. If each hydrogen atom in the ground state of 1.0 mole of H-
(a) E1 > E3 > E2 (b) E2 > E3 > E1
atoms is excited by absorbing photons of energy 8.4eV, 12.09
(c) E1 < E3 < E2 (d) E1 = E2 = E3
eV and 15.0 eV of energy, then the number of spectral lines
emitted is equal to : 36. If the value of (n + l) is more than 3 and less than 6, then
what will be the possible number of orbitals ?
(a) None (b) Two
(c) Three (d) Four (a) 6 (b) 9
28. A certain transition in H-spectrum from an excited state to (c) 10 (d) 13
ground state in one or more steps gives rise to a total of ten 37. Which of the following pairs of ions have the same electronic
lines. How many of these belong to visible spectrum ? configuration ?
(a) 3 (b) 4 (a) Cr3+, Fe3+ (b) Fe3+, Mn2+
(c) 5 (d) 6 (c) Fe3+, Co3+ (d) Sc3+, Cr3+
29. The series limit for Balmer series of H-spectra is 38. How many of the following ions have the same magnetic
(a) 3800 Å (b) 4200 Å moments ?
(c) 3646 Å (d) 4000 Å Fe2+ Mn2+ Cr2+ Ni2+
30. What is the total number of pairs of electrons at least three (a) 1 (b) 2
same quantum numbers for Be ?
(c) 3 (d) 4
(a) 2 (b) 4
39. In following two plots,  2 is plotted against the distance ‘r’
(c) 3 (d) 8
from nucleus.
31. The accelerating potential that must be imparted to proton
beam to give an wavelength 5 pm.
(a) 32.8 V (b) 3.28 V
(c) 328 V (d) 0.328 V
32. A proton accelerated from rest through a potential difference
of ‘V’ volts has a wavelength  associated with it. An alpha
particle in order to have the same wavelength must be Select the correct statement :
accelerated from rest through a potential difference of
(a) ‘A’ is for 1s and ‘B’ for 2s
(a) V volt (b) 4V volt
(b) ‘A’ is for 2s and ‘B’ for 1s
(c) 2V volt (d) V/8 volt
(c) ‘A’ is for 2s and ‘B’ for 2p
(d) ‘A’ is for 2p and ‘B’ for 2s
40. In the following two figures, ( 2 ) is plotted against (r) the 45. Which of the following parameters are not same for all
hydrogen like atoms and ions in their ground state ?
distance from nucleus :
(a) Radius of orbit (b) Speed of electron
(c) Energy of the atom
(d) Orbital angular momentum of electron
46. The angular momentum of electron can have the value (s) :
h h
(a) 0.5 (b)
(a) Both (A) and (B) are for 1s  
(b) Both (A) and (B) are for 2s h h
(c) (d) 2.5
(c) (A) is for 1s and (B) is for 2s 0.5 2
(d) (A) is for 2s and (B) is for 1s 47. Which of the following are the limitations of Bohr’s model?
41. Let us consider following graph for radial distribution (a) It could not explain the intensities or the fine spectrum
function. Which of the following has correct matching of of the spectral lines.
curve and orbital ?
(b) No justification was given for the principle of the
quantization of angular momentum.
(c) It could not explain why atoms should combine to form
bond.
(d) It could not be applied to multi-electron atoms.
48. ‘g’ orbital is possible if
(a) n = 5, l = 4 (b) it will have 18 electrons
(a) A (3p) B (3d) C (3s) (b) A (3s) B (3p) C (3d) (c) it will have 9 types of orbitals
(c) A (3d) B (3p) C (3s) (d) A (3s) B (3d) C (3p) (d) it will have 22 electrons.
Objective Questions II 49. Which of the following statement about quantum number is
correct ?
[One or more than one correct option]
(a) If the value of l = 0, the electron distribution is spherical.
42. The number of orbitals in nth Bohrs orbit of an atom
equal to (b) The shape of orbital is given by subsidiary quantum
number.
(a) n2 (b) 2n2
(c) (2l + 1) (d) possible values of ‘m’ (c) The Zeeman’s effect is explained by magnetic quantum
number.
43. The number of electrons in Na(11) having l = 0 are
equal to (d) The spin quantum number gives the orientations of
electron cloud.
(a) there are two electrons in 1s orbital.
(b) there are two electrons in 2s orbital. 50. Which of the following configuration is/are correct in the
first excited state ?
(c) there are two electrons in 2p orbital.
(d) there are one electrons in 3s orbital. (a) Cr [Ar] 3d5 4s1 (b) Fe2+ [Ar] 3d5 4s1
(c) Mn2+ [Ar] 4s0 3d5 (d) Co3+ [Ar] 3d5 4s1
44. The ionisation energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. Hydrogen
atoms in the ground state are excited by monochromatic 51. The magnetic moment of Xn+ is 24 BM. Hence, the
light of energy 12.1 eV. The spectral lines emitted by
species can be
hydrogen atoms according to Bohr’s theory will be
(a) Fe2+ (b) Cr2+
(a) n = 3 to n = 1 (b) n = 3 to n = 2
(c) Mn3+ (d) Co3+
(c) n = 2 to n = 1 (d) n = 4 to n = 1
52. The spin only magnetic moment of V (Z = 23), Cr (Z = 24) (b) the shortest wavelength in Balmer series of He+ is x
and Mn (Z = 25) are x, y and z respectively. Which of the
4
following is are correct relationships ? (c) the longest wavelength in Lyman series of H atom is x
3
(a) x > y (b) x > z
(c) y > z (d) x < z 16x
(d) the longest wavelength in Paschen series of Li2+ is
53. For radial probability distribution curves, which of the 7
following is/are correct ? 58. The ratio of the de Broglie wavelength of a proton and  -
(a) The number of maxima in 2s orbital are two particles will be 1 : 2 if their :
(b) The number of spherical or radial nodes is equal to (a) velocity are in the ratio 1 : 8
n–l–1 (b) velocity are in the ratio 8 : 1
(c) The number of angular nodes are ‘l’ (c) kinetic energy are in the ratio 16 : 1
(d) 3d 2z has two angular nodes. (d) kinetic energy are in the ratio 1 : 16
59. The uncertainties in measurement of position and momentum
54. Pick out the orbitals with the maximum number of nodal
of an electron are equal. Choose the correct statement.
planes ?
(a) The uncertainty in measurement of speed = 8 × 1012.
(a) 3dxy (b) 4d z 2
(b) The uncertainty in measurement of kinetic energy =
(c) 4dxy (d) 2px
h
55. Select the correct plots for the photoelectric current. .
8m
(c) The uncertainty in measurement of time = 9.1 × 10–31.
(d) Increasing the wavelength of light used in the experiment
(a) (b) will decrease uncertainty in position and increase the
uncertainty in momentum.
60. Which of the following is/are correct ?
(a) The orbital angular momentum for a d-electron is
h
6 .
2
(c) (d)
(b) The number of orbitals in a shell with principal quantum
number n is 2n2.
56. If the radius of first Bohr’s orbit of H-atom is x, which of the (c) The correct set of quantum numbers for the last unpaired
following is the correct conclusion ?
 1
(a) The de-Broglie wavelength in the third Bohr orbit of H- electron of Cl atoms is 3,1,1,   .
 2
atom = 6x.
(d) The ratio of energy in the first Bohr orbit of H-atom to
(b) The fourth Bohr’s radius of He+ ion = 8x.
the electron in the first excited state of Be3+ is 1 : 4.
(c) The de-Broglie wavelength in third Bohr’s orbit of
Li2+ = 2x Numeric Value Type Questions
(d) The second Bohr’s radius of Be2+ = x 61. With what velocity should an alpha () particle travel towards
the nucleus of a copper atom so as to arrive at a distance
57. If the shortest wavelength of transition of H-atom in Lyman
10–13 m from the nucleus of the copper atom ? (in 106 m/s)
series is x, then the correct conclusion is (are)
62. How many of the following atoms/ions are isoelectronic
x with Ca2+ :
(a) the longest wavelength in Balmer series of He+ is
4 Ar, Na+, Mg2+, K+, Cl–, F–, S2–, N3–
63. Infrared lamps are used in restaurants to keep the food warm. (a) A (b) B
The infrared radiation is strongly absorbed by water, raising (c) C (d) D
its temperature and that of the food. If the wavelength of
70. Assertion (A) : When   rays hit a thin foil of gold, only
infrared radiation is assumed to be 1500 nm, then the number
of photons per second of infrared radiation produced by an a few   particles are deflected back.
infrared lamp that consumes energy at the rate of 100 W and Reason (R) : Within an atom, there is a very small positively
is 12% efficient only is x × 1019. Here, x is charged heavy body is present.
64. Calculate the velocity of electron (in 105 m/s) ejected from (a) A (b) B
platinum surface when radiation of 200 nm falls on it. Work (c) C (d) D
function of platinum is 5 eV. (1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19)
71. Assertion (A) : According to the wave theory, the radiation
65. A hydrogen atom in the ground state is hit by a photon emitted by the body being heated should have the same
exciting the electron to 3rd excited state. The electron then colour but its intensity varies as the heating is continued.
drops to 2nd Bohr orbit. What is the frequency of radiation
Reason (R) : Energy of any electromagnetic radiation
emitted in the process ? (in 1014 hz)
depends upon its frequency.
66. The energy of separation of an electron is 30.6 eV moving in (a) A (b) B
an orbit of Li+2. Find out the number of waves made by the (c) C (d) D
electron in one complete revolution in the orbit. 72. Assertion (A) : Emission spectrum of a pure atom is line
Assertion Reason spectrum, not the continuous.
(A) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason (R) : Energy of the atoms are quantized.
Reason is the correct explanation of (a) A (b) B
Assertion. (c) C (d) D
(B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but 73. Assertion (A) : Accurate measurement of both positions
and momentum can be done simultaneously for a
Reason is not the correct explanation of
macroparticle.
Assertion.
Reason (R) : Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle is more
(C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false. significant to microparticles only.
(D) If Assertion is false but Reason is true. 74. Assertion (A) : Half-filled and fully-filled degenerate orbitals
are more stable.
Charge
67. Assertion (A) : ratio of anode rays is found Reason (R) : Extra stability is due to the symmetrical
Mass distribution of electrons and exchange energy.
different for different gases.
(a) A (b) B
Reason (R) : Proton is the fundamental particle present in (c) C (d) D
the gases.
75. Assertion (A) : The spin only magnetic moment of Zn2+ is
(a) A (b) B zero.
(c) C (d) D Reason (R) : Zn2+ had 3d10 4s0 configuration. If has no
68. Assertion (A) : Cathode rays are produced only when the unpaired electron.
pressure of the gas inside the discharge tube is very low. (a) A (b) B
Reason (R) : At high pressure, no electric current flows (c) C (d) D
through the tube as gases are poor conductor of electricity.
76. Assertion (A) : Wave number of visible light with wave-
(a) A (b) B length of 5000 Å is 2 × 106 m–1.
(c) C (d) D Reason (R) : Wave number is defined as the number of
69. Assertion (A) :   Particles are helium nuclei. waves present in 1 unit length.
Reason (R) : They are deflected slightly towards the negative (a) A (b) B
plate and hence carry positive change. (c) C (d) D
77. Assertion (A) : The photoelectrons produced by a 81. Matching Column Types
monochromatic light beam incident on a metal surface have Column - I Column - II
a spread in their kinetic energy.
(A) Configuration of Cr is (P) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10
Reason (R) : The work function of the metal varies as the
(B) Configuration of Cu is (Q) 5
function of depth from surface.
(C) Number of unpaired (R) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6
(a) A (b) B
electrons in Fe3+ 3d5 4s1
(c) C (d) D
(D) Electronic configuration (S) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6
78. Assertion (A) : In the emission spectrum of hydrogen atom,
of Zn2+ 3d10 4s1
lines are closely spaced in the region of large wavelengths.
(T) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d9 4s2
Reason (R) : In the region of large wavelengths, electronic
(U) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d4 4s2
transitions occur more frequently.
82. Matching Column Types
(a) A (b) B
Column - I Column - II
(c) C (d) D
Match the Following
Each question has two columns. Four options (A) Radial probability distribution (P)
are given representing matching of elements
graphs for 1s orbital
from Column-I and ColumnII. Only one of these
four options corresponds to a correct
matching.For each question, choose the op- (B) Radial probability distribution (Q)
tion corresponding to the correct matching.
79. Column - I Column - II
–19 (C) Radial probability distribution (R)
(A) Plum-Pudding model (P) 1.6022 × 10 C
(B) Planetory model of atom (Q) Thomson’s model
graph for 2p orbital
(C) Atoms are indivisible (R) Rutherford’s model
(D) Charge on electron (S)  1/2

(D) Electron cloud picture of 2s (S)
(E) The spin of electron is (T) Dalton theory
80. Matching Column Types orbital
Column - I Column - II 83. Pn = potential energy, En = total energy
f = frequency, Z = atomic number
(A) Orbit angular momentum (P) n(n  2)
vn = velocity of nth orbit Tn = time period in nth orbit
(B) Orbital angular momentum (Q) nh / 2 Column - I Column - II
(C) Spin angular momentum (R) s(s  1) h (A) En  r , y = ?

y
(P) 1/2
(B) En/Pn (Q) 1
(D) Magnetic moment (S) l (l  l) h
1
(C) f  x  z, x  ? (R) 2
(T) n (n  l) h n
(D)  v n  Tn   rn, t  ?
t
(S) –1
84. Match the entries in Column I with the correctly related
87. Which of the following is correct relation of wavelength
quantities in Column II.
among various radiations :
(a) Cosmic < X-rays < Micro-waves < -rays
(A) Angular momentum (P) Increase by increasing n
(b) UV rays < Radio waves < visible < IR rays
(B) Kinetic energy (Q) Decreases by decreasing Z
(c) Cosmic < UV rays < IR rays < Radio wave
(C) Potential energy (R) Increases by decreasing Z
(d) -rays < Cosmic rays < IR rays < Micro waves
(D) Velocity (S) Decreases by decreasing n
88. Which of the following is incorrect w.r.t Maxwell wave
85. Matching Column Types theory?
Quantum number Orbitals (a) EM radiations travel with the speed of light.
(A) n = 2, l = 1, m = –1 (P) 2px, or 2py (b) The wave number of radiations having frequency of 4 ×
(B) n = 4, l = 2, m = 0 (Q) 4 dz 2 1014 Hz is 1.33 × 104 cm–1
(C) n = 3, l = 1, m =  1 (R) 3px or 3py (c) Electric field of radiations is perpendicular to magnetic
field but parallel to direction of propagation.
(D) n = 4, l = 0, m = 0 (S) 4s
(d) Radiant energy is a continuous form of energy.
(E) n = 3, l = 2, m =  2 (T) 3d x 2 y2 , 3d xy
Use the following passage, to anwers Q. 89 to
Paragraph Type Questions Q. 91
Use the following passage, to anwers Q. 86 to Passage
Q. 88
In a mixture of H – He+ gas (He+ is singly ionized He atom),
Passage H atoms and He+ ions are excited to their respective first
Electromagnetic wave theory was proposed by James Clark excited states. Subsequently, H atoms transfer their total
Maxwell in 1864. Acc. to this theory, the energy is emitted excitation energy to He+ ions (by collisions). Assuming that
from any energy source continuously in the form of the Bohr model of atom is applicable, answer the following
radiations & is called radiant energy. questions.
Some important characteristics of a wave are : 89. The ratio of the potential energy of the n = 2 electron for the H
atom to that of He+ ion is :
1. Wavelength () :- Distance between any two
consecutive crests or troughs (a) 1/4 (b) 1/2
(c) 1 (d) 2
2. Frequency () :- Number of waves passing through a
point in one second. 90. The quantum number n of the state finally populated in He+
ions is :
3. Amplitude :- Height of crest or depth of trough
(a) 2 (b) 3
1 (c) 4 (d) 5
4. Wave Number (ν) =
 91. The wavelength of light emitted in the visible region by He+
Relation between velocity, wavelength & frequency ions after collisions with H atoms is : (in Å)
c = × (a) 6.5 × 10–7 m (b) 5.6 × 10–7 m
86. How long would it take a radiowave of frequency, 6 × 103 (c) 4.8 × 10–7 (d) 4.0 × 10–7 m
sec–1 to travel from Mars to Earth, a distance of 8 × 107 km ?
In visible region Balmer series e has to come from n
(a) 266 sec (b) 246 sec
n  4 to n  2
(c) 280 sec (d) None of these
Use the following passage, to anwers Q. 92 to 92. If the wavelength of series limit of Lyman series for He+ ion
Q. 94 is x Å, then what will be the wavelength of series limit of
Balmer series for Li2+ ion ?
Passage
One of the fundamental laws of physics is that matter is 9x 16x
(a) Å (b) Å
most stable with the lowest possible energy. Thus, the 4 9
electron in a hydrogen atom usually moves in the n = 1
orbit, the orbit in which it has the lowest energy. When the 5x 4x
electron is in this lowest energy orbit, the atom is said to be (c) A (d) A
4 7
in its ground electronic state. If the atom receives energy
from an outside source, it is possible for the electron to 93. The emission spectra is observed by the consequence of
move to an orbit with a higher n value, in which case the transition of electron from higher energy state to ground
atoms is in an excited with a higher energy. state of He+ ion. Six different photons are observed during
the emission spectra, then what will be the minimum
The law of conservation of energy says that we cannot
wavelength during the transition ?
create or destroy energy. Thus, if a certain amount of external
energy is required to excite an electron from one energy 4 4
level to another, then that same amount of energy will be (a) 27R (b) 15R
H H
liberated when the electron returns to its initial state.
Lyman series is formed when the electron returns to the 15 16
lowest orbit while Balmer series is formed when the electron (c) 16R (d) 15R
H H
returns to second orbit. Similarly Paschen, Brackett and
Pfund series are formed when electrons returns to the third, 94. What transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have the
fourth and fifth orbits from higher energy orbits respectively. same wavelength as Balmer transition, n = 4 to n = 2 in the
When an electron returns from n2 to n1 state, the number of He+ spectrum ?
lines in the spectrum will equal to (a) n = 3 to n = 1 (b) n = 3 to n = 2
(c) n = 4 to n = 1 (d) n = 2 to n = 1
(n 2  n1 ) (n 2  n1  1)
2 Use the following passage, to anwers Q. 95 to
If the electron comes back from energy level having energy
Q. 97
E2 to energy level having energy, E1, then the difference Passage
may be expressed in terms of energy of photon as :
Werner Heisenberg considered the limits of how precisely
hc we can measure the properties of an electron or other
E 2  E1  E, E  microscopic particle. He determined that there is a

fundamental limit to how closely we can measure both
Since, h and c are constants, E corresponds to definite position and momentum. The more accurately we measure
energy ; thus, each transition from one energy level to the momentum of a particle, the less accurately we can
another with produce a radiation of definite wavelength. determine its position. The converse is also true. This is
This is actually observed as a line in the spectrum of summed up in what we now call the Heisenberg uncertainty
hydrogen atom. principle.
Wave number of a spectral line is given by the formula
h
The equation is x.(mv) 
 1 1  4
R 2  2
 n1 n 2  The uncertainty in the position or in the momentum of a
macroscopic object like a baseball is too small to observe.
where R is a Rydberg’s constant (R = 1.1 × 107 m–1) However, the mass of microscopic object such as an electron
is small enough for the uncertainty to be relatively large and
significant.
95. If the uncertainties in position and momentum are equal, the (b) If (n + l) value is same for many sub-shells, priority of
uncertainty in the velocity is : electron filling is given to the sub-shell with lowest n
value.
h h
(a) (b) (c) (i) Fulfilled sub shell is most stable.
 2
(ii) "half filled orbitals are more stable than partially filled
orbital".
1 h
(c) (d) None of these 98. Which pair of sub-shell has same energy for above
2m 
described exceptional element under rule (a) ?
96. If the uncertainty in velocity and position is same, then the
(a) 1s, 2s (b) 2s, 2p
uncertainty in momentum will be :
(c) 3d, 4p (d) 5p, 4d
hm h 99. If Hunds rule is not obeyed by some elements given below
(a) (b) m
4 4 then which atom has maximum magnetic moment.
(a) Fe (b) Cu
h 1 h
(c) (d) (c) Cr (d) Mn
4m m 4
100. Which pair of element follow rule (c) (ii) ?
97. What would be the minimum uncertainty in de-Broglie (a) Cr, Mo (b) Mn, Fe
wavelength of a moving electron accelerated by potential
difference of 6 volt and whose uncertainty in position is (c) Cu, Ag (d) N, P
7
nm?
22
(a) 6.25 Å (b) 6 Å
(c) 0.625 Å (d) 0.3125 Å
Q. 100
Passage
The sequence of filling electrons in sub-shells of elements
with few exceptions in d-block and f-block elements is
governed by Aufbau principle followed by Hund’s rule and
Pauli’s exclusion principle.
(a) The electron prefers to enter into sub-shells with lower
(n + l) value.
The energy for any sub-shell of an element other than
hydrogen is proportional to the sum of principal quantum
number (n) and angular momentum quantum number
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

8. The ratio of the energy of a photon of 200 Å wavelength
Objective Questions I
radiation to that of 4000 Å radiation is (1986)
[Only one correct option]
1
1. Any p-orbital can accommodate up to (1983) (a) (b) 4
4
(a) four electrons (b) six electrons
(c) two electrons with parallel spins 1
(c) (d) 20
(d) two electrons with opposite spins 2
2. Which electronic level would allow the hydrogen atom to 9. Which one of the following sets of quantum numbers
absorb a photon but not be emit a photon ? (1984) represents an impossible arrangement ? (1986)
(a) 3s (b) 2p n l m s
(c) 2s (d) 1s 1
3. Correct set of four quantum numbers for the valence (a) 3 2 –2
2
(outermost) electron of rubidium (Z = 37) is (1984)
1
1 1 (b) 4 0 0
(a) 5, 0, 0,  (b) 5, 1, 0,  2
2 2
1
1 1 (c) 3 2 –3
(c) 5, 1, 1,  (d) 6, 0, 0,  2
2 2
4. The increasing order (lowest first) for the values of e/m 1
(d) 5 3 0 
(charge/mass) for electron (e), proton (p), neutron (n) and 2
alpha particle () is (1984) 10. Rutherford’s alpha particle scattering experiment eventually
(a) e, p, n,  (b) n, p, e,  led to the conclusion that (1986)
(c) n, p, , e (d) n, , p, e (a) mass and energy are related
5. Electromagnetic radiation with maximum wavelength is (b) electrons occupy space around the nucleus
(1985) (c) neutrons are burried deep in the nucleus
(a) ultraviolet (b) radio wave (d) the point of impact with matter can be precisely
(c) X-ray (d) infrared determined
6. The radius of an atomic nucleus is of the order of 11. The sum of the number of neutrons and proton in the isotope
(1985) of hydrogen is (1986)
(a) 10–10 cm (b) 10–13 cm (a) 6 (b) 5
(c) 10 –15
cm (d) 10 cm–8
(c) 4 (d) 3
7. Bohr’s model can explain (1985) 12. The energy of an electron in the first Bohr orbit of H-atom
(a) the spectrum of hydrogen atom only is –13.6 eV. The possible energy value (s) of the excited
state (s) for electrons in Bohr orbits of hydrogen is (are)
(b) spectrum of an atom or ion containing one electron
only (1988)
(c) the spectrum of hydrogen molecule (a) – 3.4 eV (b) – 4.2 eV
(d) the solar spectrum (c) – 6.8 eV (d) + 6.8 eV
13. The orbital diagram in which the aufbau principle is violated 20. For a d-electron, the orbital angular momentum is
(1988) (1997)
(a) (b)  h   h 
(a) 6  (b) 2 
 2   2 
(c) (d)
 h   h 
(c)   (d) 2  
14. The wavelength of a spectral line for an electronic transition  2   2 
is inversely related to (1988)
21. The first use of quantum theory to explain the structure of
(a) the number of electrons undergoing the transition atom was made by (1997)
(b) the nuclear charge of the atom (a) Heisenberg (b) Bohr
(c) the difference in the energy of the energy levels (c) Planck (d) Einstein
involved in the transition
22. The energy of an electron in the first Bohr orbit of H-atom
(d) the velocity of the electron undergoing the transition is –13.6 eV. The possible energy value(s) of the excited
15. The correct set of quantum numbers for the unpaired state(s) for electrons in Bohr orbits of hydrogen is (are)
electron of chlorine atom is (1989) (1998)
n l m n l m (a) –3.4 eV (b) – 4.2 eV
(a) 2 1 0 (b) 2 1 1 (c) – 6.8 eV (d) + 6.8 eV
(c) 3 1 1 (d) 3 0 0 23. The electrons, identified by numbers n and l,
16. The correct ground state electronic configuration of (i) n = 4, l = 1, (ii) n = 4, l = 0, (iii) n = 3, l = 2, and (iv) n = 3,
chromium atom is (1989) l = 1 can be placed in order of increasing energy, from the
(a) [Ar] 3d5 4s1 (b) [Ar] 3d4 4s2 lowest to highest, as (1999)
(c) [Ar] 3d6 4s0 (d) [Ar] 4d5 4s1 (a) (iv) < (ii) < (iii) < (i) (b) (ii) < (iv) < (i) < (iii)
17. The orbital angular momentum of an electron in 2s orbital (c) (i) < (iii) < (ii) < (iv) (d) (iii) < (i) < (iv) < (ii)
is (1992) 24. The electronic configuration of an element is 1s2, 2s22p6,
3s23p63d5, 4s1. This represents its (2000)
1 h (a) excited state (b) ground state
(a)  . (b) zero
2 2
(c) cationic form (d) anionic form
h h 1 1
(c) (d) 2. 25. The quantum numbers  and  for the electron spin
2 2 2 2
18. Which of the following does not characterise X-rays ? represent (2001)
(1992) (a) rotation of the electron in clockwise and anticlockwise
(a) The radiation can ionise gases direction respectively
(b) It causes ZnS to fluoresce (b) rotation of the electron in anticlockwise and clockwise
(c) Deflected by electric and magnetic fields direction respectively
(d) Have wavelengths shorter than ultraviolet rays (c) magnetic moment of the electron pointing up and down
respectively
19. Which of the following has the maximum number of
unpaired electrons ? (1996) (d) two quantum mechanical spin states which have no
classical analogue
(a) Mg2+ (b) Ti3+
(c) V3+ (d) Fe2+
26. The wavelength associated with a golf ball weighing 200g
h2 h2
and moving at a speed of 5 m/h is of the order (c) (d)
32  2 ma 02 64 2 ma 02
(2001)
(a) 10–10 m (b) 10–20 m 33. P is the probability of finding the 1s electron of hydrogen
(c) 10–30 m (d) 10–40 m atom in a spherical shell of infinitesimal thickness, dr, at a
distance r from the nucleus. The volume of this shell is
27. Rutherford’s experiment, which established the nuclear
4r2dr. The qualitative sketch of the dependence of P on r
model of the atom, used a beam of (2002)
is (2016)
(a) -particles, which impinged on a metal foil and got
absorbed
(b) -rays, which impinged on a metal foil and ejected
electrons
(c) Helium atoms, which impinged on a metal foil and got (a) (b)
scattered
(d) Helium nuclei, which impinged on a metal foil and got
scattered
28. If the nitrogen atom had electronic configuration 1s7, it
would have energy lower than that of the normal ground
state configuration 1s2 2s2 2p3, because the electrons (c) (d)
would be closer to the nucleus, yet 1s7 is not observed
because it violates (2002)
(a) Heisenberg uncertainty principle 34. consider the Bohr’s model of a one-electron atom whre the
elctron moves around the nuceus. In the following List-I
(b) Hund’s rule contains some quantities for the nth orbit of the atom and
(c) Pauli exclusion principle List-II contains options showing how they depend on n.
(d) Bohr postulate of stationary orbits List-I List-II
29. Which hydrogen like species will have same radius as that (I) Radius of the nth orbit (P)  n–2
of Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom ? (2004) (II) Angular momentum of (Q)  n–1
(a) n = 2, Li 2+
(b) n = 2, Be 3+
the electron in the nth orbit
(c) n = 2, He +
(d) n = 3, Li 2+
(III) Kinetic energy of the (R)  n0
30. The number of radial nodes in 3s and 2p respectively are electron in the nth orbit
(2005) (IV) Potential energy of the (S)  n1
(a) 2 and 0 (b) 0 and 2 electron in the nth orbit
(c) 1 and 2 (d) 2 and 1 (T)  n2
31. The number of nodal planes in a px orbital is (U)  n1/2
(2005)
Which of thle following has the correct combination con-
(a) One (b) Two sidering List-I and List-II? (2019)
(c) Three (d) Zero (a) (III), (S) (b) (IV), (Q)
32. The kinetic energy of an electron in the second Bohr orbit (c) (III), (P) (d) (IV), (U)
of a hydrogen atom is [a0 is Bohr radius] (2013)
h2 h2
(a) (b)
4 2 ma 02 162 ma 02
35. Consider the Bohr’s model of a one-electron atom whre the 40. Which of the following relates to photons both as wave
elctron moves around the nuceus. In the following List-I motion and as a stream of particles ?
contains some quantities for the nth orbit of the atom and (1992)
List-II contains options showing how they depend on n.
(a) Inference (b) E = mc2
List-I List-II
(c) Diffraction (d) E = h
(I) Radius of the nth orbit (P)  n–2
41. Which of the following statement (s) is (are) correct?
(II) Angular momentum of (Q)  n–1
(1998)
the electron in the nth orbit
(a) The electronic configuration of Cr is [Ar] 3d5 4s1.
(III) Kinetic energy of the (R)  n0 (Atomic number of Cr = 24).
electron in the nth orbit (b) The magnetic quantum number may have a negative
(IV) Potential energy of the (S)  n1 value.
electron in the nth orbit (c) In silver atom, 23 electrons have a spin of one type and
(T)  n 2 24 of the opposite type. (Atomic number of Ag = 47).
(U)  n1/2 (d) The oxidation state of nitrogen in HN3 is –3.
Which of thle following has the correct combination con- 42. Ground state electronic configuration of nitrogen atom can
sidering List-I and List-II? (2019) be represented by (1999)
(a) (II), (R) (b) (II), (Q) (a)
(c) (I), (P) (d) (I), (T)
Objective Questions II (b)
[One or more than one correct option] (c)

36. The atomic nucleus contains (1984)
(a) protons (b) neutrons (d)
(c) electrons (d) photons 43. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6eV. Con-
37. When alpha particles are sent through a thin metal foil, sider an elctronic state  of H3+ whose energy, azimuthal
most of them go straight through the foil because (1984) quantum number and magnetic quantum number are –3.4
(a) alpha particles are much heavier than electrons ev, 2 and 0, respectively. Which of the following statement(s)
is(are) true for the state  ? (2019)
(b) alpha particles are positively charged
(c) most part of the atom is empty space (a) It is a 4d state
(d) alpha particles move with high velocity (b) The nuclear charge experienced by the electron in this
state is less than 2e, where e is the magnitude of the
38. Many elements have non-integral masses because electronic charge
(1984) (c) It has 3 radial nodes
(a) they have isotopes (d) It has 2 angular nodes
(b) their isotopes have non-integral masses
Numeric Value Type Questions
(c) their isotopes have different masses
44. No considering the electronic spin, the degeneracy of the
(d) the constiuents, neutrons, protons and electrons, second excited state (n = 3) of H atom is 9, while the
combine to give fractional masses degeneracy of the second excited state of H– is (2014)
39. An isotone of 76
32 Ge is (1984) 45. In an atom, the total number of electrons having quantum
numbers n = 4, |ml| = 1 and ms = –1/2 is
76 77
(a) 32 Ge
(b) 33 As
(2015)
77 78
(c) 34 Se
(d) 34 Se
46. Consider a helium (He) atom that absorbs a photon of (B) A hydrogen-like one (Q) Azimuthal quantum
wavelength 330 nm. The change in the velocity (in cm s-1) of
-electron wave function number
He atom after the photon absorption is ______. (nearest
integer) (Assume : Momentum is conserved when photon obeying Pauli principle
(C) Shape, size and orientation (R) Magnetic quantum
is absorbed).
of hydrogen like atomic number
(Use : Planck constant = 6.6 × 10-34 Js, Avogadro number
orbitals
= 6 × 1023 mol-1, Molar mass of He = 4 mol-1). (2021)
(D) Probability density of (S) Electron spin quantum
Match the Following
electron at the nucleus number
Each question has two columns. Four in hydrogen -like atom
options are given representing matching of
Paragraph Type Questions
elements from Column-I and ColumnII. Only
one of these four options corresponds to a
Q. 51
correct matching.For each question, choose
the option corresponding to the correct Passage
matching. The hydrogen-like species Li2+ is in a spherically symmetric
state S1 with one radial node. Upon absorbing light the ion
47. In the following, Vn, Kn and En represent potential energy,
undergoes transition to a state S2. The state S2 has one
kinetic energy and total energy of an electron in the nth
radial node and its energy is equal to the ground state
Bohr orbit (radius : r) of hydrogen like species (nuclear
energy of the hydrogen atom
charge : Z). Match the entries on the left with those given
on right. (2006) 49. The state S1 is (2010)
(A) Vn/Kn = ? (P) –1 (a) 1s (b) 2s
(B) Vn/En = ? (Q) – 2 (c) 2p (d) 3s
(C) Kn/En = ? (R) 1 50. Energy of the state S1 in units of the hydrogen atom ground
state energy is (2010)
(D) 1/r  (Z)x : x = ? (S) 2
(a) 0.75 (b) 1.50
48. Match the entries in Column I with the correctly related
quantum number(s) in Column II. Indicate your answer by (c) 2.25 (d) 4.50
darkening the appropriate bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given 51. The orbital angular momentum quantum number of the
in the ORS (2008) state S2 is (2010)
Column - I Column - II (a) 0 (b) 1
(A) Orbital angular momentum (P) Principal quantum (c) 2 (d) 3
of the electron in a number
hydrogen
-like atomic orbital
Paragraph Type Questions
Use the following passage, to anwers Q. 52 to Q. 54
Passage
Answer Q. 52, Q. 53 and Q. 54 appropriately matching the information given in the three columns of the following table.
The wave function  n ,l , m l

, is a mathematical function whose value depends upon spherical polar coordinates (r, , ) of the
electron and characterized by the quantum numbers n, l and ml. Here r is distance from nucleus, q is colatitude and f is azimuth. In the
mathematical functions given in the Table, Z is atomic number and a0 is Bohr radius. (2018)
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
3
 Zr 
 Z  2  a 
(I) 1s-orbital (i)  n,l,ml   e  0 (P)
 a0 
1
(II) 2s-orbital (ii) One radial node (Q) Probability density at nucleus  
a 30
5
 Zr 
 Z  2  a 
(III) 2pz-orbital (iii)  n,l,ml    re  0  cos (R) Probability density is maximum at nucleus
 a0 
(IV) 3d 2z  orbital (iv) xy-plane is a nodal plane (S) Energy needed to excite electron from n = 2 state
27
to n = 4 state is times the energy needed to excite
32
electron from n = 2 state to n = 6 state
52. For He+ ion, the only INCORRECT combination is For Subjective Questions
2s orbital no. of radial nodes = n - l - 1 = 1 (2018) 55. The energy of the electron in the second and third Bohr’s
(a) (I) (i) (S) (b) (II) (ii) (Q) orbits of the hydrogen atom is – 5.42 × 10–12 erg and
–2.41 × 10–12 erg respectively. Calculate the wavelength of
(c) (I) (iii) (R) (d) (I) (i) (R)
the emitted light when the electron drops from the third to
53. For the given orbital in Column 1, the only the second orbit. (1981)
CORRECT combination of any hydrogen- like species is 56. Calculate the wavelength in Angstroms of the photon that
(2018) is emitted when an electron in the Bohr’s orbit, n = 2 returns
(a) (II) (ii) (P) (b) (I) (ii) (S) to the orbit, n = 1 in the hydrogen atom. The ionisation
potential of the ground state hydrogen atom is 2.17 × 10–11
(c) (IV) (iv) (R) (d) (III) (iii) (P)
erg per atom. (1982)
57. Give reason why the ground state outermost electronic
54. For hydrogen atom, the only CORRECT combination is configuration of silicon is : (1985)
(2018)
(a) (I) (i) (P) (b) (I) (iv) (R)
(c) (II) (i) (Q) (d) (I) (i) (S)
58. What is the maximum number of electrons that may be 68. With what velocity should an -particle travel towards the
present in all the atomic orbitals with principal quantum nucleus of a copper atom so as to arrive at a distance
number 3 and azimuthal quantum number 2 ? (1985) 10–13 m from the nucleus of the copper atom ? (1997)
59. The electron energy in hydrogen atom is given by 69. Calculate the energy required to excite 1 L of hydrogen gas
at 1 atm and 298 K to the first excited state of atomic
21.7  10 12
En  erg. Calculate the energy required to hydrogen. The energy for the dissociation of H—H bond
n2 is 436 kJ mol–1. (2000)
remove an electron completely from the n = 2 orbit. What is
70. The wavelength corresponding to maximum energy for
the longest wavelength (in cm) of light that can be used to
hydrogen is 91.2 nm. Find the corresponding wavelength
cause this transition ? (1984)
for He+ ion. (2003)
60. According to Bohr’s theory, the electronic energy of
71. (a) The Schrodinger wave equation for hydrogen atom is
hydrogen atom in the nth Bohr’s orbit is given by
(2004)
21.76  1019
En  J. Calculate the longest wavelength  1 
3/2
 r0   r /a
n2 1
 2s    2  e 0
of light that will be needed to remove an electron from the 4 2  a 0   a0 
third Bohr orbit of the He+ ion.
where a0 is Bohr’s radius. If the
(1990)
radial node in 2s be at r0, then find r0 in terms of a0.
61. What transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have the
(b) A base ball having mass 100 g moves with velocity 100
same wavelength as the Balmer transition n = 4 to n = 2 of
m/s. Find out the value of wavelength of base ball.
He+ spectrum ? (1993)
72. (a) Calculate velocity of electron in first Bohr orbit of
62. Estimate the difference in energy between 1st and 2nd
hydrogen atom (Givern, r = a0)
Bohr’s orbit for a hydrogen atom. At what minimum atomic
number, a transition from n = 2 to n = 1 energy level would (b) Find de-Broglie wavelength of the electron in first Bohr
result in the emission of X-rays with l = 3.0 × 10–8 m ? orbit.
Which hydrogen atom-like species does this atomic number (c) Find the orbital angular momentum of 2p-orbital in terms
correspond to? (1993) of h/2 units. (2005)
63. Find out the number of waves made by a Bohr’s electron in Fill in the Blanks
one complete revolution in its 3rd orbit. (1994) 73. Elements of the same mass number but of different atomic
64. Iodine molecule dissociates into atoms after absorbing light numbers are known as ................ . (1983)
to 4500Å. If one quantum of radiation is absorbed by each 74. The uncertainty principle and the concept of wave nature
molecule, calculate the kinetic energy of iodine atoms. of matter were proposed by .............. and .............
(Bond energy of I2 = 240 kJ mol–1) (1995) respectively. (1988)
65. A bulb emits light of  = 4500Å. The bulb is rated as150 75. The 2px, 2py and 2pz orbitals of atom have identical shapes
watt and 8% of this energy is emitted as light. How many but differ in their ............ . (1993)
photons are emitted by the bulb per second ? 76. Wave functions of electrons in atoms and molecules are
(1995) called ................ . (1993)
66. Consider the hydrogen atom to be proton embedded in a 77. The light radiations with discrete quantities of energy are
cavity of radius a 0 (Bohr’s radius) whose charge is called ................... . (1993)
neutralised by the addition of an electron to the cavity in
True/False
vacuum, infinitely slowly. Estimate the average total energy
of an electron in its ground state in a hydrogen atom as the 78. The energy of the electron in the 3d-orbital is less than
work done in the above neutralisation process. Also, if the that in the 4s-orbital in the hydrogen atom. (1983)
magnitude of the average kinetic energy is half of average 79. Gamma rays are electromagnetic radiations of wavelengths
potential energy, find the average potential energy. of 10–6 cm to 10–5 cm. (1983)
(1996) 80. The electron density in the XY plane in 3d x 2  y2 orbital is
67. Calculate the wave number for the shortest wavelength zero. (1986)
transition in the Balmer series of atomic hydrogen.
(1996)
Note:
Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book
Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
PERIODIC PROPERTIES
Chapter 02 89
PERIODIC PROPERTIES
1. INTRODUCTION 2.2 Newland’s Law of Octaves

In 1865, an English chemist, John Alexander Newlands observed
Periodic table may be defined as the table which classifies all
that
the known elements in accordance with their properties in such
a way that elements with similar properties are grouped together When the lighter elements were arranged in order of their increasing
in the same vertical column and dissimilar elements are atomic weights, the properties of every eighth element were similar
separated from one another. to those of the first one like the eighth note of a musical scale. This
generalization was named as Newlands’s law of octaves.
2. HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT OF
THE PERIODIC TABLE Element Li Be B C N O F
All earlier attempts of the classification of the elements were based At. wt. 7 9 11 12 14 16 19
upon their atomic weights. Element Na Mg Al Si P S Cl
2.1 Dobereiner’s Triads At. wt. 23 24 27 29 31 32 35.5

Element K Ca
In 1829, Dobereiner classified certain elements in the groups of
three called triads. The three elements in a triad had similar At. wt. 39 40
chemical properties. When the elements in a triad were arranged Drawback or Limitation of Newland’s octave rule:
in the order of increasing atomic weights, the atomic weight of the
(a) This rule is valid only upto Ca, because after Ca due to
middle element was found to be approximately equal to the
presence of d-block element there is difference of 18 element
arithmetic mean of the other two elements.
instead of 8 element
1. Triad Iron Cobalt Nickel Mean of 1st
(b) After the discovery of Inert gas and included in the
and 3rd
periodic table it becomes the 8th element from Alkali metal
At. wt. 55.85 58.93 58.71 Atomic weights so law had to be dropped out.
are nearly same 2.3 Lothar Meyer’s Curve
2. Triad Lithium Sodium Potassium
“Physical properties of elements are periodic functions of
7  39 their atomic masses.”
At. wt. 7 23 39  23
2 According to Lothar Meyer, elements having similar
3. Triad Chlorine Bromine Iodine properties occupy the similar positions in atomic volume
versus atomic mass curve
35.5 127
At. wt. 35.5 80 127  81.25
2
4. Triad Calcium Strontium Barium
40  177
 88.5
At. wt. 40 87.5 137 2
Drawback or Limitation of Dobereiner’s Triads:

Dobereiner could not arrange all the elements known at that time
into triads. He could identifty only three such triads that have
been mentioned.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
PERIODIC PROPERTIES 90
2.4 Mendeleev’s Periodic Law Initially, it was found that equivalent wt. of Be is 4.5 and it is
Mendeleev arranged elements in horizontal rows and vertical trivalent (V=3), so the weight of Be was 13.5 and there is no
columns of a table in order of their increasing atomic weights space in Mendeleev’s table for this element. So, after
in such a way that the elements with similar properties correction, it was found that Be is actually divalent (V = 2).
occupied the same vertical column or group. So, the weight of Be became 2  4.5=9 and there was a space
Characteristic of Mendeleev’s Periodic Table - between Li and B for this element in Mendeleev’s table.
Correction were done in at. wt. of elements are - U, Be , In,
(a) It is based on atomic weight. Au, Pt.
(b) 63 elements were known, noble gases were not
Demerits of Mendeleev’s periodic table -
discovered.
(a) Position of hydrogen - Hydrogen resembles both, the
(c) He was the first scientist to classify the elements in alkali metals (IA) and the halogens (VIIA) in properties so
systematic manner i.e. in horizontal rows and in vertical
Mendeleev could not decide where to place it.
columns.
(b) Position of isotopes - As atomic wt. of isotopes differs,
(d) Horizontal rows are called periods and there were 7 they have placed in different position in Mendeleev’s
periods in mendeleev’s Periodic table.
periodic table. But there were no such places for isotopes in
(e) Vertical columns are called groups and there were 8 Mendeleev’s table.
groups in mendeleev’s Periodic table. (c) Anomalous pairs of elements - There were some pair of
(f) Each group upto VIIth is divided into A & B subgroups elements which did not follow the increasing order of atomic
‘A’ sub groups element are called normal elements and ‘B’ wts.
sub groups elements are called transition elements. eg. Ar and Co were placed before K and Ni respectively in
(g) The VIIIth group was consists of 9 elements in rows the periodic table, but having higher atomic weights.
(Transitional metals group).
(h) The elements belonging to same group exhibit similar  Te I   Te I 
   
properties. 127.5 127  127.5 127 
Merits or advantages of Mendeleev’s periodic table -
 Co Ni   Th Pa 
(a) Study of elements - First time all known elements were    
classified in groups according to thier similar properties.  58.9 58.6   232 231
So study of the properties become easier of elements. (d) Like elements were placed in different groups.
(b) Prediction of new elements - It gave encouragement to There were some elements like Platinum (Pt) and Gold (Au)
the discovery of new elements as some gaps were in it which have similar properties but were placed in different
groups in mendeleev’s table.
Sc (Scandium), Ga (Gallium), Ge (Germanium), Tc
(Technetium) Pt Au
were the elements for whom position and properties were VIII IB
defined by Mendeleev even before their discoveries and (e) Unlike elements were placed in same group.
he left the blank spaces for them in table.
e.g.- Blank space at atomic wt. 72 in silicon group was called
Eka silicon (means properties like silicon ) and element
discovered later was named Germanium. Similarly other
elements discovered after mendeleev periodic table were.
Eka aliminium - Gallium (Ga), Eka Boron - Scandium (Sc),
Eka Silicon - Germanium (Ge),
Eka Mangense - Technetium(Tc)
(c) Correction of doubtful atomic weights - Correction were More reactive Less reactive
done in atomic wt. of some elements. Alkali metal Coin metal
At. Wt.=Valency  Equivalent weight. Normal elements Transition element
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
Cu, Ag and Au placed in I st group along with Na, K etc. Merits of long form of periodic gtable -
While they different in their properties (Only similar in having (a) Position of isotopes - Atomic No. of isotopes are similar,
ns electronic configuration )
1
so, different isotopes can be placed at same place in periodic
2.5 Modern Periodic Law table.
In 1913, the English physicist, Henry Moseley observed (b) (Ar-K), (Co-Ni), (Te-I) are now in increasing order of
regularities in the characteristic X-ray spectra of the elements. A atomic number.
plot of (c) Lanthanides and actinides are in IIIB group.

v (where v is frequency of X-rays emitted) against
(d) In modern periodic table diagonal line separates out
atomic number (Z) gave a straight line and not the plot of v vs metals, metalloids and non metals.
atomic mass.
(e) Elements of same group have same general formula of
Mendeleev’s Periodic Law was, therefore, accordingly modified. electronic configuration of outer most shell.
This is known as the Modern Periodic Law and can be stated as:
Demerits of long form of periodic table -
The physical and chemical properties of the elements are
(a) Position of hydrogen is still controversial.
periodic functions of their atomic numbers.
(b) ‘He’ is a inert gas but it has different electronic
Characteristic of Modern Periodic Table -
configuration than other inert gas elements.
(a) 9 vertical columns called groups.
(c) Lanthanides and actinides are still not placed in main
(b) Ist to VIII group + 0 group of inert gases. frame.
(c) Inert gases were introduced in periodic table by Ramsay. (d) Isotopes have different physical properties but have
(d) 7 horizontal series called periods. same place in periodic table.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
Nomenclature of elements with Atomic Numbers > 100 3. PREDICTION OF BLOCK, PERIOD & GROUP
The naming of the new elements had been traditionally the privilege
of the discoverer and the suggested name was ratified by the Block - last e– enters into which orbital
IUPAC. Period - Max value of principal quantum number
Notation for IUPAC Nomenclature of Elements Group - s block - no. of valence electron
Digit Name Abbreviation p block - 10 + no. of valence electron
0 nil n
d block – ns + no. of (n – 1) d e–
1 un u
f block – III B
2 bi b
Boiling Points and Melting Points :
3 tri t
It is a property of aggregate of atoms and not of a single
4 quad q
atom. i.e. why it is a molecular property.
5 pent p
In period - Along the period from left to right B.P and M.
6 hex h P. first increases then decreases.
7 sept s
Alkali metals - Crystal structure BCC (low B.P. & M.P)
8 oct o
Transition metals- .....”.....FCC(High B.P.&M.P.)
9 enn e
Inert gases.......... ......Lowest B.P.&M.P.(Vander wall force)
Nomenclature of Elements with
Transition elements ..... .....Highest M.P.
Atomic Number Above 100
Atomic Number Name Symbol  W(Tungston)Max.M.P.(3410C)
Metals 
101 Unnilunium Unu  Hg(Mercury)Lowest M.P.(38C)
102 Unnibium Unb
Non Carbon (In the form of diamond)Highest.M.P.(3727C)
103 Unniltrium Unt
Metals  Helium Lowest M.P.(270C)
104 Unnilquadium Unq
105 Unnilpentium Unp In group -
106 Unnilhexium Unh (a) In s-block elements B.P. & M.P. decreases down the
107 Unnilseptium Uns group
108 Unniloctium Uno Li, Na ( solid )  Cs, Fr (liquid )

109 Unnilennium Une
110 Ununnillium Uun
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
It is due to more repulsion of non-bonding electrons which 4.1.2 Vander Waal’s Radius
weakens the metallic bond.
It is half of the internuclear distance between adjacent atoms of
(b) In d-block elements B.P.&M.P. decreases down the the two neighbouring molecules in the solid state.
group (due to lanthanide contraction, Zeff increases and
hence bond energy increases).
(c) In p-block elements
(i) From IIIA-IVA group B.P.& M.P. decreases down the
group and from VA to ‘0’ group, B.P. & M.P. increases down
the group. (Atomic or molecular wt  vander wall force).
(ii) B.P. and M.P. of monoatomic molecules are lesser than
diatomic molecules. ‘0’ group < Halogens.
d A A
(iii) Atomic solid non-metals like B,C and Si has higher B.P. rvander waal 
2
and M.P. due to strong covalent bond.
iv- B.P. & M.P. of molecular solids are less because of weaker 4.1.3 Metallic Radius (Crystal radius)
vander wall force among molecules. e.g. I2
It is one-half of the distance between the nuclei of two adjacent
4. PROPERTIES OF AN ELEMENT metal atoms in the metallic crystal lattice.
4.1 Atomic Radius

We cannot measure the exact size of an isolated atom because its
outermost electron have a remote chance of being found quite far
from the nucleus. So, different types of atomic radius can be used
based on the environment of atoms i.e., covalent radius, van der
Waal’s radius, metallic radius.
4.1.1 Covalent Radius
The half of the distance between the nuclei of two identical atoms
joined by single covalent bond in a molecule is known as covalent
radius.
So, metallic radius for A-A
d = rA + r A
d
rA 
2
* rcovalent < rmetallic < rvander waal
Variation of Atomic Radii in the Periodic Table

(a) Variation along a period
So, covalent radius for A-A
In general, the covalent and van der Waals radii decrease
with increase in atomic number as we move from left to
d AA
rA  right in a period.
2
It is because with in the period the outer electrons are in the
If covalent bond is formed between two different elements then same valence shell & the effective nuclear charge increases
as the atomic number increases resulting in the increased
d A B  rA  rB  0.09 ( A   B ) attraction of electrons to the nucleus.
where A and B are electronegative of A and B
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
(b) Variation along a group
M 
IE1 (First Ionization Energy)
 M + 
IE 2
M 2+ 
IE 3
Atomic radius in a group increase as the atomic number -e- -e-
increases. It is because with in the group, the principal

quantum number (n) increases and the valence electrons M 3+ 
IE 4
-e-
M 4+
are farther from the nucleus.
IE1 , IE 2 , IE 3 and IE 4 are successive ionization energies.
(c) Ionic Radius
The removal of an electron from an atom results in the formation IE 4  IE3  IE 2  IE1
of a cation, whereas gain of an electron leads to an anion.
or  i H 4  i H3  i H 2  i H1
In general, the ionic radii of elements exhibit the same trend
as the atomic radii. A cation is smaller than its parent atom Variation of Ionisation Energy in Periodic Table
because it has fewer electrons while its nuclear charge
(a) Variation along a period
remains the same. The size of an anion will be larger than
that of the parent atom because the addition of one or more In a period, the value of ionisation enthalpy increases from
electrons would result in increased repulsion among the left to right with breaks where the atoms have some-what
electrons and a decrease in effective nuclear charge. For stable configurations. The observed trends can be easily
example, the ionic radius of fluoride ion (F–) is 136 pm whereas explained on the basis of increased nuclear charge and
the atomic radius of fluorine is only 64 pm. On the other decrease in atomic radii. Both the factors increase the force
hand ,the atomic radius of sodium is 186 pm compared to of attraction towards nucleus and consequently, more and
the ionic radius of 95 pm for Na+. more energy is required to remove the electrons and hence,
ionisation enthalpies increase.
(d) Isoelectronic Species
(b) Variation along a group
Isoelectronic species are those which have same number of
electrons. For example, O2–, F–, Na+ and Mg2+ have the same On moving the group, the atomic size increases gradually
number of electrons (10). Their radii would be different due to an addition of one new principal energy shell at each
because of their different nuclear charges. The cation with succeeding element. On account of this, the force of
the greater positive charge will have a smaller radius because attraction towards the valence electrons decreases and hence
of the greater attraction of the electrons to the nucleus. the ionisation enthalpy value decreases.
Anion with the greater negative charge will have the larger Units of I.E./I.P.
radius. In this case, the net repulsion of the electrons will It is measured in units of electron volts (eV) per atom or kilo
outweigh the nuclear charge and the ion will expand in size. calories per mole (kcal mol–1) or kilo Joules per mole (kJ mol–1).
Order of atomic radii is One electron volt is the energy acquired by an electron while
Mg2+ < Na+ < F– < O2– moving under a potential difference of one volt.
General Trend : 1 electron volt (eV) per atom

= 3.83 × 10–20 cal per atom
= 1.602 × 10–19 J per atom (1 cal = 4.184 J)
= 3.83 × 10–20 × 6.023 × 1023 cal mol–1
= 23.06 kcal mol–1
= 1.602 × 10–19 × 6.023 × 1023 J mol–1
= 96.49 kJ mol–1
 1 electron volt (eV) per atom
= 23.06 kcal mol–1 = 96.49 kJ mol–1
4.2 Ionization Energy
The minimum amount of energy required to remove the electron
from the outermost orbit of an isolated atom in the gaseous state
is known as ionization energy.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
Important Points
So, Mg2+ is stable.
* Ionization energy increases with decreasing the size of
an atom or an ion. A1  A1+ 
* Ionization energy increases with decreasing screening 2+ 
12.8eV. So, A1+ is stable
A1  A1 
+
effect.
A12+  A13+  6.0 eV. So, A13+ is stable

* Ionization energy increases with increasing nuclear
charge.
* Ionization energy increases if atom having half filled
A1+ is stable onlyin gaseous state
and fully filled orbitals.  +3
A1 isstable in liquid and solid state
* The penetrating power of orbitals is in the order
s > p > d > f. 4.3 Electron Gain Enthalpy
Increases When an electron is added to a neutral gaseous atom (X) to convert
Period
it into a negative ion, the enthalpy change accompanying the
process is defined as the Electron Gain Enthalpy (egH). Electron
gain enthalpy provides a measure of the ease with which an atom
Decreases
Io
n
en i zat adds an electron to form anion as represented by
erg i on
y X(g) + e–  X–(g)
Depending on the element, the process of adding an electron to
Group the atom can be either endothermic or exothermic. For many
elements energy is released when an electron is added to the
Applications of ionisation potential : atom and the electron gain enthalpy is negative. For example,
group 17 elements (the halogens) have very high negative electron
(A) Metallic and non-metallic character :
gain enthalpies because they can attain stable noble gas electronic
Metallic  I.P. Low (Na, K, Rb etc.) configurations by picking up an electron. On the other hand,
Non-metallic  I.P.High (F, Cl, Br etc.) noble gases have large positive electron gain enthalpies because
(B) Reactivity : the electron has to enter the next higher principal quantum level
leading to a very unstable electronic configuration.
(a) IA group has minimum I.P. so they are strong reducing
agents in gaseous state (Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs ). Variation of Electron Gain Enthalpy
(b) VIIA group has maximum I.P. so they are strong oxidising (a) Variation along a period
agents (F < Cl > Br > I ) Electron gain enthalpy becomes more and more negative
(C) Stability of oxidation states : from left to right in a period. This is due to decrease in size
and increase in nuclear charge as the atomic number
(a) If the difference between two successive I.P.  16eV
increases in a period. Both these factors favour the addition
then lower oxidation state is stable. of an extra electron due to higher force of attraction by the
nucleus for an incoming electron.
Na  Na + IP1 
e.g.  42.7 eV (b) Variation along a group
Na  Na
+ 2+
IP2 
The electron gain enthalpies, in general, become less
So, Na is stable.
+ negative in going down from top to bottom in a group. This
is due to increase in size on moving down a group. This
(b) If the difference between two successive I.P.  11 higher
factor is predominant in comparison to other factor, i.e.,
oxidation state is stable.
increase in nuclear charge.
Mg  Mg + IP1 
e.g  7.4 eV
Mg  Mg
+ 2+
IP2 
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
Increases According to Mulliken
Period
IP  EA
Electronegativity 
El 2
Decreases
e
af ctr
fin on (where IP = Ionization potential, EA = Electron affinity)
ity
If IP and EA are taken in electron volt
Group * Percentage ionic character = 16 (A – B) + 3.5 (A – B)2
where A and B are electronegativities of A and B.
Factors affecting electron affinity : * If the difference in the electronegatives of combining atoms
is 1.7, the bond is 50% covalent and 50% ionic.
1
(a) Atomic size  EA  Atomic size * If the difference in electronegativities of oxygen and element
is very high the oxide shows a basic character.
1 Increases
(b) Screening efect  EA  Screening effect Period
El
ec
tro
ne
Decreases
(c) Effect nucleat charge (Z eff )  ga
tiv
ity
EA  Zeff
(d) Stability of completely filled or half filled Group
orbitals 
The periodic trends of elements in the periodic table
Electron affinity of filled or half filled orbital is very
less or zero or energy is given to introduce any Factors Affecting electronegativity :
electron. It is because of its stability. (a) Atomic size -
Applications of Electron affinity :
1
electronegativity 
(a) Electron affinity  Oxidising nature Atomic size
But F has more oxidising power than CI because F
(b) Effective nuclear charge (Z eff ) 
has more standard reduction potential.
(b) Electron affinity  Reactivity Electronegativity  Zeff
- They form anions by gaining electron (c) Hybridisation state of an atom -

- Their bond nature is ionic Electronegativity  % of s character in hybridlised atom
(c) Electron affinity  electronegativity sp > sp 2 > sp3

(d) Elements of high electron affinity form oxide and s character 50% 33% 25%
hydroxides, which are acidic in nature Electronegativity 3.25 2.75 2.5
4.4 Electronegativity Because s-orbital is near to nucleus so by increasing s-
The tendency of an atom to attract the shared pair of electrons character in hybridisation state, EN also increases.
towards itself is known as its electronegativity. (d) Oxidation state -
According to Pauling, the electronegativity of F is 4.0 and Electronegativity  oxidation state
electronegativity of other elements can be calculated as
Mn 2  Mn 4  Mn 7
(A – B) = 0.208 [EA–B – (EA–A × EB–B)1/2]1/2
O  O  O 
Fe  Fe2  Fe3
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
 As atomic radius decreases by increasing (E) Reactivity -
oxidation state of cation species, EN increases.
1
 In anionic species, the order of electronegativity is Bond energy  Stability 
Reactivity
O2  O  O
(e) Electronegativity does not depends on filled or half filled As bond energy  difference of electronegativities
orbitals, because it is a tendency to attract bonded
electron, not to gain electron from out side 1
So,  Electronegativity  Stability  Reactivity
Applications of electronegativity :
(A) Metallic and non metallic nature - HF HCl HBr HI
 
Reactivity
Low electronegativity  Metals
 HI is most reactive hydrohalides or strongest acid
High electronegativity  Non metals
among all hydrohalides.
Metallic character increases down the group but (F) Nature of bonds -
decreases along a period.
(a) It can be determined by Hannay & Smith formula-
(B) Bond length -
Ionic %  16 (X A  X B )  3.5 (X A  X B ) 2
1
EN  Here X A  Electronegativity of A
Bond length
Here EN  difference in electronegativities of X B  Electronegativity of B

bonded atoms
If X A  X B  2.1 Ionic %  50% i.e. Ionic bond
HF < HCl < HBr < HI
HF has minimum bond length because of much If X A  X B  2.1 Ionic %  50% i.e. Covalent bond
difference in the electronegativities of H and F. (b) Gallis experimental values are-
(C) Bond energy - By increasing EN bond length X A  X B  1.7 Ionic
decreases and hence bond energy increases.
X A  X B  1.7 Covalent
Bond energy  Electronegativity difference
HF > HCl > HBr > HI  If X A  X B ; then A  B will be non polar, e.g.
(D) Acidic strength of hydrides - H  H, F  F

Order of stability of hydrohalides is If X A  X B and difference of EN is small then
HF > HCl > HBr > HI and so order of their
acidic strength will be - A   B  bond will be polar covalent
HF < HCl < HBr < HI e.g. H 2 O (H   O   H   )
 In VA group -
 If X A  X B and X A  X B EN is high then,
A  Β bond will be polar or ionic
e.g. Na  Cl 
In HF, X A  X B  1.9, which is more than 1.7, even then it

In PH 3 and AsH 3 there is less difference in the
is covalent compound.
electronegativities of X A and X B , so their bond
energy decreases and hence acidic character (losing
H  ion) increases.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
(G) Nature of hydroxides - NO 2  ZnO  K 2 O
(a) As per Gallis, In AOH if electronegativity of A is more 
than 1.7 (Non metal) then it is acidic in nature.
acidic character decreases
(b) If electronegativity of ‘A’ is less than 1.7 (metal) than
AOH will be basic in nature BeO, Al 2 O3 , ZnO,SnO, PbO,SnO 2 , PbO 2 ,Sb 2 O3
e.g. NaOH CIOH etc. are amphoteric oxides.
XA 0.9 3.0 CO, H 2 O, NO, N 2 O are neutral oxides.
Nature Basic Acidic Acidic strength of oxide and oxyacid
(c) If X A  X O  X O  X H then AO bond will be more B2O3 CO2 N2O5
 
polar and will break up as EN increases, acidic nature increases
H 3 BO3  H 2 CO3  HNO3
(d) If X A  X O  X O  X H
H 3 PO 4  H3 AsO 4  H 3SbO 4
e.g. In NaOH H 3SO 3  H 2 SeO 3  H 2 TeO 3

X O  X Na (2.6)  X O  X H (1.4)
HOF  HOCl  HOBr  HOI
So hydroxide is basic
HClO 4  HBrO 4  HIO 4
In CIOH 
N 2 O5  P2 O5  As 2 O5
X O  X Cl (0.5)  X O  X H (1.4)
So hydroxide is acidic N 2 O3  P2 O3  As 2 O3  Sb 2 O3
(H) Nature of oxides - Consider an oxide AO Acidic nature  oxidation state

If X A  X O  2.3 Acidic properties increases with increasing oxidation state
Basic oxide of an element
If X A  X O  2.3 HClO 4  HClO3  HClO 2  HClO

Amphoteric oxide
HNO3  HNO 2
If X A  X O  2.3
H 2SO4  H 2SO3
Acidic oxide
(a) Along a period acidic nature increases. SO3  N 2 O 3
(b) Down the group basic nature increases
Sb 2 O3  Sb 2 O5  N 2 O  NO  NO2  N 2 O5
Hydrolysis of AX
(Where A  Other element and X  Halogen)
(a) If electronegativity of X > Electronegativity of A then
on hydrolysis product will be HX.
i.e. when in periodic table the distance bewteen the In example (BCl3 ), EN of Cl  EN of B
element and oxygen increases, basic character
increases.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
So On hydrolysis
PCl3  3HOH  3ΗCl  H 3 PO3
PCl3  Cl2  H 2 O  2ΗCl  POCl3
POCl3  3HOH  3ΗCl  H 3 PO 4

(b) If electronegativity of X < electronegativity of A then on
hydrolysis product will be HOX (hypohalous acid).
e.g. Cl 2 O
Difference between Electronegativity and Electron Affinity
Electronegativity Electron Affinity
Tendency of an atom is a molecule to attract the bonded Energy released when an electron is added to neutral
electrons isolated gaseous atom
Relative value of an atom Absolutely value of an atom
It regularly change in a period or group It does not changes regularly
It has no unit It is measured in eV/atom or KJ mol-1 or K.cal mole-1
4.5 Periodic Trends in Chemical Properties (a) Variation along a period

4.5.1 Periodicity of Valence or Oxidation States As we move across a period from left to right, the number of
The electrons present in the outermost shell of an atom are called valence electrons increases from 1 to 8. But the valence of
valence electrons and the number of these electrons determine elements, w.r.t. H or O first increases from 1 to 4 and then
the valence or the valency of the atom. It is because of this reason decreases to zero.
that the outermost shell is also called the valence shell of the In the formation of Na2O molecule, oxygen being more
atom and the orbitals present in the valence shell are called electronegative accepts two electrons, one from each of the
valence orbitals. two sodium atoms and thus shows an oxidation state of –2.
In case of representative elements, the valence of an atom is On the other hand, sodium with valence shell electronic
generally equal to either the number of valence electrons (s- and configuration as 3s1 loses one electron to oxygen and is
p-block elements) or equal to eight minus the number of valence given an oxidation state of +1. Thus, the oxidation state of
electrons. an element in a given compound may be defined as the
charge acquired by its atom on the basis of electronegativity
of the other atoms in the molecule.
(b) Variation within a group
When we move down the group, the number of valence
In contrast, transition and inner transition elements, exhibit variable electrons remains the same, therefore, all the elements in a
valence due to involvement of not only the valence electrons but group exhibit the same valence. For example, all the elements
d- or f-electrons as well. However, their most common valence are of group 1 (alkali metals) have valence one while all the
2 and 3. elements of group 2 (alkaline earth metals) exhibit a valence
of two.
Let us now discuss periodicity of valence along a period and
within a group. Noble gases present in group 18 are zerovalent, i.e., their
valence is zero since these elements are chemically inert.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
4.5.2 Anomalous Properties of Second Period Elements
–— Reactivity increases 

It has been observed that some elements of the second period
show similarities with the elements of the third period placed Reactivity of Non-Metals
diagonally to each other, though belonging to different groups. The reactivity of a non-metal is measured in terms of its
For example, lithium (of group 1) resembles magnesium (of tendency to gain electrons to form an anion.
group 2) and beryllium (of group 2) resembles aluminium (of group In a period
13) and so as. This similarity in properties of elements placed
The reactivity of non-metals increases from left to right in a period.
diagonally to each other is called diagonal relationship. During reaction, non-metals tends to form anions. For example, in
the second period, the reactivity of non-metals increases in the
order.
C  N  O  F
Less reactive More reactive
–— Reactivity increases 

In a group
The anomalous behaviour is due to their small size, large charge/
radius ratio and high electronegativity of the elements. In addition, The reactivity of non-metals in a group decreases as we go down
the first member of group has only four valence orbitals (2s and the group. This is because the tendency to accept electrons
2p) available for bonding, whereas the second member of the decreases down the group. The reactivity of halogens follows
groups have nine valence orbitals (3s, 3p, 3d). As a consequence the order
of this, the maximum covalency of the first member of each group F  Cl  Br  I
is 4 (e.g., boron can only form [BF4])–, whereas the other members Most reactive Least reactive
of the groups can expand their valence shell to accommodate

more than four pairs of electrons e.g., aluminium forms [AlF6]3–. –— Reactivity decreases 

Furthermore, the first member of p-block elements displays greater The normal oxide formed by the element on extreme left is the
ability to form p-p multiple bonds to itself (e.g., C=C, CC, N=N, most basic (e.g., Na2O) whereas that formed by the element on
NN) and to other second period elements (e.g., C=O, C=N, CN, extreme right is the most acidic (e.g., Cl2O7). Oxides of elements in
N=O) compared to subsequent members of the same groups. the centre are amphoteric (e.g., Al2O3, As2O3) or neutral (e.g., CO,
4.5.3 Periodic Trends and Chemical Reactivity NO, N2O). Amphoteric oxides behave as acidic with bases and as
Reactivity of Metals basic with acids, whereas neutral oxides have no acidic or basic
properties.
The reactivity of metals is measured in terms of their tendency to
lose electrons from their outermost shell.
In a period
The tendency of an element to lose electrons decreases in going
from left to right in a period. So, the reactivity of metals decreases
in a period from left to right. For example, the reactivity of third
period elements follows the order.
Na  Mg  Al
more reactive reactive
In a group
The tendency to lose electrons increases as we go down a group.
So, the reactivity of metals increases down the group. Thus, in
group 1, the reactivity follows the order.
Li  Na  K  Rb  Cs
Least reactive Most reactive
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
5. SOME IMPORTANT FACTS ABOUT ELEMENTS (xxvi) Iodine is the element which sublimes.
(i) Bromine is a non-metal which is liquid at room temperature. (xxvii) Hydrogen is the most abundant element in the universe.
(ii) Mercury is the only metal that is liquid at room (xxviii) Only ozone is the coloured gas with garlic smell.
temperature. (xxix) Metalloids have electronegativity values closer to 2.0.
(iii) Gallium (m.pt. 29.8ºC), cesium (m.pt. 28.5ºC) and francium (xxx) First synthetic (i.e., man-made) element is technetium
(m.pt. 27ºC) are metals having low melting points.
(At. No. 43).
(iv) Tungsten (W) has the highest melting point (3380ºC)
among metals. (xxxi) Most poisonous metal-Plutonium.
(v) Carbon has the highest melting point (4100ºC) among (xxxii) Rarest element in earth’s crust-Astatine.
non-metals. (xxxiii) The elements coming after uranium are called transuranic
(vi) Oxygen is the most abundant element on the earth. elements. The elements with Z = 104 – 112, 114 and 116
are called trans-actinides or super heavy elements. All
(vii) Aluminium is the most abundant metal. these elements are synthetic, i.e., man-made elements.
(viii) Iron is the most abundant transition metal. These are radioactive elements and not found in nature.
(ix) Highest density is shown by osmium (22.57 g cm–3) or (xxxiv) The elements ruthenium (Ru), germanium (Ge), polonium
iridium (22.61 g cm–3). (Po) and americium (Am) were named in honour of the
countries named Ruthenia (Russia), Germany, Poland
(x) Lithium is the lightest metal. Its density is 0.54 g cm–3. and America, respectively.
(xi) Silver is the best conductor of electricity. (xxxv) The members of the actinide series are radioactive and
(xii) Diamond (carbon) is the hardest natural substance. majority of them are not found in nature.
(xiii) Francium has the highest atomic volume. (xxxvi) The element rutherfordium (Rf, 104) is also called
Kurchatovium (Ku) and element dubnium (Db, 105), is
(xiv) Boron has the lowest atomic volume. also called hahnium.
(xv) The most abundant gas in atmosphere is nitrogen. (xxxvii) Promethium (Pm, 61) a member of lanthanide series is not
(xvi) Fluorine is the most electronegative element. found in nature. It is a synthetic element.
(xvii) Chlorine has the maximum negative electron gain (xxxviii) Special names are given to the members of these groups
enthalpy. in periodic table.
(xviii) Helium has the maximum ionisation enthalpy. Group 1 or IA Alkali metals
Group 2 or IIA Alkaline earth metals
(xix) Cesium or francium has the lowest ionisation enthalpy.
Group 15 or VA Pnicogens
(xx) Helium and francium are smallest and largest atoms
Group 16 or VIA Chalcogens
respectively.
Group 17 or VIIA Halogens
(xxi) H– and I – ions are the smallest and largest anions
Group 18 or VIIIA Inert or noble gases
respectively.
(zero)
(xxii) H+ and Cs+ ions are the smallest and largest cations
respectively.
(xxiii) Cesium is the most electropositive element.
(xxiv) Element kept in water is phosphorus, P4 (white or yellow).
(xxv) Element kept in kerosene are Na, K, Rb, Cs, etc.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
SUMMARY
 Mendeleev’s periodic table was based on atomic masses of p-block elements occupy IIIA(13), IVA(14), VA(15), VIA(16),
the elements. When Mendeleev presented the periodic table, VIIA(17) and VIIIA(18) groups, i.e., right portion of the
only 63 elements were known. He left 29 places in the table periodic table.
for unknown elements.
d-block elements occupy IIIB(3), IVB(4), VB(5), VIB(6),
 Modern Mendeleev periodic table is based on atomic VIIB(7), VIIIB(8, 9 and 10), IB(11) and IIB(12) groups, i.e.,
numbers of the elements. The modern periodic law is : “The central portion of the periodic table. There are four d-block
physical and chemical properties of the elements are series, i.e., 3d series, 4d series, 5d series and 6d series each
periodic function of their atomic numbers”. consisting of ten elements, i.e., in all forty d-block elements
The horizontal row in the periodic table is called a period are present in periodic table.
and vertical column is called group. There are seven periods f-block elements are accommodated in two horizontal rows
and nine groups in the modern Mendeleev periodic table. below the main periodic table, each row consists of 14
 The long or extended form of periodic table consists of seven elements, i.e., 28 f-block elements are present in periodic
periods and eighteen vertical columns (groups or families). table. The elements in first row are termed 4f-elements or
The elements in a period have same number of energy shells, rare earth or lanthanides while the elements of second row
i.e., principal quantum number (n). These are numbered 1 to 7. are termed 5f-elements or actinides.
1st period 1s 2 elements  The elements are broadly divided into three types :
2nd period 2s 2p 8 elements (i) Metals comprise more than 78% of the known elements.
s-block, d-block and f-block elements are metals. The
3rd period 3s 3p 8 elements higher members of p-block are also metals.
4th period 4s 3d 4p 18 elements (ii) Non-metals are less than twenty. (C, N, P, O, S, Se, H, F,
5th period 5s 4d 5p 18 elements Cl, Br, I, He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe and Rn are non-metals).
6th period 6s 4f 5d 6p 32 elements (iii) Elements which lie in the border line between metals
and non-metals are called semimetals or metalloids. B,
7th period 7s 7f 6d 7p 32 elements
Si, Ge, As, Sb, Te, Po and At are regarded metalloids.
Total *118 elements
 IUPAC given a new scheme for assigning a temporary name
At present 114 elements are known. to the newly discovered elements. The name is derived
In a vertical column (group), the elements have similar directly from the atomic number of the elements. However,
valence shell electronic configuration and therefore exhibit IUPAC has accepted the following names of the elements
similar chemical properties. from atomci numbers 104 to 110.
Rutherfordium (Rf), Dubnium (Db), Seaborgium (Sg)
 There are four blocks of elements: s-, p-, d- and f-block
depending on the orbital which gets the last electron. The 104 105 106
general electronic configuration of these blocks are : Bohrium (Bh), Hassium (Hs), Meitnerium (Mt),
s-block : [Noble gas] ns 1 or 2
. However, hydrogen has 1s 1
107 108 109
configuration. Darmstadtium (Ds)
p-block : [Noble gas] ns2np1–6 110
d-block : [Noble gas] (n – 1)d 1–10
ns 1 or 2
The temporary names of the elements discovered recently are :
f-block : [Noble gas] (n – 2)f (n – 1)d
1–14
ns
0 or 1 2
Unununium (Uuu), Ununbium (Uub)
s-block elements occupy IA(1) and IIA(2) groups, i.e., 111 112
extreme left portion of the periodic table. Ununquadium (Uuq) and Ununhexium (Uuh)
114 116
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
 The recurrence of similar properties of the elements after In isoelectronic ions, the size decreases if Z/e increases i.e.,
certain definite intervals when the elements are arranged in greater the nuclear charge, smaller is the size of the ion.
order of increasing atomic numbers in the periodic table is  The energy required to remove the most loosely held electron
termed periodicity. The cause of periodicity is the repetition
from the gaseous isolated atom is termed ionisation enthalpy.
of similar electronic configuration of the atom in the valence
shell after certain definite intervals. These definite intervals  Ionisation enthalpy values generally increase across the periods.
are 2, 8, 8, 18, 18 and 32. These are known as magic number.  Ionisation enthalpy values generally decrease down the group.
Periodicity is observed in a number of properties which are
 Removal of electron from filled and half filled shells requires
directly or indirectly linked with electronic configuration.
of higher energy. For example, the ionisation enthalpy of
 Effective nuclear charge increases across each period. nitrogen is higher than oxygen. Be, Mg and noble gases
 Atomic radii generally decrease across the periods. have high values.
 Atomic radii generally increase on moving from top to bottom
 Metals have low ionisation enthalpy values while non-metals
in the groups.
have high ionisation enthalpy values.
 Atomic radius is of three types :
(xv) Successive ionisation enthalpies of an atom have higher values.
(a) Covalent radius : It is half of the distance between the centres
of the nuclei of two similar atoms joined by a single covalent IEI < IEII < IEIII ...
bond. This is generally used for non-metals.
(xvi) The enthalpy change taking place when an electron is added
(b) Crystal or metallic radius : It is half of the internuclear to an isolated gaseous atom of the element is called electron
distance between two nearest atoms in the metallic lattice. It gain enthalpy. The first electron gain enthalpy of most of the
is generally used for metals. elements is negative as energy is released in the process but
(c) Van der Waal’s radius : It is half of the internuclear distance the values are positive or near zero in case of the atoms having
between the nearest atoms belonging to two adjacent stable configuration such as Be, Mg, N, noble gases, etc.
molecules in solid state.
 Electron gain enthalpy becomes more negative from left to right
Van der Waal’s radius > Metallic radius > Covalent
in a period and less negative from top to bottom in a group.
radius
 Successive electron gain enthalpies are always positive.
(for an atom)
 Cations are generally smaller than anions.  The elements with higher ionisation enthalpy have higher
negative electron gain enthalpy.
 Cations are smaller and anions are larger than neutral atoms
of the elements.  Electronegativity is the tendency of an atom to attract the
shared pair of electrons towards itself in a bond.
 Electronegativity increases across the periods and decreases
down the groups.
 Elements of 2nd and 3rd transition series belonging to same
vertical columns are similar in size and properties due to  Metals have low electronegativities and non-metals have
lanthanide contraction. high electronegativities.
 The first element is each group of the representative elements  Metallic character decreases across the periods and
shows abnormal properties, i.e., differs from other elements increases down the group.
of the group because of much smaller size of the atom.  Valency of an element belonging to s- and p- block (except
 The ions having same number of electrons but different noble gases) is either equal to the number of valence
nuclear charge are called isoelectronic ions. electrons or eight minus number of valence electrons.
Examples  The reducing nature of the elements decreases across the

period while oxidising nature increases.
(a) N3–, O2–, F–, Na+, Mg2+, Al3+
 The basic character of the oxides decreases while the acidic
(b) P3–, S2–, Cl–, K+, Ca2+, Sc3+ character increases in moving from left to right in a period.
SCAN CODE
Periodic Properties
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example – 1 Example – 4
What is the basic difference in approach between the Give four examples of species which are isoelectronic with
Mendeleev’s periodic law and the modern periodic law ? Ca2+.
Sol. According to Mendeleev, the properties of the elements are Sol. K+, Cl–, S2– or P3– are isoelectronic with Ca2+.
a periodic function of their atomic weights, while according
Example – 5
to modern periodic law, the properties of the elements are
periodic functions of their atomic numbers.
What is periodicity ? What is the cause of periodicity ?
Example – 2 Sol. When elements are arranged in the increasing order of atomic
number, elements having similar properties re-occur at
On the basis of quantum numbers, justify that the sixth regular intervals in the periodic table. This type of property
period of the periodic table should have 32 elements. is called periodicity.
Sol. Sixth period corresponds to n = 6. In this period 16 orbitals, The cause of the periodicity in properties is the same
viz. one 6s, seven 4f, five 5d and three 6p orbitals are filled. outermost electronic configuration coming at regular intervals.
These sixteen orbitals can accommodate 32 elements. So,
there are 32 elements in the sixth period. Example – 6
Example – 3 (a) What is modern periodic law ? Discuss the main

features of long form of periodic table.
What do you understand by isoelectronic species ? Name
(b) Give the general electronic configuration of s, p, d &
the species that will be isoelectronic with each of the
f-block elements.
following atoms or ions.
Sol. The main features of long form of periodic table are :
(i) F– (ii) Ar
(a) The physical and chemical properties of the elements are
(iii) Mg2+ (iv) Rb+
periodic functions of their atomic numbers. The main
Sol. Ions of different elements which have the same number of features of long form of periodic table are as follows :
electrons but different magnitude of the nuclear charge are
1. The aufbau (build up) principle and the electronic
called isoelectronic ions.
configuration of atoms provide a theoretical foundation for
(i) F– has 10 (9 + 1) electrons. Therefore, the species nitride ion, the periodic classification.
N3– (7 + 3) ; oxide ion ; O2– (8 + 2), neon, Ne (10 + 0) ; sodium
2. The long form of the periodic table consists of horizontal
ion, Na+ (11 – 1) ; magnesium ion, Mg2+ (12 – 2) ; aluminium
rows called periods and vertical columns called groups.
ion, Al3+ (13 – 3) etc. each one of which contains 10 electrons,
are isoelectronic with it. 3. There are altogether seven periods. The period number
corresponds to the highest principal quantum number (n)
(ii) Ar has 18 electrons. Therefore, the species phosphide ion,
of the elements in the period.
P3– (15 + 3), sulphide ion ; S2 (16 + 2) ; chloride ion, Cl– (17 + 1),
potassium ion, K+ (19 – 1), calcium ion, Ca2+ (20 – 2), etc. each 4. The first period contains 2 elements. The subsequent
one of which contains 18 electrons, are isoelectronic with it. periods consists of 8, 8, 18, 18 and 32 elements, respectively.
The seventh period is incomplete and like the sixth period
(iii) Mg2+ has 10 (12 – 2) electrons, therefore, the species N3–,
would have a theoretical maximum (on the basis of quantum
O2–, F–, Ne, Na+, Al3+, etc. each one of which contains 10
numbers) of 32 elements.
electrons, are isoelectronic with it.
5. In this form of the Periodic Table, 14 elements of both
(iv) Rb+ has 36 (37 – 1) electrons. Therefore, the species bromide
sixth and seventh periods (lanthanoids and actinoids,
ion, Br– (35 + 1), krypton, Kr (36 + 0) and strontium Sr2+ (38 – 2)
respectively) are placed in separate panels at the bottom.
each one of which has 36 electrons, are isoelectronic with it.
6. Elements having similar outer electronic configurations in
their atoms are arranged in vertical columns referred to as groups
or families. There are in all 18 vertical column or groups.
7. The elements of groups 1 (alkali metals), 2 (alkaline earth size is called lanthanide contraction for lanthanide series
metals) and 13 to 17 are called the main group elements. and actinide contraction for actinide series.
These are also called typical or representative or normal (vii) The common oxidation state of lanthanide and actinide
elements. series is +3.
8. The elements of group 3 to 12 are called transiation (viii) They also show variable oxidation state of +2, +4, +5
elements. and +6. Hence exhibit good catalytic activity.
9. Lanthanoids & actinoids are together referred to as inner (ix) Some of the elements are radioactive. (Elements heavier
transition elements. than Uranium, do not occur in nature but are obtained
(b) (i) General outer electronic configuration of s-block elements artificially through nuclear reactions. These elements are
is ns1–2 i.e., either ns1 or ns2. called transuranic elements.)
(ii) General outer electronic configuration of p-block Example – 8
elements is ns2np1–6.
(iii) General outer electronic configuration of d-block elements Define atomic radius. Explain various factors affecting it ?
is (n – 1) d1–10 ns0–2. Sol. Atomic radius is the distance from the centre of the nucleus
(iv) General outer electronic configuration of f-block to the outermost shell containing electrons. In other words,
elements is (n – 2) f1–14 (n – 1) d0–1 ns2. it is the distance from the center of the nucleus to the point
up to which the density of the electron cloud is maximum.
Example – 7
Factors affecting atomic radius :
Give general electronic configuration of f-block elements (i) No. of shells : The atomic radius increases with the
and explain characteristic properties of elements in increase in the no. of the shells.
lanthanide and actinide series. atomic radius  no of shells
Sol. (i) General electronic configuration of f-block elements is (ii) Nuclear charge : Atomic radius decreases with the
(n-2) f1-14 (n-1) d0-1 ns2. increase in the Nuclear charge. Due to high nuclear charge,
(ii) The last electron in these elements enter f-orbital of the the nucleus attracts the electrons towards itself thereby
prepenultimate shell of an atom. reducing its own size
(iii) It includes the lanthanide and actinide series of group 3
1
(IIIB). atomic radius 
Nuclear charge
(iv) These elements are placed separately in two rows, at
the bottom of the periodic table. (iii) Shielding or screening effect : Atomic radius increases
Characteristic properties of elements in the lanthanide with the increase in the shielding effect. This is because the
and actinide series are : electrons present between the Nucleus and the valence shell
shields the valence electrons from the Nucleus i.e. it reduces
(i) Elements from the series show very little difference in the force of attraction between the nucleus and the valence
their chemical reactivity. electorns.
(ii) Elements are metallic, electropositive with high melting
point and boiling point. atomic radius  shielding effect
(iii) Most of their compounds are coloured in solid state as
Example – 9
well as in aqueous solution.
(iv) The ability to form complex compounds is comparatively Explain why cations are smaller and anions are larger in
less. radii than their parent atoms ?
(v) The elements of both the series are paramagnetic as Sol. The ionic radius of a cation is always smaller than the parent
they have unpaired electrons. atom because the loss of one or more electrons increases the
(vi) As atomic number increases, atomic size slightly effective nuclear charge. As a result, the force of attraction of
decreases across individual series. The decrease in atomic nucleus for the electrons increases and hence the ionic radii
decrease. In contrast, the ionic radius of an anion is always
larger than its parent atom because the addition of one or  Size of chloride ion is more than chlorine atom.
more electrons decreases the effective nuclear charge. As a
Example – 13
result, the force of attraction of the nucleus for the electrons
decreases and hence the ionic radii increase.
Among the elements Li, K, Ca, S and Kr, which one is
Example – 10 expected to have the lowest first ionization enthalpy and
which the highest first ionization enthalpy ?
Consider the following species. N3–, O2–, F–, Na+, Mg2+ Sol. K has the lowest first ionization energy. Kr has the highest
and Al3+. first ionization energy.
(i) What is common in them ?
Example – 14
(ii) Arrange them in order of increasing ionic radii ?
Sol. (a) Each one of these ions contains 10 electrons and hence Among the second period elements, the actual ionization
all are isoelectronic ions. energies are in the order :
(b) The ionic radii of isoelectronic ions decrease with the Li < B < Be < C < O < N < F < Ne.
increase in the magnitude of the nuclear charge. For example, Explain why (i) Be has higher i H than B (ii) O has lower
consider the isoelectronic ions : N3–, O2–, F–, Na+, Mg2+ and i H than N and F ?
Al3+. All these ions have 10 electrons but their nuclear
Sol. (i) The ionization enthalpy, among other things, depends upon
charges increase in the order :
the type of electron to be removed from the same principal
N3– (+ 7), O2– (+ 8), F– (+ 9), Na+ (+ 11), Mg2+ (+ 12) and Al3+ shell. In case of Be (1 s2 2 s2) the outermost electron is present
(+ 13). Therefore, their ionic radii decrease in the order : in 2s-orbital while in B (1 s2 2 s2 2 p1) it is present in 2p-orbital.
N3– > O2– > F– > Na+ > Mg2+ > Al3+. Since 2s-electrons are more strongly attracted by the nucleus
than 2p-electrons, therefore, lesser amount of energy is
Example – 11 required to knock out a 2p-electron than a 2s-electron.
Consequently, i H of Be is higher than that i H of B.
Arrange following in increasing order of size
(ii) The electronic configuration of N (1s2 2s2 2p1x 2p1y 2p1z)
Ca2+, S2–, P3–, K+
in which 2p-orbitals are exactly half-filled is more stable
Sol. Ions of different elements which have the same number of than the electronic configuration of O (1s2 2s2 2p2x 2p1y 2p1z)
electrons are called isoelectronic ions. in which the 2p-orbitals are neither exactly half-filled nor
The ionic radii of isoelectronic ions decrease with the completely filled. Therefore, it is difficult to remove an
increase in the magnitude of the nuclear charge. electron from N than from O. As a result, iH of N is higher
than that of O. Further, the electronic configuration of F is
All these ions have 18 electrons but nuclear charges
increases in the order : 1s2 2s2 2p2x 2p2y 2p1z. Because of higher nuclear charge (+9),
the first ionization enthalpy of F is higher than that of O.
P3– (+ 15), S2– (16), K+ (19), Ca2+ (20) Further, the effect of increased nuclear charge outweights
 their ionic radii increase in the order the effect of stability due to exactly half-filled orbitals,
Ca2+ < K+ < S2– < P3– therefore, the iH of N and O are lower than that of F.
Out of Cl– & Cl which one is larger & why ? Would you expect the first ionization enthalpies of two
isotopes of the same element to be same or different ?
Justify your answer.
Sol. Sol. Ionization enthalpy, among other things, depends upon the
electronic configuration (number of electrons), and nuclear
charge (number of protons). Since the isotopes of an element
In chloride ion, addition of one more electron in outermost have the same electronic configuration and same nuclear
shell decreases the effective nuclear charge. As a result, the charge, they are expected to have same ionization enthalpy.
force of attraction of the nucleus for the electrons decreases
and hence the ionic radii increase.
Example – 16 Mg+2  Mg+3 + e–1
I.P. of Mg is greater than I.P. of Al. As the third electron is removed form completely filled 2p6
orbital, the energy required is maximum.
Sol. (i) Ionisation potential may be defined as the amount of
energy required to remove the most lossely bound electron Hence IP of Mg is maximum in 3rd row.
from an isolated gaseous atom or ion. Example – 19
(ii) Electronic configuration of Mg is 1s 2s 2p 3s .It has a
2 2 6 2
completely filled valence orbital (i.e. 3s). I.P. of noble gases is maximum.
(iii) Whereas electronic configuration of Al is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 Sol. ‘Ionisation energy or Ionisation potential of an element may
3p1. It has a incompletely filled 3p orbital. be defined as the amount of energy required to remove the
most loosely bound electron from an isolated gaseous atom.’
(iv) As completely filled and half filled orbitals are more
stable than incompletely filled orbitals, the amount of energy The general electronic configuration of noble is ns2np6.
required to remove the valence electron from the incompletely Since noble gas has completely filled p-orbital, the energy
filled 3p orbital of Al is less compared to the completely required is maximum.
filled 3s orbital of Mg. Hence I.P. of noble gases is maximum.
Hence IP of Mg is greater than I.P. of Al. Example – 20
Example – 17
Among the elements B, Al, C and Si
I.P. of P is greater than I.P. of S. (i) Which element has the highest first ionisation
Sol. (i) Ionisation potential may be defined as the amount of enthalpy ?
energy required to remove the most loosely bound electron (ii) Which element has the most metallic character ?
from an isolated gaseous atom or ion. Justify your answer in each case.
(ii) Electronic configuration of P is 1s 2s 2p 3s 3p . It has
2 2 6 2 3
Sol. Arrange the elements B, Al, C and Si into different groups and
half filled 3p orbital. periods in order of their increasing atomic numbers, we have,
(iii) Electronic configuration of S is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p4. It has Group  13 14
incompletely filled 3p orbital.
Period 2 B C
(iv) As completely filled and half filled orbitals are more
Group 3 Al Si
stable than incompletely filled orbitals, the amount of energy
required to remove the valence electron from incompletely (i) Since ionization enthalpy increases along a period and
filled 3p orbital of S is less compared to the half filled 3p decreases down a group, therefore, C has the highest first
orbital of P. ionization enthalpy.
Hence I.P. of P is greater than I.P. of S. (ii) Since metallic character increases down a group and decreases
along a period, therefore, Al, is the most metallic element.
Example – 18
Example – 21
Third I.P. of Mg is maximum in third row.
iH1 value of Mg is more as compare to that of Na while its
Sol. (i) Ionisation potential may be defined as the amount of
iH2 value is less. Explain.
energy required to remove the most loosely bound electron
from an isolated gaseous atom or ion. or
Electronic configuration of Mg is 1s 2s 2p 3s
2 2 6 2 How would you explain the fact that the first ionization enthalpy
of sodium is lower than that of magnesium but its second
First I.P. involves removal of one electron from 3s2
ionization enthalpy is higher than that of magnesium ?
Mg  Mg+1 + e–1
Sol. The electronic configurations of Na and Mg are
Second I.P. involves removal of one electron from 3s1
Na : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s1 and Mg : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2.
Mg+1  Mg+2 + e–1
Third I.P. involves removal of one electron from 2p6
Thus, the first electron in both the cases has to be removed Sol. The second electron gain enthalpy of O is positive as
from the 3s-orbital but the nuclear charge of Na (+ 11) is explained below :
lower than that of Mg (+ 12), therefore, the first ionization
When an electron is added to O atom to form O– ion, energy
energy of sodium is lower than that of magnesium. After the
is released. Thus, first electron gain enthalpy of O is negative.
loss of first electron, the electronic configuration of Na+ is
1s2 2s2 2p6. Here, the electron is to be removed from inert O g   eg   Og  ; eg H  141kJ mol 1
(neon) gas configuration which is very stable and hence
removal of second electron from sodium is very difficult. But when another electron is added to O– to form O2– ion,
However, in case of magnesium, after the loss of first energy is absorbed to overcome the strong electrostatic
electron, the electronic configuration of Mg+ is 1s2 2s2 2p6 repulsion between the negatively charged O– ion and the
3s1. (Here, the electron is to be removed from a 3s orbital second electron being added. Thus, the second electron
which is much easier than to remove an electron from inert gain enthalpy of oxygen is positive.
gas configuration. Therefore, the second ionization enthalpy
of sodium is higher than that magnesium.) Og   eg   O2g ; eg H  780kJ mol 1
Explain why ionization enthalpies decrease down the group Among the elements of the third period of Na to Ar pick
of the periodic table ? out the element
Sol. Ionization enthalpies decrease down the group of the (i) with the highest first ionization energy
periodic table because inner shell increases. As the distance
(ii) with the largest atomic radius
of the outer electrons from the nucleus increases with
increase in atomic radius, the attractive force on the outer (iii) that is the most reactive non-metal
electrons decreases & hence lesser amount of energy is (iv) that is the most reactive metal.
required to knock them out.
Sol. (i) Argon, (ii) Na, (iii) Chlorine, (iv) Sodium.
Example – 23
Example – 26
Why does the first ionisation enthalpy increase as we go from
‘Electron affinity of fluorine is less than that of chlorine’.
left to right across a given period of the periodic table ?
Explain.
Sol. The value of ionisation enthalpy increases with the increase
Sol. (i) Def : Electron gain enthalpy or electron affinity is defined
in atomic number across the period. This is due to the fact
as the amount of energy released, when neutral gaseous
that in moving across the period from left to right :
atom, accepts an electron to form an anion.
(i) nuclear charge increases regularly by one unit.
(ii) The electronic cofiguration of fluorine is 1s22s22p5, while
(ii) progressive addition of electrons occurs in the same level. that of chlorine, it is 1s22s22p63s23p5. In both the elements
(iii) atomic size decreases. there are 7 electrons in their outermost shell. The size of F-
atom is smaller than Cl-atom.
This is due to the gradual increase in nuclear charge and
with the simultaneous decrease in atomic size the electrons (iii) In fluorine, 2p-orbitals are compact and closer to the
are more and more tightly bound to the nucleus. This results nucleus. Thus, the screening effect is very low. Hence there
in the gradual increase in ionisation energy across the period. is electron-electron repulsion in the valence shell. Thus,
when an electron is added to the p-orbital of a fluorine it
Example – 24 experiences less attraction and hence less energy is liberated
to form fluoride ion.
Would you expect the second electron gain enthalpy of O
as positive, more negative or less negative than the first ? (iv) In chlorine, the orbital accepting an electron to form
Justify your answer. chloride ion is 3p-orbital, which is away form the nucleus.
(v) Therefore, the electron-electron repulsion is less and
more energy is liberated, when an electron is added to a
chlorine atom forming a chloride anion. Thus, fluorine has
less electron affinity than chlorine.
Example – 27 much higher energy p-orbitals of the valence shell. That is

why electron gain enthalpies of Be and Mg are positive.
The first (iH1) and the second (iH2) ionization enthalpies
(in kJ mol–1) and the (egH) electron gain enthalpy (in kJ mol–1) of a Example – 29
few elements are given below
Use the periodic table to answer the following questions:
Elements H1 H2 egH
(a) Identify an element with five electrons in the outer
I 520 7300 – 60 subshell.
II 419 3051 – 48 (b) Identify the element that would tend to lose two
III 1681 3374 – 328 electrons.
IV 1008 1846 – 295 (c) Identify the element that would tend to gain two
V 2372 5251 + 98 electons.
VI 738 1451 – 40 (d) Identify the group having metal, non-metal, liquid as
well as gas at room temperature.
Which of the above elements is likely to be :
Sol. (a) The genral electronic configuration of the elements
(a) The least reactive element
having five electrons in the outer subshell is ns2 np5. This
(b) The most reactive metal electronic configuration is characteristic of elements of group
(c) The most reactive non-metal 17, i.e., halogens and their examples are F, Cl, Br, I, At, etc.
(d) The least reactive non-metal (b) The elements which have a tendency to lose two electrons
(e) The metal which can form a stable binary halide of the must have two electrons in the valence shell. Therefore, their
formula MX2 (X = halogen). general electronic configuration should be ns2. This electronic
configuration is characteristic of group 2 elements, i.e., alkaline
Sol. (a) The element V has highest first ionization enthalpy and
earth metals and their examples are Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, etc.
positive electron gain enthalpy and hence it is likely to be
the least reactive element. (c) The elements which have a tendency to accept two
electrons must have six electrons in the valence shell.
(b) The element II which has the least first ionization enthalpy
Therefore, their general electronic configuration is ns2 np4.
and a low negative electron gain enthalpy is the most
This electronic configuration is characteristic of group 16
reactive metal.
elements and their examples are O and S.
(c) The element III which has high first ionization enthalpy
(d) A metal which is liquid at room temperature is mercury. It
and a very high negative electron gain enthalpy is likely to
is a transition metal and belongs to group 12. A non-metal
be the most reactive non-metal.
which is a gas at room temperature is hydrogen (group 1),
(d) The element IV has a high negative electron gain enthalpy nitrogen (group 15), oxygen (group 16), fluorine, chlorine
but not so high first ionization enthalpy. Therefore, it is the (group 17) and inert gases (group 18).
least reactive non-metal.
A non-metal which is a liquid at room temperature is bromine
(e) The element VI has low values for first and second (group 17).
ionization enthalpies. Therefore, it appears that the element
is an alkaline earth metal and hence will form binary halide Example – 30
of the formula MX2.
What are major differences between metals and non-metals ?
Example – 28 Sol. Elements which have a strong tendency to lose electrons
to form cations are called metals while those which have a
Why are electron gain enthalpies of Be and Mg positive ?
strong tendency to accept electrons to form anions are called
Sol. They have fully filled s-orbitals and hence have no tendency non-metals. Thus, metals are strong reducing agents, they
to accept an additional electron. Consequently, energy has have low ionization enthalpies, have less negative electron
to be supplied if an extra electron has to be added to the gain enthalpies, low electronegativity, form basic oxides and
ionic compounds.
Non-metals, on the other hand, are strong oxidising agents,
they have high ionization enthalpies, have high negative
electron gain enthalpies, high electronegatively, form acidic Example – 33

oxides and covalent compounds.
Fluorine shows only -1 oxidation state while other halogen
Example – 31 element shows +3, +5 and +7 oxidation states in addition
to +1, -1. Why?
Distinguish between electronegativity and electron affinity.
Sol. (i) The outer Electronic configuration of halogens are ns2,
Sol. Electron affinity Electronegativity
np 5 they can gain one electron and show a common
1. Electron gain enthalpy or 1. Electronegativity of an oxidation state of –1.
electron affinity is defined atom in a molecule is (ii) The other halogen exhibit higher oxidation state as, +1,
as the amount of energy defined as the tendency +2, +3, +5, and +7 due to vacant d-orbitals in their shell.
released when neutral of an atom to attract (iii) Since Flourine does not have d-orbital, it only exhibits
gaseous atom, accepts an towards itself the shared only ‘–1’ oxidation state.
electron to form an anion. pair of electrons. Therefore, Halogens except fluorine shows positive oxidation
state +1, +2, +3, +5 and +7.
2. It is expressed in eV/atom 2. It does not have any unit
(electron volt per atom) or (it is a number) Example – 34
kJ mol–1 (kilo joules per Considering the elements B, C, N, F and Si, the correct
mol). order of their non-metallic character is
3. It is a kind of absolute 3. It is a relative term (atoms (a) B > C > Si > N > F (b) Si > C > B > N > F
property of the elements. are compared with fluorine, (c) F > N > C > B > Si (d) F > N > C > Si > B
whose assigned value of Sol. In a period, the non-metallic character increases from left to
electronegativity is 4.0 right. Thus, among B, C, N and F, non-metallic character
decreases in the order : F > N > C > B. However, within a
4. Electron affinity value is 4. It is measured when the
group, non-metallic character decreases from top to bottom.
measured when the atoms atoms are in their Thus, C is more non-metallic than Si. Therefore, the correct
are in their gaseous state. combined state (in state sequence of decreasing non-metallic character is :
molecules). F > N > C > B > Si, i.e., option (c) is correct.
Example – 35
Example – 32
The increasing order of reactivity among group 1 elements
Why flourine is most electronegaytive element of periodic is Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs whereas that of group 17 is F > Cl
table ? > Br > I. Explain.
Sol. Electronegativity of an atom in a molecule is defined as the Sol. The elements of group 1 have only one electron in their
tendency of an atom to attract the shared pair of electrons respective valence shells and thus have a strong tendency
towards itself. to lose this electron. The tendency to lose electrons, in
In the periodic table, electronegativity increases with the turn, depends upon the ionization enthalpy. Since the
increase in the atomic number across a period and decreases ionization enthalpy decreases down the group, therefore,
down the group. the reactivity of group 1 elements increases in the same
order : Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs. In contrast, the elements of
Due to small atomic size of Fluorine, attraction between the
group 17, have seven electrons in their respective valence
nucleus of Fluorine and the shared pair of electron in a
shells and thus have a strong tendency to accept one more
molecule is maximum.
electron. The tendency to accept electrons, in turn, depends
Moreover, noble gas (Group - 18) have stable configuration upon their electrode potentials. Since the electrode potentials
and halides (Group - 17) are the most electronegative in a of group 17 elements decrease in the order : F (+ 2.87 V) > Cl
given period. (+ 1.36 V), Br (1.08 V) and I (+ 0.53 V), therefore, their
Therefore, Fluorine is the most electronegative element. reactivities also decrease in the same order : F > Cl > Br > I.
Alternatively, tendency to accept electrons can be linked to

electron gain enthalpy. Since electron gain enthalpy 1
i.e. Electron affinity 
becomes less and less negative as we move from Cl to I, Atomic size
therefore, reactivity increases from Cl to I. F is the most
(ii) Nuclear charge : Electron affinity increases with the
reactive due to its low bond dissociation energy.
increase in the nuclear charge
Example – 36
i.e. Electron affinity  Nuclear charge
Among alkali metals which element do you expect to be
(iii) Screening effect : Electron affinity decreases with the
least electronegative and why ?
increasing screeing affect (shielding effect) of electrons.
Sol. Electronegativity decreases as the size of the atom increases.
Since Fr has the largest size, therefore, it has the least 1
Electron affinity 
electronegativity. Shielding effect
Example – 37
(iv) Electronic configuration : Elements having stable
How does the metallic and non metallic character vary on
electronic configuration shows poor tendency to accept an
moving from left to right in a period ?
electron and hence electron affinity is less.
Sol. On moving from left to right in a period, the number of
valence electrons increases by one at each succeeding Example – 39
element but the number of shells remains the same. As a
Give the formula of a species that will be isoelectronic
result, the nuclear charge increases and the tendency of the
element to lose electron decreases and hence the metallic with K+ ion.
character decreases as we move from left to right in a period. Sol. Isoelectronic species are those which have same number of
Conversely, as the nuclear charge increases, the tendency electrons.
of the element to gain electrons increases and hence the
K+ has 18 electrons.
non-metallic increases from left to right in a period.
Alternatively, metallic character decreases and non-metallic  The species P3–, S2–, Cl–, Ar, Ca2+ etc. are isoelectronic to K+.
character increases as we move from left to right in a period.
It is due to increase in ionization and electron gain enthalpy. Example – 40
Example – 38 To which block (s, p, d or f) does the element with atomic

number 50 belong ?
Explain ‘Electron affinity’. Explain various factors affecting
Sol. The electronic configuration of element with atomic
it ?
number 50 is :
Sol. (i) Defination:
Electron gain enthalpy or electron affinity is defined as the 1s2, 2s22p6, 3s23p63d10, 4s24p64d10, 5s25p2
amount of energy released, when neutral gaseous atom, The last electron enters into 5p-orbital. Hence, it is a
accepts an electron to form an anion. p-block element.
Eg :-
Example – 41

Cl g   e  Clg1
  Energy
Corresponds
Electron affinity 
to What is the group number, period and block of the element
with atomic number 43 ?
(ii) Unit : ev/atom (electron volt per atom) Sol. The electronic configuration of the element with atomic
or number 43 is
kJ/mol (kilo joules per mole of atom) 1s2, 2s22p6, 3s23p63d10, 4s24p64d5, 5s2
(iii) Greater the electron affinity, greater is the non-metallic Since, the last electron is accommodated in d-subshell, the
character. element belongs to d-block. The principal quantum number
of outermost shell is 5, the element belongs to 5th period.
Factors affecting electron affinity :-
Group number of the element = 5 + 2 = 7 i.e.,
(i) Atomic size : Electron affinity increases with the decrease
in atomic size The element belongs to group 7.
Example – 42 Sol. The electronic configurations of nitrogen and oxygen are

as follows :
Give reasons : 1 1 1
N : 1s2, 2s2 2p x 2p y 2p z
The ionic size of Cl- ion is greater than K+ ion, though
both are isoelectronic. O : 1s2, 2s2 2p 2x 2p1y 2p1z
Sol. This is because K+ ion has greater nuclear charge (19) In N, p-orbitals are half filled and hence, its electronic
than that of Cl– (17) and thus, force of attraction towards configuration is stable. It requires more energy to remove
nucleus is more in K+ ion which brings contraction in size. an electron. Hence, the IP of nitrogen is higher than oxygen
atom which has less stable electronic configuration.
Example – 43
Example – 46
Which of the following species will have the largest and
smallest size ? Out of Na+ & Ne which has higher ionization enthalpy.
Mg, Mg2+, Al, Al3+ Explain why.
Sol. Mg and Al, both belong to same period. Sol. Na+ has higher ionization enthalpy than Ne. Na+ & Ne are
isoelectronic species. However, the nuclear charge in Na+
Mg Al
is more than in Ne. Hence, the electrons are more tightly
Atomic number 12 ; 13 held in Na+ & it has higher ionization enthalpy.
Atomic size decreases from left to right across the period.
Example – 47
Thus, Mg atom is larger in size that Al atom.
Cation is smaller than its neutral atom. Mg2+ ion is smaller Why halogens have highest negative electron gain
than Mg atom and Al3+ ion is smaller than Al atom. Thus, enthalpies in their respective periods ?
Al3+ ion size is smallest and Mg atom is largest in size Sol. Halogens have the smallest size in their respective periods
among the given species. and therefore high effective nuclear charge. As a
consequence, they readily accept one electron to acquire
Example – 44 noble gas electronic configuration.
The first ionisation energy of carbon atom is greater than Example – 48
that of boron atom, whereas reverse is true for the second
ionisation energy. Explain. Which has the higher electronegativity : of N and F ?
Sol. The electronic configurations of carbon and boron are as Sol. Fluorine has a higher electronegativity since its size is
follows : smaller.
C : 1s2, 2s2 2p1x 2Py1 Example - 49
B : 1s2, 2s2 2p1x Why down the group atomic size of elements increases?
Due to higher nuclear charge in carbon, the force of Sol. On moving down the group, new shells are being added.
attraction towards valence electron is more in carbon
The nuclear charge is not enough to reduce the size enough.
atom and hence the first ionisation energy is greater than
So the atomic size increases as we move down the group.
boron atom. After loss of one electron, the monovalent
cations have the configurations as follows :
Example - 50
B+ : 1s2, 2s2
C+ : 1s2, 2s2 2p1x To which block (s, p, d or f) does the element with atomic
The B+ configuration is stable one and hence the removal number 34 belong ?
of electron is difficult in comparison to C+. Hence, second
Sol. The electronic configuration of element with atomic
ionisation potential of boron is higher than carbon.
number 34 is :
Example – 45 1s2, 2s22p6, 3s23p63d10, 4s24p4
The last electron enters into 4p-orbital. Hence, it is a
Why N has higher 1st ionisation potential than O-atom ? p-block element.

Structure of Modern Periodic Table 11. The transition elements have a characteristic electronic
configuration which can be represented as:
1. Which of the following is not a Dobereiner triad ?
(a) (n – 2) s2p6d1–10 (n – 1) s2p6ns2
(a) Cl, Br, I (b) Ca, Sr, Ba
(b) (n – 2) s2p6d1–10 (n – 1) s2p6d1 or 2 ns1
(c) Li, Na, K (d) Fe, Co, Ni
(c) (n – 1)s2p6d10 ns2np6nd1–10
2. The electronic configuration of an element is 1s2, 2s22p6,
3s23p3. What is the atomic number of the element which is (d) (n – 1) s2p6d1–10ns0–2
just below the above element in the periodic table. 12. The most electropositive element is :
(a) 34 (b) 49 (a) Cs (b) Ga
(c) 33 (d) 31 (c) Li (d) Pb
3. The basis of modern periodic table is 13. Which one of these is basic.
(a) atomic volume (b) atomic number (a) CO2 (b) SnO2
(c) atomic weights (d) atomic size (c) NO2 (d) SO2
4. Which of the following pairs has both members from the Atomic and Ionic Radii
same group of periodic table
14. Which of the following atom has largest size
(a) Mg, Ba (b) Mg, Na
(a) Cs (b) K
(c) Mg, Cu (d) Mg, Cl
(c) Kr (d) Xe
5. Elements whose outer electronic configuration vary from
15. In comparison to the parent atom, the size of the
ns2np1 to ns2np6 constitute
(a) Cation is smaller but anion is larger
(a) s-Block of elements (b) p-Block of elements
(b) Cation is larger but anion is smaller
(c) d-Block of elements (d) f-Block of elements
(c) Cation and anion are equal in size
6. In the fourth period of the periodic table, how many
elements have one or more 4d electrons ? (d) All the three are correct depending upon the atom
(a) 2 (b) 18 16. Which one is the correct order of the size of the iodine
species.
(c) 0 (d) 6
(a) I > I+ > I– (b) I > I– > I+
7. If the aufbau principle had not been followed, Ca (Z = 20)
would have been placed in the : (c) I+ > I– > I (d) I– > I > I+
(a) s-block (b) p-block 17. Which of the following ions has the smallest radius ?
(c) d-block (d) f-block (a) Li+ (b) Na+
8. La (lanthanum) having atomic number 57 is a member of : (c) Be2+ (d) K+
(a) s-block elements (b) p-block elements 18. In iso – electronic species of Mg2+, N3–, Al3+, the order of
decreasing ionic radii will be
(c) d-block elements (d) f-block elements
(a) N3– > Mg2+ > Al3+ (b) Mg2+ > Al3+ > N3–
9. The element whose electronic configuration is 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2 is
(c) Al3+ > N3– > Mg2+ (d) Al3+ = Mg2+ < N3–
(a) metal (b) metalloid
19. When a chlorine atom becomes chloride ion, its size
(c) inert gas (d) non – metal
(a) remains unaltered (b) increases
10. Ce (58) is a member of :
(c) decreases (d) none of these
(a) s – block (b) p – block
(c) d – block (d) f – block
20. In which of the following pair, both the species are 29. The maximum tendency to form unipositive ion is for the
isoelectronic but first one is large in size than the element which has the following electronic configuration :
second?
(a) 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2 (b) 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p1
(a) S , O
2– 2–
(b) Cl , S
– 2–
(c) 1s2, 2s2, 2p6 (d) 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p3
(c) F , Na
– +
(d) N , P
3– 3–
30. An element will have lowest ionisation potential when its
21. The correct order of ionic size of N3–, Na+, F–, Mg2+ and O2– electronic configuration is
is :
(a) 1s1 (b) 1s2, 2s2, 2p2
(a) Mg > Na > F > O < N
2+ + – 2– 3–
(c) 1s2, 2s2, 2p5 (d) 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s1
(b) N < F > O > Na > Mg
3– – 2– + 2+
31. The first, second and third ionsiation energies (E1, E2 & E3)
(c) Mg2+ < Na+ < F– < O2– < N3– for an element are 7 eV, 12.5 eV and 42.5 eV respectively.
(d) N3– > O2– > F– > Na+ < Mg2+ The most stable oxidation state of the element will be :
22. Arrange the following elements in the order of increasing (a) +1 (b) +4
atomic size Cl, S, P, Ar (c) +3 (d) +2
(a) Ar, Cl, S, P (b) Cl, S, P, Ar 32. The order of ionisation potential between He+ ion and
(c) S, Cl, P, Ar (d) Ar, P, S, Cl H-atom (both species are in gaseous state) is :
Ionization Enthalpy (a) I.P. (He+) = I.P. (H) (b) I.P. (He+) < I.P. (H)
23. Lowest ionisation potential in periods is shown by : (c) I.P. (He+) > I.P. (H) (d) cannot be compared
(a) inert gases (b) halogens 33. The first four I.E. values of an element are 284, 412, 656 and
3210 kJ mol–1. The number of valence electrons in the
(c) alkali metals (d) alkaline earth metals
element are :
24. Which element has the highest ionisation energy ?
(a) one (b) two
(a) Hydrogen (b) Lithium
(c) three (d) four
(c) Boron (d) Sodium
34. The element which has highest first ionization energy in
25. Which of the following iso – electronic ions has the lowest the periodic table is
ionisation energy ?
(a) H (b) Rn
(a) K+ (b) Ca2+
(c) F (d) He
(c) Cl–1 (d) S2–
35. Correct order of first ionization potential among the
26. The correct order of increasing ionisation potentials of K+, following elements Be, B, C, N, O is
Ar, Cl– is
(a) B < Be < C < O < N (b) B < Be < C < N < O
(a) K+ < Ar < Cl– (b) Cl– < K+ < Ar
(c) Be < B < C < N < O (d) Be < B < C < O < N
(c) Cl– < Ar < K+ (d) Ar < Cl– < K+
Electron Gain Enthalpy or Electron Affinity
27. The correct order of second I.E. of C, N, O and F are in the
36. The correct order for electron affinities is a
order :
(a) F > Br > I (b) F O > N > C (b) C > N > O > F
(c) F Br (d) Br N > F > C (d) O > F > N > C
37. Which one of the following statements is incorrect ?
28. The correct arrangement of the elements in the order of
decreasing ionization energies is (a) Greater is the nuclear charge, greater is the electron
gain enthalpy
(a) Na > Mg > Al (b) Mg > Na > Al
(b) Nitrogen has almost zero electron gain enthalpy
(c) Al > Mg > Na (d) Mg > Al > Na
(c) Electron gain enthalpy decreases from fluorine to iodine
in the group
(d) Chlorine has highest electron gain enthalpy
38. The value of electron affinity for noble gases is likely to be 45. Which of the following order is wrong.
(a) high (b) low (a) NH3 < PH3 < AsH3 – Acidic
(c) zero (d) positive (b) Li < Be < B < C – IE
39. Which of the following process involves the gain of energy ? (c) Al2O3 < MgO < Na2O < K2O – Basic
(a) O (g) + e–  O–(g) (d) Li+ < Na+ < K+ < Cs+ – Ionic radius
(b) Na+ + e–  Na Electronegativity and Its Applications
(c) O (g) + e  O (g)
– – 2–
46. Which of the following represent highly electropositive as
(d) O2– (g)  O–(g) + e– well as highly electronegative element in its period
40. Second electron gain enthalpy : (a) Nitrogen (b) Fluorine
(a) is always negative (c) Hydrogen (d) None
(b) is always positive 47. Outermost electronic configuration of least electronegative
(c) can be positive or negative element in the periodic table is
(d) is always zero (a) 2s2 2p5 (b) 3s2 3p5
41. Which of the following element is expected to have highest (c) 2s2 2p4 (d) 6s2 6p6 7s1
electron affinity 48. The element with highest electronegativity value is
(a) 1 s 2 s 2 p 3 s 3 p
2 2 6 2 5
(b) 1 s 2 s 2 p
2 2 3
(a) F (b) Cl
(c) 1 s 2 s 2 p
2 2 4
(d) 1 s 2 s 2 p
2 2 5
(c) P (d) N
42. In which of the following processes, energy is liberated 49. The electronegativity of Cl, F, O, S increases in the order of
(a) Cl  Cl+ + e– (b) HCl H+ + Cl– (a) S, O, Cl, F (b) S, Cl, O, F
(c) O– + e– O2– (d) F + e– F– (c) Cl, S, O, F (d) S, O, F, Cl
43. The correct order of increasing electron affinity of the 50. With respect to chlorine, hydrogen will be
following elements is : (a) Electropositive (b) Electronegative
(a) O < S < F < Cl (b) O < S < Cl < F (c) Neutral (d) None of these
(c) S < O < F < Cl (d) S < O < Cl < F
44. Which one of the following is incorrect ?
(a) An element which has high electronegativity always
has high electron affinity
(b) Electron affinity is the property of an isolated atom
(c) Electronegativity is the property of a bonded atom
(d) Both electronegativity and electron affinity are usually
directly related to nuclear charge and inversely related
to atomic size.

1. Ce3+, La3+, Pm3+ and Yb3+ have ionic radii in the increasing (c) O– ion will tend to resist the addition of another electron
order as. (2002)
(d) O– has comparatively larger size than oxygen atom
(a) La3+ < Ce3+ < Pm3+ < Yb3+
8. Which one of the following sets of ions represents the
(b) Yb3+ < Pm3+ < Ce3+ < La3+ collection of isoelectronic species ? (2004)
(c)La3+> Ce3+ > Pm3+ > Yb3+ (a) K+, Ca2+, Sc3+, Cl– (b) Na+, Ca2+, Sc3+, F–
(d) Yb3+ < Pm3+ < La3+ < Ce3+ (c) K+, Cl–, Mg2+, Sc3+ (d) Na+, Mg2+, Al3+, Cl–
2. According to the periodic law of elements, the variation in 9. Among Al2O3, SiO2, P2O3 and SO2 the correct order of acid
properties of elements is related to their (2003) strength is. (2004)
(a) atomic masses (a) SO2 < P2O3 < SiO2 < Al2O3
(b) nuclear masses (b) SiO2 < SO2 < Al2O3 < P2O3
(c) atomic numbers (c) Al2O3 < SiO2 < SO2 < P2O3
(d) nuclear neutron-proton number ratios (d) Al2O3 < SiO2 < P2O3 < SO2
3. The radius of La (atomic number : La = 57) is 1.06 Å. Which
3+
10. In which of the following arrangements the order is not
one of the following given values will be closest to the according to the property indicated against it ? (2005)
radius of Lu3+ (atomic number : Lu = 71) ? (2003)
(a) Li < Na < K < Rb : Increasing metallic radius
(a) 1.60Å (b) 1.40 Å
(b) I < Br < F < Cl : Increasing electron gain enthalpy (with
(c) 1.06 Å (d) 0.85 Å negative sign)
4. Which of the following groupings represents a collection (c) B < C < N < O : Increasing first ionization enthalpy
of isoelectronic species ? (2003)
(d) Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+ < F– : Increasing ionic size.
(At. No. Cs = 55, Br = 35)
11. Following statements regarding the periodic trends of
(a) Ca2+, Cs+, Br (b) Na+, Ca2+, Mg2+ chemical reactivity of the alkali metals and the halogens are
(c) N3–, F–, Na+ (d) Be, Al3+, Cl– given. Which of these statements give the correct picture ?
5. The atomic numbers of vanadium (V), chromium (Cr), (2006)
manganese (Mn) and iron (Fe) are respectively. 23, 24, 25 and (a) The reactivity decreases in the alkali metals but increases
26. Which one of these may be expected to have the highest in the halogens with increase in atomic number down
second ionization enthalpy ? (2003) the group
(a) Fe (b) V (b) (In both the alkali metals and the halogens the chemical
(c) Cr (d) Mn reactivity decreases with increase in atomic number down
6. Which of the following ions has the highest value of ionic the group
radius ? (2004) (c) Chemical reactivity increase with increase in atomic
(a) Li +
(b) B 3+ number down the group in both the alkali metals and
halogens.
(c) O2–
(d) F–
(d) In alkali metals the reactivity increases but in the
7. The formation of oxide ion, O2– (g) requires first an exothermic halogens it decreases with increase in atomic number
and then an endothermic step as shown below down the group
(O (g) + e–  O– (g); Hº = – 142 kJ mol–1 12. The increasing order of the first ionization enthalpies of the
(O– (g) + e–  O2– (g); Hº = 844 kJ mol–1 elements B, P, S and F (lowest first) is (2007)
(This is because (2004) (a) F < S < P < B (b) P < S < B < F
(a) Oxygen is more electronegative (c) B < P < S < F (d) B < S < P < F
(b) Oxygen has high electron affinity
13. The set representing the correct order of ionic radius is 20. Which of the following series correctly represents relations
(2009) between the elements from X to Y?
(a) Li > Be > Na > Mg
+ 2+ + 2+ (Online 2014 SET-2)
(b) Na+ > Li+ > Mg2+ > Be2+ XY
(c) Li2+ > Na+ > Mg2+ > Be2+ (a) 6C  32Ge Atomic radii increases
(d) Mg2+ > Be2+ > Li+ > Na+ (b) 9F  35Br Electron gain enthalpy with
14. The correct sequence which shows decreasing order of the negative sign increases
ionic radii of the elements is (2010) (c) 3Li  19K Ionization enthalpy increases
(a) Al > Mg > Na > F > O
3+ 2+ + – 2–
(d) 18Ar54Xe Noble character increases
(b) Na > Mg > Al > O > F
+ 2+ 3+ 2– –
21. Similarity in chemical properties of the atoms of elements in
(c) Na+ > F– > Mg2+ > O2– > Al3+ a group of the Periodic table is most closely related to:
(d) O2– > F– > Na+ > Mg2+ > Al3+ (Online 2014 SET-3)
15. Which one of the following orders presents the correct (a) number of principal energy levels
sequence of the increasing basic nature of the given oxides ? (b) number of valence electrons
(2011) (c) atomic numbers
(a) Al2O3 < MgO < Na2O < K2O (d) atomic masses
(b) MgO < K2O < Al2O3 < Na2O 22. Which of the following arrangements represents the
(c) Na2O < K2O < MgO < Al2O3 increasing order (smallest to largest) of ionic radii of the
given species O2–, S2–, N3–, P3– (Online 2014 SET-3)
(d) K2O < Na2O < Al2O3 < MgO
(a) O2– < N3– < S2– < P3– (b) N3– < O2– < P3– < S2–
16. The correct order of electron gain enthalpy with negative
sign of F, Cl, Br and I, having atomic number 9, 17, 35 and 53 (c) N3– < S2– < O2– < P3– d) O2– < P3– < N3– < S2–
(
respectively, is (2011) 23. Which one of the following has largest ionic radius ?
(a) I > Br > Cl > F (b) F > Cl > Br > I (Online 2014 SET-4)
(c) Cl > F > Br > I (d) Br > Cl > I > F
(a) O22 (b) Li
17. The increasing order of the ionic radii of the given
isoelectronic species is (2012) (c) F– (d) B3+
(a) Cl–, Ca2+, K+, S2– (b) S2–, Cl–, Ca2+, K+ 24. The ionic radii (in Å) of N3–, O2– and F– are respectively :
(c) Ca , K , Cl , S
2+ + – 2–
(d) K , S , Ca , Cl
+ 2– 2+ –
(2015)
18. Which of the following represents the correct order of
increasing first ionization enthalpy for Ca, Ba, S, Se and Ar ? (a) 1.71, 1.40 and 1.36 (b) 1.71, 1.36 and 1.40
(2013) (c) 1.36, 1.40 and 1.71 (d) 1.36, 1.71 and 1.40
(a) Ca < S < Ba < Se < Ar (b) S < Se < Ca < Ba < Ar 25. Which of the following represents the correct order of
(c) Ba < Ca < Se < S < Ar (d) Ca < Ba < S < Se < Ar increasing first ionization enthalpy for Ca, Ba, S, Se and
19. The first ionisation potential of Na is 5.1 eV. The value of Ar? (Online 2015 SET-1)
electron gain enthalpy of Na+ will be (2013) (a) S < Se < Ca < Ba < Ar
(a) – 2.55 eV (b) – 5.1 eV (b) Ba < Ca < Se < S < Ar
(c) – 10.2 eV (d) + 2.55 eV (c) Ca < Ba < S < Se < Ar
(d) Ca < S < Ba < Se < Ar
26. Which of the following atoms has the highest first ionization 31. Which one of the following is an acidic oxide ?
energy (2016) (Online 2017 SET-2)

(a) KO2 (b) BaO2
(a) Na (b) K
(c) SiO2 (d) CsO2
(c) Sc (d) Rb
32. For Na + , Mg 2+ , F- and O 2- ; the correct order of increasing
27. Identify the correct order of the size of the following : ionic radii is : (Online 2018 SET-1)
(Online 2016 SET-1)
(a) O 2- < F- < Na + < Mg 2+
(a) Ca2+ < K+ < Ar < S2– < Cl–
(b) Ca2+ < K+ < Ar < Cl– < S2– (b) Na + < Mg 2+ < F- < O 2-
(c) Ar < Ca2+ < K+ < Cl– < S2–
(c) Mg 2+ < Na + < F- < O 2-
(d) Ca < Ar < K < Cl < S
2+ + – 2–
28. The following statements concern elements in the periodic (d) Mg 2+ < O 2- < Na + < F-
table. Which of the following is true? 33. The correct order of electron affinity is :
(Online 2016 SET-2) (Online 2018 SET-2)
(a) All the elements in Group 17 are gases.
(a) F > Cl > O (b) F > O > Cl
(b) The Group 13 elements are all metals.
(c) Elements of Group 16 have lower ionization enthalpy (c) Cl > F > O (d) O > F > Cl
values compared to those of Group 15 in the corresponding 34. The group number, number of valence electrons, and
periods. valency of an element with atomic number 15, respectively,
(d) For Group 15 elements, the stability of +5 oxidation are: (12-03-2019 Shift-I)
state increases down the group. (a) 16, 5 and 2 (b) 15, 5 and 3
29. Consider the following ionization enthalpies of two elements (c) 16, 6 and 3 (d) 15, 6 and 2
‘A’ and ‘B’ (Online 2017 SET-1)
35. In general, the properties that decrease and increase down
Element Ionization enthalpy (kJ/mol)
a group in the periodic table, respectively, are:
1st (2nd 3rd
A (899 1757 14847
(a) atomic radius and electronegativity
B (737 1450 7731
(b) electron gain enthalpy and electronegativity
Which of the following statements is correct ?
(a) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-1 where ‘B’ comes (c) electronegativity and atomic radius
below ‘A’. (d) electronegativity and electron gain enthalpy
(b) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-1 where ‘A’ comes 36. The effect of lanthanide contraction in the lanthanide series
below ‘B’. of elements by enlarge means
(c) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-2 where ‘B’ comes (JEE Main 09-01-2019 shift-I)
below ‘A’. (a) increase in both atomic and ionic radii
(d) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-2 where ‘A’ comes (b) decrease in atomic radii and increase in ionic radii
below ‘B’.
(c) decrease in both atomic and ionic radii
30. The electronic configuration with the highest ionization (d) increase in atomic radii and decrease in ionic radii
enthalpy is : (Online 2017 SET-2)
37. The transition element that has lowest enthalpy of
(a) [Ne] 3s2 3p1 (b) [Ne] 3s2 3p2 atomization is: (JEE Main 09-01-2019 shift-II)
(c) [Ne] 3s2 3p3 (d) [Ar] 3d10 4s2 4p3 (a) Fe (b) Cu
(c) V (d) Zn
38. When the first electron gain enthalpy of oxygen is -141 45. The electron gain enthalpy (ln kJ/mol) of fluorine,
kJ/mol, its second electron gain enthalpy is: chlorine, bromine, and iodine, respectively, are:
(JEE Main 09-01-2019 Shift-II) (JEE Main 07-01-2020 shift-I)
(a) a more negative value than the first (a) –333, –325, –349 and –296
(b) almost the same as that of the first (b) –333, –349, –325 and –296
(c) negative, but less negative than the first (c) –296, –325, –333 and –349
(d) a positive value (d) –349, –333, –325 and –296
39. The effect of lanthanoid contraction in the lanthanoid 46. Within each pair of elements F & Cl, S & Se and Li & Na,
series of elements by and large means: respectively, the elements that release more energy upon
(JEE Main 10-01-2019Shift-I) an electron gain are: (JEE Main 07-01-2020 shift-I)
(a) increase in both atomic and ionic radii (a) Cl, Se and Na (b) Cl, S and Li
(b) decrease in atomic radii and increase in ionic radii (c) F, S and Li (d) F, Se and Na
(c) decrease in both atomic and ionic radii 47. The first ionization energy (in kJ/mol) of Na, Mg, Al and
(d) increase in atomic radii and decrease in ionic radii Si, respectively, are: (JEE Main 08-01-2020 shift-I)
40. The 71st electron of an element X with an atomic number (a) 496, 737, 577, 786
of 71 enters into the orbital: (b) 796, 577, 737, 786
(JEE Main 10-01-2019 shift-I) (c) 496, 577, 786, 737
(a) 6p (b) 4f (d) 786, 737, 577, 496
(c) 5d (d) 6s 48. The increasing order of the atomic radii of the following
41. The correct option with respect to the Pauling elements is: (JEE Main 08-01-2020 shift-II)
electronegativity values of the elements is: A. C B. O
(JEE Main 11-01-2019 shift-II) C. F D. Cl
(a) Te > Se (b) Ga < Ge E. Br
(c) Si < Al (d) P > S (a) B < C < D < A < E (b) C < B < A < D < E
42. The IUPAC symbol for the element with atomic number (c) A < B < C < D < E (d) D < C < B < A < E
119 would be: (JEE Main 08-04-2019 shift-II)
49. B has a smaller first ionization enthalpy than Be. Consider
(a) Uue (b) Une the following statements:
(c) Unh (d) Uun (i) It is easier to remove 2p electron than 2s electron
43. The correct order of the first ionization enthalpies is: (ii) 2p electron of B is more shielded from the nucleus by
(JEE Main 10-04-2019 shift-II) the inner core of electrons that the 2s electron of Be
(iii) 2s electron has more penetration power than 2p
(a) Ti < Mn < Zn < Ni (b) Ti < Mn< Ni < Zn electron
(c) Mn < Ti < Zn < Ni (d) Zn < Ni < Mn < Ti (iv) Atomic radius of B is more than Be
44. The pair that has similar atomic radii is: (Atomic number B = 5, Be = 4)
(JEE Main 12-04-2019 shift-II) The correct statements are:
(a) Mn and Re (JEE Main 09-01-2020 shift-I)
(b) Ti and Hf (a) (i), (ii) and (iii) (b) (i), (iii) and (iv)
(c) Sc and Ni (c) (ii), (iii) and (iv) (d) (i), (ii) and (iv)
(d) Mo and W
50. The first and second ionization enthalpies of a metal are 56. Among the statements (I-IV), the correct ones are:
496 and 4560 kJ mol–1 respectively. How many moles of HCl (JEE Main 03-09-2020 shift-II)
and H2SO4, respectively, will be needed to react completely
(I) Be has smaller atomic radius compared to Mg.
with 1 mole of metal hydroxide?
(JEE Main 09-01-2020 shift-II) (II) Be has higher ionization enthalpy than Al
(a) 1 and 2 (III) Charge/radius ratio of Be is greater than that of Al.
(b) 1 and 0.5 (IV) Both Be and Al form mainly covalent compounds.
(c) 1 and 1 (a) (I), (II) and (IV)
(d) 2 and 0.5 (b) (I), (II) and (III)
51. In general, the property (magnitudes only) that shows (c) (II), (III) and (IV)
an opposite trend in comparison to other properties (d) (I), (III) and (IV)
across a period is: (JEE Main 02-09-2020 shift-I)
57. The ionic radii of O–2, F–, Na+ and Mg2+ are in the order:
(a) Ionization enthalpy (JEE Main 04-09-2020 shift-I)
(b) Electronegativity (a) F– > O2– > Na+ > Mg2+
(c) Atomic radius (b) Mg2+ > Na+ > F– > O2–
(d) Electron gain enthalpy (c) O2– > F– > Na+ > Mg2+
52. The metal mainly used in devising photoelectric cells is: (d) O2– > F– > Mg2+ > Na+
(JEE Main 02-09-2020 shift-I)
58. The elements with atomic numbers 101 and 104 belong
(a) Li (b) Cs to, respectively: (JEE Main 04-09-2020 shift-I)
(c) Rb (d) Na (a) Actinoids and Group 6
53. Three elements X, Y and Z are in the 3 period of the
rd
(b) Group 11 and Group 4
periodic table. The oxides of X, Y and Z, respectively, are
(c) Group 6 and Actinoids
basic, amphoteric and acidic. The correct order of the
atomic numbers of X, Y and Z is: (d) Actinoids and Group 4
(JEE Main 02-09-2020 shift-II) 59. The atomic number of Unnilunium is ……….
(a) X < Y < Z (JEE Main 06-09-2020 shift-II)
(b) Y > X > Z 60. The correct order of the ionic radii of O2–, N3–, F–, Mg2+ Na+
and Al3+ is: (2020-09-05 shift-II)
(c) Z < Y < X
(a) N3– < O2– < F– < Na+ < Mg2+ < Al3+
(d) X < Z < Y
(b) Al3+ < Na+ < Mg2+ < O2– < F– < Al3+
54. The atomic number of the element Unnilennium is:
(c) Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+ < F– < O2– < N3–
(JEE Main 03-09-2020 shift-I)
(d) N3– < F– < O2– < Mg2+ < Na+ < Al3+
(a) 109 (b) 102
61. Consider the elements Mg, Al, S, P and Si, the correct
(c) 119 (d) 108
increasing order of their first ionization enthalpy is
55. The five successive ionization enthalpies of an element
are 800, 2427, 3658, 25024 and 32824 kJ mol–1. The (2021-02-24-shift-I)
number of valence electrons in the element is: (a) Al < Mg < Si < S < P
(JEE Main 03-09-2020 shift-II)
(b) Mg < Al < Si < S < P
(a) 2 (b) 4
(c) Mg < Al < Si < P < S
(c) 3 (d) 5
(d) Al < Mg < S < Si < P
62. Match List-I with List-II. (2021-02-26-shift-I) 67. Outermost electronic configuration of a group 13 element,
List-1 List-2 E, is 4s2,4p1. The electronic configuration of an element of
p-block period-five placed diagonally to element, E is.
Electronic configuration  i H in kJ mol–1 (of elements) (2021-07-20-shift-II)
(a) 1s2 2s2 (i) 801 (a) [Kr]3d104s24p2 (b) [Ar]3d104s24p2
(b) 1s2 2s2 2p4 (ii) 899 (c) [Xe]5d10 6s26p2 (d) [Kr]4d105s25p2
(c) 1s2 2s2 2p3 (iii) 1314 68. Which one of the following statements for D.I. Mendeleev,
(d) 1s2 2s2 2p1 (iv) 1402 is incorrect? (2021-07-22-shift-II)
(Choose the most appropriate answer from the options (a) He authored the textbook – Principles of Chemistry.
given below : (b) At the time, he proposed Periodic Table of elements
(a) (a)  (ii), (b)  (iii), (c)  (iv), (d)  (i) structure of atom was known.
(b) (a)  (i), (b)  (iii), (c)  (i), (d)  (ii) (c) Element with atomic number 101 is named after him.
(c) (a)  (iv), (b)  (i), (c)  (ii), (d)  (iii) (d) He invented accurate barometer.
(d) (a)  (i), (b)  (iv), (c)  (iii), (d)  (ii) 69. The ionic radii of K+, Na+, Al3+ and Mg2+ are in the order:
63. The correct order of electron gain enthalpy is (2021-07-25-shift-I)
(2021-02-26-shift-II) (a) Na+ < K+ < Mg2+ < Al3+
(a) S > Se > Te > O (b) Te > Se > S > O (b) Al3+ < Mg2+ < K+ < Na+
(c) S > O > Se > Te (d) O > S > Se > Te (c) Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+ < K+
64. Which pair of oxides is acidic in nature? (d) K+ < Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+
(2021-02-26-shift-II)
70. The ionic radii of F– and O2– respectively are 1.33 Å and 1.4
(a) N2O, BaO (b) CaO, SiO2 Å, while the covalent radius of N is 0.74 Å. The correct
(c) B2O3, SiO2 (d) B2O3, CaO statement for the ionic radius of N3– from the following is:
65. The ionic radius of Na+ ion is 1.02 Å. The ionic radii (in Å) of (2021-07-25-shift-II)
Mg2+ and Al3+, respectively, are : (a) It is smaller than F– and N

(2021-03-18-shift-I) (b) It is bigger than O2– and F–
(a) 1.05 and 0.99 (b) 0.72 and 0.54 (c) It is bigger than F– and N, but smaller than of O2–
(c) 0.68 and 0.72 (d) 0.85 and 0.99
(d) It is smaller than O2– and F–, but bigger than of N
66. The first ionization energy of magnesium is smaller as
71. The CORRECT order of first ionisation enthalpy is:
compared to that of elements X and Y, but higher than that (2021-07-27-shift-II)
of Z. The elements X, Y and Z, respectively, are :
(a) Mg < S < Al < P (b) Mg < Al < S < P
(2021-03-18-shift-II)
(c) Al < Mg < S < P (d) Mg < Al < P < S
(a) chlorine, lithium and sodium
(b) neon, sodium and chlorine
(c) argon, lithium and sodium
(d) argon, chlorine and sodium
72. Match List-I with List-II: (2021-07-27-shift-I) (d) (Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct
explanation of (A)
List – I List – II
75. Number of amphoteric compounds among the following is
(a) NaOH (i) Acidic
______. (2021-02-24-shift-I)
(b) Be (OH)2 (ii) Basic
(a) BeO (b) BaO
(c) Ca (OH)2 (iii) Amphoteric
(c) Be (OH)2 (d) Sr (OH)2
(d) B (OH)3
76. The characteristics of elements X, Y and Z with atomic
(e) Al (OH)3 numbers, respectively, 33, 53 and 83 are:
(Choose the most appropriate answer from the options (2021-03-16-shift-II)
given below: (a) X and Y are metalloids and Z is a metal
(a) (a)- (ii), (b)-(ii), (c)- (iii), (d)- (ii), (e)- (iii) (b) X, Y and Z are metals
(b) (a)-(ii), (b)- (iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i), (e)-(iii) (c) X and Z are non-metals and Y is a metalloid
(c) (a)-(ii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(i), (e)-(iii) (d) X is a metalloid, Y is a non-metal and Z is a metal
(d) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iii), (e)-(iii) 77. Identify the elements X and Y using the ionisation
73. The correct order of ionic radii for the ions, P3–, S2–, Ca2+, energy values given below :Ionization energy (kJ/mol)
K , Cl is:
+ –
(2021-08-27-shift-II) (2021-03-18-shift-II)
(a) P3– > S2– > Cl– > K+ > Ca2+ 1st 2nd
(b) Cl– > S2– > P3– > Ca2+ > K+ X 495 4563
(c) P3– > S2– > Cl– > Ca2+ > K+ Y 731 1450
(d) K+ > Ca2+ > P3– > S2– > Cl– (a) X = F; Y = Mg (b) X = Mg; Y = F
74. Given below are two statements: one is labelled (c) X = Mg; Y = Na (d) X = Na; Y = Mg
as Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). 78. The absolute value of the electron gain enthalpy of
Assertion (A): Metallic character decreases and non- halogens satisfies: (2021-03-17-shift-I)
metallic character increases on moving from left to right (a) Cl > F > Br > I (b) I > Br > Cl > F
in a period.
(c) Cl > Br > F > I (d) F > Cl > Br > I
Reason (R): It is due to increase in ionisation enthalpy
79. The set of elements that differ in mutual relationship from
and decrease in electron gain enthalpy when one moves
those of the other sets is : (2021-03-17-shift-II)
from left to right in a period.
(a) B - Si (b) Li - Mg
(In the light of the above statements, choose the most
appropriate answer from the options given below: (c) Be - Al (d) Li - Na
(2021-08-31-shift-I) 80. The set, in which compounds have different nature is:
(a) (A) is false but (R) is true. (2021-07-20-shift-I)
(a) B (OH)3 and H3PO3 (b) B (OH)3 and Al (OH)3
(b) (A) is true but (R) is false
(c) NaOH and Ca (OH)2 (d) Be (OH)2 and Al (OH)3
(c) (Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct
explanation of (A)

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option]
7. In which of the following pairs, the ionization energy of the
1. The order of screening effect of electrons of s, p, d and f first species is less than that of the second
orbitals of a given shell of an atom on its outer shell
(a) N, P (b) Be+, Be
electrons is:
(c) N, N– (d) S, P
(a) s > p > d > f (b) f > d > p > s
8. For a given value of n (principal quantum number),
(c) p < d < s < f (d) f > p > s > d
ionization energy is highest for
2. The electronic configuration of gadolinium (Atomic
(a) d-Electrons (b) f-Electrons
number 64) is
(c) p-Electrons (d) s-Electrons
(a) [Xe] 4f 3 5d 5 6s 2 (b) [Xe] 4f 7 5d 2 6s 1
9. The electronic configurations of the elements X, Y, Z and J
(c) [Xe] 4f 7 5d 1 6s 2 (d) [Xe] 4f 8 5d 6 6s 2
are given below. Which element has the highest metallic
3. The statement that is not correct for periodic classification character ?
of elements is :
(a) X = 2, 8, 4 (b) Y = 2, 8, 8
(a) The properties of elements are periodic function of
(c) Z = 2, 8, 8, 1 (d) J = 2, 8, 8, 7
their atomic numbers.
10. Which of the following is correct order of Ist, IInd and
(b) Non metallic elements are less in number then metallic
IIIrd ionization energy of nitrogen ?
elements.
(a) I > II > III (b) III > II > I
(c) For transition elements, the 3d-orbitals are filled with
electrons after 3p-orbitals and before 4s-orbitals. (c) I > II < III (d) II > I > III
(d) The first ionisation enthalpies of elements generally 11. The graph of ionization energy and atomic number does
increase with increase in atomic number as we go not increase smoothly because
along a period. (a) the values for Be and Mg are high and this is attributed
4. The period number in the long form of the periodic table to the stability of a filled s level
is equal to (b) the values for N and P are high due to half filled p-
(a) Magnetic quantum number of any element of the orbital
period. (c) both (a) and (b) are correct
(b) Atomic number of any element of the period. (d) None of these
(c) Maximum Principal quantum number of any element 12. Electronegativity values for the elements help in predicting
of the period. (a) Polarity of bonds
(d) Maximum Azimuthal quantum number of any element (b) Dipole moments
of the period.
(c) Valency of elements
5. The elements in which electrons are progressively filled
(d) Position in the electrochemical series
in 4f-orbital are called
13. The lower electron affinity of fluorine than that of chlorine
(a) Actinoids (b) Transition elements
is due to
(c) Lanthanoids (d) Halogens
(a) Smaller size
6. From the ground state electronic configuration of the
(b) Smaller nuclear charge
elements given below, pick up the one with highest value
of second ionization energy (c) Difference in their electronic configurations
(a) 1 s2 2 s2 2 p6 3 s2 (b) 1 s2 2 s2 2 p6 3 s1 (d) Its highest reactivity
(c) 1 s2 2 s2 2 p6 (d) 1 s2 2 s2 2 p5
14. Among halogens, the correct order of amount of energy 23. A, B and C are hydroxy-compounds of the elements X, Y
released in electron gain (electron gain enthalpy) is: and Z respectively. X, Y and Z are in the same period of
(a) F > Cl > Br > I (b) F < Cl Br > I (d) F < Cl < Br < I than seven. B reacts with both strong acids and strong
alkalis. C gives an aqueous solution which is strongly
15. In which of the following sets of elements, they have
alkaline.
nearly the same atomic size
Which of the following statements is/are true ?
(a) Li, Be, B, C (b) Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba
I : The three elements are metals.
(c) O, S, Se, Te (d) Fe, Co, Ni, Cu
II : The electronegativities decrease from X to Y to Z.
16. The correct order of the sizes of C, N, P, S, is
III : The atomic radius decreases in the order X, Y and Z.
(a) N < C < P < S (b) C < N < S < P
IV : X, Y and Z could be phosphorus, aluminium and
(c) C < N < P < S (d) N < C < S < P
sodium respectively.
17. IE1 and IE2 of Mg are 178 and 348 kcal mol–1 respectively.
(a) I, II, III only correct (b) I, III only correct
The energy required for the reaction Mg (g)  Mg2+ (g) +
2e– is (c) II, IV only correct (d) II, III, IV only correct
(a) + 170 kcal (b) + 526 kcal 24. The electron affinities of B, C, N and O are in the order of
(c) – 170 kcal (d) – 525 kcal (a) B < C < N < O (b) B < C < O > N
18. Which one of the following is true about metallic character (c) B < C > O > N (d) B > C < O < N
when we move from left to right in a period and top to Objective Questions II [One or more than one
bottom in a group correct option]
(a) Increases both in the period and group
25. Which of the following elements will gain one electron
(b) Decreases both in the period and group more readily in comparison to other elements of their
(c) Decreases in the period and increases in a group group?
(d) Increases in the period and decreases in a group (a) S (g) (b) Na (g)
19. The first ionisation enthalpies of Na, Mg, Al and Si are in (c) O (g) (d) Cl (g)
the order: 26. Which of the following sets contain only isoelectronic
(a) Na < Mg > Al < Si (b) Na > Mg > Al > Si ions?
(c) Na < Mg < Al < Si (d) Na > Mg > Al < Si (a) Zn2+ , Ca2+ , Ga3+ , Al3+
20. The ionization energy of boron is less than that of (b) K+ , Ca2+ , Sc3+ , Cl–
beryllium because : (c) P3– , S2– , Cl– , K+
(a) beryllium has a higher nuclear charge tha boron (d) Ti4+ , Ar , Cr3+ , V5+
(b) beryllium has a lower nuclear charge than boron 27. The first ionisation energy of first atom is greater than
(c) the outermost electron in boron occupies a 2p-orbital that of second atom, whereas reverse order is true for
their second ionisation energy. Which set of elements is
(d) the 2s and 2p-orbitials of boron are degenerate
in accordance to above statement ?
21. Which one of the following elements shows both positive
(a) C > B (b) P > S
and negative oxidation states ?
(c) Be > B (d) Mg > Na
(a) Cesium (b) Fluorine
28. Which of the following effects the electronegativity of an
(c) Iodine (d) Xenon
atom ?
22. The electronegativity of the following elements increases
(a) s-Character in hybridization
in the order :
(b) Multiplicity of bond between atoms
(a) C < N < Si < P (b) Si < P < C < N
(c) Oxidation number
(c) N < C < P < Si (d) C < Si < N < P
(d) The number of neutrons in the nucleus
29. Which of the following statements are correct?
Match the Following
(a) Helium has the highest first ionisation enthalpy in the
periodic table.
Each question has two columns. Four
(b) Chlorine has less negative electron gain enthalpy than
options are given representing matching of
fluorine. elements from Column-I and ColumnII. Only
(c) Mercury and bromine are liquids at room temperature. one of these four options corresponds to a
(d) In any period, atomic radius of alkali metal is the
correct matching.For each question, choose
highest. the option corresponding to the correct
Assertion Reason matching.
33. Electronic configuration of some elements is given in
(A) If both assertion and reason are correct
Column I and their electron gain enthalpies are given in
and reason is the correct explanation of Column II. Match the electronic configuration with
assertion. electron gain enthalpy.
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but Column - I Column - II
reason is not the correct explanation of Electronic configuration Electron Gain
assertion.
Enthalpy/kJ mol–1
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false. (A) 1s2 2s2 2p2 (P) - 53
(D) If assertion is false but reason is true. (B) 1s2 2s1 2p6 3s1 (Q) - 328
30. Assertion (A) : The 4f-and 5f-inner transition series of (C) 1s2 2s2 2p5 (R) - 141
elements are placed separately at the bottom of the periodic
(D) 1s 2s 2p
2 2 4
(S) + 48
table.
34. Match the correct ionisation enthalpies and electron gain
Reason (R) : (i) This prevents the undue expansion of the
enthalpies of the following elements.
periodic table i.e., maintains its structure.
(ii) This preserve the principles of classification by Elements     eg
keeping elements with similar properties in a single (A) Most reactive non (P) 419 3051 - 48
column. metal
(a) A (b) B (B) Most reactive metal (Q) 1681 3374 - 328
(c) C (d) D (C) Least reactive element (R) 738 1451 - 40
31. Assertion (A) : The 5th period of periodic table contains (D) Metal forming binary (S) 2372 5251 + 48
18 elements not 32.
halide
Reason (R) : n = 5, l = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. The order in which the energy
of available orbitals 4d, 5s and 5p increases is 5s < 4d < 5p and Paragraph Type Questions
the total number of orbitals available are 9 and thus 18 Use the following passage, to anwers Q. 35 to
electrons can be accomodated.
Q. 37
(a) A (b) B
Passage
(c) C (d) D
Nuclear charge actually experienced by an electron is
32. Assertion (A) : Third ionisation energy of phosphorous
termed as effective nuclear charge. The effective nuclear
is larger than sulphur.
charge Z* actually depends on type of shell and orbital
Reason (R) : There is a larger amount of stability associated in which electron is actually present. The relative extent
with filled s- and p- sub-shells (a noble gas electron to which the various orbitals penetrate the electron clouds
configuration) which corresponds to having eight electrons of other orbitals is.
in the valence shell of an atom or ion.
s > p > d > f (for the same value of n)
(a) A (b) B
The phenomenon in which penultimate shell electrons
(c) C (d) D act as screen or shield in between nucleus and valence
shell electrons and thereby reducing nuclear charge is
known as shielding effect. The penultimate shell electrons
Use the following passage, to anwers Q. 38 to Q. 40
repel the valence shell electron to keep them loosely held Passage
with nucleus. It is thus evident that more is the shielding
The (IE)1 and the (IE)2 in kJ mol–1 of a few elements
effect, lesser is the effective nuclear charge and lesser is
designated by Roman numerals are shown below :
the ionization energy.
Element (IE)1 (IE)2
35. Which of the following valence electron experience
maximum effective nuclear charge ? A 2372 5251
(a) 4s1 (b) 4p1 B 520 7300
(c) 3d1 (d) 2p3 C 900 1760
36. Ionization energy is not influenced by : D 1680 3380
(a) Size of atom 38. Which of the above elements is likely to be a reactive
metal ?
(b) Effective nuclear charge
(a) A (b) B
(c) Electrons present in inner shell
(c) C (d) D
(d) Change in entropy
39. Which of the above elements is likely to be a reactive
37. Which of the following is not concerned to effective
non-metal ?
nuclear charge ?
(a) A (b) B
(a) Higher ionization potential of carbon than boron
(c) C (d) D
(b) Higher ionization potential of magnesium than
aluminium 40. Which represents a noble gas ?
(c) Higher values of successive ionization energy (a) A (b) B
(d) Higher electronegativity of higher oxidation state (c) C (d) D


Objective Questions I 9. Ionic radii of (1999)
(a) Ti < Mn
4+ 7+
(b) Cl < Cl
35 – 37 –
[Only one correct option]
(c) K > Cl
+ –
(d) P3+ > P5+
1. The electronegativity of the following elements increase
10. The correct order of radii is (2000)
in the order (1987)
(a) N < Be < B (b) F– < O2– < N3–
(a) C, N, Si, P (b) N, Si, C, P
(c) Na < Li < K (d) Fe3+ < Fe2+ < Fe4+
(c) Si, P, C, N (d) P, Si, N, C
11. The set representing the correct order of first ionization
2. The first ionisation potential (electron volts) of nitrogen
potential is (2001)
and oxygen atoms are respectively given by (1987)
(a) K > Na > Li (b) Be > Mg > Ca
(a) 14.6, 13.6 (b) 13.6, 14.6
(c) B > C > N (d) Ge > Si > C
(c) 13.6, 13.6 (d) 14.6, 14.6
12. Identify the least stable ion amongst the following
3. Atomic radii of fluorine and neon in angstrom units are
(2002)
respectively given by (1987)
(a) Li+ (b) Be–
(a) 0.72, 1.60 (b) 1.60, 1.60
(c) B– (d) C–
(c) 0.72, 0.72 (d) None of these
13. The increasing order of atomic radii of the following Group
4. Which one of the following is the smallest in size ? (1989)
13 elements is (2016)
(a) N3– (b) O2–
(a) Al < Ga < In < Tl (b) Ga < Al < In < Tl
(c) F– (d) Na+
(c) Al < In < Ga < Tl (d) Al < Ga < Tl < In
5. Amongst the following elements (whose electronic
configurations are given below), the one having the highest Objective Questions II
ionisation energy is (1990) [One or more than one correct option]
(a) [Ne] 3s 3p
2 1
(b) [Ne] 3s 3p
2 3
14. The statements that is/are true for the long form of the
(c) [Ne] 3s 3p
2 2
(d) [Ne] 3d 4s 4p
10 2 3 Periodic Table is/are (1988)
6. Which has most stable +2 oxidation state ? (1995) (a) It reflects the sequence of filling the electrons in the
(a) Sn (b) Pb order of sub-energy level s, p, d and f
(c) Fe (d) Ag (b) It helps to predict the stable valency states of the
elements
7. Which of the following has the maximum number of
unpaired electrons ? (1996) (c) It reflects trends in physical and chemical properties of
the elements
(a) Mg2+ (b) Ti3+
(d) It helps to predict the relative ionicity of the bond
(c) V3+ (d) Fe2+
between any two elements
8. The incorrect statement among the following is (1997)
15. The first ionization potential of nitrogen and oxygen atoms
(a) the first ionisation potential of Al is less than the first are related as follows (1989)
ionisation potential of Mg
(a) The ionization potential of oxygen is less than the
(b) the second ionisation potential of Mg is greater than ionization potential of nitrogen.
the second ionisation potential of Na
(b) The ionization potential of nitrogen is greater than the
(c) the first ionisation potential of Na is less than the first ionization potential of oxygen.
ionisation potential of Mg
(c) The two ionization potential values are comparable.
(d) the third ionisation potential of Mg is greater than third
(d) The difference between the two ionization potential is
ionisation potential of Al
too large.
16. Sodium sulphate is soluble in water whereas barium (a) A (b) B
sulphate is sparingly soluble because (1989)
(c) C (d) D
(a) the hydration energy of sodium sulphate is more than
20. Assertion : The first ionization energy of Be is greater
its lattice energy
than that of B.
(b) the lattice energy of barium sulphate is more than its
Reason : 2p orbital is lower in energy than 2s. (2000)
hydration energy
(a) A (b) B
(c) the lattice energy has not role to play in solubility
(c) C (d) D
(d) the hydration energy of sodium sulphate is less than
its lattice energy Subjective questions
17. The option(s) with only amphoteric oxides is (are) 21. Arrange the following in (1985)
(2017) (i) Decreasing ionic size : Mg , O , Na , F
2+ 2– + –
(a) NO, B2O3, PbO, SnO2 (ii) Increasing acidic property : ZnO, Na2O2, P2O5, MgO
(b) Cr2O3, CrO, SnO, PbO (iii) Increasing first ionisation potential : Mg, Al, Si, Na
(c) Cr2O3, BeO, SnO, SnO2 22. Arrange the following in
(d) ZnO, Al2O3, PbO, PbO2 Increasing size : Cl–, S2–, Ca2+, Ar (1986)
Numeric Value Type Questions 23. The first ionisation energy of carbon atom is greater than
18. The 1st, 2nd and the 3rd ionization enthalpies I1, I2 and I3, that of boron atom whereas, the reverse is true for the
of four atoms with atomic numbers n, n + 1, n + 2 and n + second ionisation energy. Explain. (1989)
3, where n < 10, are tabulated below. What is the value of 24. Arrange the following in (1991)
n? (2020) (i) Increasing order of ionic size : N3–, Na+, F–, O2–, Mg2+
Atomic number Ionization Enthalpy (kJ/mol) (ii) Increasing order of basic character : MgO, SrO, K2O,
I1 I2 I3 NiO, Cs2O
n 1681 3374 6050 (ii) Arrange the following ions in order of their increasing
n+1 2081 3952 6122 radii: Li+, Mg2+, K+, Al3+.
n+2 496 4562 6910 25. Compare qualitatively the first and second ionization
potentials of copper and zinc. Explain the observation.
n+3 738 1451 7733
(1996)
Assertion Reason
Fill in the Blanks
(A) If both assertion and reason are correct
26. On Mulliken scale, the average of ionization potential and
and reason is the correct explanation of electron affinity is known as ......... (1985)
assertion. 27. Ca2+ has a smaller ionic radius than K+ because it has ...........
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but (1993)
reason is not the correct explanation of 28. Compounds that formally contain Pb4+ are easily reduced
assertion. to Pb2+. The stability of the lower oxidation state is due to
.......... (1997)
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
True/False
(D) If assertion is false but reason is true.
29. In group IA of alkali metals, the ionization potential
19. Assertion : F atom has a less negative electron affinity decreases down the group. Therefore, lithium is a poor
than Cl atom. reducing agent. (1987)
Reason : Additional electrons are repelled more effectively 30. The decreasing order of electron affinity of F, Cl, Br is
by 3p electrons in Cl atom than by 2p electrons in F atom. F > Cl > Br. (1993)
(1998)
Note:
PERIODIC PROPERTIES

CHEMICAL BONDING
Chapter 03 132
CHEMICAL BONDING
1. INTRODUCTION in the combination process. It is, therefore, quite reasonable to

consider the outer shell electrons, i.e., valence shell electrons
Atoms are usually not capable of free existence but groups of while discussing chemical bonds.
atoms of the same or different elements exist as one species, e.g., G.N. Lewis introduced simple symbols to denote the valence shell
H2, O2, P4, S8, H2O. electrons in an atom. The outer shell electrons are shown as dots
A group of atoms existing together as one species and having surrounding the symbol of the atom. These symbols are known
characteristic properties is called a molecule. as Lewis symbols or electron dot symbols. These symbols ignore
the inner shell electrons. A few examples are given below :
Obviously, there must be some force which holds these atoms
together within the molecules.
2. CHEMICAL BOND
4. IONIC BOND
This force which holds the atoms together within a molecule is
called a chemical bond. When a bond is formed by complete transference of electrons
2.1 Why do atoms combine ? from one atom to another so as to complete their outermost orbits
by acquiring 8 electrons (i.e., octet) or 2 electrons (i.e., duplet) in
Lewis-Kossel Approach to Chemical Bonding
case of hydrogen, lithium etc. and hence acquire the stable nearest
The atoms of different elements combine with each other in order noble gas configuration, the bond formed is called ionic bond or
to complete their respective octets (i.e., 8 electrons in their electrovalent bond.
outermost shell) or duplet (i.e., outermost shell having 2 electrons)
4.1 Explanation of Ionic Bond
in case of H, Li and Be to attain stable nearest noble gas
configuration. Atoms are electrically neutral. Therefore, they possess equal
number of protons and electrons. On losing an electron, an atom
2.2 Modes of Chemical Composition
becomes positively charged since now the number of protons
This can occur in two ways : exceeds the number of electrons.
1. By complete transference of one or more electrons from one
atom to another. This process is referred to as electrovalency  A   e
A 
and the chemical bond formed is termed as electrovalent On the other hand, in case of atom, gaining the electron, the
bond or ionic bond. number of electrons exceeds the number of protons and thus the
2. By sharing of electrons. This can occur in two ways as atom becomes negatively charged.
follows :
B  e  
 B
(a) When the shared electrons are contributed by the two
The oppositely charged particles formed above attract each other
combining atoms equally, the bond formed is called
by electrostatic forces of attraction. The bond thus formed is
covalent bond.
known as electrovalent or ionic bond.
(b) When these electrons are contributed entirely by one
Examples
of the atoms but shared by both, the bond formed is
known as a coordinate bond, also called dative bond.
3. LEWIS SYMBOLS
In the formation of a molecule, only the outer shell electrons are

involved and they are known as valence electrons. The inner
shell electrons are well protected and are generally not involved
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
CHEMICAL BONDING 133
of their negative ions is very common, e.g., in case of chlorine,
electron affinity is +348 kJ/mole, i.e.,
Cl (g) + e–  Cl– + 348 kJ/mole
or E.Z. = + 348 kJ mol–1
(iii) Lattice Enthalpy (Lattice Energy)
In the formation of ionic compounds, the positively charged
ions combine with negatively charged ions to form the
compound.
A+ (g) + B– (g)  A+ B– (s)
The energy released when the requisite number of gaseous
positive and negative ions combine to form one mole of the
ionic compound is called lattice enthalpy.
4.4 Characteristics of Ionic Compounds
1. Physical State
4.2 Electrovalency These compounds usually exist in the solid state.
The number of electrons lost or gained during the formation of an 2. Crystal Structure
electrovalent linkage is termed as the electrovalency of the element. X-ray analysis of the ionic compounds shows that they
For example, sodium and calcium lost 1 and 2 electrons exist as ions and not as molecules. These ions are arranged
respectively and so their valencies are 1 and 2. Similarly, chlorine in a regular pattern in the three dimensional space to form a
and oxygen gain 1 and 2 electrons respectively, so they possess lattice.
an electrovalency of 1 and 2. In other words, valency is equal to The pattern of arrangement, however, depends upon the
the charge on the ion. size and charges of the ions. For example, in case of sodium
4.3 Factors governing the formation of ionic bonds chloride, each sodium ion is surrounded by six chloride ions
(i) Ionisation Enthalpy (Ionization Energy) and each chloride by six sodium ions, thus giving rise to a
three dimensional octahedral crystal structure (figure). The
Ionisation enthalpy of any element is the amount of energy
formula of an ionic compound merely indicates the relative
required to remove an electron from the outermost shell of
number of ions present.
an isolated atom in gaseous phase so as to convert it into a
gaseous positive ion.
It is clear that lesser the ionisation enthalpy, easier will be
the removal of an electron, i.e., formation of a positive ion
and hence greater the chances of formation of an ionic bond.
Ionisation enthalpy (I.E.) of alkali metals (i.e., group I
elements) is low, hence they have more tendency to form
positive ions.
(ii) Electron Gain Enthalpy (Electron Affinity)
Electron affinity or Electron gain enthalpy of an element is 3. High melting and boiling points
the enthalpy change that takes place when an extra electron
Ionic compounds possess high melting and boiling points.
is added to an isolated atom in the gaseous phase to form a
This is because ions are tightly held together by strong
gaseous negative ion.
electrostatic forces of attraction and hence a huge amount
Higher is the electron affinity, more is the energy released of energy is required to break the crystal lattice.
and stabler will be the negative ion produced. Consequently,
4. Solubility
the probability of formation of ionic bond will be enhanced.
Halogens possess high electron affinity. So the formation Electrovalent compounds are soluble in solvents like water
which are polar in nature and have high dielectric constant.
It is due to the reason that the polar solvent interacts with
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
the ions of the crystals and further the high dielectric 5.1 Polarising Power of Cation
constant of the solvent (i.e., capacity of the solvent to
It is generally represented by φ . The ability of a cation to polarize
weaken the forces of attraction) cuts off the force of attraction
the anion is referred to as polarizing power. It is directly
between these ions. Furthermore, the ions may combine
proportional to the charge density, which in turn is directly related
with the solvent to liberate energy called the hydration
to the charge on cation, while inversely related to the size of
enthalpy which is sufficient to overcome the attractive forces
anion.
between the ions.
The polarizing power increases with increase in the size of cation
Non-polar solvents like carbon tetrachloride, benzene etc.
i.e. smaller cations are very effective in the polarization of anion.
having low dielectric constants are not capable of dissolving
ionic solids. Hence, ionic solids are soluble in polar solvents However, the polarizing power increases with increase in the
and insoluble in non-polar solvents. charge on cation.
5. Electrical conductivity
charge on cation
Ionic compounds are good conductors of electricity in φ
radius of cation
solution or in the molten state. In solution or molten state,
their ions are free to move. As the ions are charged, they are 5.2 Polaisibility of Anion
attracted towards electrodes and thus act as carriers of
It is the tendency of an anion to undergo polarization. It indicates
electric current.
the easiness with which an anion undergoes distortion in presence
6. Ionic Reactions of a cation.
The reactions of the ionic compounds are, in fact, the It is directly proportional to the size as well as the negative charge
reactions between the ions produced in solution. As the on the anion.
oppositely charged ions combine quickly, these reactions
The larger anions can undergo distortion very easily than the
are, therefore, quite fast.
smaller ones.
[e.g. Na+ Cl– (aq) + Ag+ NO3– (aq)  AgCl (s) + NaNO3 (aq)]
It is also important to note that the anions with greater negative
5. FAJAN’S RULE charge also undergo polarization easily.
This rule is for covalent character of an ionic bond.Covalent 6. COVALENT BOND

character of an ionic bond is favoured by :
The bond formed between the two atoms by mutual sharing of
i) Small positive ion
electrons between them so as to complete their octets or duplets
ii) Large negative ion in case of elements having only one shell is called covalent bond
iii) Large charge on ions. or covalent linkage and the number of electrons contributed by
each atom is known as covalency.
• Thus for a fixed cation, the larger the size of anion, the more
the magnitude of the charge, the more is covalent character Examples
For eg. covalent character of sodium halides follows the
order: NaI > NaBr > NaCl > NaF
• For fixed anion, the smaller the size of cation, the more the
magnitude of the charge, the more is the covalent character
For eg. BeCl2 > MgCl2 > CaCl2 > SrCl2 > BaCl2.
• It has been observed that a cation having 18 (s2p 6d10)
electrons in outermost shell (pseudo noble gas
configuration) can polarise the anion more than cation
having 8 (s2p6 ) noble gas electronic configuration.
Hence CuCl is more covalent than NaCl. Similarly AgCl is
more covalent than KCl.
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
Example
Example
Draw the Lewis dot structure of CO32– ion.
Draw the Lewis dot structure of HCN molecule.
Sol. Step-1 : Total number of valence electrons of CO3
Sol. Step-1 : Total number of valence electrons in HCN = 1 + 4 +
5 = 10 (1H = 1, 6C = 2 ,4, 7N = 2, 5) = 4 + 3 × 6 = 22 (6C = 2, 4, 8O = 2, 6)
Step-2 : Skeletal structure is HCN (C is least electronegative). Step-2 : Total number of electrons to be distributed in CO32–
Step-3 : Putting one shared pair of electrons between H and = 22 + 2 (for two units -ve charge) = 24
C and one between C and N, and the remaining as lone Step-3 : The skeletal structure of CO3 is
pairs, we have
In this structure, duplet of H is complete but octets of C and Step-4 : Putting one shared pair of electrons between each
N are not complete. Hence, multiple bonding is required C and O and completing the octets of oxygen, we have
between C and N. Octets of C and N will be complete if there
is triple bond between C and N. Thus,
Lewis structures of some typical molecules and ions
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
Lewis structures of some typical molecules and ions
7. FORMAL CHARGE The atoms have been numbered as 1, 2 and 3.

Formal charge on end O-atom numbered 1
The formal charge on an atom in a molecule or ion is defined as
the difference between the number of valence electrons of that 1
atom in the free state and the number of electrons assigned to  64 4  0
2
that atom in the Lewis structure, assuming that in each shared
pair of electrons, the atom has one electron of its own and the Formal charge on central O-atom numbered 2
lone pair on it belongs to it completely. Thus, it can be calculated
1
as follows :  62  6   1
2
 Formal charge  F.C. on  Total no. of valence electrons  Formal charge on end O-atom numbered 3
  
an atom in a molecule / ion  in the free atom 
1
 66  2   1
2
Total no. of electrons of  1
  Hence, we represent O3 along with formal charges as :
 lone pairs  non  bonding electrons   2
Total no. of shared electrons 

 
 bonding electrons   Example
Write the formal charges on atoms in (i) carbonate ion (ii)
1 nitrite ion.
i.e., FC  V  L  S
2
Sol.
Example
(i) Lewis structure of CO32– ion is
Calculate formal charge on each O-atom of O3 molecule.
Sol. Lewis structure of O3 is :
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
1 most stable structure, i.e., the one with least energy out of
Formal charge on C atom  4  0  8  0, the different possible Lewis structures. The most stable is
2
the one which has the smallest formal charges on the atoms.
Formal charge on double bonded O atom
8. LIMITATIONS OF LEWIS-LANGMUIR CONCEPT
1 OF COVALENT BOND
 64 4  0
2
Lewis-Langmuir concept of covalent bond, as explained in sec,
Formal charge on single bonded O atom has the following limitations :
(i) It could not explain how the atoms are held together in the
1
 6  6   2   1 molecules like H2, Cl2 etc. in which there are no ions and
2
hence there are no electrostatic forces of attraction, i.e., it
could not explain the formation of a covalent bond.
(ii) Lewis structure of NO2– ion is
(ii) It could not explain the shapes of molecules containing
Formal charge on N atom covalent bonds.
(iii) It could not explain the release of energy during the formation
1
 52  6   0, of a covalent bond.
2
9. VALENCE SHELL ELECTRON PAIR REPULSION
Formal charge on double bonded O atom
THEORY
1
 64 4  0 The first simple theory that was put forward to explain the shapes
2 of molecules is known as Valence Shell. Electron Pair Repulsion
Formal charge on single bonded O atom (VSEPR) theory. This theory was given by Sidgwick and Powell in
1940 and was further improved by Nyholm and Gillespie in 1957.
1
 66  2   1 The electron pairs surrounding the central atom repel one another
2 and move so far apart from one another that there are no further
Significance of formal charge. The main advantage of the repulsions between them. As a result, the molecule has minimum
calculation of formal charges is that it helps to select the energy and maximum stability.
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
Geometry of Molecules in which the Central Atom has No Lone Pair of Electrons
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
Shape (geometry) of Some Simple Molecules with Central Ions having One or More Lone Pairs of Electrons(E).
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
9.1 Calculation of total number of electron pairs, bond pairs and belong to the same atom or ion can undergo
and lone pairs and predicting the shapes of the molecules hybridisation.
and ions. (ii) Number of hybrid orbitals produced is equal to the number
(i) Total no. of electron pairs around the central atom of atomic orbitals mixed.
1 (iii) It is not necessary that all the half-filled orbitals must
 (No. of valence electrons of central atom + participate in hybridisation. Similarly, it is not necessary
2
No. of atoms linked to central atom by single bonds) that only half-filled orbitals should participate in
For negative ions, add number of electrons equal to the hybridisation. Even completely filled orbitals with slightly
units of negative charge on the ion to the valence electrons different energies can also participate.
of the central atom. (iv) Hybridisation never takes place in isolated atoms but it
For positive ions, subtract number of electrons equal to the occurs only at the time of bond formation.
units of positive charge on the ion from the valence electrons (v) Type of hybridisation indicates the geometry of molecules.
of the central atom. One can tell the shape of a molecule by knowing the kind of
(ii) No. of bond pairs (shared pairs) = No. of atoms linked to hybridisation involved.
central atom by single bonds. (vi) The bigger lobe of the hybrid orbital always has +ve sign
(iii) No. of lone pairs = Total no. of electron pairs – No. of shared while the smaller lobe on the opposite side has a -ve sign.
pairs. 10.1 Type of Hybridisation
1. Diagonal or sp hybridisation
Example
When one s and one p orbital belonging to the same main
On the basis of VSEPR theory, predict the shapes of the
shell of an atom mix together to form two new equivalent
following:
orbitals, the type of hybridisation is called sp hybridisation
(i) ClF3 (ii) BrF5
or diagonal hybridisation. The new orbitals formed are called
Sol. (i) Shape of ClF3
sp hybrid orbitals.
No. of valence electrons of the central Cl atom = 7
No. of atoms linked to it by single bonds = 3.
73
Total no. of electron pairs around Cl  5
2
No. of bond pairs = No. of atoms linked to Cl = 3.
No. of lone pairs = 5 – 3 = 2.
Thus, the molecule is of the type AB3L2.
Hence, it is T-shaped.
(ii) Shape of BrF5
No. of valence electrons of central Br atom = 7 2. Trigonal or sp2 hybridisation
No. of atoms linked to it by single bonds = 5. When one s and two p orbitals of the same shell of an atom mix
75 to form three new equivalent orbitals, the type of hybridisation
Total no. of electron pairs around Br  6
2 is called sp2 hybridisation or trigonal hybridisation. The new
No. of bond pairs = No. of atoms linked to Br = 5. orbitals formed are called sp2 hybrid orbitals.
No. of lone pairs = 6 – 5 = 1.
Thus, the molecule is of the type AB5L. Hence, it has square
pyramidal shape.
10. HYBRIDISATION
Hybridisation is defined as the mixing of the atomic orbitals
belonging to the same atom but having slightly different energies
so that a redistribution of energy takes place between them
resulting in the formation of new orbitals of equal energies and
identical shapes. The new orbitals thus formed are known as hybrid
orbitals.
Some Important Points about Hybridisation
(i) Only those orbitals which have approximately equal energies Three sp2 hybrid orbitals
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
10.2 Predicting Hybridisation
(a) Predicting hybridisation 1
i.e., X   VE  MA  c  a 
Calculate the number of hybrid orbitals (X) to be formed by 2
the central atom as follows : Note that only monovalent atoms (MA) or groups are to be
considered. For divalent ions, MA = 0.
1   No. of valence electrons  
X    If X = 2, it means two hybrid orbitals are to be formed. Hence,
2  of the central atom  hybridization is sp. If X = 3, it means three hybrid orbitals
are to be formed. Hence, hybridisation is sp2 and so on, as
 No. of monovalent atoms / groups  given in the following table :
 
surrounding the central atom 
Value of X 2 3 4 5 6 7
Charge on the cation  Charge on the anion  Type of sp sp 2 sp 3 sp 3 d sp 3d 2 sp 3d 3
   
if the given species is   if the given species is  hybridisation
a polyatomic cation  a polyatomic anion 
   
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
11. VALENCE BOND THEORY
11.1 Types of covalent bond

Depending upon the type of overlapping, the covalent bonds are mainly of two types :
1. Sigma (s) bond
When a bond is formed between two atoms by the overlap of their atomic orbitals along the internuclear axis (end to end or head
on overlap), the bond formed is called sigma (s) bond.
(i) s-s overlapping
(ii) s-p overlapping
(iii) p-p overlapping
2. Pi (p) Bond
Pi-bond is formed by lateral (sideways) overlapping of p-orbitals, i.e., by overlapping of p-orbitals in a direction at right angles
to the internuclear axis (figure).
p-p overlapping forming a pi bond

In case of oxygen molecule (each oxygen atom having electronic configuration, 1s2 2s2 2p2x 2p1y 2p1z), the two atoms are held
together by one s-bond and one p-bond as shown in figure.
Formation of oxygen molecule
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
11.2 Bond Parameters

11.2.2 Bond energy
11.2.1 Bond length
The amount of energy required to break one mole of bonds of a
The equilibrium distance between the centres of the nuclei of the
particular type so as to separate them into gaseous atoms is called
two bonded atoms is called its bond length.
bond dissociation enthalpy or simply bond enthalpy.
11.2.1.1 Factors affecting bond length 11.2.2.1 Factors affecting Bond energy
(i) Size of the atoms : The bond length increases with increase (i) Size of the atoms : Greater the size of the atoms, greater is
in the size of the atoms. For example, bond lengths of H–X the bond length and less is the bond dissociation enthalpy,
are in the order : i.e., less is the bond strength.
Table : Comparison of sigma and pi-bonds (ii) Multiplicity of bonds : For the bond between the same two
Sigma ( σ ) Bond Pi (  ) Bond atoms, greater is the multiplicity of the bond, greater is the
(i) This bond is formed by (i) This is formed by bond dissociation enthalpy. This is firstly because atoms
come closer and secondly, the number of bonds to be broken
overlap of orbitals along sideway overlapping of
is more. For example, bond dissociation enthalpies of H2, O2
their internuclear axis orbitals and N2 are in the order :
(end to end overlap). (lateral overlapping). H–H < O = O < N  N
(ii) This is formed by (ii) This is formed by the (iii) Number of lone pairs of electrons present : Greater the
overlapping between s-s, overlap of p-p orbitals number of lone pairs of electrons present on the bonded
s-p or p-p orbitals. only. atoms greater is the repulsion between the atoms and hence
(iii)Overlapping is quite large (iii) Overlapping is to a small less is the bond dissociation enthalpy. For example, for a
few single bonds, we have
and hence sigma bond extent. Hence, pi-bond is
11.2.3 Bond angle
is a strong bond. a weak bond.
The angle between the lines representing the directions of
(iv) Electron cloud in this case (iv) Electron cloud of p-bond
the bonds, i.e., the orbitals containing the bonding electrons
is symmetrical about the is unsymmetrical. is called the bond angle.
line joining the two nuclei.
(v) Sigma bond consists of (v) Pi (  ) bond consists of
only one electron cloud, two electron clouds,
symmetrical about the one above the plane of
internuclear axis. atomic nuclei and the o 11.2.4 Bond order
ther below it. In the Lewis representation of a molecule or ion, the number
(vi) Free rotation about (vi) Free rotation about a of bonds present between two atoms is called bond order.
For example, the bond orders of a few moleculer are given
s-bond is possible. pi-bond is not possible
below :
because on rotation, Molecule : H—H O=O NN C=O
overlapping vanishes Bond order : 1 2 3 3
and so the bond breaks For odd electron moleculers, as the three electron bond is
considered as equivalent to half covalent bond, bond order
(ii) Multiplicity of bond : The bond length decreases with the
multiplicity of the bond. Thus, bond length of carbon-carbon .
bonds are in the order :
C–C<C=C<C–C
(iii) Type of hybridisation (discussed later in sec. 4.24). As an s-
orbital is smaller in size, greater the s-character, shorter is
the hybrid orbital and hence shorter is the bond length. For
example,
Bond lengths : sp3 C–H > sp2 C–H > sp C–H
s-character : (25%) (33%) (50%)
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
Bond C–C N–N O–O F–F
(in H3C–CH3) (in : N  N :) 

(in : O 
 O:) ( )
Lone pairs of electrons
on each atom 0 1 2 3
Bond enthalpy (kJ mol )–1
348 163 146 139
12. MOLECULAR ORBITAL THEORY
There is another approach to chemical bonding known as molecular 12.3 Conditions for atomic orbitals to form M.O.
orbital theory (MOT) developed by Mulliken (1932) and Hund, which (i) The combining A.O. should be of a comparable energy.
explains the bonding characteristics in a better way. The molecular (ii) The combining atomic orbitals must overlap to a large extent
orbital theory considers the entire molecule as a unit with all the greater the overlap, stable is the molecule formed.
electrons moving under the influence of all the nuclei present in the
12.4 Relative energies of M.O. and filling of electron
molecules. This approach recognizes that each electron belongs to
the molecule as a whole and may move within the entire molecule. Energy diagram is shown below
12.1 Molecular Orbitals

When the atoms to be bonded come close together, the orbitals
of the bonded atoms lose their individual character and fuse
(overlap) to form larger orbitals called molecular orbitals. Like
atomic orbitals, there are molecular orbitals in a molecule. The
only difference is that in atomic orbitals, electrons move under
the influence of only one nucleus (i.e. Atomic orbital are
monocentric), while in molecular orbitals, electrons move under
the influence of many nuclei, they are polycentric.
12.2 Important features of M.O.T.
(i) Like an Atomic orbital which is around the nucleus of an
atom there are molecular orbital which are around the nuclei
of a molecule. M.O Energy level diagram for O2, F2 and Ne.
(ii) The molecular orbitals are entirely different from the atomic
orbitals from which they are formed.
(iii) The valence electrons of the constituent atoms are
considered to be moving under the influence of nuclei of
participating atoms in the molecular orbital.
(iv) The molecular orbitals possess different energy levels like
atomic orbitals in an isolated atom.
(v) The shape of molecular orbitals are dependent upon the
shapes of atomic orbitals from which they are formed.
(vi) Molecular orbitals are arranged in order of increasing energy
just like atomic orbitals.
(vii) The number of molecular orbitals formed is equal to the
number of atomic orbitals combining in bond formation.
(viii) Like atomic orbitals, the filling of electrons in molecular
orbitals is governed by the three principles such as Aufbau
principle, Hund’s rule and Pauli’s exclusion principle. M.O energy diagram for Li2, Be2, B2, C2 and N2 molecule
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
13. METALLIC BOND 14.2.2 Intramolecular hydrogen bonding

The hydrogen bonding which takes place within a molecule itself.
The constituent particles of metallic solids are metal atoms which It takes place in compounds containing two groups such that one
are held together by metallic bond. A metal atom is supposed to group contain a H-atom linked to an electronegative atom and the
consist of two parts, valence electrons and the remaining part other group contains a highly electronegative atom linked to a
(the nucleus and the inner shells) called kernel. The kernels of lesser electronegative atom. The bond is formed between the H-
metal atoms occupy the lattice sites while the space between the atom of one group with the more electronegative atom of the
kernel is occupied by valence electrons. Due to small ionisation other group.
energy the valence electrons of metal atoms are not held by the
nucleus firmly. Therefore, the electrons leave the field of influence Examples are as shown below
of one kernel and come under the influence of another kernel.
Thus the electrons are not localised but are mobile. The
simultaneous attraction between the kernels and the mobile
electrons which hold the kernel together is known as metallic
bond. This model is known electron sea model.
14. HYDROGEN BONDING
When a hydrogen atom linked to a highly electronegative atom 15. VANDER WAAL’S FORCES
(like F,O, or N) comes under the influence of another strongly
electronegative atom, then a weak bond is developed between (a) This type of attractive forces occurs in case of non polar
them which is called as hydrogen bond. It is represented by dotted molecules such as H2, O2, Cl2, CH4, CO2, etc.
line as follows
(b) The existence of weak attractive forces among the nonpolar
molecule was first proposed by Dutch scientist J.D. Vander
Waal.
As a result of hydrogen bonding, a H–atom links the two
electronegative atoms simultaneously, one by a covalent bond (c) Vander waal force  molecular weight  Boiling point.
and the other by a hydrogen bond. Hence it is said to form a 15.1 Types of Vander Waal’s force
hydrogen bridge. It is merely a strong electrostatic attractive
15.1.1 Ion dipole attraction
forces and not a normal chemical bond. It is very weak (strength +
about 2-10 K cal/mol). This force is between an ion such as Na and a polar molecule
such as HCl
14.1 Conditions for Hydrogen bonding
(a) The molecule must contain a highly electronegative atom
linked to H-atom. The higher the electronegativity, more is + – +
the polarisation of the molecule. Na
+
HCl
(b) The size of the electronegative atom should be small. The 15.1.2 Dipole dipole attraction
smaller the size the greater is the electrostatic attraction.
It is again in between two polar molecules such as HF and HCl
14.2 Types of Hydrogen bonding
14.2.1 Intermolecular Hydrogen bonding
When hydrogen bonding takes place between different molecules
of the same or different compounds, it is called intermolecular
hydrogen bonding e.g. HF, H2O, ROH (same compound) water-
alcohol, water ammonia (different compound) etc.
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
15.1.3 Ion induced dipole attraction
15. DIPOLE MOMENT
In this case a neutral molecule is induced by an ion as a dipole as
shown in fig A molecule with positive and negative charge centres in equilibrium
is called as dipole and is characterised by possessing a quantity
dipole moment (m) defined as the product of the magnitude of
+ + + +
charge (q) and the distance (d) separating the centres of +ve and
+
–ve charges. Its direction is from +ve end to – ve end.
Na Cl2 after induction
m=q×d
Before induction –10
The charge q on an electron is 4.8 × 10 esu. The distance is
15.1.4 Dipole - induced dipole attraction : –8
measured in cm and is of order of 1 Å, i.e., 10 cm. Its unit in CGS
In this case a neutral molecule is induced as a dipole by another
system is debye (D).
dipole as show in fig
A molcule will have a dipole moment of 1 Debye (D) if charges of
–8
1 × 10 esu are separated by a distance of 1Å.
–18
Thus, 1D = 1 × 10 esu. cm.
Applications of Dipole Moment
15.1.5 Induced dipole (i) The molecules having zero moment are non-polar molecules
Induced dipole attraction or London dispersion force between and those having mnet  0 are polar in nature.
two non polar molecules as in Cl2, He etc. (ii) The value of dipole moment can be used for determining the
NOTE amount of ionic character in a bond.
Percentage of ionic character
The relative strength of various bonds is as follows :
Ionic bond > Covalent bond > Metallic bond > H-bond Experimental value of dipole moment
=  100
> Vander waal bond. Theoretical value of dipole moment
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
Summary
SUMMARY
SUMMARY
 Kössel’s first insight into the mechanism of formation of electropositive and electronegative ions related the process to the
attainment of noble gas configurations by the respective ions. Electrostatic attraction between ions is the cause for their
stability. This gives the concept of electrovalency.
 The first description of covalent bonding was provided by Lewis in terms of the sharing of electron pairs between atoms and
he related the process to the attainment of noble gas configurations by reacting atoms as a result of sharing of electrons. The
Lewis dot symbols show the number of valence electrons of the atoms of a given element and Lewis dot show pictorial
representations of bonding in molecules.
 An ionic compound is pictured as a three-dimensional aggregation of positive and negative ions in an ordered arrangement
called the crystal lattice. In a crystalline solid there is a charge balance between the positive and negative ions. The crystal
lattice is stabilized by the enthalpy of lattice formation.
 While a single covalent bond is formed by sharing of an electron pair between two atoms, multiple bonds results from the
sharing of two or three electron pairs. Some bonded atoms have additional pairs of electrons not involved in bonding.These
are called lonepairs of electrons. A Lewis dot structure shows the arrangement of bonded pairs and lone pairs around each
atom in a molecule. Important parameters, associated with chemical bonds, like: bond length, bond angle, bond enthalpy,
bond order and bond polarity have significant effect on the properties of compounds.
 A number of molecules and polyatomic ions cannot be described accurately by a single Lewis structure and a number of
descriptions (representations) based on the same skeletal structure are written and these taken together represent the
molecule or ion. This is a very important and extremely useful concept called resonance. The contributing structures or
cannonical forms taken together constitute the resonance hybrid which represents the molecule or ion.
 The VSEPR model used for predicting the geometrical shapes of molecules is based on the assumption that electron pairs
repel each other and, therefore, tend to remain as far apart as possible. According to this model, molecular geometry is
determined by repulsions between lone pairs and lone pairs ; lone pairs and bonding pairs and bonding pairs and bonding
pairs. The order of these repulsions being : lp-lp > lp-bp > bp-bp
 The valence bond (VB) approach to covalent bonding is basically concerned with the energetics of covalent bond formation
about which the Lewis and VSEPR models are silent. Basically the VB theory discusses bond formation in terms of overlap of
orbitals. For example the formation of the H2 molecule from two hydrogen atoms involves the overlap of the 1s
orbitals of the two H atoms which are singly occupied. It is seen that the potential energy of the system gets lowered as the
two H atoms come near to each other. At the equilibrium inter-nuclear distance (bond distance) the energy touches a
minimum. Any attempt to bring the nuclei still closer results in a sudden increase in energy and consequent destabilization of
the molecule. Because of orbital overlap the electron density between the nuclei increases which helps in bringing them
closer. It is however seen that the actual bond enthalpy and bond length values are not obtained by overlap alone and other
variables have to be taken into account.
 For explaining the characteristic shapes of polyatomic molecules Pauling introduced the concept of hybridisation of atomic
orbitals. sp, sp2, sp3 hybridizations of atomic orbitals of Be, B,C, N and O are used to explain the formation and geometrical
shapes of molecules like BeCl2, BCl3, CH4, NH3 and H2O. They also explain the formation of multiple bonds in molecules
like C2H2 and C2H4.
 The molecular orbital (MO) theory describes bonding in terms of the combination and arrangment of atomic orbitals to
form molecular orbitals that are associated with the molecule as a whole. The number of molecular orbitals are always
equal to the number of atomic orbitals from which they are formed. Bonding molecular orbitals increase electron density
between the nuclei and are lower in energy than the individual atomic orbitals. Antibonding molecular orbitals have a
region of zero electron density between the nuclei and have more energy than the individual atomic orbitals.
 The electronic configuration of the molecules is written by filling electrons in the molecular orbitals in the order of increasing
energy levels. As in the case of atoms, the Pauli exclusion principle and Hund’s rule are applicable for the filling of molecular
orbitals. Molecules are said to be stable if the number of elctrons in bonding molecular orbitals is greater than that in
antibonding molecular orbitals.
 Hydrogen bond is formed when a hydrogen atom finds itself between two highly electronegative atoms such as F, O and N.
It may be intermolecular (existing between two or more molecules of the same or different substances) or intramolecular
(present within the same molecule). Hydrogen bonds have a powerful effect on the structure and properties of many
compounds.
SCAN CODE
Chemical Bonding
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Which of the following compound has the largest Draw the Lewis structures for the following molecules and
dipole moment ? ions :
(i) CH3OH (ii) CH4 H2S, SiCl4, BeF2, CO32 , HCOOH.

(iii) CF4 (iv) CO2 Ans. H2S
(v) CH3F.
Sol. CH4 and CF4 have tetrahedral structure and are symmetrical, SiCl4
hence their dipole moment is zero, CO2 is linear and hence
its dipole moment is also zero. Of the remaining CH3OH and BeF2
CH3F, since F is more electronegative than O, CH3F will
have high dipole moment.
Example - 2 CO32
What type of bond is formed when atoms have

(i) Zero difference of electronegativity. HCOOH
(ii) Little difference of electronegativity.
Example - 6
(iii) High difference of electronegativity.
Write the favourable factors for the formation of ionic
Sol. (i) Non-polar covalent bond.
(ii) Polar covalent Sol. Factors which favour the formation of ionic bond :
(iii) Electro-valent. (i) Low ionisation energy : In the formation of ionic bond a
Example - 3 metal atom loses electron to form cation. This process
Explain the formation of a chemical bond. requires energy equal to the ionisation energy. Lesser the
value of ionisation, greater will be the tendency of the atom
Sol. A chemical bond is formed by mutual sharing or by transfer
to form cation.
of one or more electrons. In doing so, each combining atom
acquires stable noble gas electronic configuration having 8 (ii) High electron affinity : The value of electron affinity gives
electrons in its outermost shell. the tendency of an atom to form anion. Greater the value of
electron affinity, more will be the tendency of an atom to
Example - 4 form anion.
Why NH3 has higher dipole moment than NF3 ?
(iii) High lattice energy : The lattice energy should be high so
Sol. In NH3 dipoles are towards lone pair whereas in NF3 dipoles that it overcomes the apparent deficit of energy of absorption,
are opposite to lone pair of electrons. that is, sublimation energy, ionization energy, dissociation
energy and second affinity. Higher the lattice energy, greater
will be the ease of formation of the ionic compound.
The magnitude of lattice energy gives an idea about the
interionic forces. It depends upon the following factors :
(a) Size of the ions : Smaller the size of the ions, lesser is the
inter-nuclear distance. Consequently, the interionic
attractions will be high and the lattice energy will also be
large.
(b) Charge on the ions : Larger the magnitude of charge on the
ions, greater will be the attractive forces between the ions.
Consequently, the lattice energy will be high.
Example - 7
Discuss the shape of the following molecules using the PH3 : Trigonal pyramidal : Phosphorus atom has 5 electrons
VSEPR model. in its outermost orbit. H-atoms contribute one electron each
to make in all 8 electrons around P-atom. Thus, 4 pairs of
BeCl2, BCl3, SiCl4, AsF5, H2S, PH3.
electrons would be distributed in a tetrahedral fashion
Sol. BeCl2 : A linear molecule. Be atom has 2 electrons in it around the central atom. Three pairs form three P-H bonds
outermost orbit. Each chlorine atom has seven valence while the fourth pair remains unused. Due to repulsion
electrons. The Lewis structure of BeCl2 is between the bonding and lone pairs of electrons, the angle
ˆ is not exactly tetrahedral (109º 28 ). The actual HPH
HPH
angle is 93.3º. Thus PH3 is a trigonal pyramidal molecule.
There are two electrons pairs and to minimise the repulsion,
these electron pairs tend to keep themselves far away from Example - 8
each other, i.e., 180º apart. This gives BeCl2 a linear structure. Write the resonance structures for SO3, NO2 and NO3–.
BCl3 : In BCl3 molecule, the three bond pairs of electrons Sol. (SO3)
are located around B in a triangular arrangement. Thus, the
molecule BCl3 has a triangular planar geometry.
(NO2)
SiCl4 : A tetrahedral molecule. Si has 4 electrons in its

outermost shell. Due to mutual sharing of electrons with Cl
there are 4 electron pairs around Si. To keep the repulsion at (NO3–)
the minimum, these 4 electron pairs should be arranged in a
tetrahedral manner around Si. Thus, SiCl4 is a tetrahedral
molecule.
AsF5 : Trigonal bipyramidal molecule : As has five electrons
in its outermost orbit. Due to sharing of 5 electrons from 5 F-
atoms, there are in all 5 electron pairs. These are distributed
in space to form a trigonal bypyramid. Example - 9
H2S : Bent (V-shaped) structure : S has 6 electrons its Arrange the following in order of decreasing bond angle,
outermost shell. 2H-atoms contribute 2 electrons during giving reason
bonding. Thus, there are 8 electrons or 4 electron pairs NO2, NO2+, NO2–
around S. This gives a tetrahedral distribution of electron Ans. NO2+ > NO2 > NO2–. This is because NO2+ has no lone pair of
pairs around S. The two corners of the tetrahedron are electrons (i.e. has only bond pairs on two sides) and hence
occupied by H-atoms and the other two by the lone-pairs of it is linear. NO2 has one unshared electron while NO2– has
electrons. Thus, H2S has a bent structure. one unshared electron pair. There are greater repulsions on
N–O bonds in case of NO2– than in case of NO2.
Example - 10
orbitals is occupied by a lone-pair of electrons. During the
Arrange the following in order of decreasing bond angles reaction a coordinate bond is formed due to one-side sharing
(i) CH4, NH3, H2O, BF3, C2H2 (ii) NH3, NH2–, NH4+ of electron pair.
Sol. (i) C2H2(180) > BF3(120) > CH4 (109,28) > NH3 (107º) > H2O > BF3 + NH3 [F3B  : NH3]
(104.5º)
Hybridisation state of N, i.e., sp3 in NH3 remains
(ii) NH4+ > NH3 > NH2– unchanged.The hybridisation state of B changes from sp2
This is because all of them involve sp3 hybridization. The to sp3 in the given reaction.
number of lone pair of electrons present on N-atom are 0, 1
Example - 14
and 2 respectively. Greater the number of lone pairs, greater
are the repulsions on the bond pairs and hence smaller is Explain why BeH2 molecule has a zero dipole moment
the angle. although the Be-H bonds are polar.
Example - 11 Sol. This is because BeH2 is a linear molecule and the two bond
Which of the following species have same shape/same dipoles oriented at an angle of 180º neutralize each other. As
bond order ? a result, the net dipole moment of the molecule is zero.
N3–, NO2–, CO2, O3

Sol. Isoelectronic species have same shape/same bond order.
Example - 15
The number of outer electrons is same in CO2 and N3– and
same in O3 and NO2–. Describe the change in hybridization (if any) of the Al
atom in the following reaction.
Example - 12
AlCl3 + Cl–  AlCl4–
Although both CO2 and H2O are triatomic molecules, the
shape of H2O molecule is bent while that of CO2 is linear, Sol. AlCl3  Cl  AlCl 
4
Explain this on the basis of dipole moment. tetrahedral geometry
sp3 hybridization
Sol. The H2O molecule has a dipole moment of 1.84 D. There are Aluminium chloride exists as dimer Al2Cl6. In this molecule
two OH bonds in H2O molecule. The O–H bonds are polar chlorine atoms are arranged tetrahedrally around the two Al
and has dipole moment of 1.5 D. Since the water molecule atoms.
has a net dipole, hence the two O–H dipoles are not in a
Thus Al atoms show sp3 (s in small letter) hybridisation
straight line opposing each other. This rules out the linear
in Al2Cl6. Thus, there is no change in the hybridisation of Al
structure (H–O–H) for water. The two O–H bonds cannot
lie along the same line in the same direction also. Therefore, atom in the given reaction.
the two O–H bonds in H2O molecule must be inclined to Example - 16
each other at certain angle. Thus, H2O molecule has an Draw diagrams showing the formation of a double bond
angular shape. and a triple bond between carbon atoms in C2H4 and C2H2
The CO2 molecule has zero dipole moment. In CO2, there are molecules.
two C = O bonds. Each C = O bond is a polar bond. This Sol. (i) C2H2
means each bond has a dipole moment. Since, the net dipole,
and hence the two bonds must be just opposite to each
other, i.e., the two bonds must be at 180º relative to each
other. Thus CO2 is a linear molecule.
Example - 13
Is there any change in the hybridization of B and N atoms as
a result of the following reaction ?
BF3 + NH3 F3B NH3.
Sol. Here, B atom in BF3 is sp2 hybridized and one of its p orbital Formation of a double bond between carbon atoms in C2H4
is empty. N in NH3 is sp3 hybridized and are of its hybrid The Lewis structure of ethylene is represented as
H:C::C:H
rule. It does not explain the energetics of the bond formation
.. ..
and shapes of the polyatomic molecules.
H H
The VB theory describes the bond formation in terms of
(ii) C2H4
hybridization and overlap of the orbitals. The overlap of
orbitals along the intermolecular axis increases the electron-
density between the two nuclei resulting in a decrease in
the energy and formation of a bond.
Example - 19
Why is it that in the SF4 molecule, the lone pair of electrons
occupies equatorial position in the overall trigonal
bi-pyramidal arrangement in preference to an axial position.
Sol. In SF4 molecule, the lone pair of electrons occupies an
equatorial position because in this geometry (sp 3 d
Formation of C 2 H 2 molecule
hybridisation), the line pair-bond pair repulsion is minimum
It is clear that the carbon-carbon triple bond is made up of
one strong   bond and two weak   bonds. The Lewis
structure of acetylene can be represented as
H : C :: C : H
Example - 20
Example - 17
Define hydrogen bond. Is it weaker or stronger than the
Does Li2 exist ? If so, estimate its bond order and compare Van der Waals forces ?
its bond dissociation energy with that of H2.
Sol. The hydrogen bond can be defined as the attractive force
Sol. Li has a configuration : 1s2, 2s1. which binds hydrogen atom of one molecule with the
There are two s orbitals (1s and 2s) on each atom. These electronegative atom (F, O or N) of another molecule. A
combine to give four MO’s. These are hydrogen bond is shown by a dotted line (.....)
Hydrogen bond is weaker than the Van der Waals forces.
(1s)  (1s)  1s   *1s
Example - 21
(2s)  (2s)  2s   * 2s.
NaNO3 on heating to 500ºC decomposes to produce
Thus all the six electrons are accommodated in these four NaNO2 and O2, while the same salt on heating to 800ºC,
orbitals. The electronic configuration for Li 2 is decomposes to Na2O, N2 and O2. Explain in light of Fajan’s
(1s) 2 ( *1s) 2 ( 2s) 2 . rule.
Sol. The decomposition scheme can be shown as
Nb = 4, Na = 2.
42
Bond order in Li 2   1.
2
Therefore, Li 2 should be a stable species. Its bond
dissociation energy is 105 kJ mol –1, as compared to
As we know tha thermal stability of a salt depends on
431 kJ mol–1 for H2. Thus, the bond in Li2 is much weaker
percentage ionic character, NaNO2 has greater ionic
than that on H2. This is because 2s orbital of Li (involved in
character than NaNO3 because of lower polarizability of
the bonding) is much larger than 1s orbital of H.
smaller nitrite ion than nitrate ion. Therefore, 500ºC is
Example - 18 sufficient for decomposition of less ionic NaNO3 but
Explain how V.B theory differs from the Lewis concept.
NaNO2 is stable at this temperature. On heating further to
Sol. The Lewis concept of describes the formation of bond in 800ºC, the more stable NaNO2decomposes further to Na2O
terms of sharing of one or more electron pairs and the octet and N2, O2.
Example - 26
Example - 22
Write Lewis structure of the following compounds and
Out of  and   bonds, which one is stronger and why ? show formal charge on each atom :
Sol.   bond is stronger. This is because   bond is formed HNO3, NO2, H2SO4
by head-on overlapping of atomic orbitals and, therefore,
the overlapping is large.   bond is formed by sideway Sol. HNO3 =
overlapping which is small.
Example - 23
1
Out of p-orbital and sp-hybrid orbital which has greater Formal charge = V  L  S
2
directional character and why ?
Sol. sp-orbital has greater directional character than p-orbital. 1
Formal charge on H = 1  0   2  0
This is because p-orbital has equal sized lobes with equal 2
electron density in both the lobes wheres sp-hybrid orbital
has greater electron density on one side. 1
Formal charge on O (1) = 6  4  (4)  0
2
Example - 24
Compare the relative stabilities of O 2 and N 2 and 1
Formal charge on N = 5  0  (8)  1
comment on their magnetic (paramagnetic or diamagnetic) 2
behaviour.
1
Sol. M.O. Electronic configuration of Formal charge on O (2) = 6  4  (4)  0
2
O2  KK 22s 2s
2s  2pz 2p x 2p x 2p x 2p y
2 2 2 *2 *1
1
Formal charge on O (3) = 6  6  (2)   1
2
1 3
Bond order = (8  5)   1.5
2 2 Hence, we write the structure of HNO3 with formal charges
M.O. Electronic configuration of as
N 2  KK  22s *2
2s  2p x  2p y  2pz
2 2 1
1 5 Similarly, we have
Bond order = (7  2)   2.5
2 2
As bond order of N 2  bond order of O 2 , therefore, N 2 is and

more stable than O 2 .
Each of them contains unpaired electron, hence both are Example - 27
paramagnetic. What is mean by the term average bond ethalpy ? Why is
there difference in bond enthalpy of O–H bond in ethanol
Example - 25
(C2H5OH) and water ?
Explain why HF is less viscous than H2O.
Sol. All the similar bonds in a molecule do not have the same
Sol. There is greater intermolecular hydrogen bonding in H2O
than that in HF as each H2O molecule forms four H-bonds
with other water molecules whereas HF forms only two
bond enthalpies, e.g., in CH4 , the four
H-bonds with other HF molecules. Greater the intermolecular
H-bonding, greater is the viscosity. Hence, HF is less
viscous than H2O. C–H bonds do not have the same bond enthalpies because
after breaking of the bonds one by one, the electronic
environment around carbon changes. Hence, the actual bond 2–
enthalpy of C–H bond is taken as the average value. O C O

O
O–H bond in ethanol and that in water
Example - 30
Arrange the following in increasing order of bond angle
do not have similar electronic environment around the central atom :
around oxygen atom. Hence, their O–H bond enthalpies are BeF2, BF3, CH4, NH3, H2O
different.
Example - 28 Sol. H2O < NH3 < CH4 < BF3 < BeF2
Write Lewis dot structures of the following molecules/ Bond angle 104.5º 106.5º 109º28’ 120º 180º
ions :
(i) CO (ii) HCN
Example - 31
Sol : V = number of valence electron of molecule
R = Number of electron required for octet in molecule Indicate the number of  and -bonds in the following
molecules.
S = Number of shared electron ( S = R – V)
U = Number of unshared electron (U = V – S) (i) CH3 CH CH2
(i) CO (ii) CH3 CH2 CH 2 CH3
V = 4 + 6 = 10 electrons
(iii) CH 3 C C CH 3
R = 8 + 8 = 16 electrons
S = R – V = 6 electrons
(iv)
U = 10 – 6 = 4 elctrons
C O or C O
Sol. For finding out the number of  and -bonds in a molecule,
(ii) HCN the following points should be kept in mind :
V = 1 + 4 + 5 = 10 electrons
1. All single bonds are sigma bonds.
R = 2 + 8 + 8 = 18 electrons
2. All double bonds consist of one  and one -bonds.
S = 8 electrons
U = 2 electrons 3. All triple bonds consist of one  and two -bonds.
H C N or H – C N (i) This molecule consists of seven single bonds and

one double bond. Thus, number of -bonds = 8 and
number of -bonds = 1.
Example - 29
(ii) This molecule consists of 13 single bonds.
Write Lewis structures for Thus, number of -bonds = 13.
(i) Urea, NH2CO NH2 (iii) This molecule consists of 8 single bonds and one
triple bond. Thus, number of -bonds = 9 and number
(ii) Carbonate ion, CO 32 . of -bonds = 2.
(iv) The molecule of benzene consists of nine single
Sol : (i) Urea, V = 24 electrons, R = 40 electrons, S = 16 electrons bonds and three double bonds.
U = 8 electrons Thus, number of -bonds = 12 and number of -bonds
= 3.
Example - 32
Which of the two, peroxide ion or superoxide ion, has a

(ii) V = 24 electrons, R = 32 electrons, S = 8 electrons, larger bond length ?
U = 16 electrons. Sol. The bond length in a molecule depends on bond order.
the higher the bond order, smaller will be the bond length.
Peroxide ion, O 22 Example - 36
Configuration KK (2s)2 (2s)2  (2pz)2 (2px)2 The dipole moment of KCl is 3.336 × 10–29 coulomb metre
which indicates that it is a highly polarized molecule. The
 (2py )2  * (2px )2  * (2py )2 interatomic distance between K+ and Cl– in this molecule
is 2.6 × 10–10 m. Calculate the dipole moment of KCl
86 molecule, if there were opposite charges of one
Bond order = 1 fundamental unit located at each nucleus. Calculate the
2
percentage ionic character of KCl.
Superoxide ion, O 2  =q× d
Sol. q = one fundamental unit = 1.062 × 10–19 C

Configuration KK (2s)2 (2s)2 (2pz)2 (2px)2
d = 2.6 × 10–10 M
(2py)2 (2px)2 (2py)1
= 1.602 × 10–19 × 2.6 × 10–10
85 = 4.1652 × 10–29 coulomb metre
Bond order =  1.5
2
Percentage ionic character
Bond order of superoxide is higher than peroxide ion,
hence bond length of peroxide ion is larger. 3.336  10 29
= 100  80.09
4.1652 10  29
Example - 33
Example - 37
Which of the following has maximum bond angle ?
The correct order of the ionic character of PbF2, PbCl2,
H2O, CO2, NH3, CH4 PbBr2 and PbI2 is :
Sol. CO 2 (Linear structure, carbon undergoes sp-hy- (a) PbF2 > PbCl2 > PbBr2 > PbI2
bridization). (b) PbF2 > PbBr2 > PbCl2 > PbI2
(c) PbF2 < PbCl2 < PbBr2 < PbI2
Example - 34
(d) PbF2 < PbCl2 > PbBr2 > PbI2
Interpret the non-linear shape of H2S molecule and non
planar shape of PCl3 using valence shell electron pair Sol. Since the given dihalides contain the same cation viz Pb2+
repulsion (VSEPR) theory. but different anions (halide ions), the ionic character of these
halides depends on the size of the halide ions. The ionic
Sol. In H2S, two bonded pairs and two lone pairs of electrons character decreases with the increases in the size of the
are present, i.e., S undergoes sp3 -hybridization. Tetrahedral halide ions. Thus since the size of halides ions increases as F–
configuration comes into existence. Two of the positions < Cl– PbCl2 > PbBr2 > Pb I2. Thus (a) is the correct
bent or V-shaped. answer.
In PCl3, three bonded pairs and one lone pair of electrons Example - 38
are present, i.e., P-atom undergoes sp3– hybridization.
Among the halides namely, NaF, NaCl, NaBr and NaI,
Tetrahedral configuration comes into existence. One NaF has the highest melting point, because NaF has :
position is occupied by lone pair, hence the actual
(a) minimum ionic character
structure is pyramidal.
(b) maximum ionic character
Example - 35 (c) highest oxidising power
Hydrogen bonding does not exist in HCl through chlorine (d) lowest valency
is quite electronegative.
Sol. Since the size of halide ions (X–) increases as F– < Cl–
Sol. This is due to the large size of Cl-atom < Br– < I– the ionic character of MX molecules decreases
as NaF > NaBr > NaI. Being the most ionic, NaF has the
highest melting point.
Example - 39
A diatomic molecule has a dipole moment equal to 1.2 D.
If its bond distance is 1.0 Å, what fraction of an electronic
charge exists in each atom ? (Given Electronic charge = Geometry :
4.8 × 10–18esu.cm)
(a) 12% (b) 18%
(c) 25% (d) 29%
Sol. Bond distance, d = 1.0 Å = 1.0 × 10–8 cm (given)

Dipole moment,  = 1.2 D = 1.2 × 10–18 esu. cm (given) Example - 42
–18
Electronic charge = 4.8 × 10 esu. cm (given)
Write the Lewis dot formula of the following molecules
Fraction of electronic charge = x (to be calculated) and predict their molecular shapes :
Now we know that :
(a) OSbCl3 (b) SO2Cl2 (c) IO 2 F2
=x×d
1.2 × 10–18 esu. cm = x × 10–8 cm
Sol. (a)
1.2  10 18 esu. cm
 x  1.2  10 10 esu
10 8 cm
Out of 4.8 × 10–10 esu. cm electronic charge, the electronic
charge existing on each atom = 1.2 × 10–10 esu
Out of 100 esu. cm. electronic charge, the electronic
charge existing on each atom
1.2  10 10 esu

  100
4.8  10 10 esu. cm
= 25%
(b)
Example - 40
Which of the following tetraiodides is the least stable
and has doubtful existence ?
(a) CI4 (b) GeI4
(c) SnI4 (d) PbI4
Sol. The given tetraiodides contain C, Ge, Sn and Pb as C4+,

Ge4+, Sn4+ and Pb4+ ions respectively. According to inert (c)
pair effect, the stability of these cations decreases as C4+
> Ge4+ > Sn4+ > Pb4+. This order shows that since Pb4+
ion is the least stable, its tetraiodide, PbI4 is also least
stable and hence has doubtful existence.
Example - 41
Discuss the bondings of ClO 2 ion.

Sol. The central atom is Cl . The ions can be constituted as
Example - 43 Sol. I 2 (s) being a molecular solids, the molecules are

  completely non-polar and covalent, have very low affinity
Both NH and NH are angular species but the bond
2 2 for polar solvents like water. However, in solution of KI,
angle in NH 2 is less than that in NH 2 . (a) What is the I2 forms forms KI3 salt as
reason for this difference in bond angles ? (b) Take the KI + I2 
 KI3
x-axis as lying perpendicular to the molecular plane, does
N (2px) orbital participate in the hybridization of either of KI3, a strongly ionic salt dissolves easily in water like
species ? other normal salts of the alkali metals. Hence, I2 becomes
soluble in KI via KI3.
Sol. (a) Hybridization at N atom is sp3 in NH 2 and sp2 NH 2 .
Therefore, bond angle in NH 2 is close to 109º Example - 46
(tetrahedral angle), while bond angle in NH 2 is close Compare the F (axial) —A—F (equatorial) bond angles in
to 120º (triangular planar angle). these molecules. PF6, SF4 and ClF3.
(b) In NH 2 , hybridization at N is sp3  implies that all

Sol. PF5 is symmetrical trigonal bipyramidal molecule hence
p-orbitals are involved in hybridization. In case of the sought bond angle is 90º.
NH 2 , the hybridization at N is sp2 and the ion lies in SF4 is a see-saw shaped molecule, while ClF3 is T-shaped
YZ plane as X-axis lying in perpendicular plane. For as shown below :
the species to be in YZ plane, the two p-orbitals
involved in sp2 hybridization must be py and pz orbitals
i.e., 2px orbitals at N is remaining unhybridized as
Axial bonds in SF4 is repelled by one lone pair, the same

in ClF3 are repelled by two lone pairs, more repulsions are
observed in ClF3. Hence, F—S—F angle (axial-equatorial)
is greater than F—Cl—F (axial-equatorial), although both
Example - 44 are less than 90º. The order is : PF5 > SF4 > ClF3.
Although I 3 is known, F3 is not . Explain. Example - 47
Sol. In I3 , the central I is sp3d hybridized and violate the The Lewis structure of allene is
octet rule. It is possible for elements of third and higher
period to expand its valence shell beyond eight because
they contain vacant d-orbitals. Hence formation of I 3 is
possible Make a three dimensional sketch of this molecule and answer
these questions : (a) Is the molecule planar ? (b) Does
1,3-dichloro propdience show geometrical isomerism ?
(c) Is the molecule 1, 3-dichloropropdiene polar ?
Sol. Hybridization of central carbon is sp and two of its

Since, fluorine is in second period, lack vacant d-orbitals, unhybridized p-orbitals are involved in Pi-bonding. Also
can’t violate octet rule and, hence F3 does not exist. p-orbitals at an atom are orthogonal (at 90º angle), the
two Pi-bonds at central carbon are also orthogonal. Let
these p-orbitals, involved in Pi-bondings, at central carbon
Example - 45 by py and pz, then
Iodine (I2) is a volatile solid at room temperature and has

very low solubility in water. However, I2 is highly soluble
in an aqueous solution of KI. Explain.
Example - 49
Both ‘H’ and ‘F’ are monovalent in covalent bonding,
phosphorus forms PF5 but no PH5 exists. Explain.
Sol. Phosphorus has five electrons in the valence shell (3s23p3)

Hybridization at the terminal carbons are both sp. The as well as it contains vacant d orbitals, so there is scope
two p-orbitals involved in sp hybridization are px and py for pentavalency. However, the 3d orbital of phosphorus
at left terminal and px and pz at right terminals. Therefore, is much larger is size than its 3s and 3p-orbitals, and do
the three sp hybrid orbitals at left terminal carbon are in not usually hybridize. When highly electronegative atoms
xy plane, while the same at right terminal carbon are in xz like F approach to P, its 3d-orbitals hybridize with 3s and
plane. As a result, the two triangular planes at terminals 3p orbitals and enable P to undergo sp3d hybridization to
are at right angles as shown below : form PF 5 , PCl 5 etc. Hydrogen being very less
electronegative, cannot contract 3d orbitals of
phosphorus to the level where it can participate in
hybridization with 3s and 3p orbitals. Hence, with
hydrogen, only s and p orbitals of P hybridize and no
more than its three electrons can take part in sharing,
showing trivalency only.
The two H—C—H planes at terminals are perpendicular
to each other. (Pi-bonds are also perpendicular to each
other.) Example - 50
Hence, (a) Molecule is non-planar. (b) Doesn’t show
geometrical isomerism because two H at one terminal are Trimethyl amine is a stronger base than trisilyl amine.
equidistant from any H on other terminal. (c) Polar. Explain.
Example - 48 Sol. In trisilyl amine, a p-d back bonding occurs as
Order these species according to increasing C—F bond

length : CF+, CF, CF–. Predict if any is paramagnetic.
Sol. The molecular orbital electronic configuration of CF (15e)

is
The above p-dbond decreases the availability of 1p at
2p  2p
2 * 1 nitrogen, thus the basic strength. No such p-dbonding
1s 2 *1s 2  2s 2 * 2s 2  2p x2 y
* 2p0x
y
is possible in trimethyl amine, hence stronger base.
2p * 2p
2
z
0
z
10  5
Bond order   2.5
2
In CF+, there is one ‘e’ less in antibonding MO, therefore,
bond-order = 3, while in CF–, there is one more ‘e’ in
antibonding MO giving band-order = 2. Since ‘Bond-
order’ is directly related to bond-energy, which is
inversely proportional to bond-length, the order of bond-
lengths in given series is :
CF+ < CF < CF–
Also, CF and CF– are paramagnetic because of presence
of one and two unpaired electrons respectively, while
CF+ has no unpaired electron and diamagnetic.

Kossel & Lewis Approach and Covalent Bonds (c) KCN (d) KCl
1. Which of the following molecule is theoretically not 9. The fluorine molecules is formed by :
possible? (a) p-p orbitals (sideways overlap)
(a) SF4 (b) OF2 (b) p-p orbitals ( end-to-end overlap)
(c) OF4 (d) O2F2 (c) sp-sp orbitals (d) s-s orbitals
2. The bond between two identical non-metal atoms has a 10. The strength of bonds formed by 2s-2s, 2p-2p and 2p-2s
pair of electrons overlap has the order :
(a) unequally shared between the two (a) s-s > p-p > p-s (b) s-s > p-s > p-p
(b) transferred fully from one atom to another (c) p-p > p-s > s-s (d) p-p > s-s > p-s
(c) with identical spins 11. The number of sp2 – s sigma bonds in benzene are :
(d) equally shared between them (a) 3 (b) 6
3. Which of the following molecules does not have co- (c) 12 (d) none of these
ordinate bonds ? 12. The ratio of  and  bonds in benzene is :
(a) PH 
4
(b) NO2 (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
(c) 1 : 5 (d) 1 : 6
(c) O3 (d) CO23 13. Which of the following statements is incorrect for sigma
4. The total number of electrons that taken part in forming and pi-bonds formed between two carbon atoms ?
the bonds in N2 is (a) Sigma-bond is stronger than a pi-bond
(a) 2 (b) 4 (b) Bond energies of sigma and pi-bonds are of the order
(c) 6 (d) 10 of 264 kJ/mol and 347 kJ/mol
5. Which of the following compound is covalent ? (c) Free rotation of surrounding atoms about a sigma-
bond is allowed but not in case of a pi-bond
(a) H2 (b) CaO
(d) Sigma-bond determines the direction between carbon
(c) KCl (d) Na2S atoms but a pi-bond has no primary effect in this regard
6. Which of the following does not contain any co-ordinate 14. Assuming the bond direction to the z-axis, which of the
bond ? overlapping of atomic orbitals of two atom (A) and (B)
will result in bonding ?
(a) H3O+ (b) BF4
(I) s-orbital of A and px orbital of B
 
(c) HF 2
(d) NH 4 (II) s-orbital of A and pz orbital of B
7. Which pair of elements can form multiple bond with itself (III) py-orbital of A and pz orbital of B
and oxygen ?
(IV) s-orbital of both (A) and (B)
(a) F, N (b) N, Cl
(a) I and IV
(c) N, P (d) N, C
(b) I and II
Covalent & Ionic Compounds and VBT
(c) III and IV
8. The compound which contains both ionic and covalent
(d) I, II and IV
bonds is
(a) CH4 (b) H2
15. Which of the following leads to bonding ? 22. The molecule exhibiting maximum number of non-bonding
electron pairs (l.p.) around the central atom is :
(a) (b) (a) XeOF4 (b) XeO2F2

(c) XeF3– (d) XeO3
23. Which is the following pairs of species have identical
shapes?
(c) (d)
(a) NO2 and NO2 (b) PCl5 and BrF5
VSPER Theory (c) XeF4 and ICl4 (d) TeCl4 and XeO4
16. The geometrical arrangement of orbitals and shape of I3–
24. The compound MX4 is tetrahedral. The number of XMX
are respectively :
angles in the compound is :
(a) trigonal bipyramidal geometry, linear shape
(a) three (b) four
(b) hexagonal geometry, T-shape
(c) five (d) six
(c) triangular planar geometry, triangular shape
25. Whi ch o f the followi ng a re isoelectronic and
(d) tetrahedral geometry, pyramidal shape isostructural ?
17. The shape of the noble gas compound XeF4 is :
NO3 ,CO32 , ClO3 ,SO3
(a) square planar (b) distorted tetrahedral
(c) tetrahedral (d) octahedral (a) NO3 , CO32 (b) SO3 , NO3
18. Which is not correctly matched ? (c) ClO3 ,CO32  (d) CO23  ,ClO3
(a) XeO3 – Trigonal bipyramidal 26. When iodine is dissolved in aqueous potassium iodide,
(b) ClF3 – bent T-shape the shape of the species formed is :
(c) XeOF4 – Square pyramidal (a) linear (b) angular

(c) triangular (d) see-saw
(d) XeF2 – Linear shape
27. The BCl3 is a planar molecule whereas NCl3 is pyramidal
19. Which of the following statements is incorrect for PCl5 ?
because :
(a) Its three P–Cl bond lengths are equal
(a) BCl bond is more polar than N–Cl bond
(b) It involves sp3d hybridization (b) N–Cl bond is more covalent that B–Cl bond
(c) It has linear geometry (c) nitrogen atom is smaller than boron atom
(d) Its shape is trigonal bipyramidal (d) BCl3 has no lone pair electrons but NCl3 has a lone
20. Correct statement regarding molecules SF4, CF4 and XeF4 pair of electrons
are : 28. BrF 3 molecule, the lone pairs occupy equitorial
(a) 2, 0 and 1 lone pairs of central atom respectively position to minimize.
(b) 1, 0 and 1 lone pairs of central atom respectively (a) lone pair-bond pair repulsion only
(c) 0, 0 and 2 lone pairs of central atom respectively (b) bond pair-bond pair repulsion only
(d) 1, 0 and 2 lone pairs of central atom respectively (c) lone pair-lone pair repulsion and lone pair-bond
21. The pair of species with similar shape is : pair repulsion
(a) PCl3, NH3 (b) CF4, SF4 (d) lone pair-lone pair repulsion only
(c) PbCl2, CO2 (d) PF5, IF5

Hybridization 35. Which one of the following is the correct set with respect
29. During the complete combustion of methane CH4, what to molecule, hybridization and shape ?
change in hybridisation does the carbon atom undergo ? (a) BeCl2, sp2, linear
(a) sp3 to sp (b) sp3 to sp2 (b) BeCl2, sp2, triangular planar
(c) sp2 to sp (d) sp2 to sp3 (c) BCl3, sp2, triangular planar
30. Which of the following statements is true about
(d) BCl3, sp3, tetrahedral
hybridization ?
(a) Only those atomic orbitals can be hybridized which 36. The hybridization of the central atom in ICl2 is :
do not differ much in shape.
(a) dsp2 (b) sp
(b) Only those atomic orbitals can be hybridized which
do not differ much in energy. (c) sp2 (d) sp3
(c) Only those atomic orbitals can be hybridized which 37. The state of hybridization of the central atom is not the
do not differ much in size. same as in the others :
(d) Only those atomic orbitals can be hybridized which (a) B in BF3 (b) O in H3O+
do not differ much in overlap integrals. (c) N in NH3 (d) P in PCl3
31. Which of the following statements is true about 38. Select pair of compounds in which both have different
hybridization ? hybridization but have same shape:
(a) Hybridization generates new set of atomic orbitals
identical in shape but not in size and energy. (a) BF3, BrF3 (b) ICl2 , BeCl 2
(b) Hybridization generates new set of atomic obitals (c) BCl3, PCl3 (d) PCl3, NCl3
identical in size but not in shape and energy.
39. The hybridisation of atomic orbitals of central atom “Xe”
(c) Hybridization generates new set of atomic orbitals in XeO4 , XeO2F2 and XeOF4 respectively.
indentical energy but not in shape and size.
(a) sp3, sp3d2, sp3d2 (b) sp3d, sp3d, sp3d2
(d) Hybridization generates new set of atomic orbitals
indentical in shape, size and energy. (c) sp3, sp3d2, sp3d (d) sp3, sp3d, sp3d2
32. What will be the shape of sp hybridized orbital? 40. Which of the following statements is true about
hybridization ?
(a) (b) (a) Hybrid orbitals frequently undergo linear overlaps
making sigma bonds.
(b) Hybrid orbitals frequently undergo lateral overlaps
(c) (d) making -bonds. In other words, there are several
compounds in which -bonds are formed using
33. In graphite each carbon atom is : hybrid orbitals.
(a) sp 2 hybridised (b) sp 3 hybridised (c) Hybrid orbitals are molecular orbitals.
(c) sp hybridised (d) not hybridised
(d) A hybrid orbital bigger in size makes shorter bond.
34. In which of the following pairs, both the species have the
41. In 2sp hybridization, 2s-orbital can be mixed with
same hybridisation ?
(a) Only 2p x
(I) SF4, XeF4 (II) I3 , XeF2
(b) Only 2py
  3
(III) ICl , SiCl 4
4
(IV) ClO ,PO 3 4 (c) Only 2p z
(a) I, II (b) II, III (d) Any one of 2p x, 2p y and 2p z
(c) II, IV (d) I, II, III
50. In which of the following bond angle is maximum :
42. In 2sp2 orbital, character of 2pz orbital will be
(a) always 33.33% (b) always 0% (a) NH3 (b) NH 4
(c) always 66.66% (d) either 33.33% or 0% (c) PCl3 (d) SCl2
43. Which of the followi ng orde rs is cor rect for 51. The ground state electronic configuration of valence
electronegativity ? shell electrons in nitrogen molecule (N2) is written
(a) sp3C > sp 2C > spC (b) spC > sp 2C > sp 3C (  2s)2 (  *2s)2 ( 2p)4 (  2p)2. Hence, the bond order
in nitrogen molecule is :
(c) sp2C > spC > sp 3C (d) sp3C > spC > sp 2C
(a) 0 (b) 1
44. CH 2 = C = CH2 (c) 2 (d) 3
In this molecule (allene)
52. When N2 is formed from N 2 bond-order .......... and
2
(a) all three C-atoms are sp hybridized
when O2 is formed from O 2 bond–order .......... :
(b) both terminal C-atoms are sp 2 hybridized while
central C-atom is sp-hybridized (a) increases (b) decreases
(c) both terminal C-atoms are sp-hybridized while (c) increases, decreases (d) decreases, increases
central C-atom is sp2 hybridized 53. Among unpaired electron is present in :
(d) none of these (a) KO2 only (b) NO2+ and BaO2
45. The structure and hybridisation of Si(CH3)4 is :
(c) KO2 and AlO2 (d) BaO2 only
2
(a) bent, sp (b) trigonal, sp
54. Bond order of O2, O2+, O2– and O22– is in order :
(c) octahedral, sp 3d (d) tetrahedral, sp 3
46. H2O is dipolar, whereas BeF2 is not. It is because : (a) O 2  O 22  O 2  O 2 (b) O 22  O 2  O 2  O 2
(a) the electronegativity of F is greater than that of O

(c) O 2  O 2  O 2  O 22 (d) O 2  O 2  O 2  O 22
(b) H2O involves hydrogen bonding whereas BeF2 is a
discrete molecule 55. The correct order of the O–O bond length in O2, H2O2
and O3 is :
(c) H2O is linear and BeF2 is angular
(a) O2 > O3 > H2O2 (b) O3 > H2O2 > O2
(d) H2O is angular and BeF2 is linear
(c) O2 > H2O2 > O3 (d) H2O2 > O3 > O2
47. The hybridisation of atomic orbitals of N in NO2+, NO3–
Dipole Moment of a Bond
and NH 4 are respectively :
56. The highest dipole moment is of :
2 3 3 2
(a) sp, sp , sp (b) sp, sp , sp (a) CF4 (b) CH3OH
2 3
(c) sp , sp, sp (d) sp 2, sp 3, sp (c) CO2 (d) CH3F
Bond Parameters 57. Which one of the following is the most polar bond ?
48. Energy content of a molecule will be less if (a) N–F (b) N–N
(a) bond energy is more (c) N–Cl (d) O–F
(b) bond energy is less 58. Both BF3 and NF3 are covalent but BF3 molecule is
(c) magnitude of ovelap is very less non-polar while NF3 is polar because :
(d) none of these (a) atomic size of boron is smaller than nitrogen
49. The ion that is isoelectronic with CO is : (b) BF3 is planar but NF3 is pyramidal
2–
(a) O (b) N2+ (c) boron is a metal while nitrogen is gas
+ –
(c) O (d) CN (d) BF bond has no dipole moment while NF3 bond has
dipole
59. Which of the following molecules does not have a 66. The correct order of increasing C–O bond strength of
dipole moment ?
CO, CO23  ,CO2 is :
(a) IBr (b) CHCl3
(c) CH2Cl2 (d) BF3 (a) CO23  CO2  CO (b) CO2  CO23  CO
Molecular Orbital Theory & Resonance (c) CO  CO23  CO2 (d) CO  CO2  CO23
60. Which of the following is paramagnetic ? Electrovalent or Ionic bond & Fajan’s Rule
(a) O 22 (b) NO 67. Which combination will give the strongest ionic bond ?
(C) CO (d) CN– (a) K+ and Cl– (b) K+ and O2–
61. Which one of the following is not paramagnetic ? (c) Ca 2+ and Cl– (d) Ca2+ and O2–
68. Bond formation is
(a) NO (b) N 2
(a) always exothermic
(c) CO (d) O2
(b) always endothermic
62. For exhibiting tetravalency, carbon atoms have to be
(c) neither exothermic nor endothermic
excited. Now, which of the following statements is
true ? (d) sometimes exothermic and sometimes endothermic
(a) Excitation occurs before bonding 69. Element X is strongly electropositive and element Y is
strongly electronegative. Both are univalent. The
(b) Bonding occurs before excitation
compound formed would be
(c) Both bonding and excitation occur simultaneously
(a) X + Y – (b) X –Y +
(d) Two bonds are formed first, then excitation occurs
followed by formation of another two bonds (c) X – Y (d) X  Y
+ –
63. Which of the following statements is true about 70. An ionic compound A B is most likely to be formed when:
bonding and excitation ?
(a) the ionization energy of A high and electron affinity of
(a) Energy required for excitation of carbon atoms (96 B is low
Kcal/mol) is less than energy released in bonding
(b) the ionization energy of A is low and electron affinity
(b) Energy required for excitation is more than energy of B is high
released in bonding
(c) both, the ionization energy of A and electron affinity
(c) Energy required for excitation is equal to the energy of B are high
released in bonding
(d) both, the ionization energy of A and electron affinity
(d) None of these of B are low
64. The nodal plane in the -bond of ethene is located in : 71. In which of the following species the bonds are non-
(a) the molecular plane directional ?
(b) a plane parallel to the molecule plane (a) NCl3 (b) RbCl
(c) a plane perpendicular to the molecular plane which (c) BeCl2 (d) BCl3
bisects the carbon-carbon  bond at right angle
72. The compound with the highest degree of covalency is :
(d) a plane perpendicular to the molecular plane which
contains the carbon-carbon bond (a) NaCl (b) MgCl2
65. Resonance structures can be written for : (c) AgCl (d) CsCl
73. The lattice energy of KF, KCl, KBr and KI follow the order:
(a) O3 (b) NH3
(a) KF > KCl > KBr > KI (b) KI > KBr > KCl > KF
(c) CH4 (d) H2O
(c) KF > KCl > KI > KBr (d) KI > KBr > KF > KCl
74. Covalency favoured in the following case: 82. The correct order of boiling point is :
(a) smaller cation (b) larger anion
(c) large charge on cation and anions
(d) all the above
Hydrogen Bonding
(a) I > II > III (b) III > II > I
75. The high density of water compared to ice is due to :
(c) II > I > III (d) III > I > II
(a) hydrogen bonding interactions
83. The boiling points at atmospheric pressure of HF, H2S,
(b) dipole-dipole interactions
NH3 can be arranged in the following order :
(c) dipole-induced dipole interactions
(a) HF > NH3 > H2S (b) HF > H2S > NH3
(d) induced dipole induced dipole interactions
76. The boiling point of alcohol is higher than ether due to : (c) HF < H2S < NH3 (d) HF < NH3 < H2S
(a) hydrogen bonding 84. Which statement is correct ?
(b) large size of alcohol (a) m.p. of H2O, NH3, HF are maximum in their respective
(c) presence of –OH group group due to intermolecular H-bonding
(d) high molecular weight (b) b.p. of CH4 out of CH4, SiH4, GeH4 and SnH4 is least
due to weak intermolecular force of attraction
77. Which of the following is not true about H2O molecule ?
(c) formic acid forms dimer by H-bonding
(a) The molecule has  = 0
(d) all are correct
(b) The molecule can act as a base
85. The boiling points of methanol, water and dimethyl ether
(c) Shows abnormally high boiling point in comparison to
are respectively 65ºC, 100ºC and 34.5ºC. Which of the
the hydrides of other elements of oxygen group
following best explains these wide variations in b.p. ?
(d) The molecule has a bent shape
(a) The molecular mass increases from water (18) to
78. In ice, the length of H-bonds : methanol (32) to diethy ether (74)
(a) is less than that of covalent bonds (b) The extent of H-bonding decreases from water to
(b) is greater than that of covalent bonds methanol while it is absent in ether
(c) is same as that of covalent bonds (c) The extent of intramolecular H-bonding decreases from
(d) can be less greater or same as that of covalent bonds ether to methanol to water
79. The correct order of the strength of H-bonds is : (d) The density of water is 1.00 g mL–1, methanol
(a) H....F > H....O > H....N (b) H....N > H....O > H....F 0.7914 g mL–1 and that of diethyl ether is 0.7137 g mL–1
(c) H....O > H....N > H....F (b) H....F > H....N > H....O 86. o-nitrophenol can be easily steam distilled whereas
p-nitrophenol cannot be. This is because of :
80. What is not true about ice ?
(a) strong intermolecular hydrogen bonding in
(a) It has open cage like structure
o-nitrophenol
(b) It has less density than water
(b) strong intramolecular hydrogen bonding in
(c) Each O atom is surrounded by 4 H atoms o-nitrophenol
(d) Each O atom has four H-bonds around it (c) strong intramolecular hydrogen bonding in
81. Which one of the following molecules will form a linear p-nitrophenol
polymeric structure due to hydrogen bonding ? (d) dipole moment of p-nitrophenol is larger than that of
(a) NH3 (b) H2O o-nitrophenol
(c) HCl (d) HF
Molecular Orbital Theory 88. Which of the following statements is not correct regarding
bonding molecular orbitals ?
Paragraph
(a) Bonding molecular orbitals possess less energy than
According to MOT, two atomic orbitals overlap resulting the atomic orbitals from which they are formed
in the formation of molecular orbitals. Number of atomic
(b) Bonding molecular orbitals have low electron density
orbitals overlapping together is equal to the molecular
between the two nuclei
orbital formed. The two atomic orbital thus formed by
LCAO (linear combination of atomic orbital) in the same (c) Electron in bonding molecular contributes to the
phase or in the different phase are known as bonding and attraction between atoms
antibonding molecular orbitals respectively. The energy (d) They are formed when the lobes of the combining
of bonding molecular orbital is lower than that of the pure atomic orbitals have the same sign
atomic orbital by an amount . This known as the 89. Which among the following pairs contain both
stabilization energy. The energy of antibonding molecular paramagnetic species
orbital is increased by ‘ (destabilisation energy).
(a) O22– and N2– (b) O2– and N2
87. Which of the following statement(s) is true
(a) Higher the bond order lesser the bond length (c) O2 and N2 (d) O2 and N2–
(b) Higher the bond order greater the bond length 90. Which of the following pairs of molecule can exist ?
(c) Higher the bond order lesser the bond energy (a) He2 and Be2 (b) O22– and Na2
(d) Higher the bond order lesser the number of bonds (c) O22– and H22– (d) Be2 and Mg2

1. Increasing order of bond strength of O2 , O-2 , O2-
2
and O+2 8. The bond order in NO is 2.5 while that in NO+ is 3. Which of
is (2002) the following statements is true for these two species ?
(a) O+2  O 2  O 2  O 2 (b) O 2  O 2  O 2  O 22  (2004)

(a) Bond length in NO+ is greater than in NO
(c) O 2  O 22   O 2  O 2 (d) O 22   O 2  O 2  O 2
(b) Bond length in NO is greater than in NO+
2. Select correct statement. (2002)
(c) Bond length in NO+ is equal to that in NO
(a) When a covalent bond is formed, transfer of electrons
takes place (d) Bond length is unpredictable
(b) Pure H2O does not contain any ion 9. The states of hybridisation of boron and oxygen atoms in
boric acid (H3BO3) are respectively (2004)
(c) A bond is formed when attractive forces overcome
repulsive forces (a) sp2 and sp2 (b) sp2 and sp3
(d) HF is less polar than HBr (c) sp3 and sp2 (d) sp3 and sp3
3. The pair of species having identical shapes for molecules of 10. The correct order of bond angles (smallest first) in H2S,
both species is (2003) NH3, BF3 and SiH4 is (2004)
(a) XeF2, CO2 (b) BF3, PCl3 (a) H2S < SiH4 < NH3 < BF3
(c) PF5, IF5 (d) CF4, SF4 (b) NH3 < H2S < SiH4 < BF3
4. Which one of the following compounds has the smallest
(c) H2S < NH3 < SiH4 < BF3
bond angle ? (2003)
(d) H2S < NH3 < BF3 < SiH4
(a) H2O (b) H2S
11. Which one of the following has the regular tetrahedral
(c) NH3 (d) SO2 structure ? (2004)
5. An ether is more volatile than an alcohol having the same (Atomic number : B = 5, S = 16, Ni = 28, Xe = 54)
molecular formula. This is due to (2003)
(a) XeF4 (b) SF4
(a) alcohols having resonance structures
(b) inter-molecular hydrogen bonding in ethers (c) BF4 (d) [Ni(CN)4]2–
(c) inter-molecular hydrogen bonding in alcohols 12. The maximum number of 90º angles between bond pair-bond
(d) dipolar character of ethers pair of electrons is observed in (2004)
6. Which one of the following pairs of molecules will have (a) dsp3 hybridisation (b) sp3d hybridisation
permanent dipole moments for both members ? (2003) (c) dsp2 hybridisation (d) sp3d2 hybridisation
(a) SiF4 and NO2 (b) NO2 and CO2 13. Lattice energy of an ionic compound depends upon
(c) NO2 and O3 (d) SiF4 and CO2 (2005)
7. The pair of species having identical shapes for molecules of (a) Charge on the ion and size of the ion
both species, is (2003)
(b) Packing of ions only
(a) CF4, SF4 (b) XeF2, CO2
(c) Size of the ion only
(c) BF3, PCl3 (d) PF5, IF5 (d) Charge on the ion only
14. The molecular shapes of SF4, CF4 and XeF4 are (2005) 21. Which of the following species exhibits diamagnetic
(a) different with 1, 0 and 2 lone pair of electrons on the behaviour ? (2007)
central atoms, respectively (a) O 22  (b) O 2
(b) different with 0, 1 and 2 lone pair of electrons on the
(c) O2 (d) NO
central atoms, respectively.
22. Which of the following hydrogen bonds is the strongest ?
(c) the same with 1, 1 and 1 lone pair of electrons on the
central atoms, respectively (2007)
(d) the same with 2, 0 and 1 lone pair of electrons on the (a) O—H...N (b) F—H...F
central atoms, respectively (c) O—H...O (d) O—H...F
15. Which one of the following species is diamagnetic in nature? 23. Which one of the following constitutes a group of the
(2005) isoelectronic species ? (2008)
(a) H 2 (b) H 2 (a) C 22  , O 2 , CO, NO (b) NO  , C 22  , CN  , N 2
(c) H 2 (d) He2 (c) CN  , N 2 , O 22  , CO 22  (d) N 2 , O 2 , NO  , CO

16. The decreasing values of bond angles from NH3 (106º) to 24. Using MO theory, predict which of the following species
SbH3 (101º) down group-15 of the periodic table is due to has the shortest bond length ? (2008)
(2006) (a) O 2 (b) O 2
(a) decreasing lp-bp repulsion
(b) decreasing electronegativity (c) O 22 (d) O 22
(c) increasing bp-bp repulsion 25. The reason for higher B – F bond dissociation energy as
(d) increasing p-orbital character in sp 3 compared to that of C – F is (2008)
17. In which of the following molecules/ions are all the bonds (a) stronger  bond between B and F in BF3 as compared to
not equal ? (2006) that between C and F in CF4.
(b) significant p–p interaction between B and F in BF3
(a) XeF4 (b) BF4
whereas there is no possibility of such interaction
(c) SF4 (d) SiF4 between C and F in CF4.
18. Which of the following molecules/ions does not contain (c) lower degree of p – pinteraction between B and F in
unpaired electrons? (2006) BF3 than that between C and F in CF4.
(d) smaller size of B–atom as compared to that of C–atom.
(a) N 2 (b) O2
26. The number of types of bonds between two carbon atoms
(c) O 22 (d) B2 in calcium carbide is (2011)
(a) one sigma, two pi (b) one sigma, one pi
19. Which one of the following pairs of species have the same
bond order ? (2007) (c) two sigma, one pi (d) two sigma, two pi
(a) CN– and NO+ (b) CN– and CN+ 27. Which of the following has maximum number of lone pairs
associated with Xe ? (2011)
(c) O 2 and CN  (d) NO+ and CN+
(a) XeO3 (b) XeF4
20. In which of the following ionization processes. the bond (c) XeF6 (d) XeF2
order has increased and the magnetic behaviour has
28. The structure of IF7 is (2011)
changed ? (2007)
(a) square pyramid (b) trigonal bipyramid
(a) N 2  N 2 (b) C 2  C 2
(c) octahedral (d) pentagonal bipyramid
(c) NO NO+ (d) O 2  O 2 .

29. The hybridization of orbitals of N atom in NO 3 , NO 2 and
NH 4 are respectively (2011)

(III) (IV)
(a) sp, sp2, sp3 (b) sp2, sp, sp3
(c) sp, sp3, sp2 (d) sp2, sp3, sp
(a) (I) and (II) (b) Only (III)
30. Among the following the maximum covalent character is
(c) (III) and (IV) (d) Only (I)
shown by the compound (2011)
37. Which of the following has unpaired electron(s)?
(a) FeCl2 (b) SnCl2
(Online 2014 Shift-1)
(c) AlCl3 (d) MgCl2
31. In which of the following pairs the two species are not (a) N2 (b) O 2
isostructural ? (2012)
(c) N 22  (d) O 22 
2  
(a) CO 3
and NO 3
(b) PCl and SiCl4
4
38. Which one of the following does not have a pyramidal
(c) PF5 and BrF5 (d) AlF 3
and SF6 shape? (Online 2014 Shift-2)
6
(a) (CH3)3 N (b) P(CH3)3
32. The molecule having smallest bond angle is (2012)
(a) NCl3 (b) AsCl3 (c) P(SiH3)3 (d) (SiH3)3N
39. Shapes of certain interhalogen compounds are stated below.
(c) SbCl3 (d) PCl3
Which one of them is not correctly stated?
33. Stability of the species Li 2 , Li 2 and Li 2 increases in the (Online 2014 Shift-2)
order of (2012) (a) IF7 : pentagonal bipyramid
   
(a) Li 2  Li  Li 2 2
(b) Li  Li  Li 2
2 2 (b) ICl3 : planar dimeric
(c) Li 2  Li 2  Li 2 (d) Li 2  Li 2  Li 2 (c) BrF3 : planar T-shaped
34. In which of the following pairs of molecules/ions both the (d) BrF5 : trigonal bipyramid
species are not likely to exist ? (2013) 40. In allene (C3H4), the type(s) of hybridization of the carbon
(a) H 2 , He 22 (b) H 2 , He22 atoms is (are): (Online 2014 Shift-2)
2  2
(a) sp2 and sp3 (b) sp and sp3
(c) H , He 2
2
(d) H , He
2 2
(c) sp2 and sp (d) only sp2
35. Which one of the following molecules is expected to exhibit
diamagnetic behaviour ? (2013) 41. The correct order of bond dissociation energy among N2,
(a) C2 (b) O2 O2, O 2 is shown in which of the following arrangements?
(c) S2 (d) None of these (Online 2014 Shift-2)
36. For which of the following molecule significant   0 ? (a) N2> O2> O 2 (b) O2> O 2 >N2
(2014) (c) N2> O 2 >O2 (d) O 2 >O2>N2

42. Which of the following molecules has two sigma() and
two pi() bonds? (Online 2014 Shift-3)
(I) (II) (a) C2H2Cl2 (b) HCN
(c) N2F2 (d) C2H4
43. Amongst LiCl, RbCl, BeCl2 and MgCl2 the compounds with 50. Identify the pair in which the geometry of the species is
the greatest and the least ionic character, respectively are : T-shape and squarepyramidal, respectively :
(Online 2014 Shift-4) (Online 2018 Shift-1)
(a) LiCl and RbCl (b) MgCl2 and BeCl2
(a) ClF3 and IO-4 (b) ICl2- and ICl5
(c) RbCl and BeCl2 (d) RbCl and MgCl2
44. Which of the alkaline earth metal halides given below is (c) XeOF2 and XeOF4 (d) IO3- and IO2 F2-
essentially covalent in nature? (Online 2015 Shift-1)
51. The decreasing order of bond angles in BF3, NH3, PF3 and
(a) SrCl2 (b) CaCl2
(c) BeCl2 (d) MgCl2
I3- is : (Online 2018 Shift-1)
45. The species in which the N atom is in a state of sp (a) I3- > NH3 > PF3 > BF3 (b) I3- > BF3 > NH3 > PF3
hybridization is: (2016)
(a) NO 2– (b) NO3 (c) BF3 > I3- > PF3 > NH3 (d) BF3 > NH3 > PF3 > I3-
52. Which of the following best describes the diagram below

(c) NO2 (d) NO2
of a molecular orbital ? (Online 2018 Shift-2)
46. The group of molecules having identical shape is :
(a) SF4, XeF4, CCl4
(b) ClF3, XeOF2, XeF3

(a) A non-bonding orbital
(c) BF3, PCl3, XeO3 (b) An antibonding  orbital
(d) PCl5, IF5, XeO2F2 (c) A bonding  orbital
47. The bond angle H-X-H is the greatest in the compound : (d) An antibonding  orbital
(Online 2016 Shift-2) 53. In XeO3F2, the number of bond pair(s),  -bond(s) and lone
(a) CH4 (b) NH3 pair(s) on Xe atom respectively are :
(c) H2O (d) PH3
(a) 5, 2, 0 (b) 4, 2, 2
48. Which of the following species is not paramagnetic ?
(c) 5, 3, 0 (d) 4, 4, 0
(2017)
54. The incorrect geometry is represented by :
(a) NO (b) CO
(c) O2 (d) B2
(a) BF3 - trigonal planar
49. In the molecular orbital diagram for the molecular ion, N2+,
(b) H2O - bent
the number of electrons in the  2p molecular orbital is :
(c) NF3 - trigonal planar
(d) AsF5 - trigonal bipyramidal
(a) 0 (b) 1
55. Which of the following conversions involves change in
(c) 2 (d) 3 both shape and hybridisation ? (Online 2018 Shift-3)
(a) NH3  NH+4 (b) CH4  C2H6
(c) H2O  H3O+ (d) BF3  BF4

56. Total number of Ione pair of electrons in I 3 ions is: (a) O 2 (b) N 22 
(Offline 2018) (c) O 22  (d) C22 

(a) 12 (b) 3
63. The correct statement about ICl5 and ICl4 is
(c) 6 (d) 9
57. Which of the following compounds contain(s) no covalent (08-04-2019 Shift-2)
bond(s)? (a) Both are isostructural
KCl, PH3, O2, B2H6, H2SO4 (Offline 2018)
(b) ICl5 is trigonal bipyramidal and ICl4 is tetrahedral
(a) KCl, B2H6 (b) KCl, B2H6, PH3
(c) ICl5 is square pyramidal and ICl4 is tetrahedral
(c) KCl, H2SO4 (d) KCl
58. According to molecular orbital theory, which of the (d) ICl5 is square pyramidal and ICl4 is square planar..
following will not be a viable molecule?
(Offline 2018) 64. The ion that has sp3 d 2 hybridization for the central atom,
(a) H22 (b) He22 is : (08-04-2019 Shift-2)
(a)  ICl4  (b)  ICl 2 

 
(c) He2 (d) H2
(c)  IF6  (d)  BrF2 

 
59. In which of the following processes, the bond order has
increased and paramagnetic character has changed to
65. Among the following molecules expected to the stabilized
diamagnetic ? (09-01-2019 Shift-2)
the following, the molecule expected to the stabilized by
(a) NO  NO (b) N 2  N 2 anion formation is : (09-04-2019 Shift-1)
(c) O2  O2 (d) O2  O 22  C2 ,O 2 , NO, F2
60. Two pi and half sigma bonds are present in (a) C 2 (b) F2
(10-01-2019 Shift-1)
(c) NO (d) O 2
(a) O2 (b) N 2
66. HF has highest boiling point among hydrogen halides,
(c) O 2 (d) N  because it has : (09-04-2019 Shift-2)
2
(a) strongest van der Waals’ interactions
61. The type of hybridization and number of lone pair(s)
electrons of Xe in XeOF4 respectively are (b) lowest ionic character
(10-01-2019 Shift-1) (c) strongest hydrogen bonding

(d) lowest dissociation enthalpy
(a) sp3 d 2 and 1 (b) sp3 d and 2
67. Among the following species, the diamagnetic molecule
(c) sp3 d 2 and 2 (d) sp3 d and 1 is : (09-04-2019 Shift-2)
62. Among the following molecules/ions, (a) NO (b) CO
C22  , N 22  , O22  , O 2 (c) B2 (d) O 2
Which one is diamagnetic and has the shortest bond

length ?
(08-04-2019 Shift-2)
74. If the magnetic moment of a dioxygen species is 1.73
68. During the change of O 2 to O2 , the incoming electron
B.M, it may be : (09-01-2020 Shift-1)
goes to the orbital : (10-04-2019 Shift-1)
(a) O 2 , O2 or O 2 (b) O 2 or O 2
(a) 2p y (b)  2p z
(c) O2 or O2 (d) O2 or O2
(c)  2p x (d) 2p x
75. Which of the following oxides are acidic, basic and
69. The correct statement among the following is : amphoteric, respectively ? (09-01-2020 Shift-1)
(12-04-2019 Shift-1)
(a) MgO, Cl2 O, Al2 O3 (b) N 2 O 3 , Li 2 O, Al2 O3
(a)  SiH 3 3 N is planar and less basic than  CH3 3 N
(c) SO 3 , Al 2 O3 , Na 2 O (d) P4 O10 .Cl 2 O, CaO
(b)  SiH 3 3 N is pyramidal and more basic than
76. If AB4 molecule is a polar molecule, a possible geometry
 CH3 3 N of AB4 is : (02-09-2020 Shift-1)
(c)  SiH 3 3 N is pyramidal and less basic than  CH3 3 N (a) Square planar (b) Tetrahedral
(c) Square pyramidal (d) Rectangular planar
(d)  SiH 3 3 N is planar and more basic than  CH3 3 N
77. The shape/structure of  XeF5  and

70. The C  C bond length is maximum in :

XeO3 F2 , respectively, are : (02-09-2020 Shift-1)
(12-04-2019 Shift-2)
(a) Pentagonal planar and trigonal bipyramidal
(a) Graphite (b) C70
(b) Trigonal bipyramidal and trigonal bipyramidal
(c) C 60 (d) Diamond
(c) Octahedral and square pyramidal
71. The dipole moments of CCl 4 , CHCl3 and CH 4 are in the (d) Trigonal bipyramidal and pentagonal planar
order: (07-01-2020 Shift-1)
78. The molecular geometry of SF6 is octahedral. What is the
(a) CH 4  CCl 4  CHCl3 geometry of SF4 (including lone pair(s) of electrons, if
(b) CHCl3  CH 4  CCl4 any) ? (02-09-2020 Shift-1)
(a) Pyramidal (b) Trigonal bipyramidal
(c) CH 4  CCl 4  CHCl3
(c) Tetrahedral (d) Square planar
(d) CCl 4  CH 4  CHCl3
79. Of the species, NO, NO , NO 2  and NO2  , the one with
72. The bond order and magnetic characteristics of CN are : 
minimum bond strength is : (02-09-2020 Shift-1)
(07-01-2020 Shift-1) (a) NO (b) NO
(a) 3 paramagnetic (b) 3, diamagnetic
(c) NO2  (d) NO
(c) 25, diamagnetic (d) 25, paramagnetic
80. The reaction in which the hybridisation of the underlined
73. Arrange the following bonds according to their average
atom is affected is : (04-09-2020 Shift-2)
bond energies is descending order (08-01-2020 Shift-2)
(a) H 2 SO4  NaCl 
420 K

(a) C  Cl  C  Br  C  I  C  F
(b) C  Br  C  I  C  Cl  C  F (b) XeF4  SbF5 
(c) C  I  C  B  C  Cl  C  F (c) NH3 

H


(d) C  F  C  Cl  C  Br  C  I
(d) H3 PO2 
Disproportionation

81. The molecule in which hybrid AOs involve only one (a) Distorted trigonal planar 135o and 90o
d-orbital of the central atom is : (04-09-2020 Shift-2) (b) T-shaped ; 180o and 90o
(c) Trigonal planar ; 120o
(a)  CrF6 
3
(b) XeF4
(d) Linear ; 180o
2
(c) BrF5 (d)  Ni  CN 4  88. According to molecular orbital theory, the species among
the following that does not exist is (21-08-2021 Shift-2)
82. The structure of PCl5 in the solid state is : (a) He2- (b) Be2
(05-09-2020 Shift-1) (c) O22-
(d) He2+
89. Which among the following species has unequal bond
(a) Square planar  PCl4  and octahedral  PCl6 
 
lengths? (25-02-2021 Shift-2)

(b) Tetrahedral and octahedral (a) XeF4 (b) SiF4
(c) Trigonal bipyramidal (c) SF4 (d) BF4+
(d) Square pyramidal 90. Given below are two statements : one is labelled as
83. The compound that has the largest H-M-H bond angle Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R.
(M = N, O, S, C) is : (05-09-2020 Shift-2) Assertion (A): Dipole-dipole interactions are the only non-
covalent interactions, resulting in hydrogen bond
(a) CH 4 (b) H 2S formation.
(c) NH 3 (d) H 2 O Reason R : Fluorine is the most electronegative element
and hydrogne bonds in HF are symmetrical.
84. Lattice enthalpy and enthalpy of solution of NaCl are
In the light of the above statements, choose the most
788 kJ mol1 , respectively. The hydration enthalpy of NaCl
appropriate answer from the option given below :
is : (05-09-2020 Shift-2) (26-02-2021 Shift-1)
(a) A is true but R is false
(a) 780 kJ mol1 (b) 784 kJ mol1
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct
(c) 784 kJ mol1 (d) 780 kJ mol1 explnation of A
85. Which of the following are isostructural pairs? (c) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation
of A
(24-02-2021 Shift-1)
(d) A is false but R is true.
(i) SO 24  and CrO 24  (ii) SiCl4 and TiCl4 91. Given below are two statements : one is labelled as
(iii) NH3 and NO3. (iv) BCl3 and BrCl3 Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R.
(a) I and III only (b) I and II only Assertion (A) :The H-O-H bond angle in water moleucle is
104.5o.
(c) II and III only (d) III and IV only
Reason (R) : The lone pair-lone pair repulsion of electrons
86. The correct set from the following in which both pairs are
is higher than the bond pair - bond pair repulsion.
in correct order of melting point is (24-02-2021 Shift-2)
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
(a) LiF > LiCl ; NaCl > MgO answer from the options given below:
(b) LiCl > LiF ; NaCl > MgO (26-02-2021 Shift-1)
(c) LiCl > LiF ; MgO > NaCl (a) Both A and R are true, but R is NOT the correct
explnation of A
(d) LiF > LiCl ; MgO > NaCl
(b) A is true but R is false
87. The correct shape and I-I-I bond angles respectively in I 3 (c) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation
ion are : (24-02-2021 Shift-2) of A
(d) A is false but R is true. (c) BBr3 (d) Bl3
92. Which one of the following species doesn’t have a 99. Number of paramagnetic oxides among the following given
magnetic moment of 1.73 BM, (spin only value) oxides is _________ : (1-09-2021 Shift-2)
(20-07-2021 Shift-2) Li2O, CaO, Na2O2, KO2, MgO and K2O
(a) O 
(b) CuI (a) 1 (b) 2
2
(c) 3 (d) 0
(c) [Cu(NH 3 ) 4 ]Cl2 (d) O 2
100. A central atom in a molecule has two lone pairs of electrons
93. The hybridization of the atomic orbitals of nitrogen in and forms three single bonds. The shape of this molecule
NO 2 , NO 2 and NH 4 respectively are is : (17-03-2021 Shift-1)
(20-07-2021 Shift-2) (a) see-saw (b) T-shaped
(a) sp3, sp2 and sp (b) sp, sp2 and sp3 (c) planar triangular (d) trigonal pyramidal
(c) sp3, sp and sp2 (d) sp2, sp and sp3 101. Amongst the following, the linear species is :
94. In the following the correct bond order sequence is : (17-03-2021 Shift-2)
(25-07-2021 Shift-2) (a) Cl2O (b) NO2
(a) O 22   O 2  O 2  O 2 (c) N 3 (d) O3
(b) O 2  O 2  O 22   O 2 Numeric Type Questions

102. The ionization enthalpy of Na+ formation from Na(g) is 495.8
(c) O 2  O 2  O 2  O 22  kJ mol-1, while the electron gain enthalpy of Br is -325.0 kJ
mol-1. Given the lattice enthalpy of NaBr is -728.4 kJ mol-1.
(d) O 2  O 2  O 22   O 2
The energy form the formation of NaBr ionic solid is (-)
95. Identify the species have one   bond and maximum _____ × 10-1 kJ mol-1. (25-02-2021 Shift-1)
number of canonical forms from the following : 103. AX is a covalent diatomic molecule where A and X are
(25-07-2021 Shift-2) second row elements of periodic table. Based on Molecular
(a) SO3 (b) O2 orbital theory, the bond order of AX is 2.5. The total number
of electrons in AX is ............... (Round off to the Nearest
(c) SO2 (d) CO32-
Integer) (18-03-2021 Shift-1)
96. The interaction energy of London force between two
104. The number of species below that have two lone pairs of
particles is proportional to rx, where r is the distance
electrons in their central atom is ............. (Round off to the
between the particles. The value of x is :
Nearest Integer)
(a) 3 (b) -3
SF4, BF4-, ClF3, AsF3, PCl5, BrF5, XeF4, SF6
(c) -6 (d) 6
(18-03-2021 Shift-2)
(26-08-2021 Shift-2)
105. The number of lone pairs of electrons on the central I atom
97. The bond order and magnetic behaviour of O2- ion are,
in I3- is _______. (20-07-2021 Shift-1)
respectively : (26-08-2021 Shift-2)
(a) 1.5 and paramagnetic 106. The total number of electrons in all bonding moleuclar
(b) 1.5 and diamagnetic orbitals of O 22  is : (27-07-2021 Shift-2)
(c) 2 and diamagnetic 107. The difference between bond orders of CO and NO is
(d) 1 and paramagnetic
x
98. In which one of the following molecules strongest back where x = _______ . (27-07-2021 Shift-1)
2
donation of an electron pair from halide to boron is
expected? (27-08-2021 Shift-1) 108. AB3, is an interhalogen T-shaped molecule. The number
of lone pairs of electrons on A is _______. (Integer answer)
(a) BCl3 (b) BF3
(26-08-2021 Shift-1)
109. The Born-Haber cycle for KCl is evaluated with the 114. Match List-I and List -II : (22-07-2021 Shift-2)
following data : (26-08-2021 shift -1)
List-I (Species) List - II (Hybrid Orbitals)

 f H for KCl = -436.7 kJ mol ; -1
(a) SF4 (i) sp3d2

 sub H  for K = 89.2 kJ mol-1;
(b) IF5 (ii) d2sp3
 ionisation H  for K = 419.0 kJ mol-1 ;
(c) NO2 (iii) sp3d
 electron gain H  for Cl(g) = -348.6 kJ mol-1;
(d) NH4 (iv) sp3
 bond H  for Cl2 = 243.3 kJ mol-1 (v) sp
The magnitude of lattice enthalpy of KCl in kJ mol-1 is Choose the correct answer from the options given below
__________ (Nearest integer) (a) (a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(v) and (d)-(iii)
110. The number of species having non-pyramidal shape among (b) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(v) and (d)-(v)
the following is _____ . (27-08-2021 Shift-2) (c) (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(v) and (d)-(iv)

(A) SO3, (B) NO , (C) PCl3, (D) CO
3
2
3
(d) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii) and (d)-(v)
111. According to molecular orbital theory, the number of 115. Match List-I with List-II (7-08-2021 Shift-1)
unpaired electron(s) in O 22  is : (31-08-2021 Shift-2) List- I (Molecule) List-II (Number of lone

pairs of electrons on
112. The spin-only magnetic moment value of B 2 species is the central atom
(p) XeF2 (i) 0
______ × 10-2 BM. (Nearest integer) [Given : 3  1.73 ]
(q) XeO2F2 (ii) 1
(1-09-2021 Shift-2)
(r) XeO3F2 (iii) 2
Match The Following (s) XeF4 (iv) 3
113. Match List-I with List - II (26-02-2021 Shift-2)
List- I (Molecule) List-II (Bond Order) (a) (p)-(iv), (q)-(i), (r)-(ii), (s)-(iii)
A. Ne2 (i) 1 (b) (p)-(iii), (q)-(iv), (r)-(ii), (s)-(i)
B. N2 (ii) 2 (c) (p)-(iii), (q)-(ii), (r)-(iv), (s)-(i)
C. F2 (iii) 0 (d) (p)-(iv), (q)-(ii), (r)-(i), (s)-(iii)
D. O2 (iv) 3
Choose the correct answer from the options given below

(a) A- (iv), B - (iii), C - (ii), D -(i)
(b) A- (ii), B - (i), C - (iv), D -(iii)
(c) A- (iii), B - (iv), C - (i), D -(ii)
(d) A- (i), B - (ii), C - (iii), D -(iv)

Objective Questions I [Only One Correct Option] 7. The H – C – H bond angle in CH4 is 109.5º, due to lone
1. Bonds present in N2O5 (nitrogen pentaoxide) are : pair repulsion, the H – O – H angle in H2O will :
(a) only ionic (a) remain the same (b) increase
(b) only covalent (c) decrease (d) become 180º
(c) covalent and co-ordinate 8. The molecule having the largest bond angle is :
(d) covalent and ionic (a) H2O (b) H2S
2. The lowest O – O bond length in the following molecule (c) H2Se (d) H2Te
is: 9. The correct order of bond angles is :
(a) O2F2 (b) O2
(a) NO2  NO2  NO2
(c) H2O2 (d) O3
(b) NO2  NO2  NO2
3. The shape of MnO4 ion and the hybridisation of Mn
in MnO4 is : (c) NO2  NO2  NO2

3 3
(a) tetrahedral, sp (b) tetrahedral, d s (d) NO2  NO2  NO2
2 3
(c) square planar, dsp (d) square planar, sp 10. Dipole moment of NF3 is smaller than :
4. The geometry of ammonia molecule can be best (a) NH3 (b) CO2
described as :
(c) BF3 (d) CCl4
(a) Nitrogen at one vertex of a regular tetrahedron, the
11. Which of the following molecules has highest dipole
other three vertices being occupied by three hydrogens
moment?
(b) Nitrogen at the centre of the tetrahedron, three of
(a) BF3 (b) NH3
the vertices being occupied by three hydrogens
(c) NF3 (d) B2H6
(c) Nitrogen at the centre of an equilateral triangle, three
corners being occupied by three hydrogens 12. Among the following, the molecule with highest dipole
moment is :
(d) Nitrogen at the junction of a T, three open ends
being occupied by three hydrogens (a) CH3Cl (b) CH2Cl2
5. Maximum bond angle is present in : (c) CHCl3 (d) CCl4
(a) BBr3 (b) BCl3 13. The H-bonds in solid HF can be best represented as :
(c) BF3 (d) none of these (a) H –– F---H –– F --- H –– F
6. The bond angle of NH3, NH4 and NH2 are in the order: (b)
(a) NH2  NH3  NH4
(b) NH4  NH3  NH2 (c)
(c) NH3  NH2  NH4

(d)
(d) NH3  NH4  NH2
+ – (a) (I), (III) and (IV) (b) (II), (III) and (IV)
14. The ionic bonds X Y are formed when :
(c) (I) and (II) (d) All are correct
(I) electron affinity of Y is high
20. The state of hybridisation of central atom in dimer of
(II) ionization energy of X is low
BH3 and BeH2 is :
(III) lattice energy of XY is high 2 2 2
(a) sp , sp (b) sp , sp
(IV) lattice energy of XY is low 3 3 2 3
(c) sp , sp (d) sp , sp
Choose the correct code :
21. The correct order of increasing s-character
(a) I & II (b) I & III (in percentage) in the hybrid orbitals of following
(c) I, II & III (d) All molecules/ions is :
15. Among the oxides of nitrogen, N2O, NO and NO2,
(I) CO23 (II) XeF4
molecules with unpaired electrons are :
(a) N2O and NO (b) NO and NO2 (III) I3 (IV) NCl3
(c) N2O and NO2 (d) NO2 and its dimer (V) BeCl2
16. What is the state of hybridisation of Xe in cationic part (a) II < III < IV < I < V (b) II < IV < III < V < I
of solid XeF6 ?
3 3 3 2
(c) III < II < I < V < IV (d) II < IV < III < I < V
(a) sp d (b) sp d
3 3
22. Which molecular geometry is least likely to result from
(c) sp d (d) sp a trigonal bipyramidal electron geometry ?
17. Choose the correct code of characteristics for the given (a) Trigonal planar (b) See-saw
order of hybrid orbitals of same atom,
2 3
(c) Linear (d) T-shaped
sp < sp < sp
23. Given the correct order of initials T or F for following
(i) Electronegativity statements. Use T is statement is true and F if it is false :
(ii) Bond angle between same hybrid orbitals (I) The order of repulsion between different pair of
(iii) Size electrons is lp – lp > lp – bp > bp – bp
(iv) Energy level (II) In general, as the number of lone pair of electrons
(a) (ii), (iii) and (iv) (b) (iii), (iv) on central atom increases, value of bond angle from
normal bond angle also increases.
(c) (ii) and (iv) (d) (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv)
(III) The number of lone pair on O in H2O is 2 while on
18. Assuming pure 2s and 2p orbitals of carbon are used in N in NH3 is 1
forming CH4 molecule, which of the following statement
is false ? (IV) The structures of xenon fluorides and xenon
oxyfluorides could not be explained on the basis of
(a) Three C – H bonds will be at right angle VSEPR theory
(b) One C – H bond will be weaker than other three C – (a) TTTF (b) TFTF
H bond
(c) TFTT (d) TFFF
(c) The shape of molecule will be tetrahedral
24. The correct order of H – M – H bonds angle is :
(d) The angle of C – H bond formed by s - s overlapping
will be uncertain with respect to other three bonds. (a) NH3 < PH3 < SbH3 < BiH3
19. Which is correct statements ? (b) AsH3 < SbH3 < PH3 < NH3
As the s-character of a hybrid orbital decreases (c) NH3 < PH3 < BiH3 < SbH3
(I) The bond angle decreases (d) BiH3 < SbH3 < AsH3 < PH3
(II) The bond strength increases 25. The correct increasing order of adjacent bond angle
among BF3, PF3 and ClF3 :
(III) The bond length increases
(a) BF3 < PF3 < ClF3 (b) PF3 < BF3 < ClF3
(IV) Size of orbitals increases
(c) ClF3 < PF3 < BF3 (d) BF3 = PF3 = ClF3
26. Which of the following compounds have the same no. 1 2 3 4
of lone pairs with their central atom ?
(a) P NP NP P

(I) XeF 5
(II) BrF3 (b) NP NP NP P
+
(III) XeF2 (IV) H3S (c) NP P NP P
(a) IV and V (b) I and III (d) NP P P NP
(c) I and II (d) II and IV (Where, P = polar, NP = non-polar)
27. The geometry with respect to the central atom of the 33. Select correct statement(s) regarding  and -bonds :
following molecules are : (a) -bond lies on the line joining the nuclei of bonded
N (SiH3)3 ; Me3N ; (SiH3)3P atoms
(a) planar, pyramidal, planar (b) -electron cloud lies on either side to the line joining
the nuclei of bonded atoms
(b) planar, pyramidal, pyramidal
(c) (2p – 3d) pi-bond is stronger than (2p– 3p) pi-
(c) pyramidal, pyramidal, pyramidal
bond.
(d) pyramidal, planar, pyramidal
(d) -bond has primary effect of decide direction of
28. Which of the following molecules will have polar bonds covalent bond, while -bond has no primary effect in
but zero dipole moment ? direction of bond
(a) O2 (b) CHCl3 34. In which of the following there is intermolecular
(c) CF4 (d) none of these hydrogen bonding ?
29. Which has maximum dipole moment ? (a) Water (b) Ethanol
(c) Acetic acid (d) H–F
Objective Questions II
(a) (b) [One or more than one correct option]
35. Which of the following statements are correct about
sulphur hexafluoride ?
(a) all S – F bonds are equivalent
(b) SF6 is a planar molecule
(c) (d) (c) oxidation number of sulphur is the same as number
of electrons of sulphur involved in bonding
(d) sulphur has acquired the electronic structure of the
30. The dipole moment of o, p and m-dichlorobenzene will gas argon
be in the order :
36. Ionic compounds in general do not possess :
(a) o > p > m (b) p > o > m
(a) high melting points and non-directional bonds
(c) m > o > p (d) o > m > p
(b) high melting points and low-boiling points
31. Which of the following compounds has dipole moment
approximately equal to that of chlorobenzene ? (c) directional bonds and low-boiling points
(d) high solubilities in polar and non-polar solvents
(a) o-dichlorobenzene (b) m-dichlorobenzene
37. Which of the following statements is incorrect ?
(c) p-dichlorobenzene (d) p-chloronitrobenzene
32. The correct sequence of polarity of the following (a) A  bond is weaker than a  bond
molecule (b) There are four co-ordinate bonds in the NH4 ions
(1) Benzene (2) Inorganic Benzene
(c) The covalent bond is directional in nature
(3) PCl3F2 (4) PCl2F3
(d) HF is less polar than HCl
38. Correct order of decreasing boiling points is :

(d) C – O bond length in HCO2 and C – O bond length
(a) HF > HI > HBr > HCl
in CO23  are equal
(b) H2O > H2Te > H2Se > H2S
(c) Br2 > Cl2 > F2 44. Which of the following is true for N2O ?
(d) CH4 > GeH4 > SiH4 (a) Its molecule is linear
39. Which of the following statements is correct ? (b) Symmetric N – O – N is a favoured structure as
compared to N – N – O skeleton
(a) ClF3 molecule is bent ‘T’ shape
(c) Bond orders are fractional for N – N and N – O
(b) In SF4 molecule, F – S – F equatorial bond angle is bonds
103º due to lp-lp repulsion
– (d) It is a neutral oxide
(c) In [ICl4] molecular ion, Cl – I – Cl bond angle is 90º
45. If NB is the number of bonding electrons and NA is the
(d) In OBr2, the bond angle is less than OCl2 number of antibonding electrons of a molecule. Then
40. Which of the following is (are) V-shaped ? choose the incorrect statement(s) for the relationship,
NB > NA :
(a) S23  (b) I3
(a) Molecule may be stable or unstable
 
(c) N 3
(d) I 3 (b) Molecule may have any integral, fractional or zero
41. Which of the following are true ? value of bond order
(a) van der Waals forces are responsible for the formation (c) Molecule is only paramagnetic species
of molecular crystals (d) Molecule does not exist
(b) Branching lowers the boiling points of isomeric 46. Correct order of B.pt. is/are :
organic compounds due to decrease in van der Waals (a) H2 < He (b) H2 < D2
forces
(c) H2O < D2O (d) NH3 < SbH3
(c) In graphite, van der Waals forces act between the
carbon layers Numerical Value Type Questions
(d) In diamond, van der Waals forces act between the 47. Among the following, total no. of planar species is :
carbon layers (i) SF4 (ii) BrF3
42. Which of the following statement is incorrect : (iii) XeF2 (iv) IF5
(a) O2 is paramagnetic, O3 is also paramagnetic (v) SbF4 (vi) SF5
(b) O2 is paramagnetic, O3 is diamagnetic
(vii) SeF3 (viii) CH3
(c) B2 is paramagnetic, C2 is also paramagnetic
(d) Different observation is found in their bond length (ix) PCl 4
+ +
when NO  NO and CO  CO
43. Which of the following statements are not correct ?
Assertion Reason
(A) If both Assertion and Reason are correct
(a) All C – O bonds in CO23 are equal but not in H2CO3
and Reason is the correct explanation of
(b) All C – O bonds in HCO2 are equal but not in Assertion.
HCO2H (B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but

(c) C – O bond length in HCO is longer than C – O
2
Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion.
bond length in CO32 
(C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
(D) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.
48. Assertion : In SO3 molecule bond dissociation energy 53. Column - I Column - II
of all S = O bonds are not equivalent. (A) SO3 (P) Largest bond angle
Reason : SO3 molecule is having two types of 2p – 3p (B) BeCl2 (Q) Lowest bond angle
and 2p – 3d pi-bonds. (C) NH3
2
(R) sp -hybridisation
(a) A (b) B 3
(D) NO2 (S) sp -hybridisation
(c) C (d) D
49. Assertion : The HF2 ion exists in the solid state &
(A) NH2 (P) Square pyramidal
also in liquid state but not in aqueous state.
Reason : The magnitude of hydrogen bonds among (B) XeOF2 (Q) V-shaped
HF molecules is weaker than that in between HF and
(C) ICl4 (R) T-shaped
H2O.
2–
(a) A (b) B (D) [SbF5] (S) Square planar
(c) C (d) D
50. Assertion : Water is a good solvent for ionic 55. Column - I Column - II
compounds but poor for covalent compounds. (Axial/sideways (Types of molecular
Reason : Hydration energy of ions releases sufficient combination of appropriate/ orbitals)
energy to overcome lattice energy and break hydrogen inappropriate pure orbitals)
bonds in water while covalent compounds interact so
(A) p + p pure orbitals (P)  -bonding molecular
weakly that even van der Waal’s forces between
molecules of covalent compounds cannot be broken. (B) s + p pure orbitals (Q) - anti-bonding molecular
orbital
(a) A (b) B
(C) (non-axial) d + p (R) - anti-bonding molecular
(c) C (d) D
pure orbitals orbital
51. ˆ bond angle is higher than HOCl
Assertion : HOF ˆ .
(D) (axial) d + p pure (S)  - bonding molecular
Reason : Oxygen is more electronegative than chlorine. orbital orbitals
(a) A (b) B (T) Non-bonding molecular
(c) C (d) D orbital
52. Assertion : (CH3)3N geometry is pyramidal but in case 56. Column - I Column - II
(SiH3)3N it is planar. (A) NH4Cl (P) Hydrogen bond
Reason : The maximum covalency of Si is six but that of (B) CuSO4.5H2O (Q) Co-ordinate bond
C is four.
(C) HNC (R) ionic bond
(a) A (b) B
(D) Liquid H2O2 (S) Covalent bond
(c) C (d) D
Match the following (A) B3N3H6 (P) Planar geometry
Each questions has two columns. Four op- (B) S2Cl2 (Q) Non-polar geometry
tions are given representing matching ele- (C) B2H6 (R) No lone pair
ments from Column-I and Column-II. Only (D) I2Cl6 (S) Non-polar molecule
one of these four options corresponds to
a correct matching. For each questions,
choose the correct option corresponding
to the correct matching.
61. Which of the following orbital cannot form -bond ?
(Species) (Bond angle) (a) d x2  y2 orbital (b) dxy orbital
(A) NO2 (P) 180º (c) d z 2 orbital (d) dzx orbital
(B) NO2 (Q) 120º 62. Which of the following combination of orbitals does
not form any type covalent bond (if z-axis is molecular
(C) NO2 (R) 134º
axis) ?
(D) NO3 (S) 115º (a) pz + pz (b) py + py
(T) 109º (c) s + py (d) s + s
Pragraph type questions Use the following passage, solve Q.63 to Q.65
Use the following passage, solve Q.59 Passage
Passage Ionic bond is defined as the electrostatics force of
attraction holding the oppositely charged ions. Ionic
The space model which is obtained by joining the points compounds are mostly crystalline solid having high
representing various bonded atoms gives the shape of melting and boiling points, electrical conductivity in
the molecule. The geometry of the molecule is definite molten state, solubility in water etc. Covalent bond is
relative arrangement of the bonded atoms in a molecule. defined as the force which binds atoms of same or
The shape and geometry of a molecule is explained by different elements by mutual sharing of electrons in a
valence shell electron pair repulsion theory given by covalent bond. Covalent compounds are solids, liquids
Gillespia and Nyholm. or gases. They have low melting and boiling points
59. Which is not the electron geometry of covalent molecules? compounds. They are more soluble in non-polar
(a) Pentagonal bipyramidal solvents.
(b) Octahedral 63. The valence electrons are involved in formation of
covalent bonds is/are called :
(c) Hexagonal
(a) non-bonding electrons
(d) Tetrahedral
(b) lone pairs
Use the following passage, solve Q.60 to Q.62
(c) unshared pairs
Passage (d) none of these
According to V.B.T., atoms of element form bond only 64. The amount of energy released when one mole of ionic
to pair up their unpaired electrons present in ground
solid is formed by packing of gaseous ion is called :
state or excited state. This pairing of unpaired electron
will take place by overlapping of orbitals each one (a) Ionisation energy (b) Solvation energy
having one unpaired electron with opposite spin. (c) Lattice energy (d) Hydration energy
60. Which of the following orbital combination does not 65. Which of the following is arranged order of increasing
form -bond ? boiling point ?
(a) px + px sideways overlapping (a) H2O < CCl4 < CS2 < CO2
(b) CO2 < CS2 < CCl4 < H2O
(b) d x2  y 2  p y sideways overlapping
(c) CS2 < H2O < CO2 < CCl4
(c) d xy  d xy sideways overlapping (d) CCl4 < H2O < CO2 < CS2
(d) d yz  p y sideways overlapping

Use the following passage, solve Q.66 to Q.68 68. Ka2 of Maleic acid is lesser than Ka2 of fumaric acid due
to:
Passage
(a) intramolecular hydrogen bonding in the formed after
In general boiling point of covalent compounds is one proton removal in fumaric acid
effected due to increasing molecular weight and
(b) intermolecular hydrogen bonding in the ion formed
hydrogen bonding. Thus it is observed that the boiling
after one proton removal in maleic acid
point of octanol is greater that water while that of
methanol is lesser than water. The other properties (c) intramolecular hydrogen bonding in the ion formed
which are considerably affected due to hydrogen bond after one proton removal in maleic acid
formation are acidic nature, melting point, anomalous (d) intermolecular hydrogen bonding in the ion formed
behaviour of water below 4ºC., It is therefore concluded after one proton removal in fumaric acid
that hydrogen bonding plays a vital role in explaining
many observable facts.
Use the following passage, solve Q.69 to Q.70
66. Which among the following has maximum boiling point? Passage
(a) CH3 – CH2 – (CH2)2 – CH2OH The space model which is obtained by joining the points
representing various bonded atoms gives the shape of
(b) the molecule. The geometry of the molecule is definite
relative arrangement of the bonded atoms in a molecule.
The shape and geometry of a molecule is explained by
valence shell electron pair repulsion theory given by
(c) Gillespia and Nyholm.
69. Select the correct code for the following repulsion
orders, according to VSEPR theory :
(I) lone pair-lone pair > lone pair-bond pair
(II) lone pair-bond pair > bond pair-bond pair
(d) (III) lone pair-lone pair > bond pair-bond pair
(IV) lone pair-bond pair > lone pair-bond pair
(a) I, II & III (b) II & IV
67. Which of the following statements is true ? (c) I, II & IV (d) All
(a) the lattice structure of ice involves true covalent 70. Which molecule has both shape and geometry identical?
bond
(I) SnCl2 (II) NH3
(b) the lattice strucutre of ice is the result of dipole-
(III) PCl5 (d) SF6
dipole interaction
(a) I, III & IV (b) II, III & IV
(c) the lattice structure of ice is the result of intra and
inter-molecular hydrogen bond formation (c) III & IV (d) All
(d) the lattice structure of ice is only due to inter-
molecular hydrogen bonding
Objective Question - I (Only one correct option) (c) four orbitals directed tetrahedrally
1. Which of the following compound is covalent ? (d) three orbitals in a plane
(1980) 8. The bond between two identical non-metal atoms has a
(a) H2 (b) CaO pair of electrons (1986)
(1986)
(a) unequally shared between the two
(c) KCl (d) Na2S
(b) transferred fully from one atom to another
2. Element X is strongly electropositive and element Y is
strongly electronegative. Both are univalent. The (c) with identical spins
compound formed would be (d) equally shared between them
(1980)
9. The hybridisation of sulphur in sulphur dioxide is
+ – – +
(a) X Y (b) X Y (1986)
(c) X – Y (d) X  Y (a) sp (b) sp3
3. Which of the following is soluble in water (c) sp2 (d) dsp2
(1980)
10. Of the following compounds, which will have a zero
(a) CS2 (b) C2H5OH
dipole moment ? (1987)
(c) CCl4 (d) CHCl3 (a) 1, 1-dichloroethylene
4. The ion that is isoelectronic with CO is (b) cis-1, 2-dichloroethylene
(1982) (c) trans-1, 2-dichloroethylene
– 
(a) CN (b) O 2
11. The Cl—C—Cl angle in 1, 1, 2, 2-tetrachloroethene and

(c) O 2 (d) N 2
tetrachloromethane respectively will be about
5. Carbon tetrachloride has no net dipole moment because (1988)
of
(a) 120º and 109.5º (b) 90º and 109.5º
(1983)
(c) 109º and 90º (d) 109.5º and 120º
(a) its planar structure
12. The species in which the central atom uses sp2 hybrid
(b) its regular tetrahedral structure
orbitals in its bonding is (1988)
(c) similar sizes of carbon and chlorine
(a) PH3 (b) NH3
(d) similar electron affinities of carbon and chlorine
6. Which one among the following does not have the (c) CH 3 (d) SbH3
hydrogen bond ? *
13. The compound in which C uses its sp3 hybrid orbitals
(1983) for bond formation is : (1989)
(a) Phenol (b) Liquid NH3 * *
(a) HCOOH (b) (H2N)2CO
(c) Water (d) H2O2
* *
7. On hybridisation of one s and one p-orbital we get (c) (CH 3)3COH (d) CH 3CHO
(1984) 14. The molecule which has zero dipole moment is
(a) two mutually perpendicular orbitals (1989)
(b) two orbitals at 180º (a) CH2Cl2 (b) BF3
(c) NF3 (d) ClO2
15. Which of the following is paramagnetic ? (1989)
(b) [NF3, NO3 ] and [ NO3 , BF3 ]
(a) O 2 (b) CN–
(c) [NF3, H3O+] and [ NO3 , BF3 ]
(c) CO (d) NO+
(d) [NF3, H3O+] and [HN3, BF3]
16. The molecule which has pyramidal shape is
24. The number and type of bonds between two carbon
(1989)
atoms in CaC2 are (1996)
(a) PCl3 (b) SO3
(a) one sigma () and one pi () bonds
(c) CO32  (d) NO3 (b) one sigma () and two pi () bonds
17. The number of hybrid orbitals used by the chlorine (c) one sigma () and one half pi () bonds
atom is ClO2 is (1992) (d) one sigma () bond
25. Arrange the following compounds in order of increasing
(a) 2 (b) 4
dipole moment, toluene (I), m-dichlorobenzene (II),
(c) 3 (d) 1 o-dichlorobenzene (III), p-dichlorobenzene (IV)
18. The type of hybrid orbitals used by the chlorine atom (1996)

in ClO is 2
(1992) (a) I < IV < II < III (b) IV < I < II < III
(a) sp3 (b) sp2 (c) IV < I < III < II (d) IV < II < I < III
(c) sp (d) None of these 26. Which contains both polar and non-polar bonds ?
19. The maximum possible number of hydrogen bonds a (1997)
water molecule can form is (1992) (a) NH4Cl (b) HCN
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) H2O2 (d) CH4
(c) 3 (d) 1 27. The critical temperature of water is higher than that of
20. Pick out the isoelectronic structures from the following; O2 because the H2O molecule has (1997)
(1993)
(a) fewer electrons than O2
I. CH 3 II. H3O +
(b) two covalent bonds
(c) V-shape
III. NH3 IV. CH 3
(d) dipole moment.
(a) I and II (b) III and IV
28. Among KO 2 , AlO 2 , BaO 2 and NO 2 , unpaired
(c) I and III (d) II, III and IV
electron is present in (1997)
21. (1995)
Number of paired electrons in O2 molecule is : (1995)
(a) NO 2 and BaO2 (b) KO2 and AlO 2
(a) 7 (b) 8
(c) 16 (d) 14 (c) KO2 only (d) BaO2 only
22. Which one of the following molecules is planar ? 29. Which one of the following compounds has sp 2
(1996) -hybridisation ? (1997)
(a) NF3 (b) NCl3 (a) CO2 (b) SO2
(c) PH3 (d) BF3 (c) N2O (d) CO
23. Among the following species, identify the isostructural 30. The geometry and the type of hybrid orbital present
pairs. (1996)
(1996) about the central atom in BF3 is (1998)
(1998)
NF3, NO 3 , BF3, H3O+, HN3 (a) linear, sp (b) trigonal planar, sp2
(c) tetrahedral, sp3 (d) pyramidal, sp3
(a) [ NF3 , NO3 ] and [BF3, H3O+]
31. The geometry of H2S and its dipole moment are (c) H2S because of hydrogen bonding
(1999) (d) H2Se because of lower molecular weight
(a) angular and non-zero (b) angular and zero
38. The common features among the species CN–, CO and
(c) linear and non-zero (d) linear and zero (2001)
NO+ are (2001)
32. In compounds of type ECl3, where E = B, P, As or Bi, the (a) bond order three and isoelectronic
angles Cl—E—Cl (1999)
(b) bond order three and weak field ligands
(a) B > P = As = Bi (b) B > P > As > Bi
(c) bond order two and acceptors
(c) B < P = As = Bi (d) B < P < As < Bi
(d) isoelectronic and weak field ligands
33. In the compound CH2 = CH—CH2—CH2—C  CH, the
39. The correct order of hybridisation of the central atom
C2 — C3 bonds is of (1999)
in the following species NH3,[PtCl4]2–, PCl5 and BCl3 is
(a) sp – sp2 (b) sp3 – sp3 (2001)
(a) dsp2, dsp3, sp2 and sp3
(c) sp – sp3 (d) sp2 – sp3
(b) sp3, dsp2, sp3d, and sp2
34. The correct order of increasing C – O bond length of
(c) dsp2, sp2, sp3, dsp3
CO, CO32 , CO 2 , is (1999)
(d) dsp2, sp3, sp2, dsp3
(a) CO32  CO 2  CO (b) CO 2  CO32  CO 40. Specify the coordination geometry around and
hybridisation of N and B atoms in a 1 : 1 complex of BF3
(c) CO  CO32  CO 2 (d) CO  CO 2  CO 32 and NH3 (2002)
(2002)
35. Molecular shapes of SF4, CF4 and XeF4 are (a) N : tetrahedral, sp3 ; B : tetrahedral, sp3
(2000) (b) N : pyramidal, sp3 ; B : pyramidal, sp3
(a) the same, with 2, 0 and 1 lone pairs of electrons
(c) N : pyramidal, sp3 ; B : planar, sp2
respectively
(b) the same, with 1, 1, and 1 lone paris of electrons (d) N : pyramidal, sp3 ; B : tetrahedral, sp3
respectively 41. The nodal plane in the -bond of ethene is located in
(c) different, with 0, 1 and 2 lone pairs of electrons (2002)
respectively (a) the molecular plane
(d) different, with 1, 0 and 2 lone pairs of electrons (b) a plane parallel to the molecular plane
respectively.
(c) a plane perpendicular to the molecular plane which
36. The hybridisation of atomic orbitals of nitrogen in bisects the carbon -bond at right angle
NO 2 , NO 3 and NH 4 are (2000) (d) a plane perpendicular to the molecular plane which
contains the carbon-carbon -bond
(a) sp, sp3 and sp2 respectively
42. Which of the following molecular species has unpaired
(b) sp, sp2 and sp3 respectively electrons (s) ? (2002)
(2002)
(c) sp2, sp and sp3 respectively (a) N2 (b) F2
2 3
(d) sp , sp and sp respectively
(c) O 2 (d) O 22 
37. Amongst H2O, H2S, H2Se and H2Te, the one with the
43. Among the following the molecular with the highest
highest boiling point is (2000)
dipole moment is (2003)
(a) H2O because of hydrogen bonding
(a) CH3Cl (b) CH2Cl2
(b) H2Te because of higher molecular weight
(c) CHCl3 (d) CCl4
44. Which of the following are isoelectronic and (c) only sp3 (d) sp2 and sp3
isostructural?
53. The shape of XeO2F2 molecule is (2012)
NO 3 , CO 32  , ClO 3 , SO 3 (2003)
(2003)
(a) trigonal bipyramidal (b) square planar
 2 
(a) NO , CO 3 3
(b) SO3 , NO 3
(c) tetrahedral (d) see-saw
54. Assuming 2s-2p mixing is NOT operative, the
(c) ClO3 , CO32  (d) CO32  , SO 3
(2014)
paramagnetic species among the following is (2014)
45. Number of lone pair (s) in XeOF4 is/are (2004) (a) Be2 (b) B2
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) C2 (d) N2
(c) 2 (d) 3
Objective Question - II
46. According to MO theroy, (2004)
(One or more than one correct option)
(a) O 2 is paramagnetic and bond order greater than O2 55. Dipole moment is shown by (1986)
(b) O 2 is paramagnetic and bond order less than O2 (a) 1, 4-dichlorobenzene (b) cis-1, 2-dichloroethene
(c) trans-1, 2-dichloroethene
(c) O 2 is diamagnetic and bond order is less than O2
(d) trans-1, 2-dichloro-2-pentene
(d) O 2 is diamagnetic and bond order is more than O2 56. CO2 is isostructrual with : (1986)
47. Which species has the maximum number of lone pair of (a) HgCl2 (b) SnCl2
electrons on the central atom ? (2005) (c) C2H2 (d) NO2
(a) [ClO3]– (b) XeF4 57. The linear structure is assumed by : (1991)
–
(c) SF4 (d) [I3] (a) SnCl2 (b) NCO –
48. Among the following, the paramagnetic compound is (c) CS2 (d) NO 2
(2007)
58. Which of the following have identical bond order ?
(a) Na2O2 (b) O3
(1992)
(c) N2O (d) KO2
49. The species having bond order different from that in (a) CN– (b) O 2
CO is (2007)
(c) NO+ (d) CN+
– +
(a) NO (b) NO 59. The molecules that will have dipole moment are (1992)
–
(c) CN (d) N2 (a) 2, 2-dimethyl propane
50. Assuming that Hund’s rule is violated, the bond order (b) trans-2-pentene
and magnetic nature of the diatomic molecule B2 is (c) cis-3-hexene
(2010) (d) 2, 2, 3, 3-tetramethyl butane
(a) 1 and diamagnetic (b) 0 and diamagnetic 60. The hyperconjugative stabilities of tert-butyl cation and
2-butene, respectively, are due to (2005)
(2005)
(c) 1 and paramagnetic (d) 0 and paramagnetic
51. The species having pyramidal shape is (2010) (a)  p (empty) and  * electron delocalisations
(b)  * and   electron delocalisations
(a) SO3 (b) BrF3
(c)  p (filled) and  electron delocalisations
(c) SiO32 (d) OSF2
(d) p (filled)  * and   * electrons delocalisations
52. In allene (C3H4), the type (s) of hybridization of the
carbon atoms, is (are) (2012)
(2012)
(a) sp and sp3 (b) sp and sp2
61. According to Molecular Orbital Theory, (2016) (c) If X is O2(g), deflection of the pan is downwards
(a) C22 is expected to be diamagnetic (d) If X is C6H6(l), deflection of the pan is downwards
Numeric Type Questions
(b) O22 is expected to have to longer bond length than
65. Among the species given below, the total number of
O2
diamagnetic species is________ H atom, NO 2
(c) N2 and N2 have the same bond order monomer, O 2 (superoxide), dimeric sulphur in vapour
(d) He2 is diamagnetic phase, Mn 3 O 4  NH 4  2 [FeCl 4 ], [NCl 4 ], K 2 MnO 4 ,
62. The compoun(s) with TWO lone pairs of electrons on K2CrO4 (2018)
the central atom is (are) (2016) 66. Consider the following compounds in the liquid from :
(a) BrF5 (b) ClF3 O 2 , HF, H 2 O, NH 3 , H 2 O 2 , CCl4 , CHCl3C6 H 6 , C6 H 5 Cl.
(c) XeF4 (d) SF4 When a charged comb is brought near flowing
stream,
63. Each of the following options contains a set of four how many of them show deflection as per the
molecules, identify the option(s) where all four
following figure ? (2020)
molecules possess permanent dipole moment at room
temperature. (2019)
(a) NO2, NH3, POCl3, CH3Cl
(b) BF3, O3, SF6, XeF6
(c) BeCl2, CO2, BCl3, CHCl3
(d) SO2, C6H5Cl, H2Se, BrF5
64. In an experiment, m grams of a compound X (gas/liquid/
solid) taken in a container is loaded in a balance as Assertion & Reason
shown in figure I below. In the presence of a magnetic 67. Assertion : LiCl is predominantly a covalent compound.
field, the pan with X is either deflected upwards (figure Reason : Electronegativity difference between Li and
II), or deflected downwards (figure III), depending on Cl is too small. (2014)
the compound X. Identify the correct statement(s) (A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason
is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false.
(D) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true.
(E) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false.
(2020)
(a) If X is H2O(l), deflection of the pan is upwards
(b) If X is K4[Fe(CN)6](s), deflection of the pan is
upwards
Match the Columns 78. When N2 goes to N 2 , the N–N bond distance ......,
68. Match the reactions in Column-I with nature of the and when O2 goes O 2 the O—O bond distance ...
reactions/type of the products in Column-II.
(2007)
(2007) (1996)
(1996)
Column - I Column - II 79. Among N2O, SO2, I 3 and I3 , the linear species are
........... and (2007)
(1997)
(1997)
(A) O 2  O 2  O 22  (p) Redox reaction
True/False
(B) CrO 24   H   (q) One of the products has
80. Linear overlap of two atomic p-orbitals leads to a sigma
trigonal planar structure
bond. (1983)
(1983)
(C) MnO 4  NO 2 (r) Dimeric bridged 81. All molecules with polar bonds have dipole moment.
(1985)
(1985)
H  tetrahedral metal ion
82. SnCl2 is a non-linear molecule. (1985)
(1985)
(D) NO3  H 2SO 4 (s) Disproportionation
83. In benzene, carbon uses all the three p-orbitals for
2 hybridisation. (1987)
(1987)
Fe 
69. Match each of the diatomic molecules in Column-I with 84. sp3 hybrid orbitals have equal s and p character.
its property/properties in Column-II. (2009) (2007)
(1987)
(1987)
(2009)
Column - I Column - II 85. H2O molecule is linear. (2007)
(1993)
(1993)
(A) B2 (p) Paramagnetic 86. The dipole moment of CH3F is greater than that of CH3Cl.
(1993)
(1993)
(B) N2 (q) Undergoes oxidation
Subjective Questions
(C) O 2 (r) Undergoes reduction
87. What effect should the following resonance of vinyl
(D) O2 (s) Bond order  2 chloride have on its dipole moment ? (1987)
(t) Mixing of ‘s’ and ‘p’ orbitals
CH2 = CH — Cl  CH 2 — CH=Cl (1987)
Fill in the Blanks
88. Arrange the following :
70. The angle between two covalent bonds is maximum in
(1981) (i) N 2 , O 2, F 2 , Cl 2 in increasing order of bond
.................. . (1981)
dissociation energy. (1988)
(1988)
71. Pair of molecules which forms strongest intermolecular
(ii) Increasing strength of hydrogen bonding in halogen
hydrogen bonds is .............
acids (HX). (1991)
(SiH4 and SiF4, acetone and CHCl3, formic acid and (iii) In the decreasing order of the O–O bond length
acetic acid) (1981)
(1981) present in them O2, KO2 and O2 [AsF4] (2004)
72. There are ............ bonds in a nitrogen molecule. 89. Arrange the following as stated.“Increasing strength
(1982)
(1982) of hydrogen bonding (X–H–X).” O, S, F, Cl, N (1991)
73. ............ hybrid orbitals of nitrogen atom are involved in 90. Give reasons in two or three sentences only for the
the formation of ammonium ion. (1982)
(1982) following :
74. The shape of [CH3]+ is .............. (1990)
(1990) “Hydrogen peroxide acts as on oxidizing as well as a
reducing agent.” (1992)
(1992)
75. The valence atomic orbitals on C in silver acetylide is
................ hy . (1990)
(1990) 91. Explain the difference in the nature of bonding in LiF
and LiI. (1996)
(1996)
76. The kind of delocalization involving sigma bond
orbitals is called ................ (1994)
(1994) 92. Using the VSEPR theory, identify the type of
hybridisation and draw the structure of OF2. What are
77. The two types of bonds present in B2H6 are covalent
the oxidation states of O and F ? (1997)
(1997)
and ................. (1994)
(1994)
93.
–
 I 3 , which is the Lewis
In the reaction, I + I2  100. On the basis of ground state electronic configuration
(1997) arrange the following molecules in increasing O–O bond
acid? (1997)
length order. KO2, O2, O2 [AsF6] (2004)(2004)
+ +
94 . Between Na and Ag , which is stronger Lewis acid
101. Draw the shape of XeF4 and OSF4 according to VSEPR
and why ? (1997)
(1997)
theory. Show the lone pair of electrons on the central
95. (a) Arrange the following ions in order of their increasing atom. (2004)(2004)
+ 2+ + 3+
radii : Li , Mg , K , Al (1997)(1997) 102. Predict whether the following molecules are iso-
(b) Arrange the following sulphates of alkaline earth structural or not. Justify your answer.
metals in order of decreasing thermal stability : BeSO4, (i) NMe3 (ii) N (SiMe3)3 (2005)(2005)
MgSO4, CaSO4, SrSO4.
103. The total number of lone pairs of electrons in N2O3 is
96. Interpret the non-linear shape of H2S molecule and non- (2015)(2015)
planar shape of PCl3 using valence shell electron pair
104. The sum of the number of lone pairs of electrons on
repulsion (VSEPR) theory. (Atomic number : H = 1, P =
each central atom in the following species is
15, S = 16, Cl = 17) (1998)
(1998) 2– + –
[TeBr6] , [BrF2] , SNF3 and [XeF3]
97. (a) Write the MO electron distribution of O2. Specify its
bond order and magnetic property. (2000)(2000) (Atomic numbers : N = 7, F = 9, S = 16, Br = 35, Te = 52,
Xe = 54) (2017)
(2017)
(b) Draw the molecular structures of XeF2, XeF4 and
XeO2F2, indicating the location of lone pair(s) of 105. Among H2, He 2 , Li2, Be2, B2, C2, N2, O 2 and F2, the
electrons. (2000)
(2000) number of diamagnetic species is
98. Using VSEPR theory, draw the shape of PCl5 and BrF5. (Atomic numbers, H = 1, He = 2, Li = 3, Be = 4, B = 5,
(2003)
(2003) C = 6, N=7, O=8, F=9) (2017)
(2017)
99. Draw the shape of XeF4 and OSF4 according to VSEPR

theory. Show the lone pair of electrons on the central
atom. (2004)
(2004)
Note:
CHEMICAL BONDING

Chapter 04 190
1. CHEMISTRY volume but no definite shape. They take up the shape of the
vessel in which they are put, e.g., water, milk, oil, mercury, alcohol
Chemistry is defined as the study of the composition, properties etc.
and interaction of matter. Chemistry is often called the central Gas- A substance is said to be gaseous if it neither possesses
science because of its role in connecting the physical sciences, definite volume nor a definite shape. This is because they fill up
which include chemistry, with the life sciences and applied the whole vessel in which they are put, e.g., hydrogen, oxygen
sciences such as medicine and engineering. etc.
Various branches of chemistry are The three states are interconvertible by changing the conditions
1.1 Physical chemistry of temperature and pressure as follows :
The branch of chemistry concerned with the way in which the
physical properties of substances depend on and influence their
chemical structure, properties, and reactions.
1.2 Inorganic chemistry
The branch of chemistry which deals with the structure,
composition and behavior of inorganic compounds. All the
substances other than the carbon-hydrogen compounds are
classified under the group of inorganic substances.
1.3 Organic chemistry
The discipline which deals with the study of the structure,
composition and the chemical properties of organic compounds
is known as organic chemistry.
1.4 Biochemistry 3. CLASSIFICATION OF MATTER AT
The discipline which deals with the structure and behavior of the MACROSCOPIC LEVEL
components of cells and the chemical processes in living beings
At the macroscopic or bulk level, matter can be classified as
is known as biochemistry.
(a) mixtures (b) pure substances.
1.5 Analytical chemistry
These can be further sub-divided as shown below
The branch of chemistry dealing with separation, identification
and quantitative determination of the compositions of different
substances.
2. MATTER
Matter is defined as any thing that occupies space, possess mass

and the presence of which can be felt by any one or more of our
five senses.
Matter can generally exist in 3 physical states viz. solid, liquid,
Classification of Matter
gas.
Solid - A substance is said to be solid if it possesses a definite
volume and a definite shape, e.g., sugar, iron, gold, wood etc.
Liquid- A substance is said to be liquid, if it possesses a definite
SCAN CODE
Mole and Equivalent Concept
MOLE AND EQUIVALENT CONCEPT 191
(a) Mixtures : A mixture contains two or more substances present 4. PROPERTIES OF MATTER
in it (in any ratio) which are called its components. A mixture may
be homogeneous or heterogeneous. Every substance has unique or characteristic properties. These
properties can be classified into two categories – physical
Homogeneous mixture- In homogeneous mixture the components
properties and chemical properties.
completely mix with each other and its composition is uniform
4.1 Physical Properties
throughout i.e it consist of only one phase. Sugar solution and
Physical properties are those properties which can be measured
air are thus, the examples of homogeneous mixtures.
or observed without changing the identity or the composition of
Heterogeneous mixtures- In heterogeneous mixture the the substance. Some examples of physical properties are color,
composition is not uniform throughout and sometimes the different odor, melting point, boiling point, density etc.
phases can be observed. For example, grains and pulses along 4.2 Chemical properties
with some dirt (often stone) pieces, are heterogeneous mixtures. Chemical properties are those in which a chemical change in the
NOTE substance occurs. The examples of chemical properties are
characteristic reactions of different substances; these include
Any distinct portion of matter that is uniform throughout acidity or basicity, combustibility etc.
in composition and properties is called a Phase.
(b) Pure substances :- A material containing only one substance
5. MEASUREMENT
is called a pure substance.
5.1 Physical quantities
NOTE All such quantities which we come across during our scientific
In chemistry, a substance is a form of matter that has studies are called Physical quantities. Evidently, the measurement
constant chemical composition and characteristic of any physical quantity consists of two parts
properties. It cannot be separated into components by (1) The number, and (2) The unit
physical separation methods, i.e. without breaking chemical A unit is defined as the standard of reference chosen to measure
bonds. They can be solids, liquids or gases. any physical quantity.
Pure substances can be further classified into elements and 5.2 S.I. UNITS
compounds.
The International System of Units (in French Le Systeme
Element- An element is defined as a pure substance that contains International d’Unités – abbreviated as SI) was established by
only one kind of particles. Depending upon the physical and the 11th General Conference on Weights and Measures (CGPM
chemical properties, the elements are further subdivided into three from Conference Generale des Poids et Measures). The CGPM is
classes, namely (1) Metals (2) Non-metals and (3) Metalloids. an inter governmental treaty organization created by a diplomatic
Compound- A compound is a pure substance containing two or treaty known as Meter Convention which was signed in Paris in
more than two elements combined together in a fixed proportion 1875.
by mass. Further, the properties of a compound are completely The SI system has seven base units and they are listed in table
different from those of its constituent elements. Moreover, the given below.
constituents of a compound cannot be separated into simpler
substances by physical methods. They can be separated by
chemical methods.
SCAN CODE
These units pertain to the seven fundamental scientific quantities. The other physical quantities such as speed, volume,
density etc. can be derived from these quantities, hence called drived quantities. The definitions of the SI base units are given
Definitions of SI Base Units
Unit of length metre The metre is the length of the path travelled by light in
vacuum during a time interval of 1/299 792 458 of a second.
Unit of mass Kilogram The kilogram is the unit of mass; it is equal to the mass of
the internationl prototype of the kilogram.
Unit of time second The second is the duration of 9 19,2631, 770 periods of the
radiation corresponding to the transition between the two
hyperfine levels of the ground state of the caesium-133
atom.
Unit of electric current ampere The ampere is that constant current which, if maintained in
two straight parallel conductors of infinite length, of
negligible circular cross-section, and placed 1 metre apart
in vacuum, would produce between these conductors a
force equal to 2 × 10–7 newton per metre of length.
Unit of thermodynanic kelvin The kelvin, unit of thermodynamic temperature, is the

temperature fraction 1/273. 16 of the thermodynamic temperature of the
triple point of water.
Unit of amount of substance mole 1. The mole is the amount of substance of a system
which contains as many elementary entities as there
are atoms in 0.012 kilogram of carbon-12; its symbol
is “mol.”.
2. When the mole is used, the elementary entities must

be specified and may be atoms, molecules, ions,
electrons, other particles, or specified groups of such
particles.
Unit of luminous intensity candela The candela is the luminous intensity, in a given direction,
of a source that emits monochromatic radiation of
frequency 540 × 1012 hertz and that has a radiant intensity
in that direction of 1/683 watt per steradian.
NOTE 6. SOME IMPORTANT DEFINITION

The mass standard is the kilogram since 1889. It has been
6.1 Mass and Weight
defined as the mass of platinum-iridium (Pt-Ir) cylinder that
is stored in an airtight jar at International Bureau of Weights Mass of a substance is the amount of matter present in it while
and Measures in Sevres, France. This is the international weight is the force exerted by gravity on an object. The mass of a
prototype 1 kg. Pt-Ir was chosen for this standard because substance is constant whereas its weight may vary from one
it is highly resistant to chemical attack and its mass will place to another due to change in gravity. The SI unit of mass is
not change for an extremely long time. the kilogram (kg). The SI derived unit (unit derived from SI base
units) of weight is newton.
SCAN CODE
6.2 Volume 7.3 Law of Multiple Proportions
Volume is the quantity of three-dimensional space enclosed by When two elements combine to form two or more compounds
some closed boundary, for example, the space that a substance then the ratio of masses of one element that combines with a fixed
(solid, liquid, gas, or plasma) or shape occupies or contains. mass of the other element in the two compounds is a simple whole
Volume is often quantified numerically using the SI derived unit, number ratio. This law was proposed by Dalton in 1803.
the cubic meter. For example,
6.3 Density Hydrogen combines with oxygen to form two compounds namely
The mass density or density of a material is defined as its mass water and hydrogen peroxide.
per unit volume. The symbol most often used for density is  (the Hydrogen + Oxygen  Water
lower case Greek letter rho). SI unit of density is kg m–3.
2g 16g 18g
6.4 Temperature
Hydrogen + Oxygen  Hydrogen Peroxide
Temperature is a physical property of matter that quantitatively
2g 32g 34g
expresses the common notions of hot and cold. There are three
common scales to measure temperature — °C (degree celsius), °F Therefore, the masses of oxygen (16g or 32g) which combine with
(degree fahrenheit) and K (kelvin). The temperature on two scales fixed mass of hydrogen (2 parts) bear a simple ratio i.e., 16 : 32 or
is related to each other by the following relationship: 1 : 2.
°F = 9/5 (°C) + 32 7.4 Law of Reciprocal Proportions
K = °C + 273.15 When three elements combine with each other in combination of

two and form three compounds then the ratio of masses of two
7. LAW OF CHEMICAL COMBINATION elements combining with fixed mass of the third and the ratio in
which they combine with each other bear a simple whole number
7.1 Law of conservation of mass ratio to each other. This Law was given by Richter in 1792.
“In a chemical reaction the mass of reactants consumed and mass For example,
of the products formed is same, that is mass is conserved.” This
Consider 3 grams of C reacting with 1 g of H to form methane.
is a direct consequence of law of conservation of atoms. This law
Also, 8 g of O reacting with 1 g of H to form water. Here, the mass
was put forth by Antoine Lavoisier in 1789. For example,
ratio of carbon and oxygen is 3:8. Similarly, 12 g of C reacts with
12 g of carbon combines with 32 g of oxygen to form 44 g of CO2.
32 g of O to form CO2. The mass ratio of carbon and oxygen is
7.2 Law of Constant / Definite Proportions 12:32 = 3:8.
The ratio in which two or more elements combine to form a The mass ratio in which C and O combine with each other is the
compound remains fixed and is independent of the source of the same as the mass ratio in which they separately combine with a
compound. This law was given by, a French chemist, Joseph fixed mass of H.
Proust.
7.5 Gay Lussac’s Law of Gaseous Volumes
For example, carbon dioxide can be obtained by a number of
This law was given by Gay Lussac in 1808. He observed that
methods, such as
when gases combine or are produced in a chemical reaction they
(i). By burning coal or candle do so in a simple ratio by volume provided all gases are at same
temperature and pressure.
C  O 2  CO 2
For example,
(ii). By heating limestone (CaCO3)
Two volumes of hydrogen combine with one volume of oxygen to
CaCO 3 
Heat
 CaO  CO 2 give two volumes of water vapour.
(iii). By the action of dilute hydrochloric acid on marble peices.
CaCO3  2HCl  CaCl 2  CO 2  H 2 O

It has been observed that each sample of carbon dioxide contains
carbon and oxygem elements in the ratio of 3 : 8 by weight.
SCAN CODE
7.6 Avogadro Law 10. MOLECULES
In 1811, Avogadro proposed that equal volumes of gases at the
same temperature and pressure should contain equal number of A group of similar or dissimilar atoms which exist together in
molecules. nature is known as a molecule. e.g. H2, NH3.
For example, The mass of molecules is measured by adding the masses of the
The deflation of automobile tyres. When the air trapped inside atoms which constitute the molecule. Thus, the mass of a
the tyre escapes, the number of moles of air present in the tyre molecule can also be represented by the two methods used for
decreases. This results in a decrease in the volume occupied by measuring the mass of an atom viz. amu and g/mol.
the gas, causing the tyre to lose its shape and deflate.
8. DALTON’S ATOMIC THEORY

In 1808, Dalton published ‘A New System of Chemical Philosophy’
in which he proposed the following:
1. Matter consists of indivisible atoms.
2. All the atoms of a given element have identical properties
including identical mass. Atoms of different elements differ
in mass and properties.
3. Compounds are formed when atoms of different elements
combine in a fixed ratio. Various relationships of mole
4. Chemical reactions involve reorganization of atoms. These
are neither created nor destroyed in a chemical reaction.
9. ATOM
Atom is the smallest part of an element that can participate in a
chemical reaction. {Note : This definition holds true only for non-
radioactive reactions}
9.1 Mass of an Atom
11. CHEMICAL REACTIONS
There are two ways to denote the mass of atoms.
Method 1 A chemical reaction is only rearrangement of atoms. Atoms from
different molecules (may be even same molecule) rearrange
Atomic mass can be defined as a mass of a single atom which is
measured in atomic mass unit (amu) or unified mass (u) where themselves to form new molecules.
1 a.m.u. = 1/12th of the mass of one C-12 atom Points to remember :
Method 2  Always balance chemical equations before doing any
calculations
Mass of 6.022 × 1023 atoms of that element taken in grams. This is
 The number of molecules in a reaction need not to be
also known as molar atomic mass.
conserved e.g.
NOTE N2 + 3 H2  2 NH3. The number of molecules is not conserved
Mass of 1 atom in amu and mass of 6.022 × 10 atoms in23
If we talk about only rearrangement of atoms in a balanced chemical
grams are numerically equal. reaction then it is evident that the sum of masses of reactant of
When atomic mass is taken in grams it is also called the the atoms in the reactants side is equal to the sum of the masses
molar atomic mass. of the atoms on the products side. This is the Law of Conservation
6.022 × 1023 is also called 1 mole of atoms and this number of Atoms and Law of Conservation of Mass.
is also called the Avogadro’s Number.
Mole is just a number. As 1 dozen = 12; 1 million = 106;
1 mole = 6.022 × 1023.
SCAN CODE
12. STOICHIOMETRY  Mass% : Mass percentage is defined as the ratio of the
mass of the solute in g to the mass of solution in g multiplied
The study of chemical reactions and calculations related to it is by 100.
called Stoichiometry. The coefficients used to balance the reaction  Mass/Vol % : It is defined as the ratio of the mass of the
are called Stoichiometric Coefficients. solute in g to the volume of the solution in ml multiplied
Points to remember : by 100.
 The stoichiometric coefficients give the ratio of molecules or  v/v % : Volume of solute/volume of solution {only for
moles that react and not the ratio of masses. liq-liq solutions}
 Stoichiometric ratios can be used to predict the moles of  g/L : Wt. of solute (g) in 1L of solution
product formed only if all the reactants are present in the
stoichiometric ratios. mass of solute
ppm : mass of solution  10
6

 Practically the amount of products formed is always less than
the amount predicted by theoretical calculations
moles of solute
12.1 Limiting Reagent (LR) and Excess Reagent (ER)  Molarity (M) : volume of solution (L)
If the reactants are not taken in the stoichiometric ratios then the
reactant which is less than the required amount determines how moles of solute
 Molality (m) : mass of solvent (kg)
much product will be formed and is known as the Limiting Reagent
(LR) and the reactant present in excess is called the Excess Reagent
IMPORTANT RELATIONS
(ER). e.g. if we burn carbon in air (which has an infinite supply of
oxygen) then the amount of CO2 being produced will be governed 1. Relation between molality (m), Molarity (M), density (d) of
solution and molar mass of solute (MO)
by the amount of carbon taken. In this case, Carbon is the LR and
O2 is the ER. d : density in g/mL
MO : molar mass of solute in g mol–1
13. PERCENT YIELD
M  1000
As discussed earlier, due to practical reasons the amount of Molality, m 
1000d  MM O
product formed by a chemical reaction is less than the amount
predicted by theoretical calculations. The ratio of the amount of 2. Relationship between molality (m) and mole fraction (XB) of
product formed to the amount predicted when multiplied by 100 the solute
gives the percentage yield.
XB 1000 1  X A 1000
Actual Yield m  m 
1  XB MA XA MA
Percentage Yield = Theoretical Yield × 100
Points to remember :
14. REACTIONS IN AQUEOUS MEDIA  Molarity is the most common unit of measuring strength of
solution.
Two solids cannot react with each other in solid phase and hence
 The product of Molarity and Volume of the solution gives
need to be dissolved in a liquid. When a solute is dissolved in a
the number of moles of the solute, n = M × V
solvent, they co-exist in a single phase called the solution. Various
parameters are used to measure the strength of a solution.  All the formulae of strength have amount of solute. (weight
or moles) in the numerator.
The strength of a solution denotes the amount of solute which is
contained in the solution. The parameters used to denote the  All the formulae have amount of solution in the denominator
strength or concentration of a solution are: except for molality (m).
 Mole fraction (X) : moles of a component / Total moles of

solution.
SCAN CODE
15. DILUTION LAW 18.3 Equivalent Mass

It is the number of parts by weight of the substance that combines
When a solution is diluted, more solvent is added, the moles of or displaces, directly or indirectly, 1.008 parts by mass of hydrogen
solute remains unchanged. If the volume of a solution having a or 8 parts by mass of oxygen or 35.5 parts by mass of chlorine. It
Molarity of M1 is changed from V1 to V2 we can write that: can be calculated as:
M1V1 = moles of solute in the solution = M2V2 Atomic mass

(i) Equivalent mass for elements  Valency
(M2 = final molarity)
16. EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE Molecular mass

(ii) Equivalent mass for acids  Basicity of acids
Volume of the solvent increases on increasing the temperature.  Basicity: It is the number of H+ ions that can be displaced
But it shows no effect on the mass of solute in the solution from one molecule of a substance.
assuming the system to be closed i.e. no loss of mass. Molecular mass
(iii) Equivalent mass for bases  Acidity of Base
The formulae of strength of solutions which do not involve volume
of solution are unaffected by changes in temperature. e.g. molality  Acidity: It is the number of OH– ions that can be displaced
remains unchanged with temperature. Formulae involving volume from one molecule of a substance.
are altered by temperature e.g. Molarity. (iv) Equivalent mass for salts
Formula mass
17. ORIGIN OF EQUIVALENT CONCEPT 
 Valency of cation  No. of cations 
Equivalent weight of an element was initially defined as weight of (v). Equivalent mass for oxidising agents
an element which combines with 1g of hydrogen. Later the Formula mass
definition wad modified to : Equivalent weight of an element is 
No. of electrons gained per molecule
that weight of the element which combines with 8g of Oxygen.
(vi). Equivalent mass for reducing agents
NOTE
Formula mass
Same element can have multiple equivalent weights 
No. of electrons lost per molecule
depending upon the charge on it. e.g. Fe2+ and Fe3+.
(vii). Equivalent weight of radicals
18. INTRODUCTION TO EQUIVALENT CONCEPT Formula mass

No. of units of charge
Equivalent concept is a way of understanding reactions and
processes in chemistry which are often made simple by the use NOTE
of Equivalent concept.
It should be always remembered that 1 equivalent of an
18.1 Equivalent Mass
acid reacts with 1 equivalent of a base.
“The mass of an acid which furnishes 1 mol H+ is called its 19. MIXTURE OF ACIDS AND BASES
Equivalent mass.”
“The mass of the base which furnishes 1 mol OH– is called its Whenever we have a mixture of multiple acids and bases we can
Equivalent mass.” find whether the resultant solution would be acidic or basic by
using the equivalent concept. For a mixture of multiple acids and
18.2 Valency Factor (Z)
bases find out the equivalents of acids and bases taken and find
Valency factor is the number of H+ ions supplied by 1 molecule or which one of them is in excess.
mole of an acid or the number of OH- ions supplied by 1 molecule
or 1 mole of the base.
Molecular Mass
Equivalent mass, E 
Z
SCAN CODE
20. LAW OF CHEMICAL EQUIVALENCE 23. NORMALITY
According to this law, one equivalent of a reactant combines with The normality of a solution is the number of equivalents of solute
one equivalent of the other reactant to give one equivalent of present in 1L of the solution.
each product . For, example in a reaction aA + bB  cC + dD
irrespective of the stoichiometric coefficients, 1 eq. of A reacts equivalents of solute
N
with 1 eq. of B to give 1 eq. each of C and 1eq of D volume of solution (L)
21. EQUIVALENT WEIGHTS OF SALTS The number of equivalents of solute present in a solution is given
by Normality × Volume (L).
To calculate the equivalent weights of compounds which are On dilution of the solution the number of equivalents of the
neither acids nor bases, we need to know the charge on the cation solute is conserved and thus, we can apply the formula : N1V1 =
or the anion. The mass of the cation divided by the charge on it is
N2V2 = equivalents of solute in solution
called the equivalent mass of the cation and the mass of the anion
divided by the charge on it is called the equivalent mass of the Caution :
anion. When we add the equivalent masses of the anion and the Please note that the above equation gives rise to a lot of
cation, it gives us the equivalent mass of the salt. For salts, Z in confusion and is a common mistake that students make. This is
the total amount of positive or negative charge furnished by 1 the equation of dilution where the number of equivalents are
mol of the salt. conserved. Now, since one equivalent of a reactant always reacts
with 1 equivalent of another reactant a similar equation is used
22. EQUIVALENT VOLUME OF GASES in problems involving titration of acids and bases. Please do not
extend the same logic to molarity.
Equivalent volume of gas is the volume occupied by 1 equivalent
Relationship between Normality and Molarity
of a gas at STP.
N = M × Z ; where ‘Z’ is the Valency factor
Equivalent mass of gas = molecular mass /Z.
Since 1 mole of gas occupies 22.4L at STP therefore 1 equivalent
of a gas will occupy 22.4/Z L at STP. e.g. Oxygen occupies 5.6L,
Chlorine and Hydrogen occupy 11.2L.
SCAN CODE
SUMMARY
 All substances contain matter, which can exist in three states – solid, liquid or gas. The constituent particles are held in
different ways in these states of matter and they exhibit their characteristic properties. Matter can also be classified into
elements, compounds or mixtures. An element contains particles of only one type, which may be atoms or molecules. The
compounds are formed where atoms of two or more elements combine in a fixed ratio to each other. Mixtures occur widely and
many of the substances present around us are mixtures.
 When the properties of a substance are studied, measurement is inherent. The quantification of properties requires a system
of measurement and units in which the quantities are to be expressed. Many systems of measurement exist, of which the
English and the Metric Systems are widely used. The scientific community, however, has agreed to have a uniform and
common system throughout the world, which is abbreviated as SI units (International System of Units).
 The uncertainty is taken care of by specifying the number of significant figures, in which the observations are reported.
 The combination of different atoms is governed by basic laws of chemical combination — these being the Law of
Conservation of Mass, Law of Definite Proportions, Law of Multiple Proportions, Law of Reciprocal Proportion, Gay
Lussac’s Law of Gaseous Volumes and Avogadro Law. All these laws led to the Dalton’s atomic theory, which states that
atoms are building blocks of matter.
 The atomic mass of an element is expressed relative to 12C isotope of carbon, which has an exact value of 12u. Usually, the
atomic mass used for an element is the average atomic mass obtained by taking into account the natural abundance of
different isotopes of that element. The molecular mass of a molecule is obtained by taking sum of the atomic masses of
different atoms present in a molecule. The molecular formula can be calculated by determining the mass per cent of different
elements present in a compound and its molecular mass.
 The number of atoms, molecules or any other particles present in a given system are expressed in the terms of Avogadro
constant (6.022 × 1023). This is known as 1 mol of the respective particles or entities.
 Chemical reactions represent the chemical changes undergone by different elements and compounds. The coefficients
indicate the molar ratios and the respective number of particles taking part in a particular reaction. The quantitative study of
the reactants required or the products formed is called stoichiometry. Using stoichiometric calculations, the amount of one or
more reactant(s) required to produce a particular amount of product can be determined and vice-versa.
 The amount of substance present in a given volume of a solution is expressed in number of ways, e.g., mass per cent, mole
fraction, molarity and molality
 Equivalent mass is the number of parts by weight of the substance that combines or displaces, directly or indirectly, 1.008
parts by mass of hydrogen or 8 parts by mass of oxygen or 35.5 parts by mass of chlorine. It can be calculated as:
Molecular mass
Equivalent mass, E 
Z  valency factor 
 The normality of a solution is the number of equivalents of solute present in 1L of the solution.
SCAN CODE
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Classify the following substances into elements, What is the S.I. unit of mass ?
compounds and mixtures. Sol. S.I. unit of mass is kilogram (kg).
(i) Air (ii) Diamond (iii) LPG (iv) Dry ice (v) Graphite
Example - 6
(vi) Steel (vii) Marble (viii) Smoke (ix) Glucose
(x) Laughing gas. In the reaction, A + B2  AB2, identify the limiting
Sol. reagent, if any, in the following mixtures
Elements : Diamond; Graphite (i) 300 atoms of A + 200 molecules B2
Compounds : Marble; Glucose; Laughing gas; Dry ice (ii) 2 mol A + 3 mol B2
Mixtures : Air; LPG; Steel; Smoke (iii) 100 atoms of A + 100 molecules of B2
Example - 2 (iv) 5 mol A + 2.5 mol B2
Classify the following mixtures as homogeneous and (v) 2.5 mol A + 5 mol B2
heterogeneous. Sol. (i) According to the given reaction, 1 atom of A reacts
(i) Air (ii) Smoke (iii) Petrol (iv) Sea water (v) lodized table with 1 molecule of B2.
salt (vi) Aerated water (vii) Mixture of sand and common  200 molecules of B2 will react with 200 atoms of A and
salt (viii) Gun powder (ix) Milk (x) Muddy water. 100 atoms of A will be left unreacted. Hence, B2 is the
Sol. Homogeneous : Air; Petrol; Iodized table salt; Sea water; limiting reagent while A is the excess reagent.
Aerated water; Milk. (ii) According to the given reaction, 1 mol of A reacts
Heterogeneous : Smoke; Gun powder; Mixture of sand with 1 mol of B2 . Hence A is limiting reagent.
common salt; Muddy water.
(iii) No limiting reagent.
Example - 3 (iv) 2.5 mol of B2 will react with 2.5 mol of A. Hence, B2 is
Why Law of conservation of mass should better be called the limiting reagent.
as Law of conservation of mass and energy ? (v) 2.5 mol of A will react with 2.5 mol of B2. Hence, A is
Sol. In nuclear reactions, it is observed that the mass of the the limiting reagent.
products is less than the mass of the reactants. The Example - 7
difference of mass, called the mass defect, is converted
into energy according to Einstein equation, E =  m c2. Is the law of constant composition true for all types of
Hence, we better call it as a low of conservation of mass compounds ? Explain why or why not.
and energy. Sol. No, law of constant composition is not true for all types of
compounds. It is true only for the compounds obtained
Example - 4
from one isotope. For example, carbon exists in two common
If the speed of light is 3.0 × 108 m s–1, calculate the distance isotopes, 12C and 14C.
covered by light in 2.00 ns.
Example - 8
Sol. Distance covered = Speed × Time = 3.0 × 108m s–1 × 2.00 ns
Why atomic masses are the average values ?
9
10 s Sol. Most of the elements exist as different isotopes, i.e., atoms
= 3.0 × 108m s–1 × 2.00 ns × = 6.00 × 10–1m with different masses, e.g., Cl has two isotopes with mass
1 ns
numbers 35 and 37 existing in the ratio 3 : 1 Hence, average
= 0.600 m value is taken (i.e., 35.5).
200
Example - 9 Oxide 1 Carbon Oxygen
What mass of sodium chloride would be decomposed 27.3% 72.7%
by 9.8 g of sulphuric acid, if 12 g of sodium bisulphate  Amount of oxygen that combines with 1 g carbon
and 2.75 g of hydrogen chloride were produced in a
reaction assuming that the law of conservation of mass 72.7
 = 2.66 g
is true ? 27.3
Sol. NaCl + H2SO4  NaHSO4 + HCl Ratio of oxygen in oxide (1) and (2) = 1 : 2
According to law of conservations of mass, Thus, Law of multiple proportion is verified.
Total masses of reactants = Total masses of products Example - 12
Let the mass of NaCl decomposed be x g; so In three moles of ethane (C2H6), calculate :
x + 9.8 = 12.0 + 2.75 (i) Number of moles of carbon atoms
= 14.75 (ii) Number of moles of hydrogen atoms
x = 4.95 g (iii) Number of molecules of ethane
Example - 10 Sol. (i) 1 mole of C2H6 contains 2 moles of carbon atoms
In an experiment, 2.4 g of iron oxide on reduction with  3 moles of C2H6 will C-atoms = 6 moles
hydrogen yield 1.68 g of iron. In another experiment 2.9 g
(ii) 1 mole of C2H6 contains 6 moles of hydrogen atoms
of iron oxide given 2.03 g of iron on reduction with
hydrogen. Show that the above data illustrate the law of  3 moles of C2H6 will contain H-atoms = 18 moles
constant proportions. (iii) 1 mole of C2H6 contains Avogadro’s no., i.e.,
Sol. In the first experiment
6.02 × 1023 molecules
The mass of iron oxide = 2.4 g
 3 moles of C2H6 will contain ethane molecules
The mass of iron after reduction = 1.68 g
= 3 × 6.02 × 1023
The mass of oxygen = Mass of iron oxide – Mass of iron
= 18.06 × 1023 molecules
= (2.4 – 1.68) = 0.72 g
Example - 13
Ratio of oxygen and iron = 0.72 : 1.68
Zinc sulphate crystals contain 22.6% of zinc and 43.9%
= 1 : 2.33
of water. Assuming the law of constant proportions to
In the second experiment be true, how much zinc should be used to produce 13.7 g
The mass of iron oxide = 2.9 g of zinc sulphate and how much water will they contain ?
The mass of iron after reduction = 2.03 g Sol. 100 g of zinc sulphate crystals are obtained from
The mass of oxygen = (2.9 – 2.03) = 0.87 g = 22.6 g zinc
Ratio of oxygen and iron = 0.87 : 2.03 1 g of zinc sulphate crystals will be obtained from
= 1 : 2.33 = 22.6/100 g zinc
Example - 11 13.7 g of zinc sulphate crystals will be obtained from
Carbon and oxygen are known to form two compounds. 22.6
The carbon content in one of these is 42.9% while in the  × 13.7 = 3.0962 g of zinc
100
other it is 27.3%. Show that this data is in agreement with
the law of multiple proportions. 100 g of zinc sulphate crystals contain water = 43.9 g
Sol. Oxide 1 Carbon Oxygen 1 g of zinc sulphate crystals contain water = 43.9/100 g
42.9% 57.1% 13.7 g of zinc sulphate crystals shall contain water
 Amount of oxygen that combines with 1 g carbon 43.9
 × 13.7 = 6.0143 g
57.1 100
 = 1.33 g
42.9
Example - 14 Sol. The balanced equation for the combustion of carbon in
dioxygen/air is
What will be the mass of one 12C atom in g ?
Sol. 1 mol of 12C atoms = 6.022 × 1023 atoms = 12g C (s)  O2 (g) 
 CO2 (g)
1 mole 1 mole 1 mole
(32 g ) (44 g)
Thus, 6.022 × 1023 atoms of 12C have mass = 12g
(i) In air, combustion is complete. Therefore, CO2
12 produced from the combustion of 1 mole of carbon =
 1 atom of C will have mass =
12 g
6.022 1023 44 g.
= 1.9927 × 10–23 g (ii) As only 16 g of dioxygen is available, it can combine
only with 0.5 mole of carbon, i.e., dioxygen is the limiting
Example - 15
reactant. Hence, CO2 produced = 22 g.
Calculate the molecular mass of : (iii) Here again, dioxygen is the limiting reactant. 16 g of
(i) H2O (ii) CO2 (iiii) CH4 dioxygen can combine only with 0.5 mole of carbon.
CO2 produced again is equal to 22 g.
Sol. (i) Molecular mass of H2O = 2 (1.008 amu) + 16.00 amu
= 18.016 amu Example - 18
(ii) Molecular mass of CO2 = 12.01 amu + 2 × 16.00 amu Hydrogen chloride (HCl) on oxidation gives water and
= 44.01 amu chlorine. How many litres of chlorine at STP can be
obtained starting with 36.50 g HCl ?
(iii) Molecular mass of CH4 = 12.01 amu + 4 (1.008 amu)
Sol. Oxidation of HCl takes place according to the following
= 16.042 amu equation :
Example - 16
4HCl  O 2 
 2Cl2  2H 2O
4 mol 2 mol
Calculate the mass per cent of different elements present
in sodium sulphate (Na2SO4).
Mass 36.5
Sol. Mass % of an element Moles of HCl = Molecular mass  36.5  1 mole
Mass of that element in the compound

  100  4 moles HCl give 2 moles Cl2
Molar mass of the compound
2
Now, molar mass of Na2SO4 = 2 (23.0) + 32.0 + 4 × 16.0  1 mole will give moles Cl2 = 0.5 moles Cl2
4
= 142 g mol–1
Volume of Cl2 at STP = 22.4 × 0.5 = 11.2 litre
46 Example - 19
Mass percent of sodium =  100 = 32.39 %
142
Why is air sometimes considered as a heterogeneous
32 mixture ?
Mass per cent of sulphur =  100 = 22.54 %
142 Sol. This is due to the presence of dust particles which form a
separate phase.
64
Mass per cent of oxygen =  100 = 45.07% Example - 20
142
Example - 17 Calculate the mass of sodium acetate (CH3COONa) required
Calculate the amount of carbon dioxide that could be to make 500 mL of 0.375 molar aqueous solution. Molar
produced when mass of sodium acetate is 82.0245 g mol–1.
(i) 1 mole of carbon is burnt in air. Sol. 0.375 M aqueous solution means that 1000 mL of the
solution contain sodium acetate = 0.375 mole
(ii) 1 mole of carbon is burnt in 16 g of dioxygen.
(iii) 2 moles of carbon are burnt in 16 g of dioxygen.
202
 500 mL of the solution should contain sodium acetate Example - 25
0.375 Calculate the mass of 1.5 gram molecule of sulphuric acid.

= mole
2 Sol. Molecular mass of H2SO4
Molar mass of sodium acetate = 82.0245 g mol–1 = 2 × 1 + 32 + 4 × 16 = 98.0 amu
Mass of sodium acetate acquired Gram-molecular mass of H2SO4 = 98.0 g
0.375 Mass of 1.5 gram molecule of H2SO4 = 98.0 × 1.5 = 147.0g

= mole × 82.0245g mol–1
2 Example - 26
= 15.380 g. Calculate the actual mass of one molecule of carbon
Example - 21 dioxide (CO2).
Sol. Molecular mass of CO2 = 44 amu
Boron has two isotopes boron-10 and boron-11 whose
percentage abundances are 19.6% and 80.4% respectively. 1 amu = 1.66 × 10–24 g
What is the average atomic mass of boron ? So, the actual mass of CO2 = 44 × 1.66 × 10–24
Sol. Average atomic mass of B = = 7.304 × 10–23g
(10  19.6)  (11 80.4) Example - 27
= 10.804 amu
100
Calculate the mass of a single atom of sulphur.
Example - 22 Sol. Gram-atomic mass of sulphur = 32 g
Carbon occurs in nature as a mixture of carbon-12 and
Gram  atomic mass
carbon-13. The average atomic mass of carbon is 12.011. Mass of one sulphur atom =
6.02  1023
What is the percentage abundance of carbon-12 in nature
? 32
 = 5.31 × 10–23 g
Sol. Let x be the percentage abundance of carbon-12; then 6.02  1023
(100 – x) will be the percentage abundance of carbon-13.
Example - 28
12x  13 (100  x)
Therefore,  12.011 What is the concentration of sugar (C12H22O11) in mol
100
L–1 if its 20 g are dissolved in enough water to make a
or 12x + 1300 – 13x = 1201.1
final volume up to 2 L ?
x = 98.9
Sol. Molar mass of sugar (C12H22O11) = 12 × 12 + 22 × 1 + 11 × 16
Abundance of carbon-12 is 98.9%
= 342 g mol–1
Example - 23
20g
Calculate the mass of 2.5 gram atoms of oxygen. No. of moles in 20 g of sugar = 342g mol1 = 0.0585 mole
Sol. We know that
Volume of solution = 2 L (Given)
Mass of an element in grams
Number of gram atoms = Atomic mass of the element in grams Moles of solute 0.0582 mol
Molar concentration = Volume of sol in L  2L
So, Mass of oxygen = 2.5 × 16 = 40.0 g
= 0.0293 mol L–1 = 0.0293 M
Example - 24
Calculate the gram atoms in 2.3 g of sodium.
2.3
Sol. Number of gram atoms =  0.1
23
[Atomic mass of sodium = 23 g]
Example - 29 So, 5.6 litres of oxygen at NTP contain
How many water molecules and oxygen atoms are present 5.6
 ×6.02 × 1023 molecules
in 0.9 g of water ? 22.4
Sol. Given : = 1.505 × 1023 molecules
Mass of water = 0.9 g 1 molecule of oxygen contains
–1
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol = 2 atoms of oxygen
Number of molecules of water and number of oxygen atoms 23
So, 1.505 × 10 molecules of oxygen contain
present in water are to be calculated.
= 2 × 1.505 × 1023 atoms
To find :
= 3.01 × 1023 atoms
Mass
Number of moles, n = Molar mass Example - 32
How many electrons are present in 1.6 g of methane ?

Number of molecules = n × 6.02 × 1023
Sol. Gram-molecular mass of methane
Solution :
(CH4) = 12 + 4 = 16 g
0.9
n  0.05 1.6
18 Number of moles in 1.6 g of methane =  0.1
16
Number of molecules of water = 0.05 × 6.02 × 1023
Number of molecules of methane in 0.1 mole
= 3.01 × 1022
= 0.1 × 6.02 × 1023
As one molecule of water contains one oxygen atom,
= 6.02 × 1022
22
So, number of oxygen atoms in 3.01 × 10 molecules of
One molecule of methane has = 6 + 4 = 10 electrons
water
So, 6.02 × 1022 molecules of methane have
= 3.01 × 1022
= 10 × 6.02 × 1022 electrons
Example - 30
= 6.02 × 1023 electrons
22
What is the mass of 3.01 × 10 molecules of ammonia ?
Example - 33
Sol. Gram-molecular mass of ammonia = 17 g
Calculate the number of moles in 25 g of calcium
Number of molecules in 17 g (one mole) of NH3 = 6.02 × 1023 carbonate and number of oxygen atoms.
Let the mass of 3.01 × 1022 molecules of NH3 be = x g Sol. Formula mass of calcium carbonate
3.01 10 22 x (CaCO3) = 100

So, 
6.02  10 23
17 Mass in grams 25
No. of moles of CaCO3 = Formula mass 
100
17  3.01  10 22
or x = 0.85 g
6.02  10 23 = 0.25 mole
Example - 31 No. of oxygen atoms in one mole of CaCO3

= 3 × 6.02 × 1023
How many molecules and atoms of oxygen are present in
5.6 litres of oxygen (O2) at NTP ? No. of oxygen atoms in 0.25 mole of CaCO3
Sol. We know that 22.4 litres of oxygen at NTP contain 6.02 × = 0.25 × 3 × 6.02 × 1023
1023 molecules of oxygen. = 4.515 × 1023
204
Example - 34 100 g
–23
Volume of 100 g nitric acid solution = 1.41g mL1
One atom of an element weighs 6.644 × 10 g. Calculate
the number of gram atoms in 40 kg of it.
= 70.92 mL = 0.07092 L
Sol. Atomic mass of the element
1.095 mole
= Mass of one atom × 6.02 × 1023  Conc. of HNO3 in moles per litre =
0.07092L
= 6.644 × 10–23 × 6.02 × 1023
= 15.44 M
= 40 g
Example - 37
40 kg = 40,000 g
How much copper can be obtained from 100 g of copper
ass of the element in grams
Number of grams atoms = sulphate (CuSO4) ? (Atomic mass of cu = 63.5 amu)
Atomic mass in grams
Sol. 1 mole of CuSO4 contains 1 mole (1 g atom) of Cu
40000 Molar mass of CuSO4 = 63.5 + 32 + 4 × 16 = 159.5 g mol–1
 = 1000
40
Thus, Cu that can be obtained from 159.5 g of CuSO4
Example - 35 = 63.5 g
250 cm3 of sulphuric acid solution contain 24.5 g of  Cu that can be obtained from 100 g of CuSO4
H2SO4. If the density of the solution is 1.98 g cm–3,
63.5
determine (i) molarity and (ii) molality. =  100g
159.5
Sol. (i) Molecular mass of H2SO4 = 2 + 32 + 64 = 98
= 39.81 g
24.5 Example - 38
No. of moles of H2SO4 in solution  = 0.25
98
If the density of methanol is 0.793 kg L–1, what is the
Volume of solution = 250 cm3 = 0.250 L
volume needed for making 2.5 L of its 0.25 M solution ?
0.25 Sol. Molar mass of methanol (CH3OH) = 32 g mol–1
Molarity  =1M
0.250 = 0.032 kg mol–1
(ii) Mass of solution = 250 × 1.98 = 495.0 g
0.793 kg L1
Mass of solvent = Mass of solution – Mass of solute Molarity of the given solution 
0.032 kg mol 1
= 495.0 – 24.5 = 470.5g = 0.4705 kg
= 24.78 mol L–1
0.25
Moality = = 0.53 m
0.4705 Applying M V
1 1  M V 2 2
(Given solution ) (Solution to be prepared)
Example - 36
24.78 × V1 = 0.25 × 2.5 L or V1 = 0.02522 L = 25.22 mL
Calculate the concentration of nitric acid in moles per
Example - 39
litre in a sample which has a density, 1.41 g mL–1 and
mass per cent of nitric acid in it being 69%. Pressure is determined as force per unit area of the
Sol. Mass percent of 69% means that 100 g of nitric acid solution surface. The S.I. unit of pressure, pascal, is
contain 69 g of nitric acid by mass. 1 Pa = 1 N m–2
Molar mass of nitric acid (HNO3) = 1 + 14 + 48 = 63 g mol–1 If mass of air at sea level is 1034g cm–2, calculate the
pressure in pascal.
69 g
 Moles of 68 g HNO3 = 63 g mol1 = 1.095 mole Sol. Pressure is the force (i.e., weight) acting per unit area
But weight = mg
1034g  9.8 ms 2 2  74.5  3.139
 Pressure = Weight per unit area =  3.139 g KClO3 will give = 1.909 g
cm 2 2 122.5
1034g  9.8 ms 2 1kg 100 cm 100cm Example - 42

  
cm 2 1000g 1m 1m
Calculate the number of atoms in each of the following
1N 1Pa samples:
 2

kg ms 1N m 2
(a) 800 amu of Ca (b) 800 grams of Ca
= 1.01332 × 105 Pa Sol.
Example - 40 (a) Atomic Mass of Ca = 40 amu
Calculate the empirical formula of a compound that  40 amu is the mass of 1 Ca atom
contains 26.6% potassium, 35.4% chromium and 38.1% Thus, 800 amu is the mass of 800/40 Ca atoms
oxygen [Given K = 39.1; Cr = 52; O = 16]
= 20 Ca atoms Ans.
Sol. Element Percentage Atomic mass
(b) Atomic mass of Ca = 40 g/mole
Potassium 26.6 39.1
 40g is the mass of 1 mole Ca atoms
Chromium 35.4 52.0
= 6.022 × 1023 Ca atoms
Oxygen 38.1 16.0
Thus, 800g contains of (800 × 6.022 × 1023)/40 Ca atoms
Relative no. Simplest ratio Simplest whole
= 1.2044 × 1025 Ca atoms Ans.
of atoms no. ratio
Example - 43
26.6 0.68
 0.68 1 1×2=2 Calculate the mass of carbon in 1kg of sugar (C12H22O11)
39.1 0.68
Sol. Molecular mass of sugar = 12 × 12 + 22 × 1 + 11 × 16
35.4 0.68
 0.68 1 1×2=2 = 342 g/mol
52 0.68
342g sugar contains = 144g carbon
38.1 2.38
 2.38  3.5 3.5 × 2 = 7 1000g sugar contains = 421g carbon
16 0.68
Therefore, empirical formula is K2Cr2O7. Example - 44
Example - 41 Find the amount of weight of NH3 being produced when

1kg of N2 reacts with 1kg of H2. Which reactant is in excess
(a) Calculate the mass of KClO3 necessary to produce
and how much?
1.23 g O2.
Sol. N2 + 3H2  2NH3
(b) What mass of KCl is produced along with this
quantity of oxygen ? 1 mole of N2 reacts with 3 moles of H2 to produce
Sol. (a) The reaction involved is : 2 moles of NH3. Thus, 28g N2 reacts with 6g of H2
to produce 34g of NH3.
2KClO3 
 2KCl  3O2
2 mol 2 mol
2  74.5 g
3 mol Since the weight of N2 and H2 taken are equal, so
2  122.5 g 3  32 g
N2- will be consumed before H2. So, N2 is th LR and
 3 × 32 g O2 is produced by 2 × 122.5 g KClO3 H2 is the ER.
245 Since, 28g N2- reacts with = 6g H2;
 1.23 g O2 will be produced by × 1.23 = 3.139 g
96
1000g N2 reacts = with 1000 × 6/28 = 214.3g H2
(b)  2 × 122.5 g KClO3 give 2 × 74.5 g KCl
206
So, H2 is the ER and the amount of H2 in excess Total Volume of solutions = 8L.
= 1000-214.3 = 785.7g Ans.
 n
Also, 28g N2 produces = 34g NH3;  V = 24L  As M   Ans.
 v
so, 1000g N2 produces = 1000 × 34/28 The mixture needs to be diluted 3 folds
= 1.214kg NH3 Ans.
Example - 47
Example - 45
An organic compound containing C,H and N gave the
Calculate the Molarity and molality of a 98% following analysis: C: 40% H:13.3%, N:46.67%. If its
by mass of H2SO4 solution having a density of 1.25g/cc. molecular formula weight is three times its empirical
formula weight then find out its empirical and molecular
Sol. H 2SO 4 taken = 98%  100g of solution contains
formula of the compound.
98g H2SO4.
Sol. Relative no. of atoms of C = 40/12 = 3.33
mass of solution = 100g
Relative no. of atoms of H = 13.3/1 = 13.3 and that for N =
mass of solute, H2SO4 = 98g 46.67/14 = 3.33
mass of solvent = 100 – 98 = 2g = 0.002 kg Thus, simplest atomic ratio C:H:N
98 = 3.33:13.33:3.33 = 1:4:1
moles of solute, H2SO4 = 1
98 Therefore the empirical formula of the compound is CH4N
mass of solution Ans.

volume of solution =
density
Molecular Formula Mass
Also, given: Empirical Formula Mass = 3 = n-factor
100
  80mL  0.08L
1.25 Therefore, molecular formula is (CH4N)3 i.e. C3H12N3
moles of solute 1 Example - 48

Molarity, M  volume of solution (L)  0.08
Calculate the number of equivalents in the following
= 12.5 M samples:
(a) 490g H2SO4 (b) 1600g NaOH
moles of solute 1
molality, m  
mass of solvent (kg) 0.002 (c) 730g HCl (d) 0.37g Ca(OH)2
= 500 m Sol. Eq. wt. of H2SO4 = 98/2 = 49; NaOH = 40/1 = 40;
HCl = 36.5/1 = 36.5; Ca(OH)2 = 74/2 = 37
Example - 46
(a) No. of eq. of H2SO4 = 490/49 = 10
A 3M 3L solution of NaOH is mixed with another 3M 5L
(b) No. of eq. of NaOH = 1600/40 = 40
solution of NaOH. How much should the mixture be
diluted so that the final Molarity of the solution become (c) No. of eq. of HCl = 730/36.5 = 20 Ans.
1M ? (d) No. of eq. of Ca(OH)2 = 0.37/37 = 0.01
Sol. Moles of NaOH in 1 solution = MV = 3 × 3 = 9.
st
= 10 milli-eq. Ans
Moles of NaOH in 2 solution = 3 × 5 = 15.
nd
Thus on mixing the total moles of NaOH = 24.

Final Molarity = 1M
Final moles = 24
Example - 49 125
 Volume of Na2CO3 solution = 100 mL
A mixture of three acids 3.65 g of HCl, 4.9 g H2SO4 and 9 g 1.25
H2C2O4 is made to react with a mixture of two bases x g  Meq. of H2SO4 = Meq. of Na2CO3
NaOH and 7.4 g Ca(OH)2. Calculate w for complete
neutralisation. 0.84 × V = 100 × 3.948
Sol. We know that total equivalents of acids must be equal to  Volume of H2SO4 required = 470 mL
total equivalents of bases.’ Example - 52
 (w/E)ACIDS =  (w/E)BASES
5 mL of 8N HNO3, 4.8 mL of 5N HCl and a certain volume
3.65/36.5 + 4.9/49 + 9/45 = x/40 + 7.4/37 of 17M H2SO4 are mixed together and made upto 2 litre
x = 8g 30 mL of this acid mixture exactly neutralizes 42.9 mL of
Na2CO3 solution containing 1g of Na2CO3. 10H2O in 100
Example - 50 mL of water. Calculate the amount of sulphate ions in g
Calculate the Equivalent mass of Al2 (SO4)3 ? present in solution.
Sol. 1 equivalent of Al2(SO4)3 = 1 equivalent of Al3+ + 1 equivalent Sol. Meq. of HNO3 = 5 × 8 = 40

of SO42- Meq. of HCl = 4.8 × 5 = 24
E (Al2(SO4)3) = E (Al ) + E (SO )
3+
4
2-
Meq. of H2SO4 = V × 17 × 2 = 34 V (Let V mL of H2SO4)
 Total Meq. of acid in 2 litre solution = 40 + 24 + 34V
 27   96 
      9  48  57g = 64 + 34V
 3   2
Now Meq. of acid in 30 mL solution = Meq. of Na2CO3 used
This can be tallied by the method for the salt. For this salt z = for it
6 and M = 342 g therefore E = 342/6 = 57 g.
Meq. of Na2CO3
Example - 51
11000  1 1000 
25 mL of a solution of Na2CO3 having a specific gravity  42.9   3  N Na2CO3   
286 / 2 100  286 / 2 100 
of 1.25g mL–1 required 32.9 mL of a solution of HCl
containing 109.5 g of the acid per litre for complete 3  2000
 Meq. of acid in 2 litre solution =  200
neutralization. Calculate the volume of 0.84 N H2SO4 that 30
will be completely neutralized by 125g of Na2CO3 solution.  64 + 34V = 200  34V = 200 – 64 = 136
109.5 Now Meq. of H2SO4 = Meq. of SO42 = 34V = 136

Sol. equivalents of HCl = 3
36.5
w
 Meq. of SO42 = 136  1000  136
3 96 / 2
N HCl  3
1
 Weight of SO42 = 6.528g
Since Na2CO3 is completely neutralized by HCl
Example - 53
 Meq. of Na2CO3 = Meq. of HCl
N × 25 = 32.9 × 3 Calcuate the molarity, molality and mole fraction of ethyl
alcohol in a solution fo total volume 95 mL prepared by
 N Na 2CO3 = 3.948 adding 50 mL of ethyl alcohol (density = 0.789 mL-1) to
50 mL water (density = 1.00 g mL-1)
Now Na2CO3 fresh solution reacts with H2SO4
Wt. of Na2CO3 solution = 125 g Vol.  density
Sol. No. of moles of ethyl alcohol =
Mol. mass
208
50  0.789 Example - 55
  0.8576
46 Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in solution containing
30% by mass in CCl4?
Vol.  density 50  1
No. of moles of water =   2.7777 Sol. Let the mass of solution be 100 gm
Mol. mass 18
Mass of Benzene = 30 gm
No. of moles Mass of CCl4 = 70 gm
Molarity =  1000
Vol. of sol. in mL
30
Moles of Benzene =  0.385
0.8576 78
  1000  9.027M
95
70
Moles of CCl4 =  0.45 moles
No. of mole of solute 154
Molality =
Mass of solvent in gram × 1000
0.385
Mole fraction (Benzene) =  0.461
0.385  0.45
0.8576
=  1000 = 17.152 m
50
0.8576 0.8576
Mole fraction = =   0.236
0.8576  2.7777 3.6353
Example - 54
A solution will be contains 410.3 g of H2SO4 per litre of

solution at 20oC. If the density is 1.243 g/mL, what will be its
molarity and molality?
Sol. Mol. mass of H2SO4 = 98
410.3
No. of moles of H2SO4 =  4.186
98
No. of moles of H 2SO 4

Molarity of H2SO4 solution =
Volume of soln. in litre
4.186
  4.186M
1
Mass of 1 litre H2SO4 solution = 1000 × 1.243 = 1243 g
832.7
Mass of water = (1243 - 410.3) = 832.7 g = kg
1000
Molality of solution =
No. of moles of H 2SO 4 4.186

  1000  5.027m
Mass of water in kg 832.7

Laws of Chemical Combination
1. One of the following combinations illustrate law of 7. n g of substance X reacts with m g of substance Y to form
reciprocal proportions p g of substance R and q g of substance S. This reaction
can be represented as follows :
(a) N 2 O 3 , N 2 O 4 , N 2 O 5 (b) NaCl, NaBr, Nal
X+Y=R+S
(c) CS 2 , CO 2 , SO 2 (d) PH 3 , P2 O 3 , P2 O 5
The relation which can be established in the amounts of
2. If water samples are taken from sea, river, clouds, lake or the reactants and the products will be
snow, they will be found to contain H 2 and O2 in the (a) n – m = p – q (b) n + m = p + q
approximate ratio of 1 : 8. This indicates the law of (c) n = m (d) p = q
(a) Multiple proportion (b) Definite proportion 8. Which one is the best example of law of conservation of
mass ?
(c) Reciprocal proportions (d) none of these
(a) 6 g of carbon is heated in vacuum, there is no change
3. The law of multiple proportion is illustrated by
in mass
(a) Carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide
(b) 6 g of carbon combines with 16 g of oxygen to form 22 g
(b) Potassium bromide and potassium chloride of CO2
(c) Water and heavy water
(c) 6 g water is completely converted into steam
(d) Calcium hydroxide and barium hydroxide
(d) A sample of air is heated at constant pressure when its
4. The percentage of copper and oxygen in samples of CuO volume increases but there in no change in mass.
obtained by different methods were found to be the same.
This illustrates the law of 9. SO2 gas was prepared by (i) burning sulphur in oxygen, (ii)
reacting sodium sulphite with dilute H 2 SO 4 and
(a) constant proportions (b) conservation of mass (iii) heating copper with conc. H2SO4. It was found that in
(c) multiple proportions (d) reciprocal proportions each case sulphur and oxygen combined in the ratio of
5. Two samples of lead oxide were separately reduced to 1 : 1. The data illustrates the law of :
metallic lead by heating in a current of hydrogen. The weight (a) conservation of mass (b) multiple proportions
of lead from one oxide was half the weight of lead obtained (c) constant proportions (d) reciprocal proportions
from the other oxide. The data illustrates.
10. A sample of CaCO3 has Ca = 40%, C = 12% and O = 48%. If
(a) law of reciprocal proportions the law of constant proportions is true, then the mass of
(b) law of constant proportions Ca in 5 g of CaCO3 from another source will be :
(c) law of multiple proportions (a) 2.0g (b) 0.2g
(d) law of equivalent proportions (c) 0.02g (d) 20.0g
6. One part of an element A combines with two parts of another 11. H2S contains 5.88% hydrogen, H2O contains 11.11%
element B. Six parts of the element C combine with four hydrogen while SO2 contains 50% sulphur. These figures
parts of the element B. If A and C combine together the illustrate the law of :
ratio of their weights will be governed by (a) conservation of mass (b) constant proportions
(a) law of definite proportions (c) multiple proportions (d) reciprocal proportions
(b) law of multiple proportions
(c) law of reciprocal proportions
(d) law of conservation of mass.
12. Hydrogen combines with chlorine to form HCl. It also 20. Which among the following is the heaviest ?
combines with sodium to form NaH. If sodium and chlorine (a) One mole of oxygen
also combine with each other, they will do so in the ratio of
(b) One molecule of sulphur trioxide
their masses as :
(c) 100 amu of uranium
(a) 23 : 35.5 (b) 35.5 : 23
(d) 44g of carbon dioxide
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 23 : 1
21. The number of moles of SO2Cl2 in 13.5 g is :
Mole Concept
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.2
13. The number of water molecules present in a drop of water
(volume = 0.0018 ml) at room temperature is (density of (c) 0.3 (d) 0.4
H2O = 1 g/mL) 22. The largest number of molecules is in
(a) 6.023 × 1019 (b) 1.084 × 1018 (a) 36 g of water
(b) 28 g of carbon monoxide
(c) 4.84 × 1017 (d) 6.023 × 1023
(c) 46 g of ethyl alcohol
14. M g of a substance when vaporised occupy a volume of
5.6 litre at NTP. The molecular mass of the substance will (d) 54 g of nitrogen pentoxide.
be : 23. A sample of pure calcium weighing 1.35 g was quantitatively
(a) M (b) 2M converted to 1.88 g of pure calcium oxide. Atomic mass of
calcium would be :
(c) 3M (d) 4M
(a) 20 (b) 40
1 (c) 16 (d) 35.5
15. If 1 moles of oxygen combine with Al to form Al2O3, the
2
24. The number of molecules in 89.6 litre of a gas at NTP are :
weight of Al used in the reaction is (Al = 27)
(a) 6.02×1023 (b) 2×6.02×1023
(a) 27 g (b) 54 g
(c) 40.5 g (d) 81 g (c) 3×6.02×1023 (d) 4×6.02×1023
16. Which of the following weighs the least ? 25. The mass of 112 cm3 of CH4 gas at STP is
(a) 2 g atom of N (at. wt. of N = 14) (a) 0.16 g (b) 0.8 g
(b) 3 × 1023 atoms of C (at. wt. of C = 12) (c) 0.08 g (d) 1.6 g
(c) 1 mole of S (at. wt. of S = 32) 26. Which of the following contains atoms equal to those in
12 g Mg ? (At. wt. Mg = 24)
(d) 7 g silver (at. wt. of Ag = 108)
(a) 12 gm C (b) 7 gm N2
17. The number of molecules in 4.25 g of ammonia is about
(c) 32 gm O2 (d) None of These
(a) 1.0 × 1023 (b) 1.5 × 1023
27. Which has the highest mass ?
(c) 2.0 × 1023 (d) 2.5 × 1023
(a) 50 g of iron (b) 5 moles of N2
18. The weight of molecule of the compound C60H122 is
(c) 0.1 mol atom of Ag (d) 1023 atoms of carbon
(a) 1.4 × 10–21 g (b) 1.09 × 10–21 g
28. The number of atoms present in 0.5 mole of nitrogen is
(c) 5.025 × 1023 g (d) 16.023 × 1023 g
same as the atoms in
19. Choose the wrong statement : (a) 12 g of C (b) 64 g of S
(a) 1 mole means 6.02 × 1023 particles (c) 8 g of O (d) 48 g of Mg
(b) Molar mass is mass of one molecule 29. If NA is Avogadro’s number then number of valence
(c) Molar mass is mass of one mole of a substance electrons in 4.2 g of nitride ions (N3–) is
(d) Molar mass is molecular mass expressed in grams (a) 2.4 NA (b) 4.2 NA
(c) 1.6 NA (d) 3.2 NA
30. Rearrange the following I to IV in order of increasing 36. What is the empirical formula of a compound composed of
masses and choose the correct answer [At. wt. of N = 14 u, O and Mn in equal weight ratio ?
O = 16 u, Cu = 63 u]
(a) MnO (b) MnO2
I 1 molecule of oxygen
(c) Mn2O3 (d) Mn2O7
II 1 atom of nitrogen
37. Determine the empirical formula of Kelvar, used in making
III 1 × 10–10 mol molecule of oxygen
bullet proof vests, is 70.6% C, 4.2% H, 11.8% N and 13.4%
IV 1 × 10–10 mol atom of copper O:
(a) II I > III > IV (d) I < II < IV < III (c) C7H9NO (d) C7H5NO
31. Which of the following contains maximum number of atoms 38. Formula which represents a simple ratio of atoms different
? elements present in a molecule of the substance is called :
(a) 6.023 × 1021 molecules of CO2 (a) Molecular formula (b) Empirical formula
(b) 22.4 L of CO2 at STP (c) Structural formula (d) None of these.
(c) 0.44 g of CO2 39. The carbonate of a metal is isomorphous (similar formula)
with magnesium carbonate and contains 6.091 percent of
(d) None of these
carbon. The atomic weight of metal is
32. Number of molecules in 1 litre of oxygen at NTP is :
(a) 24 (b) 56
6.02 10 23 6.02 10 23 (c) 137 (d) 260
(a) (b)
32 22.4 40. Insulin contains 3.4% sulphur. What will be the minimum
molecular weight of insulin?
32
(c) 32 × 22.4 (d) (a) 94.117 (b) 1884
22.4
(c) 941.176 (d) 976
Percentage Composition,
Chemical Equations and Stoichiometry
Empirical and Molecular Formulae
41. If 0.5 mol of BaCl2 is mixed with 0.2 mol of Na3PO4, the
33. Haemoglobin contains 0.33% of iron by weight. The maximum number of mole of Ba3(PO4)2 that can be formed
molecular weight of haemoglobin is approximately 67200.
is
The number of iron atoms (at. wt. of Fe = 56) present in one
molecule of haemoglobin is (a) 0.7 (b) 0.5
(a) 6 (b) 1 (c) 0.30 (d) 0.10
(c) 4 (d) 2 42. What is the weight of oxygen required for the complete
combustion of 2.8 kg of ethylene ?
34. If 20% nitrogen is present in a compound, its minimum
molecular weight can be (a) 2.8 kg (b) 6.4 kg
(a) 144 (b) 28 (c) 9.6 kg (d) 96 kg
(c) 100 (d) 70 43. 30g of magnesium and 30g of oxygen are reacted, then the
residual mixture contains
35. An oxide of metal (M) has 40% by mass of oxygen. Metal
M has atomic mass of 24. The empirical formula of the (a) 60g of Magnesium oxide only
oxide is (b) 40g of Magnesium oxide and 20 g of oxygen
(a) M2O (b) M2O3 (c) 45 g of Magnesium oxide and 15g of oxygen
(c) MO (d) M3O4 (d) 50 g of Magnesium oxide and 10g of oxygen

44. Silicon carbide, is produced by heating SiO2 and C to high Limiting Reagent and Excess Reactant
temperatures according to the equation :
50. If 9 moles of O2 and 14 moles of N2 are placed in a container
SiO2 (s) + 3C (s)  SiC (s) + 2CO (g) and allowed to react according to the equation :
How many grams of SiC could be formed by reacting 2.00 3O2 + 2N2  2N2O3
g of SiO2 and 2.0 g of C ?
The reaction proceeds until 3 moles of O2 remain, how
(a) 1.33 (b) 2.56
many moles of N2O3 are present at that instant ?
(c) 3.59 (d) 4.0
(a) 6 (b) 3
45. Iron (III) oxide can be reduced with CO to form metallic iron
(c) 4 (d) 12
as described by unbalanced chemical reaction
51. If AgBr is assumed to be completely insoluble, What mass
Fe2O3 + CO  Fe + CO2 of AgBr precipitates when 30.0 mL of a 0.500 mol/L solution
The number of moles of CO required to form one mole of of AgNO3 is added to 50.0 mL of an 0.400 mol/L solution of
Fe from its oxide is NaBr ?
(a) 1 (b) 1.5 (a) 3.76 g (b) 1.28 g
(c) 2 (d) 3 (c) 2.82 g (d) 3.76 kg
46. One mole of a mixture of CO and CO2 requires exactly 20 52. 10 mL of 1 M BaCl2 solution and 5 mL 0.5 M K2SO4 are
gram of NaOH in solution for complete conversion of all mixed together to precipitate out BaSO4. The amount of
the CO2 into Na2 CO3. How many moles more of NaOH BaSO4 precipated will be
would it require for conversion into Na2CO3 if the mixture (a) 0.005 mol (b) 0.00025 mol
(one mole) is completely oxidised to CO2.
(c) 0.025 mol (d) 0.0025 mol
(a) 0.2 (b) 0.5
53. Equal weights of zinc and iodine react together and the
(c) 0.4 (d) 1.5 iodine is completely converted to Znl2. What fraction by
47. Given the reaction weight of the original zinc remains unreacted? (Zn = 65, I =
Pb(NO3)2 (aq) + 2KI  PbI2 (s) + 2KNO3 (aq) 127g/mol)
(a) 0.6 (b) 0.74
What is the mass of PbI2 that will precipitate if 10.2 g of
Pb(NO3)2 is mixed with 5.73 g of KI in a sufficient quantity (c) 0.47 0.17
of H2O ? Percent Yield and Purity, POAC
(a) 2.06 g (b) 4.13 g 54. If potassium chlorate is 80% pure, then 48 g of oxygen
(c) 7.96 g (d) 15.9 g would be produced from (atomic mass of K = 39)
48. How many grams of NaBr could be formed if 14.2 g of NaI (a) 153.12g of KClO3 (b) 122.5 g of KClO3
are reacted with 40.0 mL of a 0.800 M Br2 ? (c) 245 g of KClO3 (d) 98.0 g of KClO3
2NaI + Br2  2NaBr + I2 55. Antimony reacts with sulphur according to the equation
(a) 3.30 (b) 4.80 2Sb(s) + 3S(s)  Sb2S3(s)
(c) 6.59 (d) 9.75
The molar mass of Sb2S3 is 340 g mol–1.
49. A hydrate of Na2SO3 losses 22.2% of H2O by mass on
What is the percentrage yield for a reaction in which 1.40
strong heating. The hydrate is
g of Sb2S3 is obtained from 1.73 g of antimony and a slight
(a) Na2SO3  4H2O (b) Na2SO3  6H2O excess of sulphur ?
(c) Na2SO3  H2O (d) Na2SO3  2H2O (a) 80.9 % (b) 58.0 %
(c) 40.5 % (d) 29.0 %
56. NH3 is produced according to the following reaction : 63. An aqueous solution of ethanol has density 1.025 g/mL
N2(g) + 3H2(g)  2NH3(g) and it is 2 M. What is the molality of this solution ?
In an experiment 0.25 mol of NH3 is formed when 0.5 mol of (a) 1.79 (b) 2.143
N2 is reacted with 0.5 mol of H2. What is % yield ? (c) 1.951 (d) None of these
(a) 75% (b) 50% 64. What volume of 0.4 M FeCl3 . 6H2O will contain 600 mg of
(c) 33% (d) 25% Fe3+ ?
57. A 1.50 g sample of an ore containing silver was dissolved, (a) 49.85 mL (b) 26.78 mL
and all the Ag+ was converted to 0.125 g Ag2S. What was (c) 147.55 mL (d) 87.65 mL
the percentage of silver in the ore ? 65. The density (in g mL–1) of a 3.60 M sulphuric acid solution
(a) 14.23% (b) 10.8% that is 29% H2SO4 (molar mass = 98 g mol–1) by mass will be
(c) 8.27% (d) 7.2% (a) 1.45 (b) 1.64
58. NaOH is formed according to the reaction (c) 1.88 (d) 1.22
1 66. An antifreeze mixture contains 40% ethylene glycol
2Na  O 2  Na 2O
2 (C2H6O2) by weight in the aqueous solution. If the density
of this solution is 1.05 g/mL, what is the molar
Na 2O  H 2O  2NaOH
concentration?
To make 4g of NaOH, Na required is (a) 6.77 M (b) 6.45 M
(a) 4.6g (b) 4.0g (c) 0.0017 M (d) 16.9 M
(c) 2.3g (d) 0.23g
67. The mole fraction of a given sample of I2 in C 6 H 6 is 0.2.
59. x g of Ag was dissolved in HNO3 and the solution was
The molality of I2 in C6H6 is
treated with excess of NaCl when 2.87 g of AgCl was
precipitated. The value of x is (a) 0.32 (b) 3.2
(a) 1.08 g (b) 2.16 g (c) 0.032 (d) 0.48
(c) 2.70 g (d) 1.62 g 68. In which mode of expression, the concentration of a
solution remains independent of temperature ?
60. The mass of CaO that shall be obtained by heating 20 kg of
90% pure lime-stone (CaCO3) is (a) Molarity (b) Normality
(a) 11.2 kg (b) 8.4 kg (c) Formality (d) Molality
(c) 10.08 kg (d) 16.8 kg 69. With increase of temperature, which of these changes ?
(a) molality
Reactions in Aqueous Media and Strength of
(b) weight fraction of solute
Solution
(c) fraction of solute present in unit volume of water
61. Mole fraction of ethanol in ethanol - water mixture is 0.25.
Hence, percentage concentration of ethanol (C2H6O) by (d) mole fraction.
weight of mixture is 70. Molarity and Normality change with temperature because
(a) 25 (b) 75 they involve :
(c) 46 (d) 54 (a) Moles (b) equivalents
62. A molal solution is one that contains one mole of a solute (c) weights (d) volumes
in 71. When 100 ml of 1 M NaOH solution and 10 ml of 10 N
(a) 1000 g of the solvent H2SO4 solution are mixed together, the resulting solution
will be :
(b) one litre of the solvent
(a) alkaline (b) acidic
(c) one litre of the solution
(c) strongly acidic (d) neutral
(d) 22.4 litres of the solution
72. Normality of 0.74 g Ca(OH)2 in 5 mL solution is Applications of Strength of Solutions
(a) 8 N (b) 4 N 82. When 500.0 mL of 1.0 M LaCl3 and 3.0 M NaCl are mixed.
(c) 0.4 N (d) 2 N What is molarity of Cl– ion ?
73. Normality of a 2 M sulphuric acid is (a) 4.0 M (b) 3.0 M
(a) 2 N (b) 4 N (c) 2.0 M (d) 1.5 M
(c) N / 2 (d) N / 4 83. What is the concentration of nitrate ions if equal volumes
74. 1 L of a normal solution is diluted to 2000 ml. The resulting of 0.1 M AgNO3 and 0.1 M NaCl are mixed together ?
normality is : (a) 0.1 M (b) 0.2 M
(a) N / 2 (b) N/ 4 (c) 0.05 M (d) 0.25 M
(c) N (d) 2 N 84. 100 ml of 0.3 N HCl is mixed with 200 ml of 0.6 N H2SO4. The
75. What volume of 0.232 N solution contains 3.17 final normality of the resulting solution will be
milliequivalent of solute ? (a) 0.1 N (b) 0.2 N
(a) 137 mL (b) 13.7 mL (c) 0.3 N (d) 0.5 N
(c) 27.3 mL (d) 12.7 mL 85. Normality of solution obtained by mixing 10 mL of
76. Normality of a mixture of 30 mL of 1N H2SO4 and 20 mL of 1N HCl, 20 mL of 2N H2SO4 and 30 mL of 3N HNO3 is
4N H2SO4 is (a) 1.11 N (b) 2.22 N
(a) 1.0 N (b) 1.1 N (c) 2.33 N (d) 3.33 N
(c) 2.0 N (d) 2.2 N (Use the Final volume as sum of all volumes).
77. What is the weight % sulphuric acid in an aqueous solution 86. A sample of H2SO4 (density 1.8 g/ml) is 90% by weight.
which is 0.502 M in sulphuric acid ? The specific gravity of What is the volume of the acid that has to be used to make
the solution is 1.07 1 litre of 0.2 M H2SO4?
(a) 4.77 % (b) 5.67 % (a) 16 mL (b) 10 mL
(c) 9.53 % (d) 22.0 % (c) 12 mL (d) 18 mL
87. When 50 mL of 2.00 M HCl, 100 mL of 1.00 M HCl and 100
78. What is the molarity of SO 24  ion in aqueous solution that
mL of 0.500 M HCl are mixed together, the resulting HCl
contain 34.2 ppm of Al 2(SO 4) 3 ? (Assume complete concentration of the solution is
dissociation and density of solution 1 g/mL)
(a) 0.25 M (b) 1.00 M
(a) 3 × 10–4 M (b) 2 × 10–4 M
(c) 3.50 M (d) 6.25 M
(c) 10–4 M (d) None of these
Equivalent Concept and Equivalent Weight
79. A sample of H2SO4 (density 1.8 g mL–1) is 90% by weight.
88. The Equivalent weight of an element is 13. It forms an
What is the volume of the acid that has to be used to make
acidic oxide which with KOH forms a salt isomorphous
1 L of 0.2 M H2SO4 ?
with K2SO4. The atomic weight of element is
(a) 16 mL (b) 18 mL
(a) 13 (b) 26
(c) 12 mL (d) 10 mL
(c) 52 (d) 78
80. In a titration, 15.0 cm3 of 0.100 M HCl neutralizes 30.0 cm3
89. The Equivalent weight of H3PO4 in the reaction is
of Ca(OH)2. What is the molarity of Ca(OH)2 solution ?
Ca(OH)2 + H3PO4  CaHPO4 + 2H2O
(a) 0.0125 (b) 0.0250
(c) 0.0500 (d) 0.200 (Ca = 40, P = 31, O = 16)
81. 1L solution of NaOH contains 4.0 g of it. What shall be the (a) 49 (b) 98
difference between molarity and the normality ? (c) 32.66 (d) 147
(a) 0.10 (b) zero
(c) 0.05 (d) 0.20
90. 0.1 g of metal combines with 46.6 mL of oxygen at STP. The 93. 1.0 g of a monobasic acid when completely reacted with
equivalent weight of metal is Mg gave 1.301 g of anhydrous Mg salt. Equivalent weight
(a) 12 (b) 24 of acid is
(c) 6 (d) 36 (a) 35.54 (b) 36.54
91. What weight of a metal of equivalent weight 12 will give (c) 17.77 (d) 18.27
0.475 g of its chloride ? 94. How many grams of phosphoric acid would be needed to
(a) 0.12 g (b) 0.24 g neutralise 100 g of magnesium hydroxide ? (The molecular
weights are : H3PO4 = 98 and Mg (OH)2 = 58.3)
(c) 0.36 g (d) 0.48 g
(a) 66.7 g (b) 252 g
92. 4.2 g of metallic carbonate MCO3 was heated in a hard
glass tube and CO2 evolved was found to have 1120 mL of (c) 112 g (d) 168 g
volume at STP. The Equivalent weigth of the metal is 95. 0.116 g of C4H4O4 (A) is neutralised by 0.074 g of Ca(OH)2.
(a) 12 (b) 24 Hence, protonic hydrogen (H  ) in (A) will be
(c) 18 (d) 15 (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4

1. Number of atoms in 558.5 Fe (at. wt. 55.85) is 9. How many moles of magnesium phosphate, Mg3 (Po4)2 will
(2002) contain 0.25 mole of oxygen atoms ? (2006)
(a) Twice that in 60 g carbon (a) 0.02 (b) 3.125×10–2
(b) 6.023 × 1022 (c) 1.25×10–2 (d) 2.5×10–2
(c) Half in 8 g He (d) 558.5 × 6.023 × 1023 10. The density (in g mL–1) of a 3.60 M sulphuric acid solution
2. In an organic compound of molar mass 108 g mol–1C, H and that is 29% H2SO4 (Molar mass = 98g mol–1) by mass will be
N atoms are present in 9 : 1 : 3.5 by weight. Molecular (2007)
formula can be (2002) (a) 1.64 (b) 1.88
(a) C6H8N2 (b) C7H10N (c) 1.22 (d) 1.45
(c) C5H6N3 (d) C4H18N3 11. The mass of potassium dichromate crystals required to
3. Number of atoms in 560g of Fe (atomic mass 56 g oxidise 750 cm3 of 0.6 M Mohr’s salt solution is (Given
mol–1) is (2002) molar mass = 392) (2011)
(a) twice that of 70 g N (b) half that of 20 g H (a) 0.49 g (b) 0.45 g
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of the above (c) 29.4 g (d) 2.2 g
4. What volume of H2 gas at 273 K and 1 atm pressure will be 12. The density of a solution prepared by dissolving 120g of
consumed in obtaining 21.6 g of boron (At. mass 10.8 u) urea (mol. mass = 60 u) in 1000 g of water is 1.15g/mL. The
from reduction of boron trichloride by H2 (2003) molarity of this solution is (2012)
(a) 89.6 L (b) 67.2 L (a) 0.50 M (b) 1.78 M
(c) 44.8 L (d) 22.4 L (c) 1.02 M (d) 2.05 M
5. 25 mL of a solution of Ba(OH)2 on titration with a 0.1 M 13. The molarity of a solution obtained by mixing 750 mL of 0.5
solution of HCl gave a titre value of 35 mL. The molarity of (M) HCl with 250 mL of 2 (M) HCl will be (2013)
barium hydroxide solution was (2003) (a) 0.875 M (b) 1.00 M
(a) 0.07 (b) 0.14 (c) 1.75 M (d) 0.0975 M
(c) 0.28 (d) 0.35 14. The ratio of masses of oxygen and nitrogen in a particular
6. To neutralize completely 20 mL of 0.1 M aqueous solution gaseous mixture is 1 : 4. The ratio of number of their
of phosphorus (H 3 PO 3) acid, the volume of 0.1 M molecule is : (2014)
aqueous KOH solution required is (2004) (a) 7 : 32 (b) 1 : 8
(a) 60 mL (b) 20 mL (c) 3 : 16 (d) 1 : 4
(c) 40 mL (d) 10 mL 15. Dissolving 120 g of a compound of (mol. wt. 60) in 1000 g
7. 6.023 × 1020 molecules of urea are present in 100 mL of its of water gave a solution of density 1.12 g mL–1. The molarity
solution. The concentration of urea solution is (2004) of the solution is: (Online 2014/Shift-1)
(a) 0.001 M (b) 0.1 M (a) 1.00 M (b) 2.00 M
(c) 0.02 M (d) 0.01 M (c) 2.50 M (d) 4.00 M
8. Density of a 2.05 M solution of acetic acid in water is 1.02 16. The amount of oxygen in 3.6 mol of water is:
g/mL. The molality of the solution is (2006) Online 2014/Shift-1)
(a) 0.44 mol Kg–1 (b) 1.14 mol kg–1 (a) 115.2 g (b) 57.6 g
(c) 3.28 mol kg–1 (d) 2.28 mol kg–1 (c) 28.8 g (d) 18.4 g
17. A gaseous compound of nitrogen and hydrogen contains Hydrogen (10.0%); and Nitrogen (2.6%). The weight which
12.5% (by mass) of hydrogen. The density of the a 75 kg person would gain if all 1H atoms are replaced by 2H
compound relative to hydrogen is16. The molecular formula atoms is : (2017)
of the compound is: (Online 2014/Shift-2) (a) 37.5 kg (b) 7.5 kg
(a) N2H4 (b) NH3 (c) 10 kg (d) 15 kg
(c) N3H (d) NH2 25. The ratio of mass percent of C and H of an organic
compound (CXHYOZ) is 6 : 1. If one molecule of the above
18. 
A + 2B + 3C  AB2C3 compound (CXHYOZ) contains half as much oxygen as
Reaction of 6.0 g of A, 6.0 × 1023 atoms of B, & 0.036 mol of required to burn one molecule of compound C XH Y
C yields 4.8 g of compound AB2C3. If the atomic mass of A completely to CO2 and H2O. The empirical formula of
and C are 60 and 80 amu, respectively, the atomic mass of compound CXHYOZ is: (2018)
B is (Avogadro no. = 6 × 1023) : (Online 2015/Shift-1) (a) C2H4O3 (b) C3H6O3
(a) 50 amu (b) 60 amu (c) C2H4O (d) C3H4O2
(c) 70 amu (d) 40 amu 26. A sample of NaClO3 is converted by heat to NaCl with a
19. The percent loss in weight after heating a pure sample of loss of 0.16 g of oxygen. The residue is dissolved in water
potassium chlorate (mol. wt. = 122.5) will be (2015) and precipitated as AgCl. The mass of AgCl (in g) obtained
will be : (Given : Molar mass of AgCl = 143.5 g mol-1)
(a) 12.25 (b) 24.50 (Online 2018/Shift-1)
(c) 39.18 (d) 49.0 (a) 0.35 (b) 0.41
20. 44 g of a sample on complete combustion gives 88 gm CO2 (c) 0.48 (d) 0.54
and 36 gm of H2O. The molecular formula of the compound
may be (Online 2016/Shift-1) 27. For the following reaction the mass of water produced from
445 g of C57H110O6 is : (2019-01-09/Shift-2)
(a) C4H6 (b) C2H6O
(c) C2H4O (d) C3H6O 2C57 H110 O6 (s)  163 O2 (g)  114CO 2 (g)  110 H 2 O(1)
21. The volume of 0.1 N dibasic acid sufficient to neutralize 1g (a) 490 g
of a base that furnishes 0.04 mole of OH– in aqueous (b) 445 g
solution is : (Online 2016/Shift-2) (c) 495 g
(a) 200 mL (b) 400 mL (d) 890 g
(c) 600 mL (d) 800 mL 28. A mixture of 100 m mol of Ca(OH)2 and 2g of sodium suphate
was dissolved in water and the volume was made up to 100
22. Excess of NaOH (aq) was added to 100 mL of FeCl3 (aq)
mL. The mass of caclium sulphate formed and the
resulting into 2.14 g of Fe(OH)3. The molarity of FeCl3 (aq)
concentration of OH- in resulting solution, respectively,
is :
are : (Molar mass of Ca(OH)2, Na2SO4 and CaSO4 are 74,
(Given molar mass of Fe = 56 g mol”1 and molar mass of Cl 143 and 136 g mol-1, respectively;
= 35.5 g mol”1) (Online 2017/Shift-1) Ksp of Ca(OH)2 is 5.5 × 10-6) (2019-01-10/Shift-1)
(a) 0.2 M (b) 0.3 M (a) 1.9 g, 0.28 mol L-1 (b) 13.6 g, 0.28 mol L-1
(c) 0.6 M (d) 1.8 M (c) 1.9 g, 0.14 mol L-1 (d) 13.6 g, 0.14 mol L-1
23. What quantity (in mL) of a 45% acid solution of a mono- 29. The amount of sugar (C12H22O11) required to prepare 2 L of
protic strong acid must be mixed with a 20% solution of its 0.1 M aqueous solution is : (2019-01-10/Shift-2)
the same acid to produce 800 mL of a 29.875% acid
(a) 136.8 g (b) 17.1 g
solution? (Online 2017/Shift-2)
(c) 68.4 g (d) 34.2 g
(a) 320 (b) 325
(c) 316 (d) 330
24. The most abundant elements by mass in the body of a
healthy human adult are : Oxygen (61.4%); Carbon (22.9%),
30. A 10 mg effervescent tablet containing sodium bicarbonate 37. 10 mL of 1 mM surfactant solution forms a monolayer
and oxalic acid releases 0.25 mL of CO2 at T = 298.15 K and covering 0.24 cm2 on a polar substrate. If the polar head is
P = 1 bar. If molar volume of CO2 is 25.0 L under such approximated as a cube, what is its edge length?
condition, what is the percentage of sodium bicarbonate
(2019-04-09/Shift-2)
in each tablet? (2019-01-11/Shift-1)
(a) 1.0 pm (b) 2.0 pm
[Molar mass of NaHCO3 = 84 g mol-1]
(c) 0.1 nm (d) 2.0 nm
(a) 0.84 (b) 33.6
38. The minimum amount of O2(g) consumed per gram of
(c) 16.8 (d) 8.4
reactant is for the reaction : (Given atomic mass :
31. 25 mL of the given HCl solution requires 30 mL of 0.1 M Fe = 56, O = 16, Mg = 24, P = 31, C = 12, H = 1)
sodium carbonate solution. What is the volume of this
HCl solution required to titrate 30 mL of 0.2 M aqueous (2019-04-10/Shift-2)
NaOH solution? (2019-01-11/Shift-2) (a) 4Fe(s)  3O 2 (g)  2Fe 2 O3 (s)
(a) 25 mL (b) 75 mL
(b) P4 (s)  5O 2 (g)  P4 O10 (s)
(c) 50 mL (d) 12.5 mL
32. 50 mL of 0.25 M oxalic acid is needed to neutralize 25 mL of (c) C3 H8 (g)  5O 2 (g)  3CO 2 (g)  4H 2 O(l)
sodium hydroxide solution. The amount of NaOH in 50 mL
of the given sodium hydroxide solution is : (d) 2Mg(s)  O 2 (g)  2MgO(s)
(2019-01-12/Shift-1) 39. 5 moles of AB2 weigh 125 × 10-3 kg and 10 moles of A2B2
weigh 300 × 10-3 kg.The molar mass of A(MA) and molar
(a) 40 g (b) 10 g
mass of B (MB) in kg mol-1 are : (2019-04-12/Shift-1)
(c) 20 g (d) None of these.
(a) MA = 10 × 10-3 and MB = 5 × 10-3
33. 8 g of NaOH is dissolved in 18 g of H2O. Mole fraction of
(b) MA = 50 × 10-3 and MB = 25 × 10-3
NaOH in solution and molality (in mol kg-1) of the solution
respectively are : (2019-01-12/Shift-2) (c) MA = 25 × 10-3 and MB = 50 × 10-3
(a) 0.2, 22.20 (b) 0.2, 11.11 (d) MA = 5 × 10-3 and MB = 10 × 10-3
(c) 0.167, 11.11 (d) 0.167, 22.20 40. The mole fraction of solvent in aqueous solution of a solute
is 0.8. The molality (in mol kg-1) of the aqueous solution is
34. The percentage composition of carbon by mole in methane
is : (2019-04-08/Shift-2) (2019-04-12/Shift-1)
(a) 75% (b) 80% (a) 13.88 × 10-2 (b) 13.88 × 10-1
(c) 25% (d) 20% (c) 13.88 (d) 13.88 × 10-3
35. The strength of 11.2 volume solution of H2O2 is : [Given 41. The ammonia (NH3) released on quantitative reaction of
that molar mass of H = 1 g mol-1 and O = 16 g mol-1] 0.6 g urea (NH2CONH2) with sodium hydroxide (NaOH)
(2019-04-08/Shift-2) can be neutralized by : (2020-01-07/Shift-2)
(a) 200 mL of 0.2 N HCl (b) 100 mL of 0.1 N HCl
(a) 13.6% (b) 3.4%
(c) 200 mL of 0.4 N HCl (d) 100 mL of 0.2 N HCl
(c) 34% (d) 1.7%
42. 5g of Zinc is treated separately with an excess of
36. For reaction
I. dilute hydrochloric acid and
N 2 (g)  3H 2 (g)  2NH3 (g); identify dihydrogen (H2) as
III. aqueous sodium hydroxide
a limiting reagent in the following reaction mixtures.
The ratio of the volume of H2 evolved in these two
(2019-04-09/Shift-1)
(2020-01-09/Shift-2)
(a) 56g of N2 + 10 g of H2 (b) 35 g of N2 + 8g of H2
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) 28 g of N2 + 6g of H2 (d) 14g of N2 + 4g of H2
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
43. The average molar mass of chlorine is 35.5 g mol-1. The 54. When 35 mL of 0.15 M lead nitrate solution is mixed with
ratio of 35Cl to 37Cl in naturally occuring chlorine is close to 20 mL of 0.12 M chromic sulphate solution, ____× 10–5
: (2020-09-06/Shift-2) moles of lead sulphate precipitate out. (Round off to the
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 3 : 1 nearest integer). (2021-03-16/Shift-2)
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
44. The volume (in mL) of 0.125 M AgNO3 required to
quantitatively precipitate chloride ions in 0.3 g of
55.
[Co(NH3)6]Cl3 is M[Co(NH3 )6 ]Cl3  267.46g / mol
M AgNO3  169.87g / mol (2020-01-08/Shift-1)

In the above reaction, 3.9g of benzene on nitration gives
45. The mass percentage of nitrogen in histamine is ..... 4.92 g of nitrobenzene. The percentage yield of
nitrogenzene in the above reaction is _______%. (Round
(2020-01-09/Shift-1)
off to the nearest integer)
46. The ratio of the mass percentages of ‘C & H’ and ‘C & O’
(Given atomic mass: C : 12.0 u, H:1.0 u, O : 16.0 u, N:14.0 u)
of a saturated acyclic organic compound ‘X’ are 4 : 1 and
3 : 4 respectively. Then, the moles of oxygen gas required (2021-03-17/Shift-1)
for complete combustion of two moles of organic 56. The number of chlorine atoms in 20mL of chlorine gas at
compound ‘X’ is ...... (2020-09-02/Shift-2) STP is _______ 1021. (Round off to the nearest integer).
47. The mole fraction of glucose (C6H12O6) in an aqueous binary [Assume chlorine is an ideal gas at STP
solution is 0.1. The mass percentage of water in it, to the R = 0.083 L bar mol–1K–1, NA = 6.023 × 1023]
nearest integer, is ..... . (2020-09-03/Shift-1) (2021-03-17/Shift-2)
48. The mass of ammonia in grams produced when 2.8 kg of
dinitrogen quantitatively reacts with 1 kg of dihydrogen
is _____. (2020-09-04/Shift-1)
57.
49. The minimum number of moles of O2 required for complete
combustion of 1 mole of propane and 2 moles of butane is
..... (2020-05-09/Shift-1) Consider the above reaction. The percentage yield of amide
50. The formula of a gaseous hydrocarbon which requires 6 product is _______. (Round off the nearest integer).
times of its own volume of O2 for complete oxidation and (Given: Atomic mass: C : 12.0 u, H : 1.0 u, N : 14.0u, O : 16.0
produces 4 times its own volume of CO2 is CxHy. The value u, Cl : 35.5 u) (2021-03-17/Shift-2)
of y is ______. (2021-02-24/Shift-2)
58. Complete combustion of 3g of ethane gives x × 10 22
51. The number of significant figures in 50000.020 × 10–3 is molecules of water. The value of x is ________. (Round
(2021-02-26/Shift-1) off to the nearest integer).
52. The NaNO3 weighed out to make 50 mL of an aqueous [Use : NA = 6.023 × 1023; Atomic masses in u : C: 12.0; O :
solution containing 70.0 mg Na+ per mL is ______ g. 16.0; H : 1.0] (2021-03-18/Shift-1)
(Rounded off to the nearest integer) 59. _______ grams of 3-hydroxy propanal (MW = 74) must be
[Given: Atomic weight in g mol - Na : 23 ; N : 14; O : 16]
–1 dehydrated to produce 7.8 g of acrolein (MW = 56) (C3H4O)
(2021-02-26/Shift-2) if the percentage yield is 64. (Round off to the nearest
integer).
53. Complete combustion of 750g of an organic compuond
[Given: Atomic masses: C : 12.0 u, H : 1.0 u, O : 16.0 u]
provides 420g of CO2 and 210g of H2O. The percentage
composition of carbon and hydrogen in organic compound (2021-03-18/Shift-1)
is 15.3 and _______ respectively. (Round off to the nearest
integer). (2021-03-16/Shift-1)
60. A reaction of 0.1 mole of Benzylamine with bromomethane 69. 100g of propane is completely reacted with 1000g of oxygen.
gave 23 g of Benzyl trimethyl ammonium bromide. The The mole fraction of carbon dioxide in the resulting mixture
number of moles of bromomethane consumed in this is x × 10–2. The value of x is _______. (Nearest integer)?
reaction are n × 10–1, when n = ________. (Round off to [Atomic weight: H = 1.008; C = 12.00; O = 16.00]
the nearest integer).
(2021-08-27/Shift-2)
[Given: Atomic masses: C : 12.0 u, H : 1.0 u, N : 14.0 u, Br :
70. The molarity of the solution prepared by dissolving 6.3 g
80.0 u] (2021-03-18/Shift-1)
of oxalic acid (H2C2O4.2H2O) in 250 mL of water in mol L–1 is
x × 10–2. The value of x is ______.
(Nearest integer)
61.
[Atomic mass H: 1.0, C: 12.0, O: 16.0]
Consider the above reaction where 6.1 g of Benzoic acid is (2021-08-31/Shift-1)
used to get 7.8 g of m-bromo benzoic acid is used to get 71. The number of atoms in 8g of sodium is x × 1023. The vlaue
7.8g of m-bromo benzoic acid. The percentage yield of the of x is ______. (Nearest integer)
product is __________. (Round off to the nearest integer).
[Given: NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol–1, Atomic mass of Na = 23.0 u]
[Given: Atomic masses: C : 12.0 u, H : 1.0 u, O : 16.0 u, Br :
(2021-09-01/Shift-2)
80.0 u] (2021-03-18/Shift-2)
72. If 80g of copper sulphate CuSO4.5H2O is dissolved in
62. 250 mL of 0.5 M NaOH was added to 500 mL of 1 M HCl.
deionized water to make 5 L of solution. The concentration
The number of unreacted HCl molecules in the solution
of the copper sulphate solution is x × 10–3 mol L–1. The
after complete reaction is _________ × 1021. (Nearest
value of x is ______. (nearest integer)
integer) (NA = 6.022 × 1023) (2021-07-20/Shift-1)
[Atomic masses Cu: 63.54 u, S: 32 u, O: 16 u, H: 1 u]
63. 4g equimolar mixture of NaOH and Na2CO3 contains x g of
NaOH and y g of Na2CO3. The value of x is _____g. (Nearest (2021-09-01/Shift-2)
integer). (2021-07-20/Shift-2) 73. Complete combustion of 1.80 g of an oxygen containing
64. If the concentration of glucose (C6H12O6) in blood is 0.72 g compound (CxHyOz) gave 2.64g of CO2 and 1.08g of H2O.
L–1, the molarity of glucose in blood is _____ × 10–3 M. The percentage of oxygen in the organic compound is
(Nearest integer) (a) 51.63 (b) 63.53
[Given: Atomic mass of C = 12, H = 1, O = 16 u] (c) 50.33 (d) 53.33
(2021-07-22/Shift-2) 74. Methylation of 10g of benzene gave 9.2g of toluene.

Calculate the percentage yield of toluene _______. (Nearest
65. Consider the complete combustion of butane, the amount
integer) (2021-07-22/Shift-2)
of butane utilized to produce 72.0 g of water is _____ × 10–
1
g. (in nearest integer). (2021-07-25/Shift-1) 75. Sodium oxide reacts with water to produce sodium
hydroxide. 20.0 g of sodium oxide is dissolved in 500 mL of
66. The number of significant figures in 0.00340 is ______.
water. Neglecting the change in volume, the concentration
(2021-07-25/Shift-2) of the resulting NaOH solution _____ × 10–1M. (Nearest
67. The density of NaOH solution is 1.2 g cm–3. The molality of integer)
this solution is _______ m: (Round off to the nearset [Atomic mass: Na = 23.0, O = 16.0, H = 1.0]
integer).
(2021-08-31/Shift-2)
(Use: Atomic masses Na: 23.0 u, O: 16.0 u, H: 1.0 u, density
of H2O: 1.0 g cm–3) (2021-07-27/Shift-1)
68. 100mL of Na3PO4 solution contains 3.45 g of sodium. The
molarity of the solution is _______ × 10–2 mol L–1. (Nearest
integer)
[Atomic masses - Na: 23.0 u, O: 16.0 u, P: 31.0 u]
(2021-08-26/Shift-2)

Objective Questions I (Only one correct option]
1. A gaseous mixture contains oxygen and nitrogen in the 7. One part of an element A combines with two parts of B
ratio of 1 : 4 by weight. Therefore, the ratio of their number (another element). Six parts of element C combine with four
of molecules is parts of element B. If A and C combine together, the ratio of
their masses will be governed by :
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 8
(a) law of definite proportions
(c) 7 : 32 (d) 3 : 16
(b) law of multiple proportions
2. A compound possesses 8% sulphur by mass. The least
(c) law of reciprocal proportions
molecular mass is
(d) law of conservation of mass
(a) 200 (b) 400
8. Zinc sulphate contains 22.65% Zn and 43.9% H2O. If the
(c) 155 (d) 355
law of constant proportions is true, then the mass of zinc
3. 1 mole of oxalic acid is treated with conc. H2SO4. The required to give 40g crystals will be :
resultant gaseous mixture is passed through a solution of (a) 90.6 g (b) 9.06 g
KOH. The mass of KOH consumed will be (where KOH
(c) 0.906 g (d) 906 g
absorbs CO2.)
9. Potassium combines with two isotopes of chlorine
(COOH)2 H2SO4 CO + CO2 + H2O (35Cl and 37Cl) respectively to form two samples of KCl.
Their formation follows the law of :
2 KOH + CO2 K2CO3 + H2O
(a) constant proportions (b) multiple proportions
(a) 28 g (b) 56 g
(c) reciprocal proportions (d) none of these.
(c) 84 g (d) 112 g
10. 2.76 g of silver carbonate on being strongly heated yields
4. If 100 ml of H2SO4 (A) and 100 ml of H2O (B) are mixed. a residue weighing
Then the mass per cent of H2SO4 would be (Given density (a) 2.16 g (b) 2.48 g
of H2SO4 = 0.9 g/ml; density of H2O = 1.0 g/ml)
(c) 2.32 g (d) 2.64 g
(a) 60 (b) 50
11. 0.115 g of pure sodium metal was dissolved in 500 ml
(c) 47.36 (d) 90 distilled water. The normality of the above solution, whose
5. If 100 mL of H2SO4 and 100 mL of H2O are mixed, the mass resulting volume is 400 mL, would be
percent of H2SO4 in the resulting solution is (a) 0.010 N (b) 0.0115 N
(c) 0.0125 N (d) 0.046 N
(d H2SO4  0.09g mL1 , d H2O  1.0g mL1 )
12. If we consider that 1/6 in place of 1/12, mass of carbon
(a) 90 (b) 47.36 atom is taken to be the relative atomic mass unit, the mass
of one mole of a substance will
(c) 50 (d) 60
(a) decrease twice
6. BrO3  5Br   Br2  3H2 O (b) increase two fold
1f 50 ml of 0.1M BrO3 is mixed with 30 ml of 0.5 M Br  (c) remain unchanged

(d) be a function of the molecular mass of the substance
solution that contains excess of H ions, the moles of Br2
13. If 1021 molecules are removed from 200mg of CO2, then the
formed are
number of moles of CO2 left are
(a) 6.0 × 10–4 (b) 1.2 × 10–4 (a) 2.85 × 10–3 (b) 28.8 × 10–3
(c) 9.0 × 10–3 (d) 1.8 × 10–3 (c) 0.288 × 10–3 (d) 1.68 × 10–2
14. P and Q are two elements which forms P2Q3 and PQ2. If 0.15 17. To 1 L of 1.0 M impure H2SO4 sample, 1.0 M NaOH solution
mole of P2Q3 weights 15.9g and 0.15 mole of PQ2 weights was added and a plot was obtained as follows :
9.3g, the atomic weight of P and Q is (respectively) :
(a) 18, 26 (b) 26,18
(c) 13, 9 (d) None of these
15. On the left column, some reactions are indicated and on
the right column, properties of reactions are described.
Match them appropriately, and select the correct code.
(A) N 2 (5.00g)  H 2 (1.00g) (p) First reactant is the The % purity of H2SO4 and the slope of curve, respectively,
are :

 NH 3 limiting reagent.
(a) 75%, –1/2 (b) 75%, –1
(B) N 2 (3g)  F2 (10g) (q) Mass of reactant = (c) 50%, –1/3 (d) 50%, –1/2
18. In the preparation of iron from haematite (Fe2O3) by the

 N 2 F4 Mass of product
reaction with carbon
(C) S(1.0g) + O2 (1.0 g) (r) Stoichiometric amounts Fe 2O3  C 
 Fe  CO 2

 SO 2 of reactants. How much 80% pure iron could be produced from 120 kg of
90% pure Fe2O3 ?
(s) Second reactant is the
(a) 94.5 kg (b) 60.48 kg
limiting reactant.
(c) 116.66 kg (d) 120 kg
p q r s
19. NH3 is formed in the following steps :
(a) B A A C
I. Ca + 2C  CaC2 50% yield
(b) B C B A
II. CaC2 + N2  CaCN2 + C 100% yield
(c) B C C A
(d) C A B C III. CaCN2 + 3H2O  2NH3 + CaCO3 50% yield
16. Consider the given reversible reaction at equilibrium To obtain 2 mol NH3, calcium required is :
2NO + Cl2  2ClNO(g) (a) 1 mol (b) 2 mol

(c) 3 mol (d) 4mol
Suppose that 0.30 mol NO, 0.20 mole of Cl2 and 0.50 mole of
ClNO were placed in a 25.00L vessel and allowed to reach 20. An aqueous solution of glucose (C6H12O6) is 0.01 M. To
200 mL of this solution, which of the following should be
the equilibrium. At equilibrium, the concentration of ClNO
carried out to make it 0.02 M ?
was found to be 0.024 molar. Molar concentration of NO
present at equilibrium is I. Evaporate 50 ml of solution
(a) 0.004 M (b) 0.006 M II. Add 0.180 gm of glucose

III. Add 50 mL of water
(c) 0.008 M (d) 0.01 M
The correct option is :
(a) I (b) II
(c) I, II (d) I, II, III
21. Equal volumes of 0.200 M HCl and 0.400M KOH are mixed. 28. Two elements X and Y have atomic weights of 14 and 16.
The concentrations of the ions in the resulting solution They form a series of compounds A, B, C D and E in which
are : for the same amount of element X, Y is present in the ratio
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5. If the compound A has 28 parts by weight of
(a) [K+] = 0.40M, [Cl–] = 0.20 M, [H+] = 0.20 M
X and 16 parts by weight of Y, then the compound C will
(b) [K+] = 0.20 M, [Cl–] = 0.10 M, [OH–] = 0.10 M have 28 parts by weight of X and
(c) [K+] = 0.10 M, [Cl–] = 0.10 M, [OH–] = 0.10 M (a) 32 parts by weight of Y (b) 48 parts by weight of Y
(c) 64 parts by weight of Y (d) 80 parts by weight of Y
(d) [K+] = 0.20 M, [Cl–] = 0.10 M, [OH–] = 0.20 M
29. 3 g of a hydrocarbon on combustion in excess of oxygen
22. How much NaNO3 must be weighed out to make 50 ml of produces 8.8g of CO2 and 5.4 g of H2O. The data illustrates
an aqueous solution containing 70 mg of Na+ per ml? the law of :
(a) 12.394 g (b) 1.29 g (a) conservation of mass (b) multiple proportions
(c) 10.934 g (d) 12.934 g (c) constant proportions (d) reciporcal proportions
23. 11.4 gm of a mixture of butene, C4H8 and butane C4H10, was 30. How many moles of ferric alum
burned in excess oxygen. 35.2 gm of CO2 and 16.2 gm of
(NH4)2SO4Fe2 (SO4 )3.24H2O can be made from the sample of
H2O were obtained. Calculate the percentage by mass of Fe containing 0.0056 g of it ?
butane in original mixture.
(a) 10–4 mol (b) 0.5 × 10–4 mol
(a) 50.87% (b) 49.13%
(c) 0.33 × 10–4 mol (d) 2 × 10–4 mol
(c) 50% (d) None of these
31. A metal oxide has the formula Z2O3. It can be reduced by
24. 100 mL of mixture of NaOH and Na2SO4 is neutralised by 10
hydrogen to give free metal and water. 0.16 gm of the metal
mL of 0.5 M H2SO4. Hence, NaOH in 100 mL solution is
oxide requires 6 mg of hydrogen for complete reduction.
(a) 0.2 g (b) 0.4 g The atomic weight of the metal is :
(c) 0.6 g (d) None (a) 27.9 (b) 159.6
25. 1 g alloy of Cu and Zn reacted with excess of dil. H2SO4 to (c) 79.8 (d) 55.8
give H2 gas which occupies 60 ml at STP. The percentage
32. The vapour density of a chloride of an element is 39.5. The
of Zn in the alloy (Given only Zn reacts with H2SO4)
Ew of the elements is 3.82. The atomic weight of the element
(a) 17% (b) 34% is
(c) 83% (d) 40% (a) 15.28 (b) 7.64
26. A solution of NaOH is prepared by dissolving 4.0 g of (c) 3.82 (d) 11.46
NaOH in 1 L of water. Calculate the volume of the HCl gas 33. 10 mL of N/2 HCl, 20 mL of N/2 H2SO4 and 30 mL N/3 HNO3
at STP that will neutralize 50 mL of this solution. are mixed together and solution made to one litre. The
(a) 224 mL (b) 56 mL normality of the resulting solution is
(c) 112 mL (d) 448 mL (a) 0.20 N (b) 0.10 N
27. When a hydrate of Na2CO3 is heated until all the water is (c) 0.50 N (d) 0.025 N
removed, it loses 54.3 per cent of its mass. The formula of 34. 10 mL of 0.2 N HCl and 30 mL of 0.1 N HCl together exactly
the hydrate is neutralises 40 mL of solution of NaOH, which is also exactly
neutralised by a solution in water of 0.61 g of an organic
(a) Na2CO3.10H2O (b) Na2CO3.7H2O
acid.What is the equivalent weight of the organic acid ?
(c) Na2CO3.5H2O (d) Na2CO3.3H2O (a) 61 (b) 91.5
(c) 122 (d) 183
Objection Question II Al = 13)

[One or more than one correct option] (a) Al is present in excess.
35. Select dimensionless quantity(ies) : (b) MnO is present is excess.
(a) vapour density (b) molality (c) 54.0g of Al is required.
(c) specific gravity (d) mass fraction (d) 159.0g of MnO is in excess.
36. 11.2 L of a gas at STP weighs 14 g. The gas could be : 42. You are provided with 1 M solution of NaNO3 whose
density = 1.25 g/ml
(a) N2 (b) CO
(a) The percentage by mass of NaNO3 = 6.8
(c) NO2 (d) N2O
(b) The percentage by mass of H2O = 93.2
37. 8 g O2 has same number of molecules as that in :
(c) The molality of the solution is 10.72
(a) 14 g CO (b) 7 g CO (c) 11 g
CO2 (d) 22 g CO2 (d) The solution has 0.2 moles of NaNO3.
38. Which of the following have same number of atoms ? 43. Which of the following statements is/are correct ?
(a) 6.4 g of O2 (b) 0.1 mol of NH3 (c) 4.0 g 20.0 mL of 6.0 M HCl is mixed with 50.0 mL of 2.0 M Ba(OH)2,
of He (d) 22.4 L of Cl2 at STP and 30 mL of water is added.
39. 0.2 mole of K3PO4 and 0.3 mole of BaCl2 are mixed in 1 L of (a) The concentration OH  remaining in solution is 0.8 M.
solution. Which of these is/are correct ?
(b) The concentration of Cl  remaining in solution is 1.2 M.
(a) 0.2 mole of Ba3(PO4)2 will be formed
(c) The concentration of Ba2+ remaining in solution is 1.0M
(b) 0.1 mole of Ba3(PO4)2 will be formed
(d) 80 mmoles of OH  is in excess.
(c) 0.6 mole of KCl will be formed
(d) 0.3 mole of KCl will be formed 44. The density of a solution of H2SO4 is 1.84 gm/ml and it
contain 93% H2SO4 by volume. Then
40. Which of the following statements is/are correct ?
(a) Molarity of H2SO4 is 10.42
1.0g mixture of CaCO3(s) and glass beads liberate 0.22g of
CO2 upon treatment with excess of HCl. Glass does not (b) Mass of H2O = 91 gm
react with HCl. (c) Mass of 100 gm solution = 184 gm
CaCO3  2HCl 
 CO 2  H 2O  CaCl 2
45. The mole fraction of NaCl in aqueous solution is 0.2. The
[Mw CaCO3 = 100. Mw of CO2 = 44, [Atomic weight of Ca = solution is
40]
(a) 13.9 m
(a) The weight of CaCO3 in the original mixture is 0.5g.
(b) Mole fraction of H2O is 0.8
(b) The weight of calcium in the original mixture is 0.2g.
(c) acidic in nature
(c) The weight percent of calcium in the original mixture is
(d) neutral
40% Ca.
46. When 100 ml of 0.1 M KNO3, 400 ml of 0.2 M HCl and 500
(d) The weight percent of Ca in the original mixture is 20%
ml of 0.3 M H2SO4 are mixed. Then in the resulting solution
Ca.
(a) The molarity of K+ = 0.01 M
41. Which of the following statements is/are correct ?
The following reaction occurs : (b) The molarity of SO42– = 0.15 M

2Al  3MnO   CCl4  S2Cl 2 (c) The molarity of H+ = 0.38 M
108.0g of Al and 213.0g of MnO was heated to initiate the (d) The molarity of NO3– = 0.01 M and Cl– = 0.08 M
reaction . (Mw of MnO = 71, atomic weight of
47. An oxide of nitrogen has 30.43% nitrogen (At. wt. of N=14) 52. An aqueous solution of phosphoric acid (H3PO4) being
and its one molecule weight 1.527 × 10–22 g. Which of the titrated has molarity equal to 0.25 M. Which of the following
following statement regarding the oxide is (are) true ? could be normality of this solution ?
(a) Its empirical formula is N2O (a) 0.25 N (b) 0.50 N
(b) Its empirical formula is NO2. (c) 0.75 N (d) 1.00 N

53. An aqueous solution of 6.3g of a hydrated oxalic acid
(c) Its molecular formula is N2O4.
(H2C2O4.xH2O) is made up to 250 mL. The 40 mL of 0.10 N
(d) Its molecular formula is N4O2. NaOH was required to completely neutralize 10mL of the
48. For the reaction above prepared stock solution. Which of the following
statements(s) about is (are) correct ?
H3PO4 + Ca(OH)2  CaHPO4 + 2 H2O
(a) The acid is dehydrate.
1 mol 1 mol (b) Equivalent weight of the hydrated acid is 45.
Which are true statements? (c) Equivalent weight of the anhydrous acid is 45.
(a) Equivalent weight of H3PO4 is 49 (d) 20 mL of the same stock would require 40 mL of 0.10 M
(b) Resulting mixture is neutralised by 1 mol of KOH Ca(OH)2 solution for complete neutralization.
(c) CaHPO4 is an acidic salt 54. Three metals of alkaline earth metal group (A, B, and C)
when reacted with a fixed volume of liquid Br2 separately
(d) 1 mol of H3PO4 is completely neutralized by 1.5 mol of gave a product (metal bromides) whose mass is plotted
Ca(OH)2 against the mass of metals taken as shown in the figure.
49. Which of the following statements regarding the
compound AxBy is/are correct ?
(a) 1 mole of AxBy contains 1 mole of A and 1 mole B
(b) 1 equivalent of AxBy contains 1 equivalent of A and 1
equivalent of B
(c) 1 mole of AxBy contains x moles of A and y moles of B
(d) equivalent weight of AxBy = equivalent weight of B
From the plot, predict what relation can be concluded
50. Which of the statements are true ?
between the atomic weights of A, B, and C ?
(a) The equivalent weight of Ca3(PO4)2 is Mw/6. (a) C > B
(b) The equivalent weight of Na3PO4. 12H2O is Mw/3. (b) B > A
(c) The equivalent weight of K2SO4 is Mw/2. (c) C < A < B
(d) The equivalent weight of potash alum K2SO4Al2(SO4)3. (d) Data is insufficient to predict
24H2O is Mw/8. Numeric Value Type Questions
51. 1 gm Mg sample is treated with 125 ml 0.1 N HCl and the 55. A solution contains 75 mg NaCl per mL. To what extent
excess of HCl is neutralised by 50 ml 0.5 N NaOH must it be diluted to give a solution of concentration 15 mg
completely. The correct statement is/are : NaCl per mL of solution.
(a) Mass of Mg present in the sample is 0.12 gm 56. A mixture of FeO and Fe3O4 when heated in air to a constant
(b) Mass of Mg sample unreacted is 0.88 gm weight, gains 5% of its weight. Find the percentage of
Fe3O4.
(c) % of Mg present in meq sample is 12%
(d) Mass of impurities present in the sample is 0.88 gm.
57. Igniting MnO2 in air converts it quantitatively to Mn3O4. A Assertion Reason

sample of pyrolusite is of the following composition : MnO2 (A) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and
= 80%, SiO2 and other inert constituents = 15% and rest Reason is the correct explanation of asser-
bearing H2O. The sample is ignited to constant weight.
What is the % of Mn in the ignited sample ?
tion.
58. A mixture contains equi-molar quantities of carbonates of (B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but
two bivalent metals. One metal is present to the extent of Reason is not the correct explanation of
13.5% by weight in the mixture and 2.50 gm of the mixture assertion.
on heating leaves a residue of 1.18 gm. Calculate the % age
by weight of the other metal. (C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
59. A 0.01 moles of sample of KClO3 was heated under such (D) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.
conditions that a part of it decomposed according to the 64. Assertion (A) : Both 138 g of K2CO3 and 12 g of carbon
equation : have same number of carbon atoms.
(a) 2KClO3  2KCl + 3O2 and the remaining undergoes change Reason (R) : Both contains 1 g atom of carbon which
according to the equation : contains 6.022 × 1023 carbon atoms.
(b) 4KClO3  3KClO4 + KCl (a) A (b) B
If the amount of O2 evolved was 134.4 mL at S.T.P., calculate (c) C (d) D
the % age by weight of KClO4 in the residue. 65. Assertion (A) : 1 Avogram is equal to 1 amu.
60. One commercial system removes SO2 emission from smoke Reason (R) : Avogram is reciprocal of Avogadro’s
at 95ºC by the following set of reaction : number.
(a) A (b) B
SO 2 (g)  Cl2 (g) 
 SO 2 Cl 2 (g)
(c) C (d) D
SO 2Cl2 (g)  H 2O(l ) 
 H 2SO 4  HCl 66. Assertion (A) : Molality and mole fraction units of
concentration do not change with temperature.
H 2SO 4  Ca(OH) 2 
 CaSO 4  H 2 O
Reason (R) : These concentration units are defined in terms
How many grams of CaSO4 may be produced from 3.78g of of mass rather in terms of volume and mass is independent
SO2 ? of temperature.
61. 50 mL of 1 M HCl, 100 mL of 0.5 M HNO3, and x mL of 5 M (a) A (b) B

H2SO4 are mixed together and the total volume is made (c) C (d) D
upto 1.0 L with water. 100 mL of this solution exactly 67. Assertion (A) : In laboratory, reagents are made to a
neutralises 10 mL of M/3 Al2(CO3)3. specific molarity rather molality.
Calculate the value of x.
Reason (R) : The volume of sulution is easier to measure
62. HCl gas is passed into water, yielding a solution of density than its mass.
1.095 g mL–1 and containing 30% HCl by weight. Calculate
(a) A (b) B
the molarity of the solution.
(c) C (d) D
63. A sample of a mixture of CaCl2 and NaCl weighing 4.22g
was treated to precipitate all the Ca as CaCO3, which was 68. Assertion (A) : Molality of solution is independent of
then heated and quantitatively converted to 0.959g of CaO. temperature while mole fraction depends on temperature.
Calculate the percentage of CaCl2 in the mixture. Reason (R) : Normality is the ratio of moles of solute and
volume of solution while mole fraction is the ratio of moles
(Ca = 40, O = 16, C = 12 and Cl = 35.5)
of solute and weight of solvent present in solution.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
69. Assertion (A) : When a solution is diluted from volume V1 (a) A (b) B
to V2 by adding solvents, its molarity before dilution M1 (c) C (d) D
and after dilution M2 are related as :
Match the Following
M1V1 = M2V2
Each question has two columns. Four options are
Reason (R) : During dilution, moles of the solute remains
conserved. given representing matching of elements from
(a) A (b) B Column-I and Column- II. Only one of these four
(c) C (d) D options corresponds to a correct matching.For
70. Assertion (A) : For a binary solution of two liquids, A and each question, choose the option corresponding
B, with the knowledge of density of solution, molarity can to the correct matching.
be converted into molality. 76. Match the Column I with Column II
Reason (R) : Molarity is defined in terms of volume and Column - I Column - II
molality in terms of mass, and mass and volume are related (a) 20 ml (N) HCl reacts (p) No. of molecules of HCl
by density. N
(a) A (b) B with 50 mL NaOH. left = 0
5
(c) C (d) D N
(b) 10 ml HCl reacts (q) No. of molecules of HCl
71. Assertion (A) : The equivalent mass of an element is 2
variable. N
with 50 ml NaOH. left = 6.02 × 1021
Reason (R) : It depends on the valency of the element. 10
(a) A (b) B N
(c) 50 ml HCl reacts (r) No. of molecules of HCl
(c) C (d) D 10
72. Assertion (A) : - 0.1 M H3PO3 (aq) solution has normality N
with 100 ml NaOH. left = 2.71 × 1022
equal to 0.3N when completely reacted with NaOH. 50
N
Reason (R) : H3PO3 is dibasic acid. (d) 100 ml HCl reacts (s) No. of molecules of HCl
2
(a) A (b) B N
(c) C (d) D with 50 ml NaOH. left = 1.8 × 1021
108
73. Assertion (A) : Number of molecules present in SO2 is 77. Match the solution mixtures given in column I with the
twice the number of molecules present in O2. concentrations given in column II.
Reason (R) : Molecular mass of SO 2 is double to that of Column - I Column - II
O2. (a) 11.1 g CaCl2 and 29.25g (p) [Ca2+] = 0.8 M
(a) A (b) B of NaCl are diluted [Na  ] = 1.2 M
(c) C (d) D
with water to 100 mL [Cl ] = 2.8 M
74. Assertion (A) : 1mole of H2SO4 is neutralised by 2 moles of
(b) 3.0 L of 4.0 M NaCl and (q) [Ca2+] = 0.001 M
NaOH but 1 equivalent of H2SO4 is neutralised by 1
equivalent of NaOH. 4.0 L of 2.0 M CaCl2 are [Na  ] = 0.005 M
Reason (R) : Equivalent weight of H2SO4 is half of its combined and diluted [Cl ] = 0.007 M
molecular weight while equivalent weight of NaOH is 40. to 10.0 L
(a) A (b) B (c) 3.0 L of 3.0 M NaCl (r) [Ca2+] = 1.6 M
(c) C (d) D is added to 200 mL of [Na  ] = 1.8 M
75. Assertion (A) : Equivalent volume of H2 is 11.2 L at 1 atm
4.0 M CaCl2 [Cl ] = 5.0 M
and 273 K.
(d) 100 mL of 2.0 M HCl (s) [Ca2+] = 1.2 M
Reason (R) : 1/2 mole H2 has produced when 1 mole of
H+(aq) accepted 1 mole of e–. +200 mL of 1.0 M NaOH [Na  ] = 0.4 M
+150 mL of 4.0 M CaCl2 [Cl ] = 2.8 M converted required amount of C2H2. Amount of CaO is
+50 mL of H2O determined in step I and then amount of C2H2 in step II. We
78. Match the items given in column I with those in column II. can relate CaO and C2H2 stoichiometrically by writing net
Column - I Column - II reaction which is
(a) 9.8% H2SO4 by weight (p) 3.6 N CaO + 3C + 2H2 O  Ca(OH)2 + C2H2 + CO
(density = 1.8g mL–1) Thus, CaO  C2H2

79. NX is produced by the following step of reactions
(b) 9.8 % H3PO4 by weight (q) 1.2 M
M + X2  M X2
(density = 1.2g mL–1)
MX2 + X2  M3X8
(c) 1.8 NA molecules of (r) 1.8 Equivalents
HCl is 500 mL M3X8 + N2CO3  N X + CO2 + M3O4
(d) 250 mL of 4N NaOH (s) 1.10 m How much M (metal) is consumed to produce 206 gm of
+ 250 mL of NX. (Take At. wt of M = 56, N=23, X = 80)
(a) 42 gm (b) 56 gm
1.6 M Ca(OH)2
Paragraph Type Questions 14 7
(c) gm (d) gm
3 4
Use the following passage, solve Q. 79 to Q. 81
80. The following process has been used to obtain iodine from
Passage oil-field brines in California.
Often more than one reaction is required to change starting NaI + AgNO3  AgI + NaNO3
materials into the desired product. This is true for many
reaction that we carry out in the laboratory and for many AgI + Fe  FeI2 + Ag
industrial process. These are called sequential reactions.
FeI2 + Cl2  FeCl3 + I2
The amount of desired product from each reaction is taken
as the starting material for the next reaction. If 381 kg of iodine is produced per hour then mass of AgNO3
I : 2KClO3  2KCl + 3O2 required per hour will be
[atomic mass Ag– 108, I– 127, Fe–56, N–14, Cl–35.5]
II : 4Al + 3O2  2Al2 O3
(a) 170 kg (b) 340 kg
KClO3 decomposes in step I to give O2, which in turn, is
(c) 255 kg (d) 510 kg
used by Al to form Al2O3 in step II. First we determine O2
81. 120 gm Mg was burnt in air to give a mixture of MgO and
formed in step I and then Al used by this O2 in step II. Both Mg3N2. The mixture is now dissolved in HCl to form MgCl2
reactions can be added to determine amount of KClO3 that and NH4Cl, if 107 grams NH4Cl is produced. The reaction
can give required amount of O2 needed for Al. are follows
Net : 2KClO3 + 4Al  2KCl + 2Al2O3 1

I. Mg + O2  MgO ,
2
Thus, 2KClO3 4Al
Or KClO3 2Al. II. 3Mg  N2  Mg 3 N2
I : CaO + 3C  CaC2 + CO III. MgO + 2HCl  MgCl2 + H2O,

II : CaC2 + 2H2O  Ca(OH)2 + C2H2 IV. Mg3 N2 + 8HCl  2NH4Cl + 3MgCl2
CaC2 (calcium carbide) is prepared in step I. It is used to Then the moles of MgCl2 formed is : (At. wt. Mg = 24, N
prepare acetylene (C2H2) in step II. Suppose we want to = 14, Cl = 35.5)
determine amount of CaO that can give enough CaC2 to
(a) 3 moles (b) 6 moles (a) 0.018 M (b) 0.036 M
(c) 5 moles (d) 10 moles (c) 0.084 M (d) 0.046 M
Use the following passage, solve Q. 82 to Q. 84 86. The molarity of 68 % of H2SO4 whose density is 1.84 g/cc
is
Passage
(a) 12.76 M (b) 6.84 M
HNO3 used as a reagent has specific gravity of 1.42g mL–1
(c) 18.4 M (d) 6.8 M
and contains 70% by strength HNO3.
87. HCl is 80% ionised in 0.01 M aqueous solution. The
82. Normality of acid is. equilibrium molarity of HCl in the solution is
(a) 16.78 (b) 15.78 (a) 0.002 (b) 0.06
(c) 14.78 (d) 17.78 (c) 0.02 (d) 0.008
83. Volume of acid that contains 63g pure acid is. Use the following passage, solve Q. 88 to Q. 90
(a) 100 mL (b) 40.24 mL
Passage
(c) 63.38 mL (d) 70.68 mL
A crystalline hydrated salt on being rendered anhydrous
84. Volume of water required to make 1N solution from 2 mL loses 45.6% of its weight.
conc. HNO3.
The percentage composition of anhydrous salt is : Al =
(a) 29.56 mL (b) 30.56 mL 10.5%, K = 15.1 %, S = 24.8% and oxygen = 49.6% Answer
(c) 28.56 mL (d) 31.56 mL the following four questions based on these information.
Use the following passage, solve Q. 85 to Q. 87 [Molar masses are : Al = 27, K = 39, S = 32]
88. What is the empirical formula of the salt ?
Passage
(a) K 2 AlS2O7 (b) K 2 Al2S2O 7
The analytical molarity of a solution gives the total number
of moles of a solute in one litre of the solution. The (c) KAlS2O8 (d) K 3AlS2O12
equilibrium molarity represents the molar concentration of
particular species in a solution at equilibrium. In order to 89. What is the empirical formula of the hydrated salt ?
specify the equilibrium molarity of a particular species it is (a) K 2 AlS2O7 .10H 2O (b) K 2 Al2S2O7 .16H 2O
necessary to know how the solute behaves when it is
dissolved in a solvent. e.g., if analytical molarity of HCl is (c) K 3AlS2O12 .8H 2O (d) KAlS2O8 .12H 2O
0.1 M then equilibrium molarity of NaOH equal to zero
90. If 50 g of the above hydrated salt is dissolved in 150 gram
because HCl is completely dissociated.
of water, molality of the resulting solution will be
85. Calculate the analytical molarity of Cl– ion in solution which
(a) 0.7 (b) 0.6
is prepared by mixing 100 ml of 0.1 M NaCl and 400 ml of
0.01 M BaCl2. (c) 0.5 (d) 0.4

1. The total number of electrons present in 18 ml of water Number of moles of Y and Z are (2003)
(density of water is 1 g ml-1) is (1980)
(a) 0.01, 0.01 (b) 0.02, 0.01
(a) 6.02 × 1023 (b) 6.02 × 1023
(c) 0.01, 0.02 (d) 0.02, 0.02
(c) 6.02 × 1024 (d) 6.02 × 1025
10. Which has maximum number of atoms ? (2003)
2. If 0.5 mol of BaCl2 is mixed with 0.2 mol of Na3PO4, the
maximum number of moles of Ba3 (PO4)2 that can be formed (a) 24g of C (12) (b) 56g of Fe (56)
is (1981) (c) 27g of Al (27) (d) 108g of Ag (108)
(a) 0.7 (b) 0.5 11. In a solution of 100 ml of 0.5M acetic acid, one gram of
(c) 0.30 (d) 0.10 active charcoal is added, which adsorbs acetic acid. It is
found that the concentration of acetic acid becomes 0.49
3. 3 g of a salt of molecular weight 30 is dissolved in 250 g of
M. If surface area of charcoal is 3.01 × 102m2, calculate the
water. The molality of the solution is : .......... (1983)
area occupied by single acetic acid molecule on surface of
4. A sugar syrup of weight 214.2 g contains 34.2 g of sugar charcoal. (2003)
(C12H22O11). Calculate : (i) molal concentration and (ii) mole
12. Calculate the molarity of water if its density is
fraction of sugar in the syrup. (1988)
1000 kg/m3. (2003)
5. The weight of 1 × 1022 molecules of CuSO4. 5H2O is
13. 20% surface sites have adsorbed N2. On heating N2 gas
(1991) evolved from sites and were collected at 0.001 atm and 298
(a) 41.59 g (b) 415.9g K in a container of volume is 2.46 cm3. Density of surface
sites is 6.023 × 1014/cm2 and surface area is 1000 cm2, find
(c) 4.159 g (d) none of the three
out the number of surface sites occupied per molecule of
6. The sulphate of a metal M contains 9.87% of M. This N2. (2005)
sulphate is isomorphous with ZnSO4.7H2O. The atomic
14. Given that the abundances of isotopes Fe54, Fe56 and Fe57
weight of M is (1991)
are 5%, 90% and 5%, respectively, the atomic mass of Fe is
(a) 40.3 (b) 36.3 (2009)
(c) 24.3 (d) 11.3 (a) 55.85 (b) 55.95
7. The normality of 0.3 M phosphorous acid (H3PO3) is (c) 55.75 (d) 56.05
(1999)
15. Dissolving 120g of urea (mol. wt. 60) in 1000g of water
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.9 gave a solution of density 1.15 g/mL. The molarity of the
(c) 0.3 (d) 0.6 solution is (2011)
8. 6.3g of oxalic acid dihydrate have been dissolved in water (a) 1.78 M (b) 2.00 M
to obtain a 250 mL solution. How much volume of 0.1 N (c) 2.05 M (d) 2.22 M
NaOH would be required to neutralise 10 mL of this
16. 29.2% (w/W) HCl stock solution has density of
solutions ? (2001)
1.25 g mL–1. The molecular weight of HCl is 36.5g mol–1.
(a) 40 mL (b) 20 mL The volume (mL) of stock solution required to prepare a
(c) 10 mL (d) 4 mL 200 mL solution 0.4 M HCl is (2013)
9. Mixture X = 0.02 mole of [Co(NH3)5SO4] Br and 0.02 mole of 17. A compound H2X with molar weight of 80g is dissolved in
[Co(NH3)5Br] SO4 was prepared in 2 L solution. a solvent having density of 0.4 g ml–1. Assuming no change
1 L of mixture X + excess of AgNO3 solution  Y in volume upon dissolution, the molality of a 3.2 molar
solution is (2014)
1 L of mixture X + excess of BaCl2 solution  Z
18. The mole fraction of a solute in a solution is 0.1 At 298K, 20. Aluminium reacts with sulfuric acid to form aluminium
molarity of this solution is the same as its molality. Density sulfate and hydrogen. What is the volume of hydrogen
of this solution at 298 K is 2.0 g cm–3 . The ratio of the gas in litres (L) produced at 300 K and 1.0 atm pressure,
when 5.4 g of aluminium and 50.0 mL of 5.0 M sulfuric acid
 MWsolute  are combined for the reaction?
molecular weights of the solute and solvent,  MW
 ,
solvent 
(Use molar mass of aluminium as 27.0 g mol-1, R = 0.082
is (2016) atm , L mol-1 K-1) (2020)
19. Galena (an ore) is partially oxidized by passing air through
it at high temperature. After some time, the passage of air
is stopped, but the heating is continued in a closed furnace
such that the contents undergo self-reduction. The weight
(in kg) of Pb produced per kg of O2 consumed is ........... .
(Atomic weights in g mol–1 : O = 16, S = 32, Pb = 207)
(2018)
Note:

ANSWER KEY 233
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 STRUCTURE OF AN ATOM
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (d) 1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (a)
6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (a) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (d) 10. (b)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (d) 11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (b)
16. (d) 17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (a) 16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (a) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (a)
26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (a) 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (d)
31. (a) 32. (a) 33. (a) 34. (b) 35. (b) 31. (c) 32. (d) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (d)
36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (a) 36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (d)
41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (d) 41. (d) 42. (d) 43. (d) 44. (d) 45. (d)
46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (b) 50. (b) 46. (c) 47. (d) 48. (d) 49. (c) 50. (d)
51. (d) 52. (b) 53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (c) 51. (b) 52. (d) 53. (b) 54. (a) 55. (a)
56. (a) 57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (a) 60. (a) 56. (a) 57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (c) 60. (c)
61. (d) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64. (c) 65. (c) 61. (d) 62. (c) 63. (222.00) 64. (a)
66. (b) 67. (c) 68. (d) 69. (c) 70. (c) 65. (d) 66. (a) 67. (b) 68. (d) 69. (a)
71. (d) 72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (d) 75. (c) 70. (d) 71. (c) 72. (b) 73. (b) 74. (c)
76. (a) 77. (b) 78. (a) 79. (c) 80. (a) 75. (d) 76. (d) 77. (c) 78. (d)
81. (b) 82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (d) 85. (b) 79. (0.00) 80. (2.00)
86. (d) 87. (b) 88. (d) 89. (d) 90. (c) 81. (2.00) 82. (1.00)
91. (c) 92. (d) 93. (c) 94. (a) 95. (c) 83. (8.68) 84. (3.00)
96. (a) 97. (c) 98. (d) 99. (a) 100. (c) 85. (0.00) 86. (6.00)
101. (c) 102. (c) 103. (c) 104. (c) 105. (a) 87. (12.00) 88. (2.00)
89. (58.00) 90. (5.00)
91. (3155.0) 92. (50.00)
93. (7.00) 94. (0.00)
95. (2.00)
ANSWER KEY 234
EXERCISE - 3 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c) 79. (A-Q ; B- R; C-T; D-P ; E-S)

5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (c) 80. (A-Q ; B- S; C-R; D-P)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (d) 81. (A-R ; B- S; C-Q; D-P)
13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (c) 82. (A-P ; B- Q; C-R; D-S)
17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (d) 83. (A-S ; B- P; C-P; D-Q)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a) 84. (A-P,S ; B- Q; C-P,R,S ; D-S)
25. (a) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (a) 85. (A-P ; B- Q; C-R ; D-S; E - T)
29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (d) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (c) 89. (a)
90. (c) 91. (c) 92. (b) 93. (b)
33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (a) 36. (d)
94. (d) 95. (c) 96. (a) 97. (c)
37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (c) 98. (c,d) 99. (c) 100. (a)
41. (a) 42. (a,d) 43. (a,b,d) 44. (a,b,c)
45. (a,b,c) 46. (a,b,c) 47. (a,b,c,d) 48. (a,b,c)
49. (a,b,c) 50. (b,d) 51. (a,b,c,d) 52. (c,d)
53.(a,b,c,d)54. (a,c) 55. (b,d) 56. (a,b)
57. (b,c,d) 58. (b,c) 59. (a,b,c) 60. (a,c,d)
61. (6.00) 62. (4.00) 63. (9.00) 64. (6.00)
65. (6.00) 66. (2.00) 67. (c) 68. (a)
69. (b) 70. (a) 71. (a) 72. (c)
73. (d) 74. (a) 75. (a) 76. (a)
77. (a) 78. (a)
ANSWER KEY 235
EXERCISE - 4 :
PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (b)

6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (c) 10. (b)
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (c)
16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (b) 25. (d)
26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (c) 29. (b) 30. (a)
31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (c)
36. (a,b) 37. (a,c) 38. (a,c) 39. (b,d) 40. (b,d)
41.(a,b,c) 42. (a,d) 43. (a,b) 44. (3.00) 45. (6.00)
46.(30.00)
47. (A-Q ; B- S; C-P; D-R)
48. (A-Q ; B- S; C-P,Q,R; D-P,Q,R)
49. (b) 50. (c) 51. (b) 52. (c) 53. (a)
54. (d)
ANSWER KEY 236
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 PERIODIC PROPERTIES

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a)

1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (c)
5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (c)
5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (a)
9. (d) 10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (d)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (d)
13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (c)
17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (c)
17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (a)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a)
25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (d)
25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (c)
29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (d) 32. (c)
29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (c)
33. (c) 34. (d) 35. (d) 36. (a)
33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (c) 36. (c)
37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (b)
37. (d) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (c)
41. (a) 42. (d) 43. (a) 44. (a)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (d)
45. (b) 46. (c) 47. (d) 48. (a)
45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (b)
49. (b) 50. (a)
49. (a) 50. (b) 51. (c) 52. (b)
53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (a)
57. (c) 58. (d) 59. (101.00) 60. (c)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (c)
65. (b) 66. (d) 67. (d) 68. (b)
69. (c) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (b)
73. (a) 74. (b) 75. (b) 76. (d)
77. (d) 78. (a) 79. (d) 80. (b)
ANSWER KEY 237
CHAPTER -2 PERIODIC PROPERTIES
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (c)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (d) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (a) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (b)
13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (d) 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (b)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (c) 13. (b) 14. (b,c,d) 15. (a,b,c) 16. (a,b)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (c) 17. (c,d) 18. (9.00) 19. (c) 20. (c)
25. (a,d) 26. (b,c) 27. (a,b,c,d) 28. (a,b,c)
29. (a,c,d) 30. (a) 31. (d) 32. (d)
33. (A-S; B-P; C -Q; D-R)
34. (A-Q; B-P; C -S; D-R)
35. (d) 36. (d) 37. (b) 38. (b)
39. (d) 40. (a)
ANSWER KEY 238
Answer Key
CHAPTER -3 CHEMICAL BONDING

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c) 1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c)

5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (c) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (c)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (c)
13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (a) 16. (d) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (c)
17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (d) 21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (b)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (d) 26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (c)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (c) 31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35. (a)
29. (a) 30. (b) 31. (d) 32. (c) 36. (c) 37. (b) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (c)
33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (c) 36. (d) 41. (a) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (c) 45. (d)
46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (b) 49. (b) 50. (c)
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (a)
51. (b) 52. (d) 53. (c) 54. (c) 55. (d)
41. (d) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (b)
56. (d) 57. (d) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (d)
45. (d) 46. (d) 47. (a) 48. (a)
61. (a)
61. (a) 62. (d)
62. (d) 63.63.(d)
(d) 64.64.(a)
(a) 65. (a)
49. (d) 50. (b) 51. (d) 52. (c)
66. (c)
66. (c) 67. (b) 68.
67. (b) 68. (c) (c) 69. (a)
69. (a) 70. (d)
53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (d)
71. (c) 72. (b) 73. (d) 74. (b) 75. (b)
57. (a) 58. (b) 59. (d) 60. (b) 71. (c) 72. (b) 73. (d) 74. (b)
76. (c) 77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (a) 80. (b)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (a) 64. (a) 76. (d)
81. (c) 77. (b) 78.
82.(a) (a) 79.
83.(b) 84.(a)
(c) 85. (b)
65. (a) 66. (a) 67. (d) 68. (a) 86. (d) 87. (d) 88. (b) 89. (c)
86. (d) 87. (d) 88. (b) 89. (c)91. 90. (d)
69. (a) 70. (b) 71. (b) 72. (c) 91. (c) 92. 92.
(c) (b)(b) 93.93.
(d)(d) 94.94.
(c)(c) 95. (d)
73. (a) 74. (d) 75. (a) 76. (a) 96. (c)
96. (c) 97. (a)
97. (a) 98.98. (b)
(b) 99. (a)
99. (a) 100. (b)
77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (a) 80. (d) 101. (c) 102. (5576.00)
81. (d) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (d) 103. (15.00) 104. (2.00)
85. (b) 86. (b) 87. (a) 88. (b) 105. (3.00) 106. (10.00)
89. (d) 90. (b) 107. (0.00) 108. (2.00)
109. (Text) 110. (3.00)
111. (0.00) 112. (1.73)
113. (c) 114. (c)
115. (d)
ANSWER KEY 239
CHAPTER -3 CHEMICAL BONDING


1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b)

1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b)
6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (c) 10. (c)
5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (a)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (a)
16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (d)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (b)
21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24. (b) 25. (b)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (b)
26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (c) 29. (b) 30. (b)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (d) 31. (a) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (d)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (c) 36. (b) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (a)
29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (b) 41. (a) 42. (a) 43. (a) 44. (a) 45. (b)
33. (a,b,c,d) 34. (a,b,c,d) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (d) 49. (a) 50. (a)
35. (a,c) 36. (b,c,d) 51. (d) 52. (b) 53. (d) 54. (c) 55. (b,d)
37. (a,b,d) 38. (a,b,c) 56. (a,c) 57. (b,c,d) 58. (a,c) 59. (b,c)
39. (a,c) 40. (a,d) 60. (a) 61. (a,c) 62. (b,c) 63. (a,d) 64. (a,b,c)
41. (a,b,c) 42. (a,c) 65. (1.00) 66. (6.00)67. (c)
43. (c,d) 44. (a,c,d) 68. (A-p,s; B-r; C-p,q; D-p)
45. (b,c,d) 46. (b,c) 69. (A-p,q,r,t; B-q,r,s,t ; C-p,q,r,t ; D-p,r,s,t)
47. (4.00) 48. (a) 72. (2.00) 103. (8.00)
49. (c) 50. (a) 104. (6.00) 105. (6.00)
51. (b) 52. (b)
53. (A-R; B-P; C-Q,S; D-R)
54. (A-Q; B-R; C-S; D-P)
55. (A-P,Q,R,S,T; B-P,R,T; C-Q,S,T; D-P,R,T)
56. (A-Q,R,S; B-P,Q,R,S ; C-P,S; D-P,Q)
57. (A-P,R,S; B -Q; C-Q,R,S; D-P,S)
58. (A-P; B-S;C-R;D-Q)
59. (c) 60. (b) 61. (c) 62. (c)
63. (d) 64. (c) 65. (b) 66. (a)
67. (d) 68. (c) 69. (a) 70. (c)
ANSWER KEY 240
CHAPTER -4 MOLE AND EQUIVALENT CONCEPTS


1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (c) 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (a)
6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (a) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (c)
11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (b)
16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (d) 16. (b) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (c) 21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b) 25. (a)
26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (a) 29. (c) 30. (8.4)
31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (c) 31. (a) 32. (d) 33. (c) 34. (d) 35. (b)
36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (c) 36. (a) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (13.88)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (a) 45. (b) 41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (b)
46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (c) 49. (d) 50. (c) 44. (26.92) 45. (37.84)
51. (c) 52. (d) 53. (b) 54. (a) 55. (b) 46. (5.00) 47. (47.00)
56. (a) 57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (c) 48. (3400.00) 49. (18.00)
61. (c) 62. (a) 63. (b) 64. (b) 65. (d) 50. (8.00) 51. (8.00)
66. (a) 67. (b) 68. (d) 69. (c) 70. (d) 52. (13.00) 53. (3.00)
71. (d) 72. (b) 73. (b) 74. (a) 75. (b) 54. (525.00) 55. (80.00)
76. (d) 77. (a) 78. (a) 79. (c) 80. (b) 56. (1.00) 57. (77.00)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (c) 84. (d) 85. (c) 58. (18.00) 59. (16.00)
86. (c) 87. (b) 88. (a) 89. (a) 90. (a) 60. (3.00) 61. (78.00)
91. (a) 92. (a) 93. (b) 94. (c) 95. (b) 62. (226.0) 63. (1.00)
64. (4.00) 65. (464.00)
66. (3.00) 67. (5.00)
68. (0.5 M) 69. (19.00)
70. (20.00) 71. (2.00)
72. (64.00) 73. (d)
74. (78.00) 75. (13.00)
ANSWER KEY 241
CHAPTER -4 MOLE AND EQUIVALENT CONCEPTS


1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (b) 1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (0.4m)

6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (a) 4. (i) 0.56, (ii) 0.0099
11. (c) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (c) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (a)
16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (c) 10. (a) 11. (5× 19-19 m2) 12. (55.55 M)
21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (b) 25. (a) 13. (2.00) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (8.00) 17. (8.00)
26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (b) 18. (9.00)19. (6.47) 20. (6.15)
31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (a,c,d)
36. (a,b) 37. (b,c) 38. (a,b) 39. (b,c) 40. (a,b,d)
41. (a,c) 42. (a,b) 43. (a,b,c,d)
44. (a,b,c) 45. (a,b,d)
46. (a,b,c,d) 47. (b,c)
48. (a,b,c,d) 49. (b,c,d)
50. (a,b,d) 51. (a,b,c,d)
52. (a,b,c) 53. (a,c,d)
54. (a,b) 55. (5.00)
56. (79.75) 57. (59.4%)
58. (14.5%) 59. (60.3%)
60. (8g) 61. (10.00)
62. (9.00) 63. (45.04%)
64. (a) 65. (c)
66. (a) 67. (a)
68. (d) 69. (a)
70. (d) 71. (a)
72. (d) 73. (d)
74. (b) 75. (a)
76. (a-q; b-q; c-s; d-r) 77. (a-q; b-p; c-r; d-s)
78. (a-p,s; b-p,q; c-p,r; d-r) 79. (a) 80. (d)
81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (c) 84. (a) 85. (b)
86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (c) 89. (d) 90. (b)
MASTER INDEX
VOLUME 1:
Periodic Properties
Chemical Bonding
Mole & Equivalent concept
VOLUME 2:
Redox Reactions
Gaseous State
General Organic Chemistry
Hydrocarbons
Hydrogen
VOLUME 3:
Thermodynamics and Thermochemistry
Chemical Equilibrium
Ionic Equilibrium
VOLUME 4:
s- Block
p-Block (group 13 and 14)
Environmental Chemistry
Creating Impact at Scale
65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views
49 Million+ 40+ Countries

Monthly Where Students
Web + App Visitors Take Live Classes
25 Million+ 26 Million+
Monthly Active Hours of
Users Live Learning
25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
Our Achievers of 2021
JEE Advanced 2021
Prerak Kevin Abhinav Vedantu students ace

JEE ADV. AIR 35 JEE ADV. AIR 78 JEE ADV. AIR 156 JEE Advanced 2021
JEE MAIN AIR 243 JEE MAIN AIR 533 JEE MAIN AIR 512
Ankit Shrey
6% of IITs’ upcoming batch
will be from Vedantu
JEE ADV. AIR 172 JEE ADV. AIR 174

JEE MAIN AIR 252 JEE MAIN AIR 238
JEE Main 2021
903 students in
Top 10,000
Vaibhav Bajaj Hrishit B P Sunrit Roy K
AIR 35 AIR 113 AIR 139
78 869
students scored students scored
99.9+ PERCENTILE 99.9+ PERCENTILE
68 444
students in students in
Top AIR 1000 Top AIR 5000 Kushagra Ganesh C Iyer
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179
NEET (UG) 2021
AIR 23
Pavit
Online Long Term Course
Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course
Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course
AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers
CBSE Class 12 ISC Class 12 CBSE Class 10
Annmary
Aatman Upreti Shreya Roshan Aastha N Raj Gitanjali Rajulal Shreya Nigam Khushi Arora Anshika Singha
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%
ICSE Class 10
M.D.Sriya Varshil J Patel Mohammad Y Devika Sajeev Sakshi Semwal Aloki Upadhyay Ishita Surana Saumya Gupta
99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%
#HereForRealAchievers

Tatva Volume 1 Chemistry

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tatva Volume 1 Chemistry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Academic Progress for every Student

Regular tests &

Our Extraordinary Results 2021

All India HIGHER

37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

Typesetting Team Graphic Designer

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions........................................................................................... 54

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAINS Questions ........................................................................... 61

Solved Examples ............................................................................................................................... 105

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions........................................................................................... 114

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAINS Questions ........................................................................... 117

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ................................................................................. 124

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .................................................................... 128

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 236

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 131

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions........................................................................................... 158

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAINS Questions ........................................................................... 165

MOLE AND EQUIVALENT CONCEPT

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 189

Solved Examples ............................................................................................................................... 199

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions........................................................................................... 209

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAINS Questions ........................................................................... 216

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ................................................................................. 221

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .................................................................... 230

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 240

1. INTRODUCTION 2. They are deflected towards the positive plate in an electric

Apparatus of charge to mass ratio of electron

Millikan oil drop apparatus

R.A Millikan devised a method known as oil drop experiment

The theoretical requirement for the existence of a neutron particle

Name Discoverer Symbol Charge Relative Mass

Electron J.J. Thomson e –1.6022 × 10–19 C –1 9.1094×10–31 Kg

Neutron Chadwick n 0 0 1.6749 × 10–27 kg

3. THOMSON MODEL Thomson’s proposed model of atom

Scattering of   particles by thin gold foil

5.3.4 Isotones 6. ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATIONS

When all the electromagnetic radiations are arranged in increasing

8. PLANCK’S QUANTUM THEORY

The main points of this theory are:

According to Maxwell’s Theory, the ejection of electrons

Apparatus for studying the photoelectric effect

The following observations are made:

Continuous spectrum of white light

Plot of kinetic energy versus frequency of absorbed photons

9.3 Absorption Spectra Z2

K < L < M < N...... and so on.

(c) Velocities of the electron in different orbits:

10.2 What does negative energy for Hydrogen atom means?

(b) All five d orbitals have same energy in the absence of

Boundary surface diagram of the s orbital

12.6 Filling of orbitals in an atom

Order of filling of orbitals

Atomic No. Element Electronic Configuration

(RH = 109678 cm–1 and n2 > n1)

2.178  10 18 Z 2 13.6Z2

K | q1 | | q 2 | 1 It can be shown from the above expressions that :

K | Ze | | e | KZe 2 or K.E.n = –En and P.E.n = 2En

This centrifugal force must be provided by the electrostatic force Z2

0.529 n 2  Shapes of atomic orbitals: The shape of an orbital is found

Distinguish between Proton, Neutron & Electron.